Loading...
09.22.2025 TC Agenda PacketTOWN OF TROPHY CLUB TOWN COUNCIL REGULAR MEETING AGENDA September 22, 2025 7:00 PM Town Hall - Council Chambers 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, Texas 76262 CALL TO ORDER AND ANNOUNCE A QUORUM INVOCATION led by Rev. Bill Eason, Fellowship United Methodist Church PLEDGES led by Council Member Pledge of Allegiance to the American Flag Pledge of Allegiance to the Texas Flag COMMUNITY SPOTLIGHT 1.John Donnelly - Trophy Club Resident 2.Working for You... Trophy Club a)Update from Town Council Members b)Update from Town Manager (Brandon Wright, Town Manager) c)Quick Civic Tip (Dean Roggia, Town Attorney) CONSENT AGENDA This part of the agenda consists of non-controversial, or "housekeeping" items required by law. Items may be removed from Consent by any council member by making such request prior to a motion and vote. 3.Consider approval of the September 8, 2025, Town Council work session and regular meeting minutes. (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) 4.Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a five-year contract with Motorola in the amount of $298,998.50 for police body cameras and in-car video systems with software and video storage. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) Page 1 of 522 5. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a 5-year contract with Axon in the amount of $119,590.80 for Police Department Taser 10 conducted energy weapons, training, software, and support. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) 6. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with BMW Motorcycle of North Dallas for the purchase of a BMW R1250 RT-P police motorcycle in the amount of $40,726.99. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) 7. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Classic Chevrolet for the purchase of two Police Department vehicles in the amount of $116,437.49. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) 8. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with SupplyCore for the purchase of Modular Vehicle Barriers in the amount of $158,204.10. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) 9. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Stolz Telecom for the purchase of police emergency equipment to outfit a new Chevrolet K9 response unit in the amount of $41,283.98. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) 10. Consider ratifying the Town Manager's execution of a contract with H&G Systems for the emergency purchase and installation of a replacement RTU HVAC system at Town Hall in the amount of $75,398. (Matt Cox, Director of Community Development) 11. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute an amendment to a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. for the purchase of water treatment chemicals for the Community Pool in the total amount of $25,496.86. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) 12. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with SiteOne Landscape Supply Holding, LLC for the purchase of irrigation and landscaping supplies in the amount of $40,000. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) 13. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. for water treatment chemicals in the not-to-exceed amount of $30,000. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) 14. Consider an ordinance of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas amending Ordinance 2013-23 relating to the composition of the Board of Directors for the Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) 15. Consider Amendment No. 2 to the participation agreement between the Town of Trophy Club and Tarrant County for Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) 16. Consider a resolution of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas finding that Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC’s application to change rates within the Town should be denied. (Brandon Wright, Town Manager.) INDIVIDUAL ITEMS 17. Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance accepting and approving an update of the Service and Assessment Plan and an updated Assessment Roll for the Town of Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (PID) in compliance with Chapter 372 Public Improvement District Assessment Act of the Texas Local Government Code. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) Page 2 of 522 i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance 18. Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance finding that annual special assessments for emergency services in Public Improvement District No. 1 (The Highlands at Trophy Club) no longer provide a special benefit to the property; providing that no further levy of assessments for emergency services will be made in accordance with Chapter 372 of the Texas Local Government Code; repealing the Service and Assessment Plan; and providing an effective date. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance 19. Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance amending Sections 14.02.052, "Definitions," Section 14.02.103, "Use Table," and Division 5, "Supplementary District Regulations," of Article 2, "Zoning Ordinance," of Chapter 14, "Zoning," of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, by updating regulations pertaining to Nursing Facilities, Assisted Living Facilities, and Community Homes and establishing for the registration of such operations. (Tamara Smith, Assistant to the Town Manager) i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance 20. Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a professional services agreement with Olsson, Inc. for gateway, water tower, and wayfinding signage design in a not-to-exceed amount of $111,300. (Tamara Smith, Assistant to the Town Manager) ADJOURN The Town Council may convene into executive session to discuss posted items as allowed by Texas Government Code Sections 551.071 through 551.076 and Section 551.087. I do hereby certify that the notice of meeting was posted on the bulletin board at the Town Hall for the Town of Trophy Club, Texas, in a place convenient and readily accessible to the general public at all times on the following date and time: September 16, 2025 at 1:00 p.m., and said Notice of Meeting was also posted concurrently on the Town’s website in accordance with Texas Government Code Ch. 551. Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary • In accordance with section 551.127 of the Texas Government Code (Open Meeting Act) this meeting will be an in-person meeting with either a member of Town Council, staff, or consultant, participating by video conference. The public meeting location will be Trophy Club Town Hall, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Texas. The Mayor, as presiding officer of Town Council, and a quorum of the Town Council will be physically present at this location. The location where the Mayor is physically present shall be open to the public during the open portions of the meeting. • BUDGET STATEMENT: Pursuant to Section 551.043, Government Code, the following taxpayer impact statement must be on the Town Council meeting agenda at which the Town Council will discuss or adopt a budget for the Town of Trophy Club: For an average-valued homestead property ($714,324.00), the Town’s portion of the property tax bill in dollars for the current fiscal year (FY2025) is $2,967.79, the Town’s portion of the property tax bill for the upcoming fiscal year (FY2026) for the same property if the proposed budget is adopted is estimated to be $2,949.19, and the Town’s portion of the property tax bill in dollars for the upcoming fiscal year (FY2026) for the same property if a budget funded at the no-new-revenue rate under Chapter 26, Tax Code, is adopted is estimated to be $2,809.82. • If you plan to attend this public meeting and have a disability that requires special needs, please contact the Town Secretary’s Office at 6822372900, 48 hours in advance, and reasonable accommodations will be made to assist you. Page 3 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary AGENDA ITEM: Consider approval of the September 8, 2025, Town Council work session and regular meeting minutes. (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Town Council held a work session and regular meeting on September 8, 2025. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: N/A LEGAL REVIEW: N/A ATTACHMENTS: 1. 09.08.2025 TC Meeting Minutes ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Move to approve the September 8, 2025, Town Council work session and regular meeting minutes. Page 4 of 522 Town of Trophy Club Town Council Work Session and Regular Meeting Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025, 6:00 p.m. 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Texas 76262 CALL WORK SESSION TO ORDER Mayor Tiffany called the work session to order at 6:00 p.m. COUNCIL MEMBERS PRESENT Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor Stacey Bauer, Council Member Place 1 Jeff Beach, Council Member Place 2 Dennis Sheridan, Council Member Place 3 Garry Ash, Council Member Place 5 Steve Flynn, Council Member Place 6 COUNCIL MEMBERS ABSENT Rhylan Rowe, Mayor Pro Tem STAFF MEMBERS PRESENT Brandon Wright, Town Manager Maggie McKormick-Krukowski, Records Analyst (left at 6:51 p.m.) Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary (arrived at 7:00 p.m.) Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Chase Ellis, Director of Parks and Recreation Jason Wise, Fire Chief Matt Cox, Director of Community Development Jill Lind, Director of Communications and Marketing April Duvall, Director of Finance Patrick Arata, Police Chief (arrived at 7:00 p.m.) Denise Deprato, Director of Human Resources Tamara Smith, Assistant to the Town Manager WORK SESSION ITEM 1. Presentation and discussion regarding the development of a Facility Naming Policy. (Brandon Wright, Town Manager) Town Manager Wright presented a draft policy for naming and renaming Town facilities. The draft established procedures to ensure names align with community values, outlined criteria for honoring exceptional individuals, and differentiated between major facilities (e.g., buildings, parks) and minor facilities (e.g., rooms, fields). Council provided feedback and directed staff to revise the draft policy as follows: • Clarify that the policy does not affect initial facility naming. Page 5 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 2 • Expand the definition of “exceptional individuals.” • Select an annual review period that avoids the election cycle. • Add that placard or sign design will be determined at the Town’s discretion. • Honoring Exceptional Individuals: include consideration of military and first responder service, and require long-term Town residency. • Explore options for memorials separate from the naming policy. • Major Gifts: define a significant contribution as at least 60% of the project cost. • Remove street renaming; allow only honorary street names. • Prohibit honorary street names on Indian Creek, Trophy Club Drive, and Bobcat. • Require 250 verifiable signatures for major facilities and 125 for minor facilities. Staff will update the draft policy and bring it back for Council adoption. ADJOURN Mayor Tiffany adjourned the work session at 6:51 p.m. CALL REGULAR MEETING TO ORDER Mayor Tiffany called the regular meeting to order at 7:00 p.m. INVOCATION Mayor Tiffany, led the invocation. PLEDGES Council Member Sheridan led the Pledge of Allegiance to the American and Texas Flags. PUBLIC COMMENTS There were none. COMMUNITY SPOTLIGHT 1. Methodist Southlake Medical Center Benson Chacko, President of Methodist Southlake Medical Center, gave a presentation on the medical center. Page 6 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 3 2. Working for You... Trophy Club a) Update from Town Council Members Council Member Sheridan reported that legal fees related to Council Member Bauer totaled $4,600 through July, with August invoices not yet received. Mayor Tiffany reported on her participation in the Metroport Leadership Program, highlighting a presentation from Chris Wallace of the North Texas Commission regarding regional growth. b) Update from Town Manager (Brandon Wright, Town Manager) Town Manager Wright announced the upcoming Patriot Day Ceremony on September 11, 2025, at the Fire Station, and noted a joint work session would be held with the Economic Development Corporation on September 22 , 2025, to revisit the Small Area Plan. He noted upcoming events and board and commission meetings: • Economic Development Corporation: September 10, 6:00 p.m. • Zoning Board of Adjustment: September 11, 6:00 p.m. • Parks & Recreation Board: September 15, 6:00 p.m. • Breakfast with Tiffany: September 15, 9:00 a.m. at Starbucks inside of Tom Thumb. c) Quick Civic Tip (Dean Roggia, Town Attorney) Town Attorney Dean Roggia provided an overview of the statutory requirements and procedures for adopting the budget, setting a tax rate, and levying taxes. CONSENT AGENDA 3. Consider approval of the minutes from the August 25, 2025 Joint Work Session of the Town Council and Parks and Recreation Board, and from the Town Council Regular Meeting.(Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) Council Member Flynn moved to approve Consent Item 3. Council Member Beach seconded the motion. VOTE ON MOTION AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 Page 7 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 4 INDIVIDUAL ITEMS 5. Consider a resolution establishing the debt financing plan and tax rate goal for the FY 2026 Budget and the FY 2026 -2031 Capital Improvement Program. (Brandon Wright, Town Manager) April Duvall, Director of Finance, presented the FY 2025–26 Debt Financing Plan and Tax Rate Goal, outlining current obligations, future debt issuances through 2046, and a strategy to maintain the debt rate goal while supporting infrastructure and long-term financial stability. Council Member Sheridan moved to approve Resolution No. 2025-17 establishing the debt financing plan and tax rate goal for the FY 2026 Budget and the FY 2026 -2031 Capital Improvement Program. Council Member Beach seconded the motion. The caption of the resolution reads as follows: RESOLUTION NO. 2025-17 A RESOLUTION OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB ESTABLISHING THE DEBT FINANCING PLAN AND TAX RATE GOAL FOR THE FISCAL YEAR 2026 BUDGET AND THE FISCAL YEAR 2026-2031 CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. VOTE ON MOTION AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 6. Consider a resolution adopting the Town of Trophy Club FY 2026 Business Plan. (Brandon Wright, Town Manager) Town Manager Wright presented the FY 2026 Business Plan, which aligns with the Town’s five-year strategic plan and focuses on key priorities for the upcoming year: 1) Create a voluntary database to assist first responders with elderly, homebound, and special-needs residents. 2) Develop a public safety transparency page showcasing statistics and policies. 3) Evaluate parks and trails to prioritize inclusive play areas for all ages and abilities. 4) Continue development of a 10-year maintenance and replacement plan for Town assets. 5) Continue redevelopment strategies for the SH-114 corridor and other commercial areas. Mr. Wright noted that quarterly progress reports on these goals will be posted on the Town’s website for transparency. Page 8 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 5 Council Member Sheridan moved to approve Resolution No. 2025-18 adopting the Town of Trophy Club FY 2026 Business Plan . Council Member Beach seconded the motion. The caption of the resolution reads as follows: RESOLUTION NO. 2025-18 A RESOLUTION OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB ADOPTING THE FISCAL YEAR 2026 BUSINESS PLAN FOR THE STRATEGIC PLAN; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE.VOTE ON MOTION AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 7. Consider an ordinance adopting the FY 2026 Annual Budget for the fiscal year beginning October 1, 2025 through September 30, 2026 making appropriations for each fund and department. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) April Duvall, Director of Finance, presented the FY 2026 Proposed Budget and FY 2026-2031 Capital Improvement Program noting the following: • Proposed tax rate: $0.412864 • Revenues: $17.5M General Fund; $27.5M all funds • Expenditures: $31.3M total; $17.7M General Fund • Key changes: o 3% COLA, merit increases, step increases, market adjustments o 25% increase in Fire/EMS funding (NEFDA dues) o $140K reduction in Community Development (one-time plan review) o Transition to new Harvest Festival; $20K arts programming; $100K tourism incentive o Addition of one police position in CCPD budget Council Member Flynn moved to approve Ordinance No. 2025-27 adopting the FY 2026 Annual Budget for the fiscal year beginning October 1, 2025 through September 30, 2026 making appropriations for each fund and department. Council Member Beach seconded the motion. The caption of the resolution reads as follows: ORDINANCE NO. 2025-27 AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE BUDGET FOR THE FISCAL YEAR BEGINNING OCTOBER 1, 2025 AND ENDING SEPTEMBER 30, 2026, AND MAKING APPROPRIATIONS FOR EACH DEPARTMENT, PROJECT, OPERATION, ACTIVITY, PURCHASE, ACCOUNT, AND OTHER EXPENDITURES; PROVIDING FOR EMERGENCY EXPENDITURES AND EXPENDITURES AS ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW; PROVIDING FOR FILING OF DOCUMENTS; REPEALING CONFLICTING ORDINANCES; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SAVINGS CLAUSE; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. Page 9 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 6 ROLL CALL VOTE: AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 8. Consider a resolution adopting the FY 2026-2031 Capital Improvement Program. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) April Duval, Director Finance, presented the FY 2025–26 Capital Improvement Program (CIP), noting it was previously reviewed at the August 8 work session and the August 25 budget hearing. The CIP serves as a long-term planning tool for infrastructure and facility investments and provides a six-year project outlook. Highlights of this year’s program include: • Street improvements on Forest Hill Drive, Paint Rock Court, Palmetto Court, and Oakmont. • Sidewalk enhancements along Skyline Drive & Creekside. • Street lighting upgrades on Bobcat Boulevard and Parkview. • Public safety and infrastructure investments including crosswalk flasher upgrades, mobile vehicle barriers, drones for public safety operations, and new outdoor warning sirens. Council Member Flynn moved to approve Resolution No. 2025-19 adopting the FY 2026-2031 Capital Improvement Program. Council Member Beach seconded the motion. The caption of the resolution reads as follows: RESOLUTION NO. 2025-19 A RESOLUTION OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB ADOPTING THE FISCAL YEAR 2026 - 2031 CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. 9. Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance levying municipal ad valorem taxes for FY 2026 from October 1, 2025 to September 30, 2026 at the rate of $0.412864 per $100 assessed valuation on all taxable property within the corporate limits of the Town of Trophy Club. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) Conduct Public Hearing Mayor Tiffany opened the public hearing at 7:37 p.m. April Duval, Director of Finance, presented the item. No one spoke in favor or opposition. Mayor Tiffany closed the public hearing at 7:38 p.m. Page 10 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 7 Consider Ordinance Approval Council Member Beach moved that the property tax rate be increased by the adoption of a tax rate of $0.412864, which is effectively a 0.627 percent decrease in the tax rate; and further move to approve an ordinance fixing and levying municipal ad valorem taxes for the fiscal year beginning on October 1, 2025, and ending on September 30, 2026, and for each fiscal year thereafter until otherwise provided, at the rate of $0. 412864 per $100 assessed valuation on all taxable property within the corporate limits of the Town of Trophy Club as of January 1, 2025. Council Member Sheridan seconded the motion. The caption of the ordinance reads as follows: ORDINANCE NO. 2025-28 AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, AFFIXING AND LEVYING MUNICIPAL AD VALOREM TAXES FOR THE FISCAL YEAR BEGINNING OCTOBER 1, 2025 AND ENDING SEPTEMBER 30, 2026, AND FOR EACH FISCAL YEAR THEREAFTER UNTIL OTHERWISE PROVIDED, AT A RATE OF $0.412864 PER ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($100.00) ASSESSED VALUATION ON ALL TAXABLE PROPERTY WITHIN THE CORPORATE LIMITS OF THE TOWN; DIRECTING THE ASSESSMENT THEREOF TO PROVIDE REVENUES FOR THE PAYMENT OF CURRENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE EXPENSES AND INDEBTEDNESS OF THE TOWN; APPROVING THE TAX RATE AND LEVY AND NOTIFYING THE PUBLIC THAT THIS TAX RATE WILL RAISE MORE TAXES FOR MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS THAN LAST YEAR’S TAX RATE; PROVIDING FOR DUE AND DELINQUENT DATES TOGETHER WITH PENALTIES AND INTEREST; PROVIDING FOR PAYMENT TO THE TOWN ASSESSOR/COLLECTOR; PROVIDING FOR PENALTY AND INTEREST; PROVIDING A CUMULATIVE CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SAVINGS CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; PROVIDING PUBLICATION; PROVIDING FOR ENGROSSMENT AND ENROLLMENT; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. ROLL CALL VOTE AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 10. Consider ratifying the property tax increase included in the FY 2026 Budget. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) April Duval, Director of Finance, explained that under Local Government Code Section 102.007, a separate ratification vote is required when a budget generates more property tax revenue than the prior year. For FY 2025 –26, the adopted tax rate of $0.412864 per $100 of taxable value ($0.309764 for maintenance and operations and $0.103100 for interest and sinking) will raise approximately $562,699 more in property tax revenue than the previous year, a 5.26% increase, including $50,404 from new property. Page 11 of 522 Town Council Meeting Minutes – September 8, 2025 Page 8 Council Member Flynn moved to ratify the property tax revenue increase reflected in the FY 2026 Budget. This budget will raise more total property taxes than last year's budget by $562,699 or 5.26%, and of that amount, $50,404 is tax revenue to be raised from new property added to the tax roll this year. Council Member Sheridan seconded the motion. ROLL CALL VOTE AYES: Bauer, Beach, Tiffany, Sheridan, Ash, Flynn NAYES: None ABSENT: Rowe VOTE: 6-0-1 EXECUTIVE SESSION/OPEN SESSION Pursuant to the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, the Town Council convened into a Closed Executive Session at 7:42 p.m. and reconvened into Open Session at 7:52 p.m. in accordance with the Texas Government Code regarding: Section 551.074 Personnel Matters to deliberate the employment, evaluation, and/or duties of a public officer or employee: a) Town Attorney. No Action Taken. ADJOURNMENT Mayor Tiffany adjourned the regular meeting at 7:52 p.m. ____________________________ Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor Attest: _______________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary Page 12 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a five-year contract with Motorola in the amount of $298,998.50 for police body cameras and in-car video systems with software and video storage. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department currently uses aging body- worn and in-car video camera systems that have reached end-of-life and are no longer supported with critical software or hardware updates. These systems are vital to ensuring officer accountability, enhancing public trust, supporting criminal investigations, and providing necessary evidence for prosecution. Motorola Solutions, Inc., a leading provider of public safety technology, is the Town’s current vendor for police communications and related equipment. The proposed solution includes: • New body-worn cameras for all sworn officers • In-car camera systems for patrol units • Cloud-based digital evidence storage and management software • Integration with existing Motorola communications systems • Ongoing hardware refreshes, software upgrades, and technical support over the five- year term The Motorola system provides several benefits to the Town: • Reliability & Compatibility: The Motorola system fully integrates with the department’s existing Motorola radios and CAD/RMS systems, ensuring seamless operation. • Evidence Security: Cloud storage ensures secure retention of digital evidence in compliance with state and federal requirements. • Officer Safety & Accountability: High-definition video improves evidence collection, provides enhanced situational awareness, and strengthens officer accountability. • Operational Efficiency: Automatic upload and categorization of video evidence reduces staff workload and risk of human error. • Lifecycle Management: The five-year agreement ensures timely upgrades and replacement of equipment, minimizing downtime and long-term costs. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A Page 13 of 522 FISCAL IMPACT: The proposed 5-year contract with Motorola Solutions totals $298,998.50, which includes hardware, software licensing, cloud storage, and ongoing support. The cost will be allocated across the contract term as follows: • Year 1: $120,000 • Year 2: $44,749.62 • Year 3: $44,749.62 • Year 4: $44,749.62 • Year 5: $44,749.62 Funding is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Police Department Capital Equipment Replacement Fund. The Town will utilize the Texas Department of Information Resources (DIR) Contract DIR-CPO-5433. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Motorola Quote 2. Contract Purchasing Rider ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a five-year contract with Motorola in the amount of $298,998.50 for police body cameras and in-car video systems with software and video storage. Page 14 of 522    QUOTE-3152576        TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF  V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX  08/05/2025   The design, technical, pricing, and other information (“Information”) furnished with this submission is conffdential proprietary information of Motorola Solutions, Inc. or the Motorola Solutions entityproviding this quote (“Motorola”) and is submitted with the restriction that it is to be used for evaluation purposes only. To the fullest extent allowed by applicable law, the Information is not to bedisclosed publicly or in any manner to anyone other than those required to evaluate the Information without the express written permission of Motorola.MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks arethe property of their respective owners. © 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.  Page 15 of 522 08/05/2025 TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF  1 TROPHY WOOD DR TROPHY CLUB, TX 76262         RE: Motorola Quote for V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX Dear Patrick Arata,   Motorola Solutions is pleased to present TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF with this quote for quality communications equipment and services.  The development of this quote provided us the opportunity to evaluate your requirements and propose a solution to best fulffll your communications needs.   This information is provided to assist you in your evaluation process. Our goal is to provide TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF with the best products and services available in the communications industry. Please direct any questions to Jonathan Castilaw at jonathancastilaw@callmc.com.   We thank you for the opportunity to provide you with premier communications and look forward to your review and feedback regarding this quote.      Sincerely,       Jonathan Castilaw  MR Account Executive   Motorola Solutions Manufacturer's Representative    QUOTE-3152576   Page 16 of 522  Billing Address: TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF  1 TROPHY WOOD DR  TROPHY CLUB, TX 76262  US      Shipping Address: TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF  1 TROPHY WOOD DR  TROPHY CLUB, TX 76262  US     Quote Date:08/05/2025 Expiration Date:10/19/2025 Quote Created By: Jonathan Castilaw MR Account Executive jonathancastilaw@callmc.com 469-263-5292 End Customer: TROPHY CLUB, TOWN OF  Patrick Arata  parata@trophyclub.org  (682) 237-2960         Contract:  DIR-CPO-5433 AGREEMENT: WG AGREEMENT&STATE OF TEXAS   Summary: This Motorola quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the "Underlying Agreement") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively "Products"). If no Underlying Agreement exists between Motorola and Customer, then the following Motorola's Standard Terms of use and Purchase Terms and Conditions govern the purchase of the Products which is found at http://www.motorolasolutions.com/product-terms  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes       APX™ N70   APX N70           1   H35UCT9PW8AN   PORTABLE RADIO APX N70 7/800 MODEL 4.5   4    $9,959.37   $7,085.34   $28,341.36      1a   QA08821AA   ALT: 7800 STUBBY 762-870MHZ   4       false     1b   QA08824AA   ALT: 3.0" HOLSTER   4       false     1c   QA09017AA   ADD: LTE WITH ACTIVE SERVICE AT&T US   4       false     1d   QA09030AB   ADD: MOTOROLA APX HOSTED RADIOCENTRAL*   4       false     1e   H499KC   ENH: SUBMERSIBLE (DELTA T)   4       false     1f   BD00001AA   ADD: CORE BUNDLE   4       false       QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 3  Page 17 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes    1g   BD00010AB   ADD: SECURITY BUNDLE   4       false     1h   Q387CB   ADD: MULTICAST VOTING SCAN   4       false     1i   QA01767BL   ADD: P25 LINK LAYER AUTHENTICATION   4       false     1j   QA03399AK   ADD: ENHANCED DATA   4       false     1k   QA09001AM   ADD: WIFI CAPABILITY   4       false     1l   QA09028AA   ADD: VIQI VC RADIO OPERATION   4       false     1m   H797DW   SOFTWARE LICENSE ENH: DVP-XL ENCRYPTION AND ADP   4       false     1n   Q15AK   ADD: AES/DES-XL/ DES-OFB ENCRYPTION AND ADP   4       false     1o   Q498BN   SOFTWARE LICENSE ENH: ASTRO 25 OTAR W/ MULTIKEY   4       false     1p   QA07680AA   ADD: MULTI SYSTEM OTAR   4       false     1q   H38DA   ADD: SMARTZONE OPERATION   4       false     1r   Q361CD   ADD: P25 9600 BAUD TRUNKING   4       false     1s   Q806CH   ADD: ASTRO DIGITAL CAI OPERATION   4       false     1t   QA00580BA   ADD: TDMA OPERATION   4       false     1u   QA09113AA   ADD: BASELINE RELEASE SW   4       false     2   PSV03S02464A   CMSO PROVISIONING FOR APX DMS 2*   1    $0.00   $0.00   $0.00      3   PSV01S02944A   PROVISIONING SUPPORT   1    $0.00   $0.00   $0.00      4   LSV01S03060A   APX N70 DMS ESSENTIAL 4   5 YEARS   $343.20   $343.20   $1,372.80        QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 4  Page 18 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes     5   LSV01S03082A   RADIOCENTRAL PROGRAMMING   4   5 YEARS   $160.20   $160.20   $640.80      6   PSV01S02940A   SMARTMAPPING ENABLEMENT   1    $0.00   $0.00   $0.00      7   SSV01S01407A   SMARTPROGRAMMIN G   4   5 YEARS   $375.00   $375.00   $1,500.00      8   SSV01S01406A   APX NEXT SMARTCONNECT SUBSCRIPTION   4   5 YEARS   $375.00   $375.00   $1,500.00      9   SSV01S01476A   SMARTLOCATE   4   5 YEARS   $375.00   $375.00   $1,500.00      10   SSV01S01907A   SMARTMAPPING   4   5 YEARS   $375.00   $375.00   $1,500.00      11   PMNN4816A   BATT IMPRES 2 LIION IP68 3200T   4    $225.50   $180.40   $721.60      12   PSV01S02942A   VIRTUAL PARTNER ENABLEMENT   1    $0.00   $0.00   $0.00      13   SSV01S01408B   VIQI VIRTUAL PARTNER   4   5 YEARS   $375.00   $375.00   $1,500.00      14   PMMN4142A   XVP730 REMOTE SPEAKER MICROPHONE NO CHANNEL KNOB, FOR APX N RADIOS   4    $520.00   $416.00   $1,664.00      15   PMPN4604A   CHARGER, DESKTOP SINGLE UNIT IMPRES 2 FAST, US/NA   4    $221.64   $166.23   $664.92         SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone             16   PMPN5022A   SVX CHARGE AND UPLOAD SMARTDOCK, 10 SLOT, US/NA   1    $1,499.00   $1,199.20   $1,199.20      17   PMNN4893A   BATTERY PACK,BATT LIION IP68 4300T   4    $99.00   $79.20   $316.80      18   PMLN8708A   SVX RECEIVE ONLY EARPIECE W/TRAN TUBE, EXTRA LOUD, 3.5MM JACK, IP54   4    $70.00   $52.50   $210.00      19   PMLN8682A   CARRY ACCESSORY- STRAP,COILED LANYARD (PACK OF 5)   1    $152.90   $114.68   $114.68        QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 5  Page 19 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes    20   PMMN8200A   SVX VIDEO REMOTE SPEAKER MIC WITH MAGNETIC SHIRT MOUNT   4    Included   Included   Included   3 YEAR   1    21   LSV07S05097A   ESSENTIAL SUPPORT, ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE, ADVANCED REPLACEMENT HAAS - SVX   4   60 MONTHS   Included   Included   Included      22   LSV07S05139A   HARDWARE REPAIR - TRANSFER STATION / SMARTDOCK   1   5 YEARS   $810.00   $648.00   $648.00      23   SSV07S05083A   BODY WORN CAMERA HARDWARE AS A SUBSCRIPTION   4   60 MONTHS   $2,910.48   $2,328.38   $9,313.52         CommandCentral DEMS             24   SSV00S05162A   COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS UNLIMITED STORAGE PER INTERVIEW CAMERA*   1   5 YEAR   $4,680.00   $3,744.00   $3,744.00      25   SSV00S03616A   SOFTWARE,COMMAN DCENTRAL INTERVIEW ROOM SUBSCRIPTION*   1   5 YEAR   $0.00   $0.00   $0.00      26   PSV00S05487A   MOBILE VIDEO REMOTE CLOUD DEPLOYMENT   1    $3,200.00   $12,798.00   $12,798.00      27   SSV00S05158A   COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS PLUS SERVICE*   42   5 YEAR   $1,980.00   $1,282.00   $53,844.00      28   SSV00S05160A   COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS UNLIMITED STORAGE PER BODYWORN CAMERA*   25   5 YEAR   $1,020.00   $600.00   $15,000.00      29   SSV00S05161A   COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS UNLIMITED STORAGE PER IN-CAR VIDEO CAMERA*   18   5 YEAR   $1,020.00   $600.00   $10,800.00      30   SSV00S05163A   COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS UNLIMITED STORAGE 3RD PARTY*   23   5 YEAR   $1,560.00   $1,248.00   $28,704.00        QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 6  Page 20 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes    31   SSV00S03748A   INTEGRATION: AWARE TO EVIDENCE*   1   5 YEAR   $0.00   $0.00   $0.00         VideoManager EL or EX: Video Evidence Management             32   WCM000111-010   INTEGRATION, CAD- RMS PACKAGE, ANNUAL/DEVICE   34   5 YEAR   $750.00   $0.00   $0.00         V700            33   WGB-0741A   V700 BODY WORN CAMERA FIRSTNET READY   25    $968.00   $750.00   $18,750.00   3 YEAR     34   WGP02950   V700 BATTERY, 3.8V, 4180MAH, REMOVABLE   25    $137.50   $0.00   $0.00   3 YEAR     35   WGP02798-KIT   V700 MAGNETIC MOUNT WITH BWC BOX   25    Included   Included   Included      36   PRODUCT_REFRES H   VIDEO EQUIPMENT,PRODUC T REFRESH   25    $1,244.00   $0.00   $0.00      37   SWV07S03593A   BODY WORN CAMERA SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS   25   5 YEARS   Included   Included   Included      38   LSV07S03512A   ESSENTIAL SERVICE W/ACC DMG AND ADV REPLACEMENT   25   5 YEARS   $531.25   $250.00   $6,250.00         M500            39   WGB-0708A   M500 ICV SYSTEM W/ RCAM, V300 WIFI DOCK*   9    $7,893.75   $6,315.00   $56,835.00      40   WGW00121   IN-CAR SYSTEM INSTALLATION (PER UNIT CHARGE)   16    $812.50   $650.00   $10,400.00      41   WGW00119   VIDEO SYSTEM REMOVAL (PER UNIT CHARGE)   9    $125.00   $100.00   $900.00      42   LSV07S05296A   5Y ESSENTIAL - M500   9   5 YEARS   $1,063.13   $850.50   $7,654.50        QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 7  Page 21 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Description   Qty   Term   List Price   Sale Price   Ext. Sale Price   Refresh Duration   Number Of Refreshes       LPR Integrations and Parking             43   WGS00224   One Year LPR Trial Period   15   1 YEAR   $549.96   $0.00   $0.00      44   RMT-IC-LPR   One Year LPR Trial Period   1    $200.00   $0.00   $0.00         M500 Interview Recording System             45   WGB-0735A   M500 INTERVIEW SYSTEM, 1 DOME & 1 COVERT CAMERAS   1    $8,099.00   $4,418.82   $4,418.82      46   WGW00121   Interview Room System Installation   1    $812.50   $1,000.00   $1,000.00         Sierra Wireless Devices             47   WSWA-1104789   XR80 5G ROUTER WIFI 1-YEAR AIRLINK COMPL   5    $2,124.00   $2,124.00   $10,620.00      48   WSWA-6001354   ANT DOME 10IN1 5G/ LTE, GNSS, WIFI, BLACK   5    $519.00   $519.00   $2,595.00      49   WSWA-9010394   UPGRADE AIRLINK COMPLETE TO 5 YEARS XR80   5    $368.00   $368.00   $1,840.00      50   WSWA-GWS10025   MODEM SETUP BASIC PRO SERVICES   5    $27.50   $27.50   $137.50     Subtotal  $463,588.53    Total Discount Amount  $164,590.03    Grand Total  $298,998.50(USD)   Pricing Metric : Price is indicative of the following -# of Devices - 42       QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 8  Page 22 of 522   Pricing Summary Sale Price Grand Total System Price (Inclusive of Upfront and Annual Costs)$298,998.50 *Upfront costs include the cost of Hardware, Accessories and Implementation, where applicable.    Notes: ●   The Pricing Summary is a breakdown of costs and does not reflect the frequency at which you will be invoiced.         ●       Additional information is required for one or more items on the quote for an order.     Motorola's quote (Quote Number: ________________ Dated: ____________ ) is based on and subject to the terms andconditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the "UnderlyingAgreement") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively"Products"). If no Underlying Agreement exists between Motorola and Customer, then the following Motorola'sStandard Terms of use and Purchase Terms and Conditions govern the purchase of the Products which is foundat http://www.motorolasolutions.com/product-terms. The Parties hereby enter into this Agreement as of the Efiective Date.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.   Customer   By: ______________________________   By: ______________________________   Name: ___________________________    Name: ____________________________   Title: ____________________________   Title: ____________________________   Date: ____________________________   Date: ____________________________       ●      Unless otherwise noted, this quote excludes sales tax or other applicable taxes (such as Goods and ServicesTax, sales tax, Value Added Tax and other taxes of a similar nature). Any tax the customer is subject to will beadded to invoices.     ●       Unless otherwise noted in this quote / order, installation of equipment is not included.     QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 9   Year 2 Subscription Fee $44,749.62 Year 3 Subscription Fee $44,749.62 Year 4 Subscription Fee $44,749.62 Year 5 Subscription Fee $44,749.62 Year 1 Subscription Fee (Inclusive of Upfront Hardware, Subscription, & Implementation Costs) $120,000.00 Page 23 of 522  Line #   Item Number   Parametric Data      12   PSV01S02942A   TEMAILAR = parata@trophyclub.org      1c   QA09017AA   ENDUSERT = POLICE PROTECTION      1d   QA09030AB   Incomplete      2   PSV03S02464A   Incomplete      24   SSV00S05162A   Incomplete      25   SSV00S03616A   Incomplete      27   SSV00S05158A   Incomplete      28   SSV00S05160A   Incomplete      29   SSV00S05161A   Incomplete      3   PSV01S02944A   TEMAILAR = parata@trophyclub.org,CUSTNAME = Patrick, Arata,SYSTEMID = 0693      30   SSV00S05163A   Incomplete      31   SSV00S03748A   Incomplete      32   WCM000111-010   INTER64 = Mark 43,SALECON = xxx,SALEADR = xxx,ADMEMAIL = xxx,ADMUSER = xxx      39   WGB-0708A   Incomplete      43   WGS00224   CUSTTYPE = LAW ENFORCEMENT,AGDOMAIN = 1011985746,CAMMODEL = Integration      6   PSV01S02940A   TEMAILAR = parata@trophyclub.org        QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 10  Page 24 of 522 1VIDEO MANAGER EL CLOUD SOLUTION DESCRIPTION VideoManager EL Cloud simplifies evidence management, automates data maintenance, and facilitates management of the Customer’s cloud- based, off-premises storage solution. It is compatible with V300/V700 body -worn cameras and M500 in-car video systems, as well as, legacy VISTA body -worn cameras and 4RE in-car video systems enabling the Customer to upload video evidence quickly and securely. VideoManager EL Cloud allows live streaming from the V300/V700 body -worn cameras and the M500 in-car video system to CommandCentral Aware. VIDEO EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT VideoManager EL Cloud delivers benefits to all aspects of video evidence administration. With this streamlined process, the Customer minimizes the amount of time spent manually managing evidence, allowing your team to spend more time in the field. Simplified Evidence Review VideoManager EL Cloud makes evidence review easier by allowing users to upload evidence into cloud storage from their in-field devices. This information includes a recording’s date and time, device used to capture the evidence, event ID, officer name, and event type. This allows the Customer to view recordings of an incident that were taken from several devices simultaneously, eliminating the task of reviewing irrelevant footage. Its built -in media player includes a visual display for incident data, highlighting moments of interest when lights, sirens, or brakes are activated during the event timeline. Other relevant files, such as PDFs, spreadsheets, reports, third-party videos, audio recordings, pictures, and drawings can also be grouped together and stored under a specific case entry, allowing all pertinent information to be st ored together. Easy Evidence Sharing VideoManager EL Cloud allows you to easily share information by exporting evidence. Ways to export evidence include downloading to a PC, sharing evidence through a cloud-based service, or Rimage. Rimage is a robust tool responsible for exporting evidence to DVD/BR discs. Automatic Data Maintenance VideoManager EL Cloud can schedule the automatic purging of events based on recorded event category and age. It is user customizable. Security The Customer will sync security groups and users from the Azure Active Directory. In VideoManager EL Cloud, the Customer can grant groups access to the evidence on an as -needed basis.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 11   Page 25 of 522 Integration with In-Car Video Systems and Body-Worn Cameras Video and audio captured by the integration of in-car video systems (4RE, M500) and body -worn cameras (VISTA, V300, V700) are automatically linked in VideoManager EL Cloud based on time, officer name, or group recordings. The Customer can utilize synchronized playback and export of video and audio from multiple devices in the same recording group. DEVICE MANAGEMENT The Customer can easily manage, configure, and deploy their in-car and body -worn cameras in VideoManager EL Cloud. Body -worn cameras are checked out to a given officer, where VideoManager EL Cloud keeps record of who last had the body -worn camera. In contrast, in-car video systems are configured with a list of officers who are authorized to use it. When an officer logs into the device, the officer is marked as the owner of any evidence that is created by the device. VideoManager EL Cloud does not display the officer’s name who is currently associated with the in-car video system, but it does for body -worn cameras. VideoManager EL Cloud’s Rapid Checkout Kiosk feature allows agencies to take advantage of pooled body -worn cameras. The cameras can be checked out at the beginning of a shift using an easy -to-use interface. At the end of a shift, the body -worn camera will be returned to its dock, where video is automatically uploaded. The camera is then ready to be checked out for the next shift. The in-car and body -worn cameras can also be configured to remember preference settings for each user, including volume level, screen brightness and camera aim. These settings are applied whenever a device is assigned to a specific user. There are other settings in VideoManager EL Cloud that will enable the Customer to configure devices to operate in alignment with your agency’s policies and procedures. REPORTING VideoManager EL Cloud’s Report Management allows the creation of reports that will give the Customer greater insight into the system. Reports are created to provide a specific type of data from a specified time period. Report types cover areas such as recorded event details, purged recorded events, recorded events with unknown metadata, body -worn camera assignments, device use, and case details.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 12   Page 26 of 522 MOBILE VIDEO PRODUCTS NEW SYSTEM STATEMENT OF WORK OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of body-worn camera(s) and/or in-car video system(s) and your digital evidence management solution. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. A third-party partner(s) (Motorola-certified installer) will work on Motorola’s behalf to install your in-car video system(s) (if applicable). This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation of the hardware and software components listed in the Solutions Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must be mutually agreed upon by both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATION, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer. FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola does not believe our Mobile Video offerings (i.e. in-car/body-worn cameras) require compliance with the FBI-CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI- CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 13   Page 27 of 522 security controls as a guide. Motorola’s Mobile Video system design and features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section 5.12 Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on Section 5.12, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is required to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted access. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information. Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJIS Section 5.12 Personnel Security screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personnel status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have access to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third party installer will work independently with the Customer to complete the Section 5.12 Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. COMPLETION CRITERIA The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delays due to incomplete Customer tasks. The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task completion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within ten (10) business days. In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 14   Page 28 of 522 SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the subscription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access. The provision and use of the subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola PM. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi- disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW. Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to: • Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. • Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Conduct equipment inventory if applicable. • Maintain project communications with the Customer. • Identify and manage project risks. • Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays. • Evaluate project status against Project Schedule. • Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status. • Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues related to project progress. • Conduct daily status calls with the Customer during Go-Live. Post Sales Engineer The Post Sales Engineer will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • Discovery validation. • System provisioning. • Covers the IT portion of the Project Kickoff Call with the Customer. • Contracted data migration between two disparate digital evidence management systems (if applicable).    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 15   Page 29 of 522 System Technologist (ST) The ST will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • Configure Customer’s digital evidence management system. • Inspect installation and configure hardware devices. • Provide instructions to the Customer on how to configure the hardware. • Review Deployment Checklist with the Customer. • Develop and submit a Trip Report. • Update Customer IP Map. Professional Services Engineer (if applicable) The Professional Services Engineer is engaged on projects that include integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party software application. Their responsibilities include: • Delivery of the interface between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third- party software (e.g. CAD). • Work with the Customer to access required systems/data. Application Specialist (if applicable) The Application Specialist will work with the Customer Project Team on system provisioning and education. The Application Specialist’s responsibilities include but are not limited to: • Deliver provisioning education and guidance to the Customer for operating and maintaining their system. • Provide product education as defined by this SOW and described in the Education Plan. • Provide on-site training based on the products the Customer purchased. Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training on-site or remote depending on the training topic and deployment services purchased. Motorola-Certified Installer The Motorola-certified installer is primarily responsible for installing in-car video systems (ICVs) into Customer vehicles. There are specific requirements the 3rd party partner must meet in order to be considered a Motorola- certified installer, and they include the following: • Required Training - WTG0501 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Remote) or WTG0503 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Live)  Needs to be renewed yearly.  Needs to be submitted to the PM by the technician completing the installation no less than thirty (30) days prior to the installation. - Review of any previous Motorola Solutions Technical Notifications (MTNs). • Optional Training - WGD00186 - M500 Installation Overview and Quick Start (NA)  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. - WGD00177 - M500 In-Car Video System Installation Guide  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. - MN010272A01 - M500 In-Car Video System Basic Service Manual    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 16   Page 30 of 522  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. Other responsibilities the Motorola-certified installer may be involved in include the installation of cellular routers or Access Points. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer. Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost. Project Manager The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to: • Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. • Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities. • Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM. • Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule. • Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM. • Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola. • Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities. • Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. • Monitor project to ensure resources are available as required. • Attend status meetings. • Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. • Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contractors, and common carriers. • Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date. • Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date. • Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department. • Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certificates, as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner. • Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if required for access. • Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 17   Page 31 of 522 • Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project. • Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. • Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel. • Identify and manage project risks. • Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN, server and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to: • Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system. • Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training. • Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems. • Maintain provisioning. • Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Video Management Point of Contact (POC) The Video Manager POC will educate users on digital media policy, participate in Discovery tasks, and complete the Video Management Administration training. The Customer is responsible for its own creation and enforcement of media protection policies and procedures for any digital media created, extracted, or downloaded from the digital evidence management system. Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis, training and provisioning process, including making decisions on global provisioning. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective field (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on provisioning, workflows, and department policies related to the proposed system. Training POC The Training POC will act as the course facilitator and is considered the Customer’s educational monitor. The Training POC will work with Motorola when policy and procedural questions arise. They will be responsible for developing any agency specific training material(s) and configuring new users on the Motorola Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) system. This role will serve as the first line of support during Go-Live for the Customer’s end users.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 18   Page 32 of 522 General Customer Responsibilities (if applicable) In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following: • All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, etc. • Configure, test, and maintain third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system. • Establish an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and provide documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system. • Coordinate and facilitate communication between Motorola and Customer third-party vendor(s) as required. • Motorola-certified installers must be certified through LXP for remote or in person installation training. The Customer is responsible for work performed by non-certified installers. • Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system. • Mitigate the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action. • Active participation of Customer SMEs during the course of the project. • Electronic versions of any documentation associated with business processes identified. • Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions. • Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer- provided remote conferencing tool. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to Motorola installing the proposed system: • Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system. • Provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) remote access for Motorola personnel to configure the system and conduct diagnostics. • Provide Internet access to server(s). • Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. The workstations must support MS Windows 11 Enterprise. • Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s). • Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Active Directory for the purpose of installation, configuration, and support. • Provide all environmental conditions such as power, uninterruptible power sources (UPS), HVAC, firewall and network requirements. • Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall. Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 19   Page 33 of 522 PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. PROJECT PLANNING SESSION A Project Planning Session will be scheduled after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet prior to the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include: • A high level review of the following project elements: - Contract documents. - A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. - Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. - A high level Project Schedule with milestones and dates. • Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors. • Determine Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities • Schedule the remote Project Planning Session. • Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Provide the initial Project Schedule. • Baseline the Project Schedule. • Review Motorola’s delivery approach and its reliance on Customer-provided remote access. • Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Request user information required to establish the Customer in LXP. Customer Responsibilities • Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting. Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. PROJECT KICKOFF Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 20   Page 34 of 522 Note – The IT Questionnaire is completed during the pre-sales process and prior to Contract award. The IT Questionnaire is given to Motorola at the time of offer acceptance. Delay in completing the IT Questionnaire may delay shipment of equipment. Motorola will not be responsible for any delays associated with or related to the completion of the IT Questionnaire. Motorola Responsibilities • Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW . • Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist. • Discuss vehicle equipment installation activities and responsibilities. • Discuss the equipment inventory process (if applicable). • Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW. • Review resource and scheduling requirements. • Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements (24-hour access to a secured two-way Internet connection through the Customer’s firewall for the purpose of deployment and maintenance). • Discuss and deliver the Business Process Review (BPR) Workbook. • Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Discuss the LXP training approach. • Provide designated Customer administrator with access to LXP. • Review and agree on completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support. Customer Responsibilities • Provide feedback on project delivery requirements. • Review the Deployment Checklist. • Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority. • Provide VPN access to Motorola personnel to facilitate delivery of services described in this SOW. • Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable). • Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Provide Motorola with names and contact information to the designated LXP Administrator(s). Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes. • BPR Workbook. • Deployment Checklist. DISCOVERY TELECONFERENCE During the Discovery Teleconference, Motorola will meet with the Customer to define system configuration, as well as, agency recording and retention policies. This information will be documented in the Business Process Review (BPR) Workbook, which is used as a guide for configuration and provisioning decisions. Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate Discovery Teleconference(s). • Review and complete BPR Workbook with the Customer.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 21   Page 35 of 522 • Confirm Customer-provided configuration inputs. Customer Responsibilities • Gather and review information required to complete the BPR Workbook during the Discovery Teleconference. • Schedule Customer Project Team and SMEs to attend the Discovery Teleconference. SMEs should be present to weigh-in on hardware, software and network components. Customer attendees should be empowered to convey policies and make modifications to policies as necessary. • Return completed BPR Workbook no later than five (5) business days after the conclusion of the Discovery Teleconference. Motorola Deliverables • Completed BPR Workbook.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 22   Page 36 of 522 PROJECT EXECUTION HARDWARE PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The hardware will be configured with a basic profile in line with the information provided by the IT Questionnaire or Discovery Teleconference for installation and configuration of the system. The Customer is responsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to: • Power • Heating and Cooling • Network Connectivity • Access and Security • Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities • Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location. • Inventory equipment after arrival at Customer location (if applicable). • Install backend server in Customer's designated area (if applicable). • Conduct a power-on test to validate the installed hardware and software are ready for configuration. • Verify remote connection to hardware. • For an on-site deployment, Motorola will be responsible for verifying the body-worn camera Transfer Stations are connected to the Customer’s network. The Customer is responsible for ensuring Motorola has the correct IP address(es) for configuring the Transfer Stations, and the Customer’s network is operational. • The installer will be responsible for installing the Access Point(s) (APs) if provided by Motorola (if applicable). • The ST will verify whether the AP(s) are properly installed and connected to the network (if applicable). • Create a Trip Report outlining the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware. Customer Responsibilities (if applicable) • Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location. • Confirm the server room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.). • Verify the server is connected to the Customer’s network. • Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software for server(s) and/or workstation(s). • Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to the CommandCentral cloud by utilizing the Customer’s Internet connection (if applicable). • Install Customer-supplied APs (if applicable). • Verify APs are properly installed and connected to the network (if applicable). • For remote deployments, the Customer is responsible for verifying the body-worn camera Transfer Stations are connected to their network. • Confirm access to installed software on Customer-provided workstation(s). • For body-worn cameras, the Customer will verify whether the Transfer Station(s) are connected to their network. Motorola Deliverables • Contracted Equipment.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 23   Page 37 of 522 • Equipment Inventory (if applicable). In-Car Video System Configuration (if applicable) The Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the in-car video (ICV) system(s) within the Customer-provided vehicle(s). The installer may also be responsible for installing cellular routers or WiFi radios inside the vehicle(s) for wireless upload of video to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. The Customer vehicles must be available for the ST to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of ICVs. If the Customer does not have all vehicles available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of ICV configurations completed. If the Customer requires the ST to complete the full contractual number of ICVs at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. Table 1-1 shows the number of ICVs an ST is contractually obligated to configure and test based on the number of ICVs purchased. Table 1-1: Number of Contractual ICV Configurations Number of ICV Purchased Number of ICV to Test 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 - 25 5 26 - 50 10 51 - 75 15 76 - 100 20 101 - 150 30 151 - 200 40 201+ 20% Note – The Pricing Page will reflect in-car video installation services by Motorola if Motorola is responsible for the vehicle installations. Motorola Responsibilities • Setup server for ICV digital video recorder (DVR) configuration. • Create configuration USB used to complete ICV hardware configuration and validation. • Travel to the Customer site to conduct configuration and testing of ICVs. • Complete ICV configuration on a single vehicle, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining ICV configurations. • Complete remaining contracted vehicle configurations. • Test a subset of completed ICV hardware configurations.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 24   Page 38 of 522 • For Motorola-certified installer, complete the installation of cellular router and confirm placement of antenna mounting with Customer (if applicable). • The Motorola-certified installer will install Customer-provided SIM card into cellular router and connect cellular router to ICV (if applicable). • Activities surrounding ICV (M500) interface to Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR) (if applicable). - Install Car Detector Mobile MDC Software on Customer-provided mobile data terminal (MDT) within the vehicle. - Configure MDC Network Card. Customer Responsibilities • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete ICV hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the vehicle installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for ICV hardware configuration(s). • Make ICV hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Provide cellular SIM Card for Internet connectivity to the installer at time of vehicle installation. Motorola Deliverables • Complete Functional Validation Plan as it applies to the proposed solution. NOTE - The Customer is responsible for having all vehicles and devices available for installation per the Project Schedule. All cellular data fees and Internet connectivity charges are the responsibility of the Customer. If a Motorola-certified installer is not used to install the ICV(s), Motorola is not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. In the event the Customer takes on the responsibility of installing the ICV(s) through a Motorola-certified installer, Motorola is also not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. For ALPR installations, an MDT is required for all vehicles (if applicable). Body Worn Camera Configuration (if applicable) The Transfer Station will be utilized to configure each body-worn camera according to the Business Process Review. In order for this process to be successfully completed, the Transfer Station must be connected to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. The table below shows the number of body-worn cameras an ST is contractually obligated to configure and test based on the number of body-worn cameras purchased. Table 1-2: Number of Contractual Body-Worn Camera Configurations Number of BWC Purchased Number of BWC to Test 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 - 25 5 26 - 50 10    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 25   Page 39 of 522 Number of BWC Purchased Number of BWC to Test 51 - 75 15 76 - 100 20 101 - 150 30 151 - 200 40 201+ 20% Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Transfer Station(s) for connectivity to the digital evidence management system . • Verify the Transfer Station(s) is configured properly and connected to the network. • Configure body-worn camera(s) within the digital evidence management system. • Check out body-worn camera(s) and create a test recording. • Verify completion of upload from body-worn camera(s) after it is docked in a Transfer Station or USB dock. • Install and provide a demonstration of client software as part of the same on-site engagement as Go-Live, unless otherwise outlined in this SOW . Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Transfer Station(s). • Provide and install workstation hardware. • Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and mobile devices. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR) Commissioning (if applicable) This section highlights the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer when an in-car video system interfaces with the Law Enforcement Archival Report Network (LEARN) database. Motorola Responsibilities • Create a Customer account in the LEARN system with user emails. • Verify the Customer has installed and launched the Vigilant Car Detector Mobile Software per the Vigilant LEARN Quickstart Guide. • Provide Mobile LPR - Officer Safety Basic and Advanced Pre-Installation Checklist. • Provide Agency Manager with Training Materials and Car Detector Mobile MDC software installation guide. • Advise Agency Manager of different options available to add new users. • Confirm Agency Manager is aware of registration required for Hotlists. • Confirm Agency Manager understands how to set up data-sharing. Customer Responsibilities • Identify the Agency Manager. • Register to receive access to Hotlists.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 26   Page 40 of 522 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Motorola will install VideoManager Evidence Library (EL) software on a specified number of workstations dictated by the Contract. The Customer will be responsible for installing the software on the remaining workstations. Provisioning of VideoManager EL software will be done in accordance with the information contained in the BPR Workbook. Installation of VideoManager EL software consists of the following activities: • Delivery and installation of server hardware (if applicable). • Network discovery. • Operating system and software installation. • Onboarding user / group identity set up. • Provide access to the application. VideoManager EL (if applicable) The VideoManager EL software is an on-premises solution that requires an onsite server and supports both body worn cameras and in-car video systems. Motorola Responsibilities • Install software on a specified number of customer workstations and/or mobile devices. • Use information provided in the BPR Workbook to configure VideoManager EL software. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Provide instruction on client software USB utility. Customer Responsibilities • Provide a network environment that conforms to the requirements presented in the Solution Description. • Procure and install server and storage hardware at desired location in accordance with Solution Description requirements. • Perform a power on test with Motorola. • Provide assigned Motorola System Administrator with access to SQL database for installation purposes (Motorola’s access will be revoked upon conclusion of the installation). • For Active Directory integration, provide domain user (service account), security group (for application administrators including service account), and domain read access (if applicable). • Provide workstation and/or mobile device hardware in accordance with specifications listed in the Solution Description. • Complete online training. • Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and/or mobile devices. VideoManager ELC (if applicable) VideoManager ELC software is a cloud solution that does not require an onsite server and supports both body- worn cameras and in-car video systems. Motorola Responsibilities • Use information provided in BPR Workbook to configure VideoManager ELC software. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities:    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 27   Page 41 of 522 - Create users, groups, and setup permissions. - Create event categories. - Set retention policies. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Ensure training POC can access the system. Customer Responsibilities • Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end user workstations. CloudConnect Installation and Configuration (applicable for CommandCentral Aware purchase) Motorola Responsibilities • Verify remote access capability. • Remotely configure CloudConnect Virtual Machine within the Cloud Anchor Server. • Configure network connectivity and test connection to the CloudConnect Virtual Machine. • Create an IPSEC tunnel. • Provide Customer with the information for setting up the IPSEC tunnel. Customer Responsibilities • Provide Motorola with two static IP addresses, corresponding subnet masks/default gateway, and available NTP and DNS IP for the CloudConnect Virtual Machine and the Cloud Anchor Server. • Confirm with Motorola the network performance requirements are met. • Configure firewall to allow traffic from IPSEC tunnel. Completion Criteria • CloudConnect Virtual Machine configuration is complete and accessible throughout the network. CommandCentral Evidence (if applicable) Motorola will work with the Customer to determine best industry practices, current operations environment, and subsystem integration to ensure optimal configuration of your CommandCentral Evidence solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Use the CommandCentral Admin Portal to provision users, groups, and rules based on Customer Active Directory data. • Guide the Customer in the configuration of CommandCentral Evidence. Customer Responsibilities • Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Active Directory for the purpose of Motorola conducting CommandCentral Evidence provisioning. • Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups and agency mapping to CommandCentral Evidence. • Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions. • Configure evidence as directed by Motorola.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 28   Page 42 of 522 DATA MIGRATION SERVICES (IF APPLICABLE) The Customer is responsible for partitioning data to be converted from a legacy or on-premises digital evidence management system to an on-cloud solution as part of this offer. The Customer will have ten (10) business days to provide feedback after Motorola validates the migrated data. If feedback is not received on or before ten (10) business days, Motorola will assume the migration is complete. Motorola Responsibilities • Receive access to Customer video data. • Perform contracted data migration and validation. Customer Responsibilities • Provide remote access to partitioned data to be migrated. • Validate migrated dataset, and provide Motorola with feedback within ten (10) business days. Completion Criteria • A migrated dataset as defined in the Contract. DEMS INTEGRATIONS AND THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE) The integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the complexity of accessing the third-party system. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third-party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities • Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. • Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third-party systems. • Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the digital evidence management system. • Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts. • Provide network connectivity between digital evidence management system and the third-party system(s). • Provide information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulties with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or a non-functional interface. By providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will put us in the best position to mitigate these potential issues. If the resolution requires additional third-party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or Customer-provided third-party hardware or software.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 29   Page 43 of 522 SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer-based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote) depending on what is purchased. Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training will be delivered in accordance with the Education Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format. ONLINE TRAINING (IF APPLICABLE) Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP. This subscription service provides customers with unlimited access to our online training content and provides users with the flexibility of learning the content at their own pace. Training content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Through LXP, a list of available online training courses, Motorola User Guides, and Training Material are accessible in electronic format. Motorola Responsibilities • Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer. • Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer. • Configure a Customer-specific portal view. • Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies. • Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account. • During onboarding, assist the Customer with LXP usage. • Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content. • Provide instruction to Customer LXP Administrator on building groups. Customer Responsibilities • Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts. • Complete LXP Administrator training. • Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to LXP. • Customer's primary LXP Administrator is required to complete the following self-paced training: LXP Introduction (LXP0001), LXP Primary Site Administrator Overview (LXP0002), and LXP Group Administrator Overview (LXP0003). • Advise users on the availability of training through LXP. • Ensure users complete LXP training in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Build groups as needed. INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAIN ING (ON-SITE AND REMOTE, IF APPLICABLE) Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Responsibilities • Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format. • Perform training in accordance with the Education Plan.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 30   Page 44 of 522 • Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities • Supply classroom(s) based on the requirements listed in the Education Plan. • Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content. • Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Deliverables • Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials. • Attendance rosters.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 31   Page 45 of 522 PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the ST demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipment has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities • Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement process and contact information. • Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support. • Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete. • Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate. • Provide Customer survey upon closure of the project. Customer Responsibilities • Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure. • Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motorola’s Technical Support. • Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 32   Page 46 of 522 ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions (if applicable): • Videomanager EL Cloud (VMELC) must be connected to the Microsoft Entra ID (formally known as Microsoft Azure Active Directory) for user authentication to the VMELC application. Microsoft Entra ID can be synchronized with the Customer's on-premises Active Directory using Azure AD Connect. If the Customer is using Microsoft Office 365, Motorola will be able to integrate with this Microsoft Entra ID. • Must be 2003 or later for Microsoft Entra ID integration. • Upload Speed Requirements for Hardware Devices - 5 Mbps + 3 Mbps per additional device.  This assumes it will take 8 hours to upload 5 GB of video on a device. - 40-50 Mbps per concurrent uploading device.  This assumes video is required to upload within 30-40 minutes with approximately 5 GB to upload. • If the Customer is supplying an upload server to temporarily store video, please verify the server complies with the specifications provided in the Solutions Description. • By default, M500 ICVs and V300/V700 BWCs do not need an upload server for cloud deployments. An upload server may be required depending on how many devices are uploading concurrently and the need for the Customer to upload video evidence at a given speed. • Upload appliance required if using 4REs or VISTA body worn cameras connected to VideoManager EL Cloud • Cellular upload of ICVs and BWCs (if applicable) requires an Ethernet connection to an LTE modem in the vehicle. • If the Customer is supplying a server for VideoManager EL (On-premises) solution, the Customer must verify the server is not a Domain Controller. • VideoManager EL for on-premises cannot be installed on a server running Active Directory or Exchange applications on the Customer’s network. • The ICVs are configured with a hidden SSID and WPA2-AES Security with a 128-bit Pre-shared Key. If another type of security is desired, the Customer will be responsible for configuring these security requirements into the ICVs. This information must be supplied through the IT Questionnaire in order for the factory to configure the correct security requirements. • If the Customer is supplying their own Access Point, it must be 5 GHz 802.11n compatible.    QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Motorola Solutions, Inc.: 500 West Monroe, United States - 60661 ~ #: 36-1115800     Page 33   Page 47 of 522 1M500 IN-CAR VIDEO SYSTEM SOLUTION DESCRIPTION The M500 In-Car Video System is the first AI-enabled in-car video solution for law enforcement. It combines Motorola’s powerful camera technology with our industry -leading digital evidence management software, VideoManager, to deliver high-quality digital evidence and real-time analytics. The M500 offers the following benefits: • Delivers exceptionally clear, evidence-grade video, from ins ide and outside the vehicle • The M500 has three high-definition cameras, mounted on the front and rear windshield and in the cabin. The front camera has a 4K sensor, with an ultra high-definition recording resolution that captures both wide-angle and focused video streams. The cabin camera’s infrared illumination allows backseat recording in total darkness, and a built -in microphone captures audio in the vehicle during recording. • Works reliably, even in challenging situations • The cameras and processor are small, rugged devices, easily and securely installed where they do not hinder any line of sight. They are tamper proof and built to withstand significant impact and severe weather conditions. Even if a vehicle is in a serious collision, the Uninterruptible P ower Supply automatically kicks in to continue capturing evidence for those critical extra seconds. • Protects video data, whether in transit or at rest • The powerful core processor, with a 1 terabyte drive, securely stores all video footage, encrypting the data to prevent cyber threats. • Provides users a reliable, easy -to-learn system • Ease of use is at the heart of the M500. The interface is highly intuitive, and any feature can be accessed with no more than three touches of the control panel. Users can start a recording manually or program sensors to activate a recording when triggered – such as a siren, blue lights, vehicle speed, crash detection, wireless microphones, and more. After the recording starts and is categorized, everything is automated, including the uploading of footage to the system’s evidence management software, VideoManager. There, recordings are easily managed, redacted, organized, and shared with all authorized parties, including first responders, fleet managers, investigative officers, supervisors, prosecutors, and legal teams. • Increases efficiency • The system’s software makes it easy to search and analyze video footage, which can save countless hours for users and minimize human error. • Promotes trust • By providing a clear record of incident s that occur while officers are on duty, the M500 promotes trust between public safety agents and the communities they serve. • Integrates seamlessly with other Motorola technologies • The M500 offers additional benefits when working in conjunction with Motorola’s V700 Body -Worn Camera or L5M License Plate Recognition camera and VehicleManager. - When used with the V700, the M500 in-car video system triggers the V700 to record at the same time. Officers can focus on the situation at hand, while the cameras – working together as a seamless system – capture synchronized recording from multiple vantage points. The footage is uploaded to and can be reviewed on the same system.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 34   Page 48 of 522 - When used with the L5M, both the LPR camera and the M500 feed their collected license plate data into Vigilant VehicleManager and display the information on a single interface. W orking together, the systems increase coverage while maintaining ease of use through a shared user interface and database. The M500 is a reliable and comprehensive mobile video solution that will enhance safety, promote accountability, and improve efficiency. It ensures that you always have the critical information needed for smarter, faster decisions to help keep officers and the communities they serve safe.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 35   Page 49 of 522 STATEMENT OF WORK - MOBILE VIDEO PRODUCTS NEW SYSTEM OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of body-worn camera(s), in-car video system(s), interview recording system(s) and/or your digital evidence management solution. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. A third party has been identified as our Motorola- certified installer and will work on Motorola’s behalf to install your in-car video system(s). This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation o f the hardware and software components listed in the Solutions Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must b e mutually agreed upon by both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services & Products provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATION, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requ iring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer. FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola believes our solution is not in scope of the FBI-CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI-CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL security controls as a guide. Motorola’s design and      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 36   Page 50 of 522 features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on the Personnel Security section of the CJISSECPOL, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is requ ired to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted access to unencrypted CJI. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information and Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJISSECPOL Personnel Security screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personnel status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have access to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third-party installer (if applicable) will work independently with the Customer to complete the CJISSECPOL Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. COMPLETION CRITERIA The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delays due to i ncomplete Customer tasks. The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task completion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within ten (10) business days. In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 37   Page 51 of 522 SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the subscription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access or for hardware, upon shipment of the hardware. The provision and use of the subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW. Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to: • Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. • Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Conduct equipment inventory. • Discovery validation • Maintain project communications with the Customer. • Identify and manage project risks. • Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays. • Evaluate project status against Project Schedule. • Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status. • Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues re lated to project progress. • Conduct daily status calls with the Customer during Go-Live. Post Sales Engineer The Post Sales Engineer will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • System provisioning. • Data Migration • Contracted data migration between two disparate digital evidence management systems (if applicable, additional fees may apply).      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 38   Page 52 of 522 Field Engineer (FE) The FE will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • Inspect installation and configure hardware devices. • Provide instructions to the Customer on how to configure the hardware. • Review Deployment Checklist with the Customer. • Develop and submit a Trip Report. • Update Customer IP Map. Professional Services Engineer (if applicable) The Professional Services Engineer is engaged on projects that include integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party software application. Their responsibilities include: • Delivery of the interface between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third - party software (e.g. CAD). Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training on-site or remote depending on the training topic and deployment services purchased. • Deliver provisioning education and guidance to the Customer for operating and maintaining their system. • Provide product education as defined by this SOW and described in the Education Plan. Motorola-Certified Installer (if applicable) The Motorola-certified installer is primarily responsible for installing in-car video systems (ICVs) into Customer vehicles. There are specific requirements the 3rd party partner must meet in order to be considered a Motorola - certified installer, and they include the following: • Required Training • WTG0501 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Remote) or WTG0503 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Live) • Needs to be renewed yearly. • Needs to be submitted to the PM by the technician completing the installation no less than thirty (30) days prior to the installation. • Review of any previous Motorola Solutions Technical Notifications (MTNs). • Optional Training • WGD00186 - M500 Installation Overview and Quick Start (NA) • Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. • WGD00177 - M500 In-Car Video System Installation Guide • Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. • MN010272A01 - M500 In-Car Video System Basic Service Manual • Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. Other responsibilities the Motorola-certified installer may be involved in include the installation of cellular routers or Access Points. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the respons ibility of the Customer.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 39   Page 53 of 522 Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost. Project Manager • The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to: • Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. • Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities. • Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM. • Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule. • Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM. • Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola. • Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities. • Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. • Monitor Project to ensure resources are available as required. • Attend status meetings. • Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. • Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contractors, and common carriers. • Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date. • Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date. • Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department. • Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certificates , as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner. • Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if required f or access. • Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources. • Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project. • Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. • Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel. • Identify and manage project risks.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 40   Page 54 of 522 • Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to: • Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system. • Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training. • Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems. • Maintain provisioning. • Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Video Management Point of Contact (POC) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Video Manager POC will educate users on digital media policy, participate in Discovery tasks, and complete the Video Management Administration training. The Customer is responsible for its own creation and enforcement of media protection poli cies and procedures for any digital media created, extracted, or downloaded from the digital evidence management system. Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis, training and provisioning process, including m aking decisions on global provisioning. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective field (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on provisioning, workflows, and department policies related to the proposed system. Training POC The Training POC will act as the course facilitator and is considered the Customer’s educational monitor. The Training POC will work with Motorola when policy and procedural questions arise. They will be respo nsible for developing any agency specific training material(s) and configuring new users on the Motorola Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) system. This role will serve as the first line of support during Go-Live for the Customer’s end users. General Customer Responsibilities In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following: • All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, connectivity etc. • Configure, test, and maintain third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 41   Page 55 of 522 • Establish an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and provide documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system (if applicable). • Coordinate and facilitate communication between Motorola and Customer third-party vendor(s) as required. • Mitigate the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action. • Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system. • Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions. • Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer - provided remote conferencing tool. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to Motorola installing the proposed system: • Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system. • Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. • Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s). • Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Active Directory for the purpos e of installation, configuration, and support. • Provide all environmental conditions such as power, uninterruptible power sources (UPS), HVAC, firewall and network requirements. • Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall. Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 42   Page 56 of 522 PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. PROJECT PLANNING SESSION A Project Planning Session will occur after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet before the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include: • A high-level review of the following project elements: • Quoting/ordering documents • A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. • Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. • Data Migration questionnaire if migration is included in the Solution • The Business Process Review (BPR), used to document system configuration, agency recording, and retention policies • A high-level Project Schedule with milestones and dates. • Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors. • Determine Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities • Contact the customer to complete the Project Planning Session. • Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Baseline the Project Schedule, if applicable. • Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. Customer Responsibilities • Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting. Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Data Migration Questionnaire (if applicable) • BPR Workbook      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 43   Page 57 of 522 PROJECT KICKOFF Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation. Note – The IT Questionnaire is completed during the pre-sales process and prior to Contract award. The IT Questionnaire is given to Motorola at the time of offer acceptance. A delay in completing the IT Questionnaire may delay the shipment of equipment. Motorola will not be responsible for any delays associated with or related to the completion of the IT Questionnaire. Motorola Responsibilities • Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW. • Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist. • Discuss the equipment inventory process • Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW. • Review resource requirements. • Provide the initial Project Schedule • Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements. • Review the BPR. • Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Review the LXP training portal. • Request user information required to establish the Customer in LXP. • Review and agree on completion criteria and the proces s for transitioning to support. Customer Responsibilities • Provide feedback and approval on project delivery requirements and schedule. • Review the Deployment Checklist. • Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority. • Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable). • Complete the BPR Workbook within 5 business days after the conclusion of the Project Kickoff for review during the Discovery Teleconference • Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Provide Motorola with names and contact information of the designated LXP Administrator(s). Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes. • Deployment Checklist. DISCOVERY TELECONFERENCE During the Discovery Teleconference, Motorola will meet with the Customer to review information documented in the BPR Workbook. The Data Migration Questionnaire will also be rev iewed if migration is part of the Solution. Motorola Responsibilities      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 44   Page 58 of 522 • Facilitate Discovery Teleconference. • Confirm Customer-provided configuration inputs. Customer Responsibilities • Gather and review the information required to complete the BPR Workbook. • Schedule Customer Project Team and SMEs to attend the Discovery Teleconference. SMEs should be present to weigh in on hardware, software, and network components. Customer attendees should be empowered to convey policies and make modifications to policies as necessary. Motorola Deliverables • Completed BPR Workbook.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 45   Page 59 of 522 PROJECT EXECUTION HARDWARE PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The hardware will be configured with a basic profile in line with the information provided by the IT Questionnaire or Discovery Teleconference for installation and configuration of the system. The Customer is responsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to: • Power • Heating and Cooling • Network Connectivity • Access and Security • Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities • Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location. • Inventory equipment after arrival at Customer location • Conduct a power-on test to validate that the installed hardware is ready for configuration. • Verify remote connection to hardware. • Complete Deployment Checklist which outlines the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware. Customer Responsibilities • Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location. • Confirm the installation room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.). • Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software workstation(s). • Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System by utilizing the Customer’s Internet connection. • Confirm access to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System cloud on Customer-provided workstation(s). Motorola Deliverables • Contracted Equipment. • Equipment Inventory SVX Configuration as a Remote Speaker Microphone (if applicable) The Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to manage firmware updates on each SVX. In order for this process to be successfully completed, each Smart Dock must be connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Solution through the Customer’s internet connection. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Smart Dock(s) for connectivity to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 46   Page 60 of 522 • Verifying the SVX Smart Dock(s) are connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System through the Customer’s network. The Customer is responsible for ensuring Motorola has the correct IP address(es) for configuring the Smart Dock(s), and the Customer’s network is operational. • Verify all slots in each Smart Dock are functional. • Provide documentation on how to pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N 70 radio(s) using Secure Near-Field Communications (NFC). Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Smart Dock(s). • Provide network information (IP address, gateway, DNS, and subnet mask) to Motorola for each Smart Dock(s). • Enable Bluetooth, Bluetooth Tones, and Secure NFC Touch Pairing on Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s). • Motorola recommends “Power Down Standby Mode (hrs) = 1” to allow the SVX Bluetooth connection to quickly reconnect after power up within the 1-hour timeframe. • Pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s) using Secure NFC. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. SVX Configuration as a Body Camera (if applicable) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to configure each SVX as a body camera. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure SVX(s) within Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System. • Check out SVX(s) and create a test recording. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for up to 25% of purchased SVX(s). • Provide a demonstration of client software. Customer Responsibilities • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. • The Customer will verify whether the Smart Docks(s) are connected to their network. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for the remainder of purchased SVX(s). V700 Body Camera Configuration (if applicable) The Transfer Station(s) will be utilized to con figure each V700 body camera according to the Business Process Review. In order for this process to be successfully completed, each Transfer Station must be connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Solution through the Customer’s internet connection. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Transfer Station(s) for connectivity to the digital evidence management system. • Verify the Transfer Station(s) is configured properly and connected to the network.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 47   Page 61 of 522 • Configure body camera(s) within the digital evidence management system. • Check out body camera(s) and create a test recording. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for up to 25% of purchased V700(s). • Verify completion of upload from body-worn camera(s) after it is docked in a Transfer Station or USB dock. • Install and provide a demonstration of client software as part of the same on-site engagement as Go-Live, unless otherwise outlined in this SOW. Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Transfer Station(s). • Provide and install workstation hardware. • Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and mobile devices. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. In-Car Video System Configuration (if applicable) The Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the in-car video (ICV) system(s) within the Customer-provided vehicle(s). The installer may also be responsible for installing cellular routers or WiFi radios inside the vehicle(s) for wireless upload of video to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer. The Customer vehicles must be available for the FE to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of ICVs. If the Customer does not have all vehicles available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of ICV configurations completed. If the Customer requires the FE to complete the full contractual number of ICVs at a later date and time, additi onal cost may be incurred. The following table shows the number of ICVs an FE is contractually obligated to configure and test based on the number of ICVs purchased. Table 1: Number of Contractual ICV Configurations Number of ICV Purchased Number of ICV to Test 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 - 25 5 26 - 50 10 51 - 75 15      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 48   Page 62 of 522 Number of ICV Purchased Number of ICV to Test 76 - 100 20 101 - 150 30 151 - 200 40 201+ 20% Note – The Pricing Page will reflect in-car video installation services by Motorola if Motorola is responsible for the vehicle installations. Motorola Responsibilities • Setup ICV digital video recorder (DVR) configuration. • Create configuration USB used to complete ICV hardware configuration and validation. • Travel to the Customer site to conduct configuration and testing of ICVs. • The FE will verify whether the AP(s) are properly installed and connected to the network for in-car video system WiFi upload (if applicable). • Complete ICV configuration on a single vehicle, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining ICV configurations. • Complete remaining contracted vehicle configurations. • Test a subset of completed ICV hardware configurations. Motorola-Certified Installer Responsibilities (if applicable) These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer. • Complete the installation of ICV hardware in Customer provided vehicles. • Complete the installation of cellular router and confirm placement of antenna mounting with Customer (if applicable). • Install Customer-provided SIM card into cellular router and connect cellular router to ICV (if applicable). • Installation of Access Point(s) (APs) if provided by Motorola for in-car video system WiFi upload (if applicable). Customer Responsibilities • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete ICV hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the vehicle installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for ICV hardware configuration(s). • Make ICV hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Provide cellular SIM Card for Internet connectivity to the installer at time of vehicle installation (if applicable). • Install Customer-supplied APs (if applicable). • Verify APs are properly installed and connected to the network (if applicable).      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 49   Page 63 of 522 Motorola Deliverables • Complete Functional Validation Plan as it applies to the proposed solution. NOTE - The Customer is responsible for having all vehicles and devices available for installation per the Project Schedule. All cellular data fees and Internet connectivity charges are the responsibility of the Cu stomer. If a Motorola-certified installer is not used to install the ICV(s), Motorola is not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. In the event the Customer takes on the responsibility of installing the ICV(s) through a Motorola-certified installer, Motorola is also not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. For ALPR installations, an MDT is required for all vehicles. M500 Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR) Configuration (if applicable) This section highlights the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer when an M500 in -car video system interfaces with the VehicleManager database. Motorola Responsibilities • Create a Customer account in the VehicleManager system with user emails. • Verify the Customer has installed and launched the Vigilant Car Detector Mobile Software per the VehicleManager Quickstart Guide. • Provide Mobile ALPR - Officer Safety Basic and Advanced Pre-Installation Checklist. • Provide Agency Manager with Training Materials and Car Detector Mobile MDC software installation guide. • Advise Agency Manager of different options available to add new users. • Confirm Agency Manager is aware of registration required for Hotlists. • Confirm Agency Manager understands how to set up data-sharing. Customer Responsibilities • Identify the Agency Manager. • Register to receive access to Hotlists. Interview Recording System Configuration (if applicable) When installation services are included as part of the contract, the Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the Interview Recording System(s) within the Customer -provided location(s). The Customer location(s) must be available for the Motorola Resource an d/or contracted third party to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of systems. If the Customer does not have all locations available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of configurations completed. If the Customer requires the Motorola Resource and/or contracted third party to complete the full contractual number of systems at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. Motorola Responsibilities • Create configuration USB used to complete hardware configuration and validation. • Conduct configuration and testing of system(s). • Complete configuration on a single system, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining configurations. • Complete remaining contracted system configurations.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 50   Page 64 of 522 • Test a subset of completed hardware configurations. • When installation services for Motorola-certified installer are in the contract, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable). Customer Responsibilities • When installation services are being provided by the Customer, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable). • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to comple te hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for hardware configuration(s). • Make hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverables • Complete the Deployment Checklist and testing as it applies to the proposed solution. SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION CommandCentral DEMS (if applicable) CommandCentral DEMS software is a cloud solution that does not require an onsite server. Section 3.2 does not apply to existing Motorola customers using VideoManager EL Cloud. Motorola Responsibilities • Use information provided in BPR Workbook to configure CommandCentral DEMS software. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: • Create users, groups, and setup permissions. • Create event categories. • Set retention policies. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Use the CommandCentral Admin Portal to provision users, groups, and rules ba sed on Customer Active Directory data. • Guide the Customer in the configuration of CommandCentral DEMS. • Ensure training POC can access the system. Customer Responsibilities • Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Active Directory for the purpose of Motorola conducting CommandCentral DEMS provisioning. • Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups, and agency mapping to CommandCentral DEMS. • Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions. • Configure evidence as directed by Motorola. • Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end-user workstations. DATA MIGRATION SERVICES (IF APPLICABLE*) The Customer is responsible for partitioning data to be converted from Motorola on -premises digital evidence management system, or Customer’s Non-Motorola Digital Evidence Management System to Motorola’s cloud solution as part of this offer. The Customer will have ten (10) business days to provide feedback after Motorola      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 51   Page 65 of 522 validates the migrated data. If feedback is not received on or before ten (10) business days, Motorola will assume the migration is complete. *Data Migration Services may be subject to additional fees. Motorola Responsibilities • Receive access to Customer video data. • Perform contracted data migration and validation. Customer Responsibilities • Provide 24/7 remote access to partitioned data to be migrated. • Customer hardware or virtualization environment will be the sole responsibility of the Customer to troubleshoot and resolve issues. • Validate migrated dataset and provide Motorola with feedback within ten (10) business days. Completion Criteria • A migrated dataset as defined in the Contract. Motorola On-Premises Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola supports data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from our on-premises evidence management systems, Evidence Library 4 and VideoManager EL On-Prem (formally known as Evidence Library 5), to Motorola’s cloud solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Verify compatible platform(s) and upgrade if applicable Customer Responsibilities • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources Non-Motorola Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola will perform data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from the Cu stomer’s Non-Motorola Evidence Management system to the new Motorola Cloud Evidence Management System. Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate the method of obtaining and consuming the data • Review data in the Motorola systems with the customer Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the Non - Motorola digital evidence management system. • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources, if applicable. • Provide API connection to the source, if applicable • Provide data and metadata information in a readable and consumable format • Assist with mapping metadata information into Motorola system      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 52   Page 66 of 522 INTEGRATIONS AND THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE) The integration between Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System and the Customer’s third- party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the complexity of accessing the third-party system. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third-party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities • Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. • Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third-party systems. • Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the third - party system. • Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts. • Provide network connectivity between digital evidence management system and the third -party system(s). • Provide hardware to run any required interface components for on-prem interfaces when required. • Provide sample data and information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulties with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or non-functional interface. Providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will potentially allow us to mitigate these issues. If the resolution requires additional third -party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or Customer-provided third-party hardware or software.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 53   Page 67 of 522 SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer -based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote) depending on what is purchased. Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training will be delivered in accordance with the Education Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format . ONLINE TRAINING Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP. This subscription service provides customers with unlimited access to our online training content and provides users with the flexibility of learning the content at their own pace. Training content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Through LXP, a list of available online training courses, Motorola User Guides, and Training Material are accessible in electronic format. Motorola Responsibilities • Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer. • Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer. • Configure a Customer-specific portal view. • Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies. • Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account. • During onboarding, assist the Customer with LXP usage. • Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content. • Provide instruction to Customer LXP Administrator on building groups. Customer Responsibilities • Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts. • Complete LXP Administrator training. • Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to LXP. • Customer's primary LXP Administrator is required to complete the following self-paced training: LXP Introduction (LXP0001), LXP Primary Site Administrator Overview (LXP0002), and LXP Group Administrator Overview (LXP0003). • Advise users on the availability of training through LXP. • Ensure users complete LXP training in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Build groups as needed. ON-SITE TRAINING Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Education Plan. On-site instructor- led classes will utilize the Customer’s hardware and software in order to provide the best training envir onment. This will allow the Customer to engage in an environment that has been configured and deployed in alignment with this SOW.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 54   Page 68 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format. • Perform training in accordance with the Education Plan. • Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities • Supply classroom(s) based on the requirements listed in the Education Plan. • Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content. • Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Deliverables • Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials. • Attendance rosters.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 55   Page 69 of 522 PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the assigned Motorola Resource demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipme nt has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities • Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement process and contact information. • Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support. • Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete. • Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate. Customer Responsibilities • Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure. • Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motoro la’s Technical Support. • Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 56   Page 70 of 522 ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions: • Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System must be connected to the Microsoft Entra ID (formally known as Microsoft Azure Active Directory) for user authentication to the application. Microsoft Entra ID can be synchronized with the Customer's on-premises Active Directory using Azure AD Connect. If the Customer is using Microsoft Office 365, Motorola will be able to integrate with this Microsoft Entra ID. • If Microsoft Entra ID is not utilized by the Customer, Motorola will provide a free version of Entra ID for user authentication to the application. • Must be 2003 or later for Microsoft Entra ID integration. • Upload Speed Requirements for SVX when used as a body camera: • 5 Mbps + 3 Mbps per additional device. • This assumes it will take 8 hours to upload 5 GB of video on a device. • 40-50 Mbps per concurrent uploading device. • This assumes video is required to upload within 30-40 minutes with approximately 5 GB to upload. • Cellular upload of ICVs and BWCs (if applicable) requires an Ethernet connection to an LTE modem in the vehicle. • If the Customer is supplying their own Access Point for ICV Wi-Fi upload, it must be 5 GHz 802.11n compatible.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 57   Page 71 of 522 LPR INTEGRATIONS & PARKING SOLUTION DESCRIPTION LINC SOLUTION Using the Motorola ALPR Engine, LinC leverages existing infrastructure to transform non-ALPR cameras into high-performing ALPR systems. LinC software analyzes camera and VMS streams to extract ALPR events, enhances the data with location, time, and vehicle details, and integrates seamlessly with VehicleManager Enterprise for comprehensive data management. Key Features and Benefits:  Integration with Existing Hardware: This solution utilizes existing VMS cameras, and processing can be done either centrally or at the edge to offer compatibility with any level of network infrastructure.  Comprehensive Data Management: Integrates with VehicleManager Enterprise for centralized data storage and management.  Real-Time Processing: Processes VMS-supported RTSP feeds into ALPR detections in real time and allows real-time alerting from the Vehicle Manager through email, TAS, and Mobile Companion.  Enhanced Cloud Processing: This technique combines local processing of HD video streams with subsequent cloud-based vehicle detail analysis to enhance metadata collection and accuracy.  Flexible Compatibility: Supports ONVIF or RTSP-compatible cameras with specific technical requirements. AVIGILON CAMERA INTEGRATION The Avigilon Camera Integration allows customers to convert their non-ALPR Avigilon cameras into ALPR- capable devices. This integration incorporates ALPR data within the VehicleManager Enterprise back -office solution, providing a scalable, secure, and fully integrated data management system. Key Features and Benefits:  Engineering Support: Includes ongoing support, new integrations and security patching.  Integration Services: Facilitates local device configuration and troubleshooting without requiring additional development.  Camera Mapping: Provides detailed geocode mapping and camera-specific filtering for precise ALPR data management.  Full Data Management: Offers secure storage, access control, and watchlist alerting based on site retention policies.  Image and Advanced Analytics: Enables post-processing of images for vehicle details and offers comprehensive search and trend analysis capabilities. COMPETITIVE INTEGRAT ION The Competitive Integration solution enables customers to integrate their third -party ALPR hardware with the VehicleManager back-office system. This integration ensures seamless data ingestion and management, allowing federated queries and data sharing as if sourced directly from Motorola cameras.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 58   Page 72 of 522 Key Features and Benefits:  Engineering and Integration Support: Provides updates, new integrations, security patching, and data migration services.  Seamless Installation: Ensures easy installation and configuration without additional development requirements.  Detailed Camera Mapping: Allows precise 1:1 camera mapping, geocode mapping, and specific camera filtering.  Robust Data Management: Supports data storage based on agency retention policies and integrates with national data-sharing programs.  Advanced Image Analytics: Processes ALPR data for detailed vehicle information and facilitates advanced vehicle search and analysis. WATCHGUARD INTEGRATION The WatchGuard ICV integration enhances existing camera systems by enabling license plate recognition and real-time data transmission to CarDetector Mobile (CDM). This integration supports im mediate alerting, data synchronization, and scalable expansion of LPR capabilities. Key Features and Benefits:  On-Device LPR: M500 cameras use an on-device engine to provide immediate license plate recognition.  Real-Time Alerts: Data sent to CDM triggers hotlist alerts, ensuring quick response to critical information.  CDM Feature Access: Utilizes advanced CDM features like Mobile Hit Hunter for improved alert management.  Data Synchronization: Supports hotlist synchronization and detection sharing through the VehicleManager platform.  Scalability: Allows for easy addition of more LPR cameras, ensuring expandable coverage and enhanced situational awareness. PARKING TOOLKIT Our customizable Parking Toolkit offers a comprehensive solution for managing and enforcing parking regulations. It supports fixed camera installations in garages and mobile enforcement, providing features like permit verification, digital chalking, and real-time occupancy statistics tailored to specific locations and schedules. Key Features and Benefits:  Permit Enforcement: Helps ensure only authorized vehicles park in designated areas, increasing compliance.  Digital Chalking: Automates vehicle marking to monitor parking durations and enforce time-limited regulations.  Duplicate Permit Detection: Identifies and prevents fraudulent permit usage, ensuring fair parking practices.  Excessive Detection Monitoring: Tracks and reports excessive detections to address permit misuse.  Flexible Zone Setup: Allows the creation of geo-zones or manual zones for precise parking enforcement.  Customizable Permit Schedules: Enables tailored enforcement rules based on specific times and days.  Occupancy Statistics: Provides real-time data on parking occupancy for efficient space management.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 59   Page 73 of 522 LICENSE PLATE RECOGNITION TECHNOLOGY STATEMENT OF WORK OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of fixed or mobile License Plate Recognition (LPR) technology(s) and your License Plate Recognition Technology solution, if Deployment or Installation Services are purchased as part of the Contract. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. A third-party partner(s) (Motorola-certified installer) will work on Motorola’s behalf to install your License Plate Recognition Technology system(s) (if applicable). This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation of the hardware and software components listed in the Solutions Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must be mutually agreed upon b y both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. The Customer is responsible for acquisition and use of a remote access tool that complies with the regulations controlling use of the remote access tool. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATION, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 60   Page 74 of 522 FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola does not believe our LPR and License Plate Recognition Technology offerings require compliance with the FBI-CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI-CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL security controls as a guide. Motorola’s LPR system design and features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section 5.12 Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on Section 5.12, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is required to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted access. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information. Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJIS Section 5.12 Personnel Security screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personne l status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have ac cess to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third party installer will work independently with the Customer to complete the Section 5.12 Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. COMPLETION CRITERIA The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delays due to incomplete Customer tasks.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 61   Page 75 of 522 The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task completion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within t en (10) business days. In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system. SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the sub scription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access. The provision and use of the subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibiliti es (if applicable) The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW . Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to:  Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project.  Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable.  Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable.  Maintain project communications with the Customer.  Identify and manage project risks.  Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays.  Evaluate project status against Project Schedule.  Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status.  Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues related to project progress.  Conduct status calls with the Customer throughout the Project up to and including Go-Live. System Technologist The System Technologist (ST) will work with the Customer’s Project Team on:  Camera programing  Camera alignment      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 62   Page 76 of 522  Licensed Software Training  Develop and submit Start Up and Commissioning Sign Off (SSU&C) Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training in accordance with the Training Plan provided to the Customer. Motorola-Certified Installer The Motorola-certified installer is primarily responsible for installing in-car and fixed LPRs. There are specific requirements the 3rd party partner must meet in order to be considered a Motorola-certified installer, and they include (but are not limited to) the following: Required Training  SSU&C Onsite Training - Included Certification testing completed and passed  Networking (must meet one of the following three requi rements) - CompTia Network + Certification - Networking Degree in IT - Basic Networking RDS003  ASE Certification for Mobile Installers  Electrical Certification - Electrical Certification/Permitting  Low Voltage Certification  High Voltage Certification  Equipment Certification - Bucket Truck Certification - Any applicable testing equipment certification Other responsibilities the Motorola-certified installer may be involved in include the fixed and/or mobile installation of cellular routers, wired networks, poles, trenching, and conduit runs as well as the manufacturing and/or service of trailers. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of t he Customer. Customer Support and Services Team The Customer Support and Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities (if applicable) Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 63   Page 77 of 522 Project Manager The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to:  Communicate and coordinate with other project participants.  Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities.  Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM.  Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule.  Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM.  Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola.  Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities.  Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule.  Monitor project to ensure resources are available as required.  Attend status meetings.  Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress.  Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contr actors, and common carriers.  Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date.  Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date.  Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department.  Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certifica tes, as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner.  Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if require d for access.  Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources, if applicable to the solution.  Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, permits, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project.  Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service.  Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel.  Identify and manage project risks.  Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN, server and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to:  Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system.  Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 64   Page 78 of 522  Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems.  Monitor firmware updates  Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Agency Manager The Agency Manager will act as the primary POC upon project completion.  Push internal requests for updates through appropriate channels  Monitor all firmware updates and all other security measures for physical hardware as required by the Customer internal policies  Administer users  Audit reports  Manage Hotlist and Hotlist functionality  Attend Agency Manager training  Oversee or act as the training POC  Ensure all Authorized Users are aware of usage restrictions and any applicable terms related to the use of the LPR System  Controls appropriate use and data storage policies as well as procedures for the da ta maintained outside the LPR system. This includes when any information is disseminated, extracted or exported out of the LPR system  Controls and is responsible for developing the policies, procedures, and enforcement for applying deletion/purging and dissemination rules to information within and outside of the LPR system.  Ensure data and system protection strategies are accomplished through the tools provided by Motorola for account and user management features along with audit and alert threshold features. Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis, training and implementation process. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective field (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on workflows and department policies related to the proposed system. General Customer Responsibilities (If Applicable) In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following:  Customer Site. If the Solution is to be installed at a Customer location (“Site”), the Solution will only be installed and/or evaluated at the Customer sites identified.  Customer will be responsible for providing all necessary permits, licenses, and other approvals necessary for the installation and use of the Products and the performance of the Services at each applicable Site, including for Motorola to perform its obligations hereunder, and for facilitating Motorola’s access to the Sites. This includes, but is not limited to providing a traffic safety plan to facilitate the safe deployment of all Equipment that is installed on, over, or near Sites with active roadways. No waivers of liability will be imposed on Motorola or its subcontractors by Customer or others at Customer facilities or other Sites, but if and to the extent any such waivers are imposed, the Parties agree such waivers are void. The Equipment used for the Services will only be located at such site.  If the Solution is to be accessed remotely, Customer will only access Solution in the manner described by Solution documentation or as otherwise instructed by Motorola.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 65   Page 79 of 522  Site Conditions and Issues. Customer will ensure that (a) all Sites are safe and secure, (b) Site conditions meet all applicable industry and legal standards (including standards promulgated by OSHA or other governmental or regulatory bodies), (c) to the extent applicable, Sites have adequate phys ical space, air conditioning, and other environmental conditions, electrical power outlets, distribution, equipment, connections, and telephone or other communication lines (including modem access and interfacing networking capabilities), and (d) Sites are suitable for the installation, use, and maintenance of the Products and Services. This Agreement is predicated upon normal soil conditions as defined by the version of E.I.A. standard RS-222 in effect on the Effective Date.  All costs associated with permitting.  Supply a proper power source to all Motorola Solutions provided equipment.  Provide ALL points of attachment for hardware that include fixed LPR Cameras and associated equipment and ensuring all equipment is attached in accordance with local policies and codes.  Supply any new infrastructure required to mount or attach the Motorola Solutions hardware to.  Trenching as required for the purpose of running electrical power  All poles and existing infrastructure that are not being purchased from Motorola a s part of the LPR solution.  All Utility locates needed for impacted areas.  Providing the communications point of attachment for each site.  When cellular service is used as the point of connection, customer is responsible for providing cellular service and SIM cards if they are not being purchased from Motorola as part of the LPR solution.  All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, etc.  Configure, test, and maintain third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system.  Establish an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and provide documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system.  All work is to be performed by Motorola-certified installers. The Customer is responsible for work performed by non-certified installers.  Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system.  Mitigate the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action.  Electronic versions of any documentation associated with business processes identified.  Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer - provided remote conferencing tool.  Manage the Hotlist in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Customers State. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to Motorola installing the proposed system:  Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system.  Provide remote access for Motorola personnel to configure the system and conduct diagnostics.  Provide Internet access to fixed and mobile equipment.  Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. The workstations must support MS Windows 11 Enterprise.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 66   Page 80 of 522  Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s).  Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Active Directory for the purpose of installation, configuration, and support (if applicable).  Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall. Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements. PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. Project Planning Session (if applicable) A Project Planning Session will be scheduled after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet prior to the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include:  A high level review of the following project elements: - Contract documents. - A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. - Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. - A high level Project Schedule with milestones and dates.  Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors.  Confirm Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities  Schedule the remote Project Planning Session.  Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success.  Provide the initial Project Schedule.  Baseline the Project Schedule.  Review Motorola’s delivery approach.  Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda.  Request user information required to establish the Customer in associated training portals. Customer Responsibilities  Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success.  Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda.  Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 67   Page 81 of 522 Motorola Deliverables  Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. Project Kickoff (if applicable) Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation. Note – The Detail Design Review (DDR), if applicable, is completed during the pre-sales process and normally completed prior to Contract award. Delay in the DDR review may impact the project schedule. Motorola will not be responsible for additional costs or delays incurred for Customer requested changes to the DDR. Motorola Responsibilities  Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW.  Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist.  Discuss Mobile LPR equipment installation activities and responsibilities.  Discuss Fixed LPR installation activities and responsibilities.  Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW.  Review resource and scheduling requirements.  Review the DDR, arranging for additional meeting for review as needed  Review the Credentials Form  Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements (24-hour access to a secured two-way Internet connection through the Customer’s firewall for the purpose of deployment and maintenance).  Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities.  Discuss the Training Plan.  Review and agree on completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support . Customer Responsibilities  Provide feedback on project delivery requirements.  Review the Deployment Checklist.  Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority.  Grant Motorola Support access in the License Plate Recognition T echnology program  Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable).  Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. Motorola Deliverables  Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes  Deployment Checklist      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 68   Page 82 of 522 PROJECT EXECUTION Hardware Procurement and Installation (if applicable) Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The Customer is r esponsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to:  Power  Heating and Cooling  Network Connectivity  Access and Security  Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities  Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location.  Verify remote connection to hardware.  The installer will be responsible for installing all Motorola provided hardware.  Installer will utilize a certified electrician when wiring power to equipment.  Verify whether the hardware is properly installed, connected to the network, and positioned to capture license plate data. (if applicable).  Create a Trip Report outlining the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware. Customer Responsibilities (if applicable)  Provide Motorola with the correct IP address(es) for configuration  Ensure the Customer’s network is operational.  Inventory LPR equipment after arrival at Customer location.  Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location.  Install backend server in Customer's designated area (if applicable).  Confirm the server room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.)(if applicable).  Verify the server is connected to the Customer’s network and installed for use.(if applicab le)  Conduct a power-on test to validate the installed hardware and software are ready for configuration.  Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software for server(s) and/or workstation(s).  Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to License Plate Recognition Technology  Install Customer-supplied Access Points (if applicable).  Verify all equipment directly connected to power is properly installed and connected to the network (if applicable).  For remote deployments, the Customer is responsible for verifying all equipment is connected to their network  Confirm access to installed software on Customer-provided workstation(s). Motorola Deliverables  Contracted Equipment      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 69   Page 83 of 522 Mobile LPR Camera System (If Applicable) The Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the Mobile LPR system(s) within the Customer- provided vehicle(s) or selected location. The installer may also be responsible for installing cellular routers or Wi- Fi radios inside the vehicle(s) for wireless upload of video and images. The Customer vehicles must be available for the ST to complete the configuration and test ing of the contractual number of Mobile LPR cameras. If the Customer does not have all vehicles available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of Mobile configurations completed. If the Customer requires the ST to complete the full contractual number of Mobile LPR Cameras at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. Note – The Pricing Page will reflect the Mobile LPR installation services by Motorola if Motorola is responsible for the installations. Motorola Responsibilities  Setup server for Mobile LPR digital video recorder (DVR) configuration.  Create configuration USB used to complete Mobile LPR hardware configuration and validation.  Travel to the Customer site to conduct configuration and test ing of Mobile LPRs.  Complete Mobile LPR configuration on a single vehicle, and validate the configuration with the Customer.  Point and aim the Mobile LPR camera for image capturing.  Install Licensed Software on Customer-provided mobile data terminal (MDT)  Configure MDT Netowrk Card  Enable AI in Video Manager  Configure NetMotion (if applicable)  Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining Mobile LPR configurations.  Complete remaining contracted vehicle configurations.  Test a subset of completed Mobile LPR hardware configurations.  For Motorola-certified installer, complete the installation of cellular router and confirm placement of antenna mounting with Customer (if applicable).  The Motorola-certified installer will install Customer-provided SIM card into cellular router and connect cellular router to the Mobile LPR (if applicable). Customer Responsibilities  Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete Mobile LPR hardware configuration.  Notify Motorola of the vehicle installation location.  Coordinate and schedule date and time for Mobile LPR hardware configuration(s).  Make Mobile LPR hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule.  Provide cellular SIM Card for Internet connectivity to the installer at time of installation. Motorola Deliverables  Complete Configuration and camera aiming as it applies to the proposed solution.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 70   Page 84 of 522 Fixed LPR Camera System Configuration (If Applicable) The Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the Fixed LPR system(s) within the Customers designated locations. The installer may also be responsible for installing cellular routers or Wi-Fi radios for wireless upload of video and images. In the instance where Customer has purchased a self-deploy or quick- deploy camera without deployment or installation, the below Motorola responsibilities will be absorbed by the Customer. Motorola Responsibilities  Review preliminary plans for installation  Verify with customer that proper permits and authorizations have been obtained  Identify installation locations (pole or infrastructure asset) on which to install the Fixed LPR camera  Motorola-certified installer will install the Fixed LPR camera  Point and aim the Fixed LPR camera for image capturing  Install License Plate Recognition Technology Software Customer Responsibilities  Approve installation locations  Obtain necessary permits and authorizations  Provide power to installation locations  Provide any required trenching  Coordinate with local utility companies in the case of any interrupted service requests or instances NOTE - The Customer is responsible for having all vehicles and devices available for installation per the Project Schedule. All cellular data fees and Internet connectivit y charges are the responsibility of the Customer. When cellular service is used as the point of connection, customer is responsible for providing cellular service, and SIM cards if they are not being purchased from Motorola as part of the LPR solution. If a Motorola-certified installer is not used for installation, Motorola is not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. In the event the Customer takes on the responsibility of install ing LPR cameras through a Motorola-certified installer, Motorola is also not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. For in-car LPR installations, an MDT is required for all vehicles (if applicable). Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR) Commissioning (If Applicable) This section highlights the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer when a Motorola In-Car Video (ICV) system interfaces with the LPR database. Motorola Responsibilities  Create a Customer account in the LPR data system with authorized user emails.  Verify License Plate Recognition Technology software has been installed and launched per the Quickstart Guide.  Provide Mobile LPR - Officer Safety Basic and Advanced Pre-Installation Checklist.  Provide Agency Manager with Training Materials and Licensed Software MDT installation guide.  Advise Agency Manager of different options available to add new users.  Confirm Agency Manager is aware of registration required for Hotlists.  Confirm Agency Manager understands how to set up data-sharing.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 71   Page 85 of 522 Customer Responsibilities  Identify the Agency Manager.  Register to receive access to Hotlists. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION (IF APPLICABLE) Motorola will install LPR software on a specified number of work stations. The Customer will be responsible for installing the software on the remaining workstations. Licensed Software for the Mobile LPR Solution Licensed Software is used in conjunction with Mobile LPR cameras. Installation consists of the following activities:  Network discovery.  Operating system and software installation.  Onboarding user / system identity set up.  Provide user access to the application. License Plate Recognition Technology License Plate Recognition Technology software is a cloud solut ion that does not require an onsite server and supports the full LPR Solution. Motorola Responsibilities  Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: - Create users, groups, and permissions.  Test to ensure software is accessible to the Customer Customer Responsibilities  Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end user workstations. CloudConnect Installation and Configuration (applicable for CommandCentral Aware purchase) Motorola Responsibilities  Verify remote access capability.  Remotely configure CloudConnect Virtual Machine within the Cloud Anchor Server.  Configure network connectivity and test connection to the CloudConnect Virtual Machine.  Create an IPSEC tunnel.  Provide Customer with the information for setting up the IPSEC tunnel. Customer Responsibilities  Provide Motorola with two static IP addresses, corresponding subnet masks/default gateway, and available NTP and DNS IP for the CloudConnect Virtual Machine and the Cloud Anchor Server.  Confirm with Motorola the network performance requirements are met.  Configure firewall to allow traffic from IPSEC tunnel. Completion Criteria  CloudConnect Virtual Machine configuration is complete and accessible throughout the network.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 72   Page 86 of 522 CommandCentral Evidence (if applicable) Motorola will work with the Customer to determine best industry practices, current operations environment, and subsystem integration to ensure optimal configuration of your CommandCentral Evidence solution. Motorola Responsibilities  Use the CommandCentral Admin Portal to provision users, groups, and rules based on Customer Active Directory data.  Guide the Customer in the configuration of CommandCentral Evidence. Customer Responsibilities  Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Active Directory for the purpose of Motorola conducting CommandCentral Evidence provisioning.  Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups and agency mapping to CommandCentral Evidence.  Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions.  Configure evidence as directed by Motorola. Third-Party Interfaces (if applicable) The integration between Motorola’s LPR system and the Customer’s third-party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the complexity of accessing the third-party system. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third -party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third -party systems. Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data t o the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities  Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the LPR system.  Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts.  Provide network connectivity between the LPR and the third-party system(s).  Provide information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulti es with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or a non-functional interface. By providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will put us in the best position to mitigate these potential issues. If the resolution requires additional third-party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 73   Page 87 of 522 Customer-provided third-party hardware or software. All APIs provided by Motorola or integrations with third-party software are provided AS IS. Motorola is not liable for any claims or damages associated with third party applications, or Customer-provided third party hardware or software. SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer -based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote). Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training will be delivered in accordance with the Training Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format. Online Training (if applicable) Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP and/or Motorola vetted third party platforms. Motorola Responsibilities  Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer (if applicable).  Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer (if applicable).  Configure a Customer-specific portal view.  Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies.  Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account..  Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content (if applicable).  Provide instruction to Customer on building groups.  Coordinate third party platform usage and additional course offerings Customer Responsibilities  Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts.  Complete LXP Administrator training (if applicable).  Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to training platforms. Instructor-Led Training (On-Site and/or Remote, if applicable) Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Training Plan. Motorola Responsibilities  Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format.  Perform training in accordance with the provided Training Plan.  Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities  Supply classroom(s) with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training.  Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content.  Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Training Plan.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 74   Page 88 of 522 Motorola Deliverables  Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials.  Attendance rosters. PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the ST demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipment has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities  Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement process and contact information.  Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support.  Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete.  Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate.  Provide Customer survey upon closure of the project. Customer Responsibilities  Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure.  Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motorola’s Technical Support.  Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria  Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project.      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 75   Page 89 of 522 ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions (if applicable):  Customer is aware of and abiding by their States’ laws, mandates and requirements in relation to the Hotlist  Pole installations will be done on grassy/dirt/gravel areas or sites where excava tion can easily be done with fstandard auger equipment.  Site conditions meet all applicable industry and legal standards (including standards promulgated by OSHA or other governmental or regulatory bodies)  Information provided and approved in the Presales DDR process was accurate      QUOTE-3152576 V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70, SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 76   Page 90 of 522 APX N70 PORTABLE RADIO SOLUTION DESCRIPTION OVERIVIEW   The APX N70 offers affordable, next generation communications for without compromising P25 interoperability or voice and data quality. It offers a durable design with “pick-up-and- go” functionality, optimizing ease-of-use and focused communications in almost all environments. DURABLE AND EASY TO USE  The APX N70 enhances operations with a full color transflective glass display with touch technology for easy operation with gloves on. The touchscreen includes a high velocity user interface with large touch targets, shallow menu hierarchy, home screen information at a glance, and access to integrated apps. Additionally, the N70 offers extended battery life, a shorter antenna, and Bluetooth compatibility with audio accessories, promoting efficient communications between first responders. ESSENTIAL AND SECURE P25 COMMUNICATIONS  The APX N70 is certified compliant with P25 standards and supports digital and analog trunking, FDMA and TDMA, and Integrated Voice and Data. P25 communications over the N70 are safe and secure–it offers software and hardware encryption, single- and multi key encryption, and P25 Authentication, protecting communications during daily operations.     Reliable Connectivity  Using the APX N70 lets first responders stay connected across disparate networks. It can be equipped with LTE, Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth®, and GPS features, bringing future-ready applications, services, and best-in-class connectivity to everyday users. APX N70 radios support 7/800 MHz frequency bands across radio systems with minimal intervention by the radio user.   Managing and Provisioning Devices   APN N70 provides users greater awareness and faster radio management through Customer Programming Software (“CPS”), Radio Management (“RM”), or the Radio Central programming. These tools transform accurate data into smarter action by enabling dispatchers and network managers to keep radios in the field, make informed operational decisions, and, above all, protect first responders' focus and safety.  Customer Programming Service   CPS is a proprietary, Windows-based application used to configure APX subscriber radios in offline situations. The CPS application offers drag-and-drop, clone-wizard, and basic import/export functions that allow for the addition of new      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 77  Page 91 of 522 software and feature enhancements. APX N radios can be programmed one-at-a-time on a local PC, via secure USB port connection, with TLS-PSK based encryption. Once loaded, subscriber radios are read, and edited, and copdeplugs and templates can be saved and duplicated to program other fleet radios.  Radio Management   Batch Programming is available through the RM software for simultaneous programming and upgrading throughout the radio fleet. With Batch Programming, up to 16 radios can be programmed at once over a Wi-Fi connection. This reduces programming time and ensures that the radio fleet is always up-to-date and ready-to-use in the field.   Device Management Services  Device Management Services (“DMS”) packages provide programming, management, and maintenance services to maximize the effectiveness of this APX N70 solution, while reducing maintenance risk, workload, and total cost of ownership. DMS tackles a range of customer needs, whether the solution is self-maintained or managed by Motorola Solutions.  Using Motorola Solutions’ cloud-based Radio Central Programming, APX N70 supports faster provisioning and deployment to get devices in the hands of first responders and out into the field. Parameters such as talk groups, interface options, and security keys can be programmed remotely within minutes. The DMS package provides access to batch programming with Radio Central Programming or one-at-a-time basic programming with Customer Programming Service, described below.  Radio Central  Radio Central Programming streamlines the APX N70 out-of-the-box experience with a few simple steps. Users will power on the device and view a boot-up animation. Status bar icons on the front display indicate when a connection is made and an update download is initiated. If the APN N70 device is being started for the first time, a “peek-in” device management notification will indicate that the default configuration is detected. When the update download is complete, the device reboots and installs the update. When the install is complete, the device goes back to the full home screen and notifies the user that the update is complete. From power on to provisioning, the process takes less than a minute. For Encryption and Authentication users, a KVL needs to be connected to the radio to use those services.  APX N70 also features Touchless Key Provisioning (“TKP”), leveraging Radio Central and Key Management Facility to add encryption keys remotely. This streamlined, one-time process reduces the time and effort spent enabling encryption. TKP delivers the initial encryption keys to APN N70 radios. Users can provision encryption on one radio or on batches of radios, further speeding up the encryption process for radio fleets.  The figure below illustrates APX N70’s faster provisioning process.      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 78  Page 92 of 522      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 79  Page 93 of 522 APX N-SERIES DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICES - ESSENTIAL STATEMENT OF WORK   OVERVIEW  Device Management Servces (“DMS”) efficiently maintains the Customer’s device fleet while helping to keep devices up-to-date and fully operational in the field.  DMS Essential services provide basic hardware and software support.  This Statement of Work (“SOW”), including all of its subsections and attachments is an integral part of the applicable agreement (“Agreement”) between Motorola Solutions, Inc. (“Motorola Solutions”) and Customer (“Customer”).   In the event of a conflict between the terms and conditions of the Agreement and the terms and conditions of this SOW, this SOW will control as to the inconsistency only. The SOW applies to the device specifically named in the Agreement.  HARDWAREREPAIR   Hardware Repair provides repair coverage for internal and external device components that do not work in accordance with published specifications. Repair services are performed at a Motorola Solutions-operated or supervised facility. The device will be repaired to bring it to compliance with its specifications, as published by Motorola Solutions at the time of delivery of the original device.  For malfunctioning devices that must be replaced, Motorola Solutions will attempt to read the codeplugs from those devices. If successful, Motorola Solutions will load the codeplug to any replacement devices. If not, Motorola Solutions will load a factory codeplug, and the Customer will need to load the previous codeplug.  Motorola Solutions will load factory available firmware to any replacement devices, which may not match the Customer’s firmware version.   MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS RESPONSIBILITIES  •Repair or replace malfunctioning device, as determined by Motorola Solutions. •Complete repair or replacement with a turnaround time of five business days in-house, provided the device is delivered to the repair center by 9:00 a.m. (local repair center time). Turnaround time represents thetime a product spends in the repair process, and does not include time in transit to and from the Customer’s site. Business days do not include US holidays or weekends. •If applicable, apply periodically-released device updates, in accordance with an Engineering Change Notice. •Provide two-way air shipping when a supported Motorola Solutions electronic system, such as MyView Portal, is used to initiate a repair. A shipping label will be generated via the electronic system.  CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES  •For non-contiguous renewals, Customer must provide a complete list, preferably in electronic format, of all hardware serial numbers to be covered under the Agreement to Motorola Solutions. •Initiate device repairs, as needed. •When initiating a repair via a supported Motorola Solutions electronic system, label each package correctly with the shipping label and Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number generated by the electronic system. •When initiating a repair via paper Return Material Form (“RMF”), the RMF must be completed for each device, included in the package with the device, and shipped to the Motorola Solutions depot specified on the RMF.      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 80  Page 94 of 522 •Remove any data or other information from the device that the Customer wishes to destroy or retain prior to sending the device for repair. •If a malfunctioning device must be replaced and the Customer has loaded information for that device to Motorola Solutions’ cloud environment, the Customer will need to remove the information for the malfunctioning device and add information for the replacement device to the applicable cloud environment.  LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS  The Customer will incur additional charges at the prevailing rates for any activities that are not included or are specifically excluded from this service scope, as described below. Motorola Solutions will notify the Customer and provide a quotation of any incremental charges related to such exclusions prior to completing the repair and said repair will be subject to Customer’s acceptance of the quotation. •Replacement of consumable parts or accessories, as defined by product, including but not limited to batteries, cables, and carrying cases. •Repair of problems caused by: •Natural or manmade disasters, including but not limited to internal or external damage resulting from fire, theft, and floods. •Third-party software, accessories, or peripherals not approved in writing by Motorola Solutions for use with the device. •Using the device outside of the product’s operational and environmental specifications, including improper handling, carelessness, or reckless use. •Unauthorized alterations or attempted repair, or repair by a third party. •Non-remedial work, including but not limited to administration and operator procedures, reprogramming, and operator or user training. •Problem determination and/or work performed to repair or resolve issues with non-covered products. For example, any hardware or software products not specifically listed on the service order form are excluded from service. •File backup or restoration. •Completion and test of incomplete application programming or system integration if not performed by Motorola Solutions and specifically listed as covered. •Accidental damage, chemical or liquid damage, or other damage caused outside of normal device operating specifications, except if optional Accidental Damage Coverage was purchased. •Cosmetic imperfections that do not affect the functionality of the device. •Software support for unauthorized modifications or other misuse of the device software is not covered.  Motorola Solutions is not obligated to provide support for any device that has been subject to the following: •Repaired, tampered with, altered or modified (including the unauthorized installation of any software) — except by Motorola Solutions authorized service personnel. •Subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress, abuse, or forces or exposure beyond normal use within the specified operational and environmental parameters set forth in the applicable product specification. •If the Customer fails to comply with the obligations contained in the Agreement, the applicable software license agreement, and Motorola Solutions terms and conditions of service. DEVICETECHNICALSUPPORT   Motorola Solutions’ Device Technical Support service provides telephone consultation for device and accessory issues. Support is delivered through the Motorola Solutions Centralized Managed Support Operations (“CMSO”) organization by a staff of technical support specialists.  For Device Technical Support, Motorola Solutions will respond to calls within two (2) hours during the support days. Support hours are 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. CST Monday through Friday, excluding US holidays. In addition, Customers may      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 81  Page 95 of 522 contact the Call Management Center (800-MSI-HELP) at any time (24 hours a day, seven days a week) and a Motorola Solutions representative will log a technical request in Motorola Solutions Case Management System on the Customer’s behalf.   MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS RESPONSIBILITIES  •Provide technical support for devices, assessing and troubleshooting reported issues. •Receive and log Customer support requests, and assign a technical representative to respond to a Customer incident per the defined timeframes.   CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES  •Use the provided methods to contact Motorola Solutions technical support. •Provide sufficient information to allow Motorola Solutions technical support agents to diagnose and resolve Customer issues. •Provide contact information for field service technicians in the event that Motorola Solutions has to follow up.  LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS  •Device support does not include Land Mobile Radio (“LMR”) network, Wi-Fi, and LTE network troubleshooting.  Software Maintenance    Motorola Solutions is continually developing new features and functionality for our portfolio of public-safety-grade radios. By purchasing software maintenance, the Customer can take advantage of these firmware releases and future-proof their communications investment.   MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS RESPONSIBILITIES  •Test all firmware releases to minimize software defects. •Announce new firmware releases and post release notes in a timely manner via MyView Portal. •Provide firmware updates. Motorola Solutions makes no guarantees as to the frequency or timing of firmware updates. •Provide upgrade capability through supported Programming Tools. •Provide programming and service tools and technical support through the firmware support window. •Provide documentation via MyView Portal with each release detailing new features, bug fixes, and any known issues.   CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES   •Periodically check MyView Portal for firmware update announcements. •Keep the radio fleet updated with firmware versions within the support window.  MyView Portal Access   MyView Portal is the single location to track the status of subscriptions and service contracts, including start and end dates. This portal includes order, RMA, and technical support ticket status, as well as a consolidated download site for software and documentation.  Outside of pre-announced maintenance periods, MyView Portal will be available on a best effort 24/7 basis. Motorola Solutions cannot guarantee the availability of Internet networks outside of our control.       QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 82  Page 96 of 522 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS RESPONSIBILITIES  •Provide a web accessible, secure portal to view the Customer’s data. •Provide the Customer with login credentials for the site. •Provide end-user training for the site. •Provide technical support to answer end user questions between the hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. CST Monday through Friday, excluding US holidays. •Keep the site updated with the latest Customer information.  CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES  •Provide Motorola Solutions with contact information for administrative users. •Administer user access. •Provide Internet access for users to access the site. •Attend available MyView Portal training. •Protect login information against unauthorized use. •Provide Motorola Solutions with updated equipment information, as needed.      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 83  Page 97 of 522 Essential Service for SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone Device   This Statement of Work (SOW) is subject to the terms and conditions of the Motorola Solutions Customer Agreement or other applicable agreement in effect between the parties (Agreement). The terms of this SOW are an integral part of an Agreement with the Customer to which this SOW is appended and is made a part thereof by this reference. In the event of a conflict between the terms and conditions of an Agreement and the terms and conditions of this SOW, this SOW will control the inconsistency only. This SOW applies to the Device(s) specifically named in the Agreement.  Description of Services and Obligations The term “Customer” refers to any end-user who has a purchase agreement with Motorola Solutions.Essential Service provides either three (3) or five (5) years of coverage, as selected and purchased by the Customer, and includes:  •Remote Technical Support  •Software Maintenance •Hardware Repair for manufacturing defects  Every SVX device is covered by one (1) year of standard product warranty. Motorola Solutions offers three (3) and five (5) years of Essential Service options for SVX devices, with optional service upgrades to extend and/or provide additional coverage for the device described in Section 7 of this SOW.   Essential Service  Remote Technical Support  Remote Technical Support is provided for device issues related to software and/or hardware that require troubleshooting expertise. Motorola Solutions’ System Support Center (SSC) and Technical Support Operations (TSO) center are staffed with highly trained technologists who specialize in the diagnosis and resolution of product issues. Motorola Solutions’ SSC and TSO are continuously monitored against industry recognized incident and problem management processes.  Motorola Solutions will respond to calls, e-mails, and web portal submissions during normal support hours, five (5) business days per week, excluding holidays, and weekends. In addition, Customers may contact the Motorola Service Desk and a Motorola Solutions representative will log a technical request on Motorola Solutions’ Case Management System.  Technical Problem Isolation, Analysis and Resolution  A Motorola Solutions representative or technologists will:  •Work to isolate the problem/issue  •Analyze and determine the cause of the problem/issue •Work to achieve problem/issue resolution   Software Maintenance Software maintenance is important for ensuring device performance and operation. Essential Service provides the Customer with access to the latest available SVX device operating system (OS) software, device firmware, and application software. Device software releases maintain the device software performance such that the Device operates in accordance with its specifications and documented functionality, and is aligned with the applicable Motorola Solutions infrastructure platform lifecycle. Each release may include bug fixes, security patches, and/or new feature activation enablements.  Configuration of the SVX device is made possible through the use of the CommandCentral DEMS or  VideoManager EL solution.  Access to software updates will remain available until the expiration of the initial term of the Essential Service Package. Upon expiration of the initial Essential Service term, availability of software updates will      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 84  Page 98 of 522 terminate, unless the Customer renews Essential Service. Only Customers with three (3) year service term durations are eligible for a two (2) year renewal for a total of (5) years of services.  Device Hardware Repair Essential Service provides the Customer with repair services at a Motorola Solutions owned and operated, supervised, or certified Repair Center that employs the latest test equipment and original or certified replacement components used in the manufacturing of the SVX device. Device Hardware Repair provides the Customer with repair services for internal and external device components that are damaged as a result of manufacturing defects and operational defects due to normal wear and tear. With this Service, the device is repaired to ensure compliance with its specifications, as published by Motorola Solutions at the time of delivery of the original device via:  •Repairs, adjustments and restorations, if appropriate, of any device that malfunctions while being used within the operational and environmental parameters specified by Motorola Solutions. •Device updates, if applicable, as may be released, from time to time, by Motorola Solutions in accordance with an Engineering Change Notice.  At the discretion of Motorola Solutions, if the device is considered “un-repairable”, for technical or economic reasons, Motorola will replace the device with a new or refurbished device.   Standard Product Warranty  The Customer is automatically entitled to one (1) year of technical support and one (1) year of hardware repair against manufacturing defects, as covered by the standard product warranty. Exclusions apply, per the Agreement.   Scope of Products or Services Included Essential Service, and optional Service upgrades, are currently available for all SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone devices. Check with your Motorola Solutions’ Sales representative if you have a question about the eligibility of your device.  Motorola Solutions Responsibilities  Software Release Availability Motorola Solutions will provide access to the latest SVX device software and firmware releases via the CommandCentral DEMS VideoManager EL On-Premises, or VideoManager EL Cloud, solution. For customers using the CommandCentral DEMS or VideoManager EL Cloud, software and firmware upgrades will occur automatically when the Video Remote Speaker MicrophoneBody Worn Camera device connects to the agency’s CommandCentral DEMS or VideoManager EL Cloud instance.  Software Release Notes Motorola Solutions may, from time to time, provide release notes for the SVX Device software release. Information regarding training material will be posted on the Learning Experience Portal (LXP) at https:// learning.motorolasolutions.com  Hardware Repair Motorola Solutions will provide repair or replacement of a device, at its option, with a five (5) business day in-house turnaround time, provided the device is delivered to the repair center by 9:00 a.m. (local repair center time), and replacement parts, components, and/or devices are available. Business days do not include holidays or weekends. Repair may include the replacement of parts, or boards with new parts or complete boards or, at Motorola Solutions’ option, with functionally equivalent, reconditioned parts, boards, or with a new or refurbished replacement device. All replaced parts, boards or devices will become the property of Motorola Solutions. Turnaround time represents the time a product spends in the repair process; it does not include time in transit, including customs clearance.       QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 85  Page 99 of 522   Shipping For devices repaired under Essential Service, Motorola Solutions will provide one-way shipping, from an Authorized Motorola Repair Center to the Customer. The Customer is responsible for the shipping method and any shipping costs incurred when returning the faulty device to an Authorized Motorola Solutions repair center. Based on the country of purchase, Motorola Solutions may also cover, or include, two-way shipping for the damaged or defective device. Eligibility for two-way shipping will be confirmed during the repair submission process.  Customer Responsibilities  Serial Numbers If device orders are submitted via Motorola Solutions’ Customer Hub, OCC, or CPQ ordering systems, the hardware serial number(s) for three (3) year Essential Service and Essential Software, as well as five (5) year Essential Service, and three (3) and five (5) year Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement, will be automatically captured and included in the Service Agreement.  If five (5) year Essential Service or three (3) and five (5) year Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement is purchased within 90 days of device shipment, the Customer must provide a complete list, preferably in electronic format, or by completing a Service Order Form (SOF), of all hardware serial numbers to be covered under the Agreement.   Initiating Repair When initiating a repair, the Customer must contact Motorola Solutions to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number for each faulty SVX device. The Customer can submit a repair, and request an RMA, via the Customer Hub Portal, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions’ Service Desk. If two-way shipping is included, the customer can generate a shipping label via Customer Hub, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions Service Desk. The Return Material Authorization (RMA) must be included with the device when shipped to the Authorized Motorola Repair Center. •Only the SVX device should be returned for repair. The battery must be removed before shipping the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center. •Device accessories should not be included when returning a device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories, or device batteries, that are shipped with the device for repair.   Device Software Releases The Customer will be responsible for updating each eligible SVX device with the latest available software and/or firmware, and of advising users of any operational changes that may have been introduced as a result of the new software or firmware.   WiFi Connectivity The Customer is responsible for providing all WiFi connectivity to the device.   Removing Customer Data The Customer is responsible for removing, from the device, any data, video, or other information that the Customer wishes to retain or destroy, prior to sending the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair.  Motorola Solutions may provide a Video Evidence Recovery Service for the SVX device, as an additional charge. Video Evidence Recovery is a best effort service that is dependent on the condition of the device. This service, if applicable, will have a separated Agreement, with Terms and Conditions, outside the      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 86  Page 100 of 522 scope of this Statement of Work (SOW). Please contact your Motorola Solutions Representative for more information regarding the Video Evidence Recovery Service.  Essential Service Limitations and Restrictions  •Customer will incur additional charges at the prevailing rates for any of the following activities, which are not covered under this Agreement: •Replacement of consumable parts or accessories, as defined by product, including but not limited to batteries, cables, mounts, or clips. •Repair of problems caused by natural or manmade disasters, including but not limited to fire, theft and floods that would cause internal or external component damage or destruction. •Repair of problems caused by third parties’ Software, accessories or peripherals not approved in writing by Motorola Solutions for use with the device. •Repair of problems caused by using the device outside of the product’s operational and environmental specifications, including improper handling, carelessness or reckless use, or repaired by a third party. •Repair of problems caused by unauthorized alterations or attempted repair. •Non-remedial work, including but not limited to administration and operator procedures, reprogramming, and operator or user training. •Problem determination and/or work performed to repair or resolve issues with non-covered products; for example, any hardware or software products not specifically listed on the service order form. •Any file or video backup or restoration. •Completion and test of incomplete application programming or system integration if not performed by Motorola Solutions and specifically listed as covered. •Use of Software or Firmware releases, except as provided for under the responsibilities outlined in this document. •Accidental damage, chemical or liquid damage, or other damage caused outside of normal device operating specifications, unless the Customer has purchased the optional Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement package. •Cosmetic imperfections that do not affect the functionality of the device. •Where a Video Remote Speaker Microphone device is submitted for repair that is outside the scope of Service, such repair may be quoted by Motorola Solutions for additional cost in accordance with Motorola Solutions’ standard Time and Materials (T&M) rates and terms and conditions.  Motorola Solutions will notify the Customer of any incremental charges related to the aforementioned exclusions prior to completing the repair and said repair will be subject to acceptance of the quotation by the Customer. •Software support for unauthorized modifications, or other misuse of the device software, is not covered under this Agreement. •Access to the software and firmware releases for updating the device under this SOW is available only for the device named in the Agreement. Software updates to any additional devices are expressly excluded and prohibited. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Motorola Solutions may, at its sole discretion, include coverage for other devices.  •Any implementation tools not required to support the device software and firmware updates are excluded from coverage.   Motorola Solutions is not obligated to provide support for any Device: •That has been repaired, tampered with, altered or modified (including the unauthorized installation of any software) — except by Motorola Solutions authorized service personnel. •That has been subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress, abuse, or forces or exposure beyond normal use within the specified operational and environmental parameters set forth in the applicable product specification. •If Customer fails to comply with the obligations contained in the product purchase agreement and/or the applicable software license agreement and/or Motorola Solutions terms and conditions of service.      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 87  Page 101 of 522   Optional Add-Ons: Essential Service with Accidental Damage Repair and Advanced Replacement   Description of Services and Obligations Accidental Damage coverage is an optional, prepaid service that adds coverage for accidentally damaged SVX devices. Accidental Damage coverage must be purchased together with, or within 90 days of, a qualifying Motorola Solutions device purchase. This three (3) or five (5) year service offer (as selected by the Customer) reduces unexpected expenses related to the repair of the device. Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement coverage includes all services provided under Essential Service, plus additional coverage for Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement of the damaged device. Examples of repairs covered under Accidental Damage include:  •Electrical repair for failures caused by accidental water or chemical damage •Electrical repair for accidental internal damage •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken housings. •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken camera lens or displays. •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken or missing buttons, knobs, or keypads   Repair or Replacement Motorola Solutions will provide repair or replacement of a SVX device, at its option, with a five (5) business day in-house turnaround time, excluding weekends and holidays, provided the device is delivered to the repair center by 9:00 a.m. (local repair center time), and replacement parts, components, and/or devices are available. Repair may include the replacement of parts, or boards with new parts or complete boards or, at Motorola Solutions option, with functionally equivalent, reconditioned parts, boards, or with a new replacement or refurbished device. All replaced parts, boards or devices will become the property of Motorola Solutions. Turnaround time represents the time a product spends in the repair process; it does not include time in transit, including customs clearance.   Serial Numbers If the Accidental Damage Service is purchased with the device, in the same order, using Motorola Solutions’ Customer Hub Portal, OCc, or CPQ when ordering, the hardware serial number(s) are automatically captured and included in the Service Agreement. If Accidental Damage Service is purchased within 90 days of device shipment, the Customer must provide a complete list, preferably in electronic format, or by completing a Service Order Form (SOF), of all hardware serial numbers to be covered under the Agreement.   Initiating Repair When initiating a repair, the Customer must contact Motorola Solutions to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number for each faulty SVX device. The Customer can submit a repair, and request an RMA, via the Customer Hub Portal, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions’ Service Desk. If two-way shipping is included, the customer can generate a shipping label via Customer Hub, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions Service Desk. The Return Material Authorization (RMA) must be included with the device when shipped to the Authorized Motorola Repair Center. •Only the SVX device should be returned for repair. The battery must be removed before shipping the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center. •Device accessories should not be included when returning a device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories, or device batteries, that are shipped with the device for repair.   Advanced Replacement      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 88  Page 102 of 522 Under Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement Service, Motorola Solutions will provide Advanced Replacement for the damaged device. Motorola Solutions will ship a new or refurbished replacement device to the Customer within two (2) business days of receiving the Customer repair request, subject to availability of replacement devices. Business days do not include weekends or holidays.  The Customer must return the defective or damaged device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center within 60 days after receiving the replacement device. Failure to return the damaged device to Motorola Solutions will result in an additional Customer charge for the replacement device.  When returning a device for Advanced Replacement, device accessories should not be included. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories that are shipped with the device.  Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement Limitations and Restrictions  •Customer will incur additional charges at the prevailing rates for any of the following activities, which are not covered under this Agreement: •Replacement of consumable parts or accessories, as defined by product, including but not limited to batteries, chargers, charging stations, mounts, and clips.  •Repair of problems caused by natural or manmade disasters, including but not limited to fire, theft and floods that would cause internal or external component damage or destruction. •Repair of problems caused by third parties’ Software, accessories or peripherals not approved in writing by Motorola Solutions for use with the device. •Repair of problems caused by using the device outside of the product’s operational and environmental specifications, including improper handling, carelessness or reckless use, or repair by a third party. •Repair of problems caused by unauthorized alterations or attempted repair. •Non-remedial work, including but not limited to administration and operator procedures, reprogramming, and operator or user training. •Problem determination and/or work performed to repair or resolve issues with non-covered products; for example, any hardware or software products not specifically listed on the service order form. •Any file or video backup or restoration. •Completion and test of incomplete application programming or system integration if not performed by Motorola Solutions and specifically listed as covered. •Use of Software or Firmware releases except as provided for under the responsibilities outlined in this document. •There is a maximum limit of one (1) SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone device repair, per contract year, for Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement. •Where ongoing “Accidental Damage” repair is deemed by Motorola Solutions to be excessive, systemic, or the result of device mishandling, the Customer may be subject to an additional charge. Should the accidental damage continue unabated, the Customer will incur repair charges at Motorola Solutions’ discretion and prevailing charges for devices deemed by Motorola Solutions to have been damaged through improper handling, carelessness or reckless use.      QUOTE-3152576V700, M500 VaaS & APX N70,SVX     Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 89  Page 103 of 522 Purchase Order Checklist NA OM Marked as PO/Contract/Notice to Proceed on Company Letterhead (PO will not be processed without this) PO Number/Contract Number PO Date Vendor =Motorola Solutions,Inc. Payment (Billing)Terms/State Contract Number Bill-To Name on PO must be equal to the Legal Bill-To Name Bill-To Address Ship-To Address (If we are shipping to a MR location,it must be documented on PO) Ultimate Address (If the Ship-To address is the MR location then the Ultimate Destination address must be documented on PO ) PO Amount must be equal to or greater than Order Total Non-Editable Format (Word/Excel templates cannot be accepted) Tax Exemption Status Signatures (As required) NOTE:When an email order is submitted a confirmation is sent from Motorola AutoNotify referencing a case number. Once checklist is complete,order still must go through Order Validation/Credit Approval      Page 104 of 522 1 V700 BODY-WORN CAMERA SOLUTION DESCRIPTION The V700 body-worn camera captures clear video and audio of every encounter from the user ’s perspective.Its continuous-operation capabilities allow constant recording, helping the user to capture every detail of each situation and create a reliable library of evidence for case-building and review.The V700 can stream live video and report real time GPS location through a built-in LTE modem,directly to the suite of CommandCentral applications. The V700 is easy to operate,with four control buttons.Its innate Record-After-the-Fact®(RATF)technology enables the device to capture important video evidence that can be retrieved hours or days after an incident occurs,even if a recording is not triggered by the user or sensor.With RATF,officers can prioritize response to immediate threats versus manually activating their camera. 1.1.KEY FEATURES OF THE V700 ●Detachable Battery –The V700’s detachable battery allows officers to switch to a fully-charged battery if their shift goes longer than expected.Since the battery charges without being attached to the V700,the battery is kept fully charged in the dock ready for use.This feature is especially helpful for agencies that share body-worn cameras with multiple officers. ●Wireless Uploading –Recordings made by the V700 are uploaded to the agency’s evidence management system via LTE.Upload over WiFi will be available soon.This enables easy transfer of critical recordings to headquarters for immediate review or long-term storage. ●Real-time Location and Video Streaming –With built-in LTE connectivity,the V700 paired with CommandCentral Aware will send location updates and stream live video to a dispatch center or Real Time Crime Center (RTCC)giving the agency a complete and accurate view of their officers for better coordination and quicker response times. ●LTE Service Ready –The V700 is approved for use on Verizon and FirstNet networks in the U.S.and Bell Mobility in Canada.The V700 will ship with a pre-installed SIM from both carriers,ready for service activation upon arrival with a data plan that best suits the agency’s needs.LTE service activation would be on the agency’s carrier account.Motorola Solutions does not provide LTE service for the V700 camera. ●Data Encryption –The V700 uses FIPS-140-2 compliant encryption at-rest and in-transit.This ensures recordings made by the agency’s officers are secure from unauthorized access. ●Record-After-The-Fact®–Our patented Record-After-the-Fact®technology captures footage even when the recording function is not engaged.The camera user or admin can request video footage from a specific point in the past to be uploaded to the evidence management system,hours or even days after the event occurred. ●Natural Field of View –The V700 eliminates the fisheye effect from wide-angle lenses that warps video footage.Distortion correction ensures a clear and complete evidence review process.The V700’s high quality, low light sensor captures an accurate depiction of recorded events,even in challenging lighting conditions. ●SmartControl Application –To maximize efficiency in the field,the Motorola Solutions SmartControl app enables V700 users to preview video recordings,add or edit tags,change camera settings and view live video from the camera.The app is available for both iOS and Android phones. ●In-Field Tagging –The V700 enables easy in-field event tagging.It allows officers to view event tags and save them to the appropriate category directly from the body-worn camera or via the SmartControl app. Page 1    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 105 of 522 ●Auto Activation –The V700 body-worn camera(s)paired with an M500 or 4RE in-car video system(s) can form a recording group,which automatically starts recording when one of the devices begins to record.Each device can be configured to initiate a group recording using triggers like lights,sirens, doors,gun racks,and other auxiliary inputs.Up to eight V700s can form a recording group and collaborate on recordings,without a corresponding in-car video system,using similar triggers.Group recordings are uploaded and automatically linked to the evidence management system as part of one event. 1.2.V700 AND IN-CAR VIDEO INTEGRATION The V700 integrates seamlessly with the M500 or 4RE in-car video systems,capturing video of an incident from multiple vantage points.This integration includes the following features: ●Distributed Multi-Peer Recording –Multiple V700 body-worn cameras and in-car video systems can form a recording group and based on the configuration,automatically start recording when one of the devices begins to record.Group recordings are uploaded and automatically linked to the evidence management system as part of one incident. ●Automatic Tag Pairing –Recordings captured by integrated V700 body-worn cameras and in-car video systems can be uploaded to the evidence management system with the same tags.From the in-car video system’s display,videos can be saved under the appropriate tag category.The tag is then automatically shared with the V700 video and uploaded as part of one incident along with the officer ’s name. ●Evidence Management Software –When V700 body-worn cameras and in-car video systems record the same incident,the Motorola Solutions evidence management software automatically links those recordings based on officer name,date,and time overlap. ●Additional Audio Source –The V700 can serve as an additional audio source when integrated with the in-car video system.The V700 also provides an additional view of the incident and inherits the event properties of the in-car video system’s record,such as officer name,event category,and more,based on configuration. 1.3.V700 AND APX RADIO INTEGRATION Motorola Solutions’APX two-way radios can pair with V700 body-worn cameras to automate video capture through Bluetooth.When the APX’s emergency mode button is pressed,or the ManDown feature is activated,the V700 is triggered to start recording immediately.The recording will continue until manually stopped by the officer via the start/stop button on the V700 or group in-car video system. 1.4.HOLSTER AWARETM INTEGRATION The V700 integrates with a Holster AwareTM sensor through Bluetooth.If configured,the sensor automatically prompts the V700 to record the moment the holstered equipment is drawn.The holster sensor information is stored with the V700 user profile and uploaded to the evidence management system.If the user is assigned to a different camera,the hoster sensor information will be applied to the new camera.The holster sensor allows officers to record high-stress events as they unfold,without having to sacrifice situational awareness by manually activating the V700. Page 2    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 106 of 522 1.5.DOCKING STATIONS The V700 has three docking options: Transfer Station –The Transfer Station is built for large,multi-location agencies with large numbers of V700 cameras in service at any given time.It can charge up to eight fully assembled body-worn cameras or individual batteries.The eight docking slots include an LED indication of a battery charging and upload status. While the V700 charges,the Transfer Station can automatically offload recordings from the camera to the evidence management system via an integrated 2.5Gb switch.The Transfer Station connects directly to the LAN for fast offload of recorded events to storage,while charging the body-worn camera battery.The Transfer Station supports comprehensive device management capabilities,such as camera configuration,checkout and officer assignment options;rapid checkout,kiosk,and individual camera checkout;automatic firmware and configuration updates. USB Base –The USB Base charges the battery of a single V700 or standalone battery pack.The USB Base can be mounted in a vehicle or attached to a desktop or Mobile Data Computer with 12V or USB connection for power.The USB Base has LED indications for battery charging status and upload,and an ambient light sensor for optimal LED brightness control from bright sunlight to the dim interior of a patrol car.When connected to a laptop or desktop computer,the USB Base can be used to upload recordings to the evidence management system,as well as,receive firmware and configuration updates. Wi-Fi Base –The Wi-Fi Base is mounted in a vehicle.It facilitates V700 upload of video evidence to the evidence management system,firmware updates, communication between V700 and in-car video system group devices and charges fully assembled V700s or individual battery packs.It has LED indications of battery charging status and upload,and an ambient light sensor for optimal LED brightness control,from bright sunlight to the dim interior of a patrol car. Page 3    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 107 of 522 1.6.MOUNTING SOLUTIONS V700 is compatible with the entire line of V300 mounting solutions as depicted below. Page 4    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 108 of 522 SVX VIDEO REMOTE SPEAKER MICROPHONE SOLUTION DESCRIPTION The SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphones leverages the capabilities of APX NEXT and N70 radios - from clarity of audio, to mission-critical ergonomics and virtual partner ViQi - and adds the ability to capture powerful evidential footage. By converging our industry-leading voice and trusted video technology, we’ve transformed what it means to be on the front line. Now, law enforcement agencies can get the best of both worlds, without sacrificing ergonomics or usability. The SVX can help every member of an agency, regardless of their role. Officers experience fewer distractions in the field, and are secure in the knowledge that they’ll both hear, and be heard - whether they’re in the middle of an evolving incident or reviewing a suspect’s confession back at the station. Evidence technicians can build a stronger case more easily, with evidential audio and radio communications captured on one device in a single video; and, because these videos are categorized automatically, technicians can also find the relevant information quickly. IT technicians now have half the number of devices, docks and accessories they need to secure and maintain, while senio r officers know that they’re augmenting the power of their APX radio investment and improving the safety of their officers. COMMUNICATION AND ERGONOMICS • Secure and reliable wireless connectivity – out of the box, the SVX operates as a Wireless Remote Speaker Microphone, freeing officers from the constraints of cords and cables via a secure, reliable Bluetooth connection to their APX NEXT or N70 radio. It enables officers to move effortlessly while still staying focused on the task at hand. • Intuitive design – The large, recessed push-to-talk and emergency buttons are easy to use and designed to prevent accidental activation. Officers can also query the device status via voice commands, to reduce interaction with the device during high-stress situations. • Clear audio – The SVX can be positioned anywhere on the front of an officer’s uniform or tactical vest, due to its 102 Phon speech loudness, High Dynamic Range (HDR) microphones, advanced windporting technology and intelligent noise suppression technology. This provides the best possible field of view for both evidential video capture and clear radio communications. • Secure NFC pairing – Via “touch” pairing, an officer can quickly associate their SVX with their corresponding APX NEXT or N70 for the first time, even when many other wireless devices are present in the area. • Removable battery – The SVX’s detachable battery enables officers to switch from a depleted battery to a fully-charged battery in the field, which accommodates unexpected overtime or heavy usage. Batteries can be charged independently from the SVX itself, so officers can keep a replacement battery on-hand and ready to use. • Programmable buttons – Use four configurable buttons to accommodate radio shortcuts or video operation functionality.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 109 of 522 EVIDENTIARY VIDEO FUNCTIONALITY (REQUIRES VIDEOMANAGER EL OR COMMANDCENTRAL EVIDENCE) • Dual audio streams – revolutionary audio technology enables officers to capture both clear radio communications and environmental audio simultaneously; this provides mission-critical communications in the field, while also adding more context of how and when an officer responded in the evidentiary video. • Natural field of view – The SVX eliminates the fisheye effect from wide-angle lenses that warps video footage. Distortion correction enables a clear and complete evidence review process. The SVX’s high quality, low light sensor captures an accurate depiction of recorded events, even in challenging lighting conditions. • Data encryption – The SVX uses FIPS-140-2 compliant encryption at-rest and in-transit. This prevents bad actors from gaining unauthorized access to confidential and sensitive data. • Record-After-the-Fact® – Our patented Record-After-the-Fact® technology captures footage even when the recording function is not engaged. An officer or supervisor can request video footage from a specific point in the past to be uploaded to the evidence management system, hours or even days after the event occurred. • Voice-activated tagging – Leveraging the ViQi Voice Control capabilities of the paired APX NEXT or N70 radio, officers can now easily apply an event category to a recording video by simply uttering a voice command (e.g., “tag video as ‘arrest’”). This eliminates scrolling through a long list of events, either on a small body camera screen or back at the station after a shift. • Bluetooth recording triggers – The SVX accommodates a variety of Bluetooth recording triggers, so officers can focus on the task at hand instead of needing to manually start recording. Emergency button: the SVX is triggered to start recording immediately when the APX NEXT or N70 emergency mode button is pressed, or the “Fall Alert” feature is activated. M500 in-car video systems collaboration and Holster sensors will be available in upcoming software upgrades. • Wireless uploading – Recordings made by the SVX are uploaded to the agency’s evidence management system via Wi-Fi. This enables easy transfer of critical recordings from a vehicle to headquarters for immediate review or long-term storage. • Real-time location and video streaming – leveraging a Wi-Fi connection, the SVX can send location updates and stream live video to CommandCentral Aware in a dispatch center or Real Time Crime Center (RTCC), giving the agency a complete and accurate view of their officers for better coordination and quicker response times. • SmartControl Application – To maximize efficiency in the field, the Motorola Solutions SmartControl app enables SVX users to preview video recordings, add or edit tags, change camera settings and view live video from the camera. The app is available for both iOS and Android phones. CHARGERS AND UPLOAD STATIONS The SVX has three charging options: SmartDock – charge up to ten SVX devices and their attached batteries simultaneously. When the SVX is used as an RSM only, a LAN-connected SmartDock enables the devices to check for new firmware and automatically apply these updates without manual intervention. When the SVX is used as a video RSM, the SmartDock enables the automatic offload of video recordings from the devices to the evidence management platform via an integrated gigabit switch. It also facilitates comprehensive device management capabilities, including device configuration and checkout.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 110 of 522 Battery-only charger – charge up to 12 spare batteries at once. Quickly understand which batteries are ready to take for a shift via a status LED on each slot. A convenient mounting bracket allows the charger to be placed on a desk or mounted on a wall. USB-C charger: charge a single SVX device or battery by connecting a commercially-available USB-C cable to a 1.5amp wall adapter, car port or battery backup bank, for additional charging flexibility on the go. EARPICE SOLUTIONS The receive-only earpiece connects to the 3.5mm side connector on the SVX and is a great option for private communication when the device is mounted at chest level on the officer’s uniform. The SVX serves as the wireless microphone to speak, and the earpiece to listen. The two-wire surveillance style earpiece is an ideal choice for unobtrusive communication when the SVX is mounted below chest level. The discreet microphone piece can be attached on a shirt collar or outer carrier shoulder strap. To transmit, the officer can press the PTT button on the microphone piece, the SVX or radio itself. The programmable button on the front of the mic piece mirrors the function of the 3-dot button on the SVX. MOUNTING SOLUTIONS The SVX is compatible with the entire portfolio of existing V300 / V700 mounting solutions, depicted below:    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 111 of 522 SVX REMOTE SPEAKER MICROPHONE STATEMENT OF WORK OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of the SVX remote speaker microphone and your digital evidence management solution. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation of the hardware and software components listed in the Solution Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must be mutually agreed upon by both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services & Products provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATION, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer. FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola does not believe our solution requires compliance with the FBI -CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI-CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL security controls as a guide. Motorola’s    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 112 of 522 design and features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on the Personnel Security section of the CJISSECPOL, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is req uired to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted access to unencrypted CJI. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information and Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJISSECPOL Personnel Security screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personnel status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have access to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third-party installer (if applicable) will work independently with the Customer to complete the CJISSECPOL Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. Completion Criteria The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delay s due to incomplete Customer tasks. The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task comp letion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within ten (10) business days. In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 113 of 522 SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the subscription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access or for hardware, upon shipment of the hardware. The provision and use of th e subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW. Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to: • Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. • Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Conduct equipment inventory. • Discovery validation • Maintain project communications with the Customer. • Identify and manage project risks. • Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays. • Evaluate project status against Project Schedule. • Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status. • Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues related to project progress. • Conduct daily status calls with the Customer during Go-Live. Post Sales Engineer The Post Sales Engineer will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • System provisioning. • Data Migration • Contracted data migration between two disparate digital evidence management systems (if applicable, additional fees may apply).    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 114 of 522 Field Engineer (FE) The FE will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • Inspect installation and configure hardware devices. • Provide instructions to the Customer on how to configure the hardware. • Review Deployment Checklist with the Customer. • Develop and submit a Trip Report. • Update Customer IP Map. Professional Services Engineer (if applicable) The Professional Services Engineer is engaged on projects that include integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party software application. Their responsibilities include: • Delivery of the interface between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third - party software (e.g. CAD). Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training on-site or remote depending on the training topic and deployment services purchased. • Deliver provisioning education and guidance to the Customer for operating and maintaining their system. • Provide product education as defined by this SOW and described in the Education Plan. Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost. Project Manager The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to: • Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. • Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities. • Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM. • Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule. • Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 115 of 522 • Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola. • Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities. • Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. • Monitor Project to ensure resources are available as required. • Attend status meetings. • Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. • Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contractors, and common carriers. • Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date. • Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date. • Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department. • Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certificates, as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner. • Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if required for access. • Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources. • Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project. • Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. • Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel. • Identify and manage project risks. • Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to: • Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system. • Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training. • Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems. • Maintain provisioning. • Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Video Management Point of Contact (POC) (if applicable) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Video Manager POC will educate users on digital media policy, participate in Discovery tasks, and complete the Video Management Administration training. The Customer is responsible for its    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 116 of 522 own creation and enforcement of media protection policies and procedures for any digital media created, extracted, or downloaded from the digital evidence management system. Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis , training and provisioning process, including making decisions on global provisioning. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective field (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on provisioning, workflows, and department policies related to the proposed system. Training POC The Training POC will act as the course facilitator and is considered the Customer’s educational monitor. The Training POC will work with Motorola when policy and procedural questions arise. They will be responsible for developing any agency specific training material(s) and configuring new users on the Motorola Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) system. This role will serve as the first line of support during Go-Live for the Customer’s end users. General Customer Responsibilities In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following: • All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, connectivity etc. • Configure, test, and maintain third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system. • Establish an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and provide documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system. • Coordinate and facilitate communication between Motorola and Customer third-party vendor(s) as required. • Mitigate the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action. • Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system. • Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions. • Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer- provided remote conferencing tool. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to Motorola installing the proposed system: • Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system. • Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. • Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s). • Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Active Directory for the purpose of installation, configuration, and support.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 117 of 522 • Provide all environmental conditions such as power, uninterruptible power sources (UPS), HVAC, firewall and network requirements. • Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall. Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements. PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. PROJECT PLANNING SESSION A Project Planning Session will occur after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet before the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include: • A high-level review of the following project elements: • Quoting/ordering documents • A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. • Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. • Data Migration questionnaire if migration is included in the Solution • The Business Process Review (BPR), used to document system configuration, agency recording, and retention policies • A high-level Project Schedule with milestones and dates. • Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors. • Determine Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities • Contact the customer to complete the Project Planning Session. • Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Baseline the Project Schedule, if applicable. • Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. Customer Responsibilities • Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 118 of 522 Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Data Migration Questionnaire (if applicable) • BPR Workbook PROJECT KICKOFF Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation. Note – The IT Questionnaire is completed during the pre-sales process and prior to Contract award. The IT Questionnaire is given to Motorola at the time of offer acceptance. A delay in completing the IT Questionnaire may delay the shipment of equipment. Motorola will not be responsible for any delays associated with or related to the completion of the IT Questionnaire. Motorola Responsibilities • Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW. • Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist. • Discuss the equipment inventory process • Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW. • Review resource requirements. • Provide the initial Project Schedule • Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements. • Review the BPR. • Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Review the LXP training portal. • Request user information required to establish the Customer in LXP. • Review and agree on completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support. Customer Responsibilities • Provide feedback and approval on project delivery requirements and schedule. • Review the Deployment Checklist. • Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority. • Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable). • Complete the BPR Workbook within 5 business days after the conclusion of the Project Kickoff for review during the Discovery Teleconference • Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Provide Motorola with names and contact information of the designated LXP Administrator(s). Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes. • Deployment Checklist.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 119 of 522 DISCOVERY TELECONFERENCE During the Discovery Teleconference, Motorola will meet with the Customer to review information documented in the BPRWorkbook. The Data Migration Questionnaire will also be reviewed if migration is part of the Solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate Discovery Teleconference. • Confirm Customer-provided configuration inputs. Customer Responsibilities • Gather and review the information required to complete the BPR Workbook. • Schedule Customer Project Team and SMEs to attend the Discovery Teleconference. SM Es should be present to weigh in on hardware, software, and network components. Customer attendees should be empowered to convey policies and make modifications to policies as necessary. Motorola Deliverables • Completed BPR Workbook. PROJECT EXECUTION HARDWARE PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The hardware will be configured with a basic profile in line with the information provided by the IT Questionnaire or Discovery Teleconference for installation and configuration of the system. The Customer is responsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to: • Power • Heating and Cooling • Network Connectivity • Access and Security • Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities • Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location. • Inventory equipment after arrival at Customer location • Conduct a power-on test to validate that the installed hardware is ready for configuration. • Verify remote connection to hardware. • Verifying the SVX Smart Dock(s) are connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System through the Customer’s network. The Customer is responsible for ensuring Motorola has the correct IP address(es) for configuring the Smart Dock(s), and the Customer’s network is operational. • Complete Deployment Checklist which outlines the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 120 of 522 Customer Responsibilities • Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location. • Confirm the installation room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.). • Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software workstation(s). • Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Syste m by utilizing the Customer’s Internet connection. • Confirm access to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System cloud on Customer-provided workstation(s). • The Customer will verify whether the Smart Docks(s) are connected to their network. Motorola Deliverables • Contracted Equipment. • Equipment Inventory SVX Configuration as a Remote Speaker Microphone The Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to manage firmware updates on each SVX In order for this process to be successfully completed, each Smart Dock must be connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Solution through the Customer’s internet connection. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Smart Dock(s) for connectivity to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System. • Verify the Smart Dock(s) is configured properly and connected to the network. • Verify all slots in each Smark Dock are functional. • Provide documentation on how to pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s) using Secure Near-Field Communications (NFC). Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Smart Dock(s). • Enable Bluetooth, Bluetooth Tones, and Secure NFC Touch Pairing on Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s). • Motorola recommends “Power Down Standby Mode (hrs) = 1” to allow the SVX Bluetooth connection to quickly reconnect after power up within the 1-hour timeframe. • Pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s) using Secure NFC. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. SVX Configuration as a Body Camera (if applicable) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to configure each SVX as a body camera. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure SVX(s) within Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 121 of 522 • Check out SVX(s) and create a test recording. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for up to 25% of purchased SVX(s). • Provide a demonstration of client software. Customer Responsibilities • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for the remainder of purchased SVX(s). SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION CommandCentral DEMS (if applicable) CommandCentral DEMS software is a cloud solution that does not require an onsite server and supports the SVX as a remote speaker microphone and a body camera. Section 3.2 does not apply to existing Motorola customers using VideoManager EL Cloud Motorola Responsibilities • Use information provided in BPR Workbook to configure CommandCentral DEMS software. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: • Create users, groups, and setup permissions. • Create event categories when SVX is used as a body camera. • Set retention policies when SVX is used as a body camera. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Use the CommandCentral Admin Portal to provision users, groups, and rules based on Customer Active Directory data. • Guide the Customer in the configuration of CommandCentral DEMS. • Ensure training POC can access the system. Customer Responsibilities • Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Active Directory for the purpose of Motorola conducting CommandCentral DEMS provisioning. • Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups, and agency mapping to CommandCentral DEMS. • Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions. • Configure evidence as directed by Motorola. • Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end-user workstations. DATA MIGRATION SERVICES (IF APPLICABLE*) The Customer is responsible for partitioning data to be converted from Motoro la on-premises digital evidence management system, or Customer’s Non-Motorola Digital Evidence Management System to Motorola’s cloud solution as part of this offer. The Customer will have ten (10) business days to provide feedback after Motorola validates the migrated data. If feedback is not received on or before ten (10) business days, Motorola will assume the migration is complete. *Data Migration Services may be subject to additional fees.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 122 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Receive access to Customer video data. • Perform contracted data migration and validation. Customer Responsibilities • Provide 24/7 remote access to partitioned data to be migrated. • Customer hardware or virtualization environment will be the sole responsibility of the Customer to troubleshoot and resolve issues. • Validate migrated dataset and provide Motorola with feedback within ten (10) business days. Completion Criteria • A migrated dataset as defined in the Contract. Motorola On-Premise Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola supports data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from our on-premise evidence management systems, Evidence Library 4 and VideoManager EL On-Prem (formally known as Evidence Library 5), to Motorola’s cloud solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Verify compatible platform(s) and upgrade if applicable Customer Responsibilities • Provide internet connectivity from on-premise server to destination resources Non-Motorola Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola will perform data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from the Customer’s Non-Motorola Evidence Management system to the new Motorola Cloud Evidence Management System. Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate the method of obtaining and consuming the data • Review data in the Motorola systems with the customer Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the Non - Motorola digital evidence management system. • Provide internet connectivity from on-premise server to destination resources, if applicable. • Provide API connection to the source, if applicable • Provide data and metadata information in a readable and consumable format • Assist with mapping metadata information into Motorola system    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 123 of 522 INTEGRATIONS AND THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE) The integration between Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System and the Customer’s third-party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the com plexity of accessing the third-party system. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third-party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities • Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. • Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third-party systems. • Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the third - party system. • Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts. • Provide network connectivity between digital evidence management system and the third -party system(s). • Provide hardware to run any required interface components for on-prem interfaces when required. • Provide sample data and information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulties with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or non-functional interface. Providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will potentially allow us to mitigate these issues. If the resolution requires additional third-party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or Customer-provided third-party hardware or software. SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer -based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote) depending on what is purchased. Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training w ill be delivered in accordance with the Education Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format. ONLINE TRAINING Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP. This subscription service provides customers with unlimited access to our online training content and provides users with the flexibility of learning the content at their own pace. Training content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Through LXP, a list of available online training courses, Motorola User Guides, and Training Material are accessible in electronic format.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 124 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer. • Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer. • Configure a Customer-specific portal view. • Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies. • Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account. • During onboarding, assist the Customer with LXP usage. • Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content. • Provide instruction to Customer LXP Administrator on building groups. Customer Responsibilities • Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts. • Complete LXP Administrator training. • Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to LXP. • Customer's primary LXP Administrator is required to complete the following self-paced training: LXP Introduction (LXP0001), LXP Primary Site Administrator Overview (LXP0002), and LXP Group Administrator Overview (LXP0003). • Advise users on the availability of training through LXP. • Ensure users complete LXP training in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Build groups as needed. ON-SITE TRAINING Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Education Plan. On-site instructor-led classes will utilize the Customer’s hardware and software in order to provide the best training environment. This will allow the Customer to engage in an environment that has been configured and deployed in alignment with this SOW. Motorola Responsibilities • Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format. • Perform training in accordance with the Education Plan. • Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities • Supply classroom(s) based on the requirements listed in the Education Plan. • Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content. • Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Deliverables • Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials. • Attendance rosters.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 125 of 522 PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the assigned Motorola Resource demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipment has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities • Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement pr ocess and contact information. • Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support. • Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete. • Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate. Customer Responsibilities • Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure. • Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motorola’s T echnical Support. • Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project. ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions: • Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System must be connected to the Microsoft Entra ID (formally known as Microsoft Azure Active Directory) for user authentication to the application. Microsoft Entra ID can be synchronized with the Customer's on-premises Active Directory using Azure AD Connect. If the Customer is using Microsoft Office 365, Motorola will be able to integrate with this Microsoft Entra ID. • If Microsoft Entra ID is not utilized by the Customer, Motorola will provide a free version of Entra ID for user authentication to the application. • Must be 2003 or later for Microsoft Entra ID integration.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 126 of 522 • Upload Speed Requirements for SVX when used as a body camera: • 5 Mbps + 3 Mbps per additional device. • This assumes it will take 8 hours to upload 5 GB of video on a device. • 40-50 Mbps per concurrent uploading device. • This assumes video is required to upload within 30-40 minutes with approximately 5 GB to upload.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 127 of 522 Essential Service for SVX Video Remote SpeakerMicrophone Device   This Statement of Work (SOW) is subject to the terms and conditions of the Motorola Solutions Customer Agreement or other applicable agreement in effect between the parties (Agreement). The terms of this SOW are an integral part of an Agreement with the Customer to which this SOW is appended and is made a part thereof by this reference. In the event of a conflict between the terms and conditions of an Agreement and the terms and conditions of this SOW, this SOW will control the inconsistency only. This SOW applies to the Device(s) specifically named in the Agreement.  Description of Services and Obligations The term “Customer” refers to any end-user who has a purchase agreement with Motorola Solutions.Essential Service provides either three (3) or five (5) years of coverage, as selected and purchased by the Customer, and includes:  •Remote Technical Support  •Software Maintenance •Hardware Repair for manufacturing defects  Every SVX device is covered by one (1) year of standard product warranty. Motorola Solutions offers three (3) and five (5) years of Essential Service options for SVX devices, with optional service upgrades to extend and/or provide additional coverage for the device described in Section 7 of this SOW.   Essential Service  Remote Technical Support   Remote Technical Support is provided for device issues related to software and/or hardware that require troubleshooting expertise. Motorola Solutions’ System Support Center (SSC) and Technical Support Operations (TSO) center are staffed with highly trained technologists who specialize in the diagnosis and resolution of product issues. Motorola Solutions’ SSC and TSO are continuously monitored against industry recognized incident and problem management processes.  Motorola Solutions will respond to calls, e-mails, and web portal submissions during normal support hours, five (5) business days per week, excluding holidays, and weekends. In addition, Customers may contact the Motorola Service Desk and a Motorola Solutions representative will log a technical request on Motorola Solutions’ Case Management System.   Technical Problem Isolation, Analysis and Resolution  A Motorola Solutions representative or technologists will:  •Work to isolate the problem/issue  •Analyze and determine the cause of the problem/issue •Work to achieve problem/issue resolution  Software Maintenance  Software maintenance is important for ensuring device performance and operation. Essential Service provides the Customer with access to the latest available SVX device operating system (OS) software, device firmware, and application software. Device software releases maintain the device software performance such that the Device operates in accordance with its specifications and documented functionality, and is aligned with the applicable Motorola Solutions infrastructure platform lifecycle. Each release may include bug fixes, security patches, and/or new feature activation enablements.  Configuration of the SVX device is made possible through the use of the CommandCentral DEMS or  VideoManager EL solution.  Access to software updates will remain available until the expiration of the initial term of the Essential Service Package. Upon expiration of the initial Essential Service term, availability of software updates will terminate, unless the Customer renews Essential Service. Only Customers with three (3) year service term durations are eligible for a two (2) year renewal for a total of (5) years of services.  Device Hardware Repair     QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 128 of 522 Essential Service provides the Customer with repair services at a Motorola Solutions owned and operated, supervised, or certified Repair Center that employs the latest test equipment and original or certified replacement components used in the manufacturing of the SVX device. Device Hardware Repair provides the Customer with repair services for internal and external device components that are damaged as a result of manufacturing defects and operational defects due to normal wear and tear. With this Service, the device is repaired to ensure compliance with its specifications, as published by Motorola Solutions at the time of delivery of the original device via:  •Repairs, adjustments and restorations, if appropriate, of any device that malfunctions while being used within the operational and environmental parameters specified by Motorola Solutions. •Device updates, if applicable, as may be released, from time to time, by Motorola Solutions in accordance with an Engineering Change Notice.  At the discretion of Motorola Solutions, if the device is considered “un-repairable”, for technical or economic reasons, Motorola will replace the device with a new or refurbished device.   Standard Product Warranty   The Customer is automatically entitled to one (1) year of technical support and one (1) year of hardware repair against manufacturing defects, as covered by the standard product warranty. Exclusions apply, per the Agreement.   Scope of Products or Services Included  Essential Service, and optional Service upgrades, are currently available for all SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone devices. Check with your Motorola Solutions’ Sales representative if you have a question about the eligibility of your device.  Motorola Solutions Responsibilities  Software Release Availability  Motorola Solutions will provide access to the latest SVX device software and firmware releases via the CommandCentral DEMS VideoManager EL On-Premises, or VideoManager EL Cloud, solution. For customers using the CommandCentral DEMS or VideoManager EL Cloud, software and firmware upgrades will occur automatically when the Video Remote Speaker MicrophoneBody Worn Camera device connects to the agency’s CommandCentral DEMS or VideoManager EL Cloud instance.  Software Release Notes  Motorola Solutions may, from time to time, provide release notes for the SVX Device software release. Information regarding training material will be posted on the Learning Experience Portal (LXP) at https:// learning.motorolasolutions.com  Hardware Repair  Motorola Solutions will provide repair or replacement of a device, at its option, with a five (5) business day in-house turnaround time, provided the device is delivered to the repair center by 9:00 a.m. (local repair center time), and replacement parts, components, and/or devices are available. Business days do not include holidays or weekends. Repair may include the replacement of parts, or boards with new parts or complete boards or, at Motorola Solutions’ option, with functionally equivalent, reconditioned parts, boards, or with a new or refurbished replacement device. All replaced parts, boards or devices will become the property of Motorola Solutions. Turnaround time represents the time a product spends in the repair process; it does not include time in transit, including customs clearance.   Shipping  For devices repaired under Essential Service, Motorola Solutions will provide one-way shipping, from an Authorized Motorola Repair Center to the Customer. The Customer is responsible for the shipping method and any shipping costs incurred when returning the faulty device to an Authorized Motorola Solutions repair center. Based on the country of purchase, Motorola Solutions may also cover, or include, two-way    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 129 of 522 shipping for the damaged or defective device. Eligibility for two-way shipping will be confirmed during the repair submission process.  Customer Responsibilities  Serial Numbers  If device orders are submitted via Motorola Solutions’ Customer Hub, OCC, or CPQ ordering systems, the hardware serial number(s) for three (3) year Essential Service and Essential Software, as well as five (5) year Essential Service, and three (3) and five (5) year Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement, will be automatically captured and included in the Service Agreement.  If five (5) year Essential Service or three (3) and five (5) year Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement is purchased within 90 days of device shipment, the Customer must provide a complete list, preferably in electronic format, or by completing a Service Order Form (SOF), of all hardware serial numbers to be covered under the Agreement.   Initiating Repair  When initiating a repair, the Customer must contact Motorola Solutions to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number for each faulty SVX device. The Customer can submit a repair, and request an RMA, via the Customer Hub Portal, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions’ Service Desk. If two-way shipping is included, the customer can generate a shipping label via Customer Hub, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions Service Desk. The Return Material Authorization (RMA) must be included with the device when shipped to the Authorized Motorola Repair Center. •Only the SVX device should be returned for repair. The battery must be removed before shipping the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center. •Device accessories should not be included when returning a device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories, or device batteries, that are shipped with the device for repair.   Device Software Releases  The Customer will be responsible for updating each eligible SVX device with the latest available software and/or firmware, and of advising users of any operational changes that may have been introduced as a result of the new software or firmware.   WiFi Connectivity  The Customer is responsible for providing all WiFi connectivity to the device.   Removing Customer Data  The Customer is responsible for removing, from the device, any data, video, or other information that the Customer wishes to retain or destroy, prior to sending the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair.  Motorola Solutions may provide a Video Evidence Recovery Service for the SVX device, as an additional charge. Video Evidence Recovery is a best effort service that is dependent on the condition of the device. This service, if applicable, will have a separated Agreement, with Terms and Conditions, outside the scope of this Statement of Work (SOW). Please contact your Motorola Solutions Representative for more information regarding the Video Evidence Recovery Service.  Essential Service Limitations and Restrictions   •Customer will incur additional charges at the prevailing rates for any of the following activities, which are not covered under this Agreement: •Replacement of consumable parts or accessories, as defined by product, including but not limited to batteries, cables, mounts, or clips.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 130 of 522 •Repair of problems caused by natural or manmade disasters, including but not limited to fire, theft and floods that would cause internal or external component damage or destruction. •Repair of problems caused by third parties’ Software, accessories or peripherals not approved in writing by Motorola Solutions for use with the device. •Repair of problems caused by using the device outside of the product’s operational and environmental specifications, including improper handling, carelessness or reckless use, or repaired by a third party. •Repair of problems caused by unauthorized alterations or attempted repair. •Non-remedial work, including but not limited to administration and operator procedures, reprogramming, and operator or user training. •Problem determination and/or work performed to repair or resolve issues with non-covered products; for example, any hardware or software products not specifically listed on the service order form. •Any file or video backup or restoration. •Completion and test of incomplete application programming or system integration if not performed by Motorola Solutions and specifically listed as covered. •Use of Software or Firmware releases, except as provided for under the responsibilities outlined in this document. •Accidental damage, chemical or liquid damage, or other damage caused outside of normal device operating specifications, unless the Customer has purchased the optional Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement package. •Cosmetic imperfections that do not affect the functionality of the device. •Where a Video Remote Speaker Microphone device is submitted for repair that is outside the scope of Service, such repair may be quoted by Motorola Solutions for additional cost in accordance with Motorola Solutions’ standard Time and Materials (T&M) rates and terms and conditions.  Motorola Solutions will notify the Customer of any incremental charges related to the aforementioned exclusions prior to completing the repair and said repair will be subject to acceptance of the quotation by the Customer. •Software support for unauthorized modifications, or other misuse of the device software, is not covered under this Agreement. •Access to the software and firmware releases for updating the device under this SOW is available only for the device named in the Agreement. Software updates to any additional devices are expressly excluded and prohibited. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Motorola Solutions may, at its sole discretion, include coverage for other devices.  •Any implementation tools not required to support the device software and firmware updates are excluded from coverage.  Motorola Solutions is not obligated to provide support for any Device: •That has been repaired, tampered with, altered or modified (including the unauthorized installation of any software) — except by Motorola Solutions authorized service personnel. •That has been subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress, abuse, or forces or exposure beyond normal use within the specified operational and environmental parameters set forth in the applicable product specification. •If Customer fails to comply with the obligations contained in the product purchase agreement and/or the applicable software license agreement and/or Motorola Solutions terms and conditions of service.  Optional Add-Ons: Essential Service with Accidental Damage Repair and Advanced Replacement   Description of Services and Obligations  Accidental Damage coverage is an optional, prepaid service that adds coverage for accidentally damaged SVX devices. Accidental Damage coverage must be purchased together with, or within 90 days of, a qualifying Motorola Solutions device purchase. This three (3) or five (5) year service offer (as selected by the Customer) reduces unexpected expenses related to the repair of the device. Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement coverage includes all services provided under Essential Service, plus additional coverage for Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement of the damaged device. Examples of repairs covered under Accidental Damage include:  •Electrical repair for failures caused by accidental water or chemical damage    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 131 of 522 •Electrical repair for accidental internal damage •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken housings. •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken camera lens or displays. •Replacement of accidentally cracked or broken or missing buttons, knobs, or keypads  Repair or Replacement  Motorola Solutions will provide repair or replacement of a SVX device, at its option, with a five (5) business day in-house turnaround time, excluding weekends and holidays, provided the device is delivered to the repair center by 9:00 a.m. (local repair center time), and replacement parts, components, and/or devices are available. Repair may include the replacement of parts, or boards with new parts or complete boards or, at Motorola Solutions option, with functionally equivalent, reconditioned parts, boards, or with a new replacement or refurbished device. All replaced parts, boards or devices will become the property of Motorola Solutions. Turnaround time represents the time a product spends in the repair process; it does not include time in transit, including customs clearance.   Serial Numbers  If the Accidental Damage Service is purchased with the device, in the same order, using Motorola Solutions’ Customer Hub Portal, OCc, or CPQ when ordering, the hardware serial number(s) are automatically captured and included in the Service Agreement. If Accidental Damage Service is purchased within 90 days of device shipment, the Customer must provide a complete list, preferably in electronic format, or by completing a Service Order Form (SOF), of all hardware serial numbers to be covered under the Agreement.   Initiating Repair  When initiating a repair, the Customer must contact Motorola Solutions to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number for each faulty SVX device. The Customer can submit a repair, and request an RMA, via the Customer Hub Portal, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions’ Service Desk. If two-way shipping is included, the customer can generate a shipping label via Customer Hub, or by contacting the Motorola Solutions Service Desk. The Return Material Authorization (RMA) must be included with the device when shipped to the Authorized Motorola Repair Center. •Only the SVX device should be returned for repair. The battery must be removed before shipping the device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center. •Device accessories should not be included when returning a device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center for repair. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories, or device batteries, that are shipped with the device for repair.   Advanced Replacement  Under Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement Service, Motorola Solutions will provide Advanced Replacement for the damaged device. Motorola Solutions will ship a new or refurbished replacement device to the Customer within two (2) business days of receiving the Customer repair request, subject to availability of replacement devices. Business days do not include weekends or holidays.  The Customer must return the defective or damaged device to a Motorola Solutions Repair Center within 60 days after receiving the replacement device. Failure to return the damaged device to Motorola Solutions will result in an additional Customer charge for the replacement device.  When returning a device for Advanced Replacement, device accessories should not be included. Accessories include batteries, chargers or charging stations, cables, mounts, and clips. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any accessories that are shipped with the device.  Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement Limitations and Restrictions   •Customer will incur additional charges at the prevailing rates for any of the following activities, which are not covered under this Agreement:    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 132 of 522 •Replacement of consumable parts or accessories, as defined by product, including but not limited to batteries, chargers, charging stations, mounts, and clips.  •Repair of problems caused by natural or manmade disasters, including but not limited to fire, theft and floods that would cause internal or external component damage or destruction. •Repair of problems caused by third parties’ Software, accessories or peripherals not approved in writing by Motorola Solutions for use with the device. •Repair of problems caused by using the device outside of the product’s operational and environmental specifications, including improper handling, carelessness or reckless use, or repair by a third party. •Repair of problems caused by unauthorized alterations or attempted repair. •Non-remedial work, including but not limited to administration and operator procedures, reprogramming, and operator or user training. •Problem determination and/or work performed to repair or resolve issues with non-covered products; for example, any hardware or software products not specifically listed on the service order form. •Any file or video backup or restoration. •Completion and test of incomplete application programming or system integration if not performed by Motorola Solutions and specifically listed as covered. •Use of Software or Firmware releases except as provided for under the responsibilities outlined in this document. •There is a maximum limit of one (1) SVX Video Remote Speaker Microphone device repair, per contract year, for Essential Service with Accidental Damage and Advanced Replacement. •Where ongoing “Accidental Damage” repair is deemed by Motorola Solutions to be excessive, systemic, or the result of device mishandling, the Customer may be subject to an additional charge. Should the accidental damage continue unabated, the Customer will incur repair charges at Motorola Solutions’ discretion and prevailing charges for devices deemed by Motorola Solutions to have been damaged through improper handling, carelessness or reckless use.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 133 of 522 COMMANDCENTRAL DEMS PLUS SOLUTION DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW CommandCentral DEMS provides a suite of digital evidence management tools that help users contain, organize, and act on large amounts of incoming multimedia. These tools streamline the collection, capture, storage, and sharing of data from a single location. By centralizing digital evidence collections, CommandCentral DEMS removes data silos and provides users with the storage and tools they need to get the most out of their critical information. In addition, users can easily secure and share content with an intact chain of custody, to improve collaboration. CommandCentral DEMS Plus is available without any upfront capital investment. Monthly subscription service costs include the software, device management, and storage. Evidence also secures data at rest and in transit to protect communications. This complies with CJIS guidelines and the NIST framework. THE COMMANDCENTRAL PLATFORM CommandCentral is an end-to-end platform of interconnected solutions that unify data and streamline public safety workflows from a tip or call to case closure. Through single sign-on capabilities, your personnel can access all software applications with one agency username and password for a more streamlined workflow. The platform puts your agency’s data to better use, improves safety for critical personnel, and helps keep your focus on the communities you serve.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 134 of 522 CommandCentral continuously evolves, maximizing the value of existing investments while adopting new capabilities that better meet your personnel’s growing needs. With cloud-based services and an agile development methodology through constant user feedback, Motorola Solutions can deliver new features and functionality in a more manageable, non-intrusive way. Figure 1: The End-to-End Platform DIGITAL EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT Evidence stored in the tool is easy to search, correlate, and review alongside other case-related information from your CAD or RMS database. Relevant content can be marked and intelligently sorted to quickly locate critical information from a central touchpoint. This unified storage framework allows personnel to make informed decisions from an organized and complete case evidence view, while offering an access control system to allow only authorized personnel to view sensitive information. Store and Manage - Collections Evidence is automatically linked based on the tags and metadata attached to those files, helping users find additional contextual information on an incident and build cases quickly. Users can search and filter content to locate additional relevant data to link to a case or incident. • Auto Created Collections – Digital evidence captured by integrated products that provide a Record ID, such as an Incident or Case Number, will automatically be grouped into a Collection. • Manually Created Collections – Users can manually create collections or sub-collections to better organize individual files and related items. • Bulk Actions – Easily download, share, and edit specific details of multiple files in a group. • Manual Upload - Upload digital evidence from 3rd parties directly into an existing collection or while creating a new collection to build your case. Interagency, Judicial, and Community Sharing Easily share digital evidence with trusted organizations and community members using our secure sharing features. • Trusted Organizations, Authenticated Sharing - Share digital evidence collections with other agencies and judicial partners in a secure portal accessible by authenticated users. • Unauthenticated - Quickly share evidence with the community for public information requests. Links can be password protected to add a level of security.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 135 of 522 AI Assisted Redactions and Transcriptions Protect confidentiality and save time with our AI Assisted Redaction and Transcription Services. • AI Transcription & Summaries - Generate transcriptions on-demand or set up automations to create transcriptions for video and audio files with an AI generated summary. • AI Assisted Video and Audio Redactions - Receive suggestions for objects and information commonly redacted. - Video Object Detection - Identifies and tracks objects commonly redacted; such as heads (faces), license plates, screens, and documents. - Audio Detections - Use AI to auto-detect common sensitive data found in audio; such as names, phone numbers, and medical interactions. - Manual Redactions - For simple projects, manual redaction tools are available. Current MSI Ecosystem Integrations: • CommandCentral Responder Starter, Mobile Field Responder Application • SmartControl Mobile App for Body Cameras • 10-21 Police Phone • CAPE-Equipped Drones • Smart Transcription for 9-1-1 call recordings • ViQi - Voice Activated AI • Records Management - Flex Records - PremierOne Records - CC Records / RMS Third Party Integrations Import and export of data from some 3rd party software is available in some instances. Talk to your sales team for more details. DEVICE MANAGEMENT Easily manage, configure, deploy and monitor in-car and body cameras in CommandCentral DEMS. • Body Cameras are checked out to a given officer with assignment records showing the history of use for the device. • In-Car Video systems are configured with a list of officers who are authorized to use it. When an officer logs into the device, they are marked as the owner of any evidence created by the device. • Rapid Checkout Kiosk allows users to quickly check out pooled body cameras at the beginning of a shift with an easy-to-use interface. • User Preferences - In-car and Body cameras can be configured to remember preference settings for each user, including alert volume level, haptic notifications, screen and LED brightness and more. • Automatic Video Upload: Videos are automatically uploaded to CommandCentral DEMS and linked based on officer name, or group recordings. • Device Dashboard: See a detailed, easy-to-understand overview of your body cameras and in-car video systems at a glance, including their battery levels, memory levels, last checkout, and location. • In-field tagging: Categorize and review body camera footage while still in the field, via the SmartControl iOS/Android/Windows app.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 136 of 522 Supported devices include: • SVX converged Radio Speaker Mic and Body-Worn Camera • V700 Body Cameras • M500 In-Car Camera System CLOUD SECURITY AND COMPLIANCE Proactive Security Design Security is proactively incorporated into the design of our applications, not applied reactively when incidents occur. Applications undergo security reviews at each phase of their development and continue with ongoing assessments after deployment to find and repair vulnerabilities. Compliance with Industry Best Practices Our cloud solutions comply with key industry best practices for security, including NIST Security and Privacy Controls for Information Systems and Organizations (800-53), ISO 27001, 27017, 27018 - Specification for an Information Security Management System, and Criminal Justice Information System (CJIS) Security Policy. We conduct continuous and comprehensive risk assessments following the guidelines and best practices provided by NIST and ISO. Cybersecurity Champions Imbedded in Product and Service Teams Over 350 specially trained and certified Cybersecurity Champions ensure that a culture of cybersecurity is instilled into the fabric of our product and services teams. Programmers receive ongoing security training and updates on the latest hacker tactics so they can layer security into every stage of the application development process.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 137 of 522 COMMANDCENTRAL RESPONDER STARTER WITH EVIDENCE SOLUTION DESCRIPTION CommandCentral Responder is a mobile solution for frontline Responders. This includes an application for iOS and Android. The Responder with Evidence solution (also known as Responder Starter) allows users to capture media, record notes, tag items and link them to cases / incident records. Depending on which feature flags are enabled, a customer can gain access to different sets of features. Using a note, users can capture a group of photos in one go and then tag them or link them all as a group. Responder uploads media automatically once captured, making the process easy for users. Media is removed automatically from a user’s device after a customer defined retention period. Users can set up the application easily by downloading the application from App Store or Play Store, and simply logging in with their MSI account. NOTES AND MEDIA CAPT URE Responder with Evidence allows a user to create a note and capture media and associated text. Users can use the note either just to group a set of media together (as they capture it) or to add additional explanatory text as they capture details. Users can capture audio, video and photographs in this collection. This means users can attend a scene and immediately capture a collection of media before working out how to tag or link it. Users can view a full size version of a photo and can zoom in to view it at larger scale.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 138 of 522 IMPORTING MEDIA Users can import media (photos, audio, video and files such as PDFs) from their gallery or file system - allowing them to use media files shared to their device by members of the public. This feature can be enabled or disabled using per agency configuration (if an agency does not want to use this capability they can turn it off). TAGGING Users can choose to tag a note, which will tag it and all media within it. Tags provided are those configured by the agency and are shown grouped by categories defined by the agency. Selected tags will then show on the note. As with all media, in CommandCentral Evidence, tags are used to manage and set the retention period for media. In addition to manual tags, Responder can be configured to set a default “Responder Media” tag on every media item uploaded by Responder. This allows agencies to set a default tag & retention period for anything captured by Responder. LINKING TO RECORDS Users can link a note to an incident record contained in the CommandCentral Consolidated Records View - to relate the note & media to the incident and ensure they are shown in the Consolidated Records View. The incident record summary shown in Responder contains key data for the record - Report number, Incident Type, Involved officers & Incident Start & End Date.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 139 of 522 Users can: • Link to an incident record already on a user’s device - Any incident records for which a user is already added as an involved officer will be automatically downloaded to their device. • Link to an incident record by search: - A user can search for an incident record using a simple free text search, searching for any incident record for the agency in CC Records that the user has permission to view • Create a new incident record if one does not exist (not available with Flex - see below) - User can create a new incident record (providing summary details above). - User will be provided with the Report number separately - Responder application will detect creation of incidents (from Responder) with duplicate Report numbers, warn users and allow them to resolve conflicts. The exact behavior depends on whether the customer is using: • Responder with CommandCentral Evidence connected to Flex - Flex generates law incidents (typically created from CAD). These law incidents are uploaded to CC Records and user can link to these. Whenever there is a case number to link to there will be a law incident in Flex and this will be pushed to CC Records. As a result, users can’t create incident record summaries in Responder, they can link to law incidents created in Flex. • Responder with CommandCentral Evidence connected to P1 RMS - P1 RMS manages case reports in case folders. If there is a case report, then P1 uploads this to CC Records and users can link to it. - If there is a case folder in P1 RMS but no case report then users can create an incident record summary in Responder, adding the case number - allowing the user to link media to the case. • Responder with CommandCentral Evidence standalone (with CommandCentral Records Starter capability) - Users can create incident record summaries or link to ones that have already been created. - Incident records have to be manually created in Responder (or the CommandCentral Evidence/Records web UI) - they aren’t imported from other systems    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 140 of 522 TIMELINE Users can view previous notes in their timeline: • Update a note later with further information; • Refer back to them later when completing a report; • Notes (and associated media) are kept on the device in a user’s timeline for an agency configured period - configured in CC Admin (default is 30 days). The timeline is separated into a To Do and All Items view. The To do view shows notes that a user has added, that are either less than 24 hours old or that have not yet been linked to an incident record. Users can manually move a note out of the To do view if they don’t intend to link it to an incident record. However, typically users are encouraged to capture media and then link it. This provides an easy way for users to see notes they still have to deal with. The All Items view shows all notes on a user’s device so they can find older notes & evidence that they need to refer to. SYNCHRONIZING DATA Notes & media files are automatically uploaded to CommandCentral Evidence - a synch indicator is shown on the note to show data is being uploaded, and an indicator is shown on each media item to show that the media item is being uploaded. When a user signs out of Responder app, if they have unsent data (notes & evidence) then Responder will alert the user that they have unsent items - allowing them to ensure they are in an area of coverage and wait for sync to complete. AUTHENTICATION AND SECURITY CommandCentral Responder prevents unauthorized users from accessing the data transmitted to and from mobile devices through an HTTPS connection with FIPS 140-2 Transport Layer Security (TLS) v1.2 encryption. All user requests and other user data are protected by Azure Government services. To access the system, a user authenticates against the CommandCentral Identity Management system. If desired, the identity management system can be setup to federate authentication against a customer identity management system such as Azure AD. Customers can enable multi-factor authentication. • If a customer uses CommandCentral Identity Management directly then multi factor authentication can be enabled for any or all users (at customer decision). If enabled then users need to enter a username & password and a second factor which is either a one time passcode sent by email or a one time passcode or authentication approval enabled via a separate app (Ping ID). • If a customer uses federated authentication then the federated auth system authenticates the user. In this case the customer identity management will implement the multi factor authentication. For instance, Azure AD can enforce multi factor authentication and allows a one time passcode to be provided via email, SMS or via the Azure authenticator app.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 141 of 522 In addition, Responder uses a PIN code (or optionally biometric unlock) that is used to allow users to unlock their app after inactivity timeout. Sign in online is required once per shift to access online data.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 142 of 522 MOBILE VIDEO PRODUCTS NEW SYSTEM STATEMENT OF WORK OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of body-worn camera(s), in-car video system(s), and/or interview recording system(s) and your digital evidence management solution. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. Motorola’s certified installer will work on Motorola’s behalf to install your in-car video system(s). This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation of the hardware and software components listed in the Solutions Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must be mutually agreed upon by both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services & Products provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATION, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer. FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola believes our solution is not in scope of the FBI-CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI-CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL security controls as a guide. Motorola’s design and    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 143 of 522 features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on the Personnel Security section of the CJISSECPOL, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is required to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted access to unencrypted CJI. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information and Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJISSECPOL Personnel Security screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personnel status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have access to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third-party installer (if applicable) will work independently with the Customer to complete the CJISSECPOL Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. COMPLETION CRITERIA The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delays due to incomplete Customer tasks. The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task completion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within ten (10) business days. In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 144 of 522 SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the subscription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access or for hardware, upon shipment of the hardware. The provision and use of the subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW. Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to: • Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. • Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Conduct equipment inventory. • Discovery validation • Maintain project communications with the Customer. • Identify and manage project risks. • Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays. • Evaluate project status against Project Schedule. • Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status. • Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues related to project progress. • Conduct daily status calls with the Customer during Go-Live. Post Sales Engineer The Post Sales Engineer will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • System provisioning. • Data Migration • Contracted data migration between two disparate digital evidence management systems (if applicable, additional fees may apply).    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 145 of 522 Field Engineer (FE) The FE will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • Inspect installation and configure hardware devices. • Provide instructions to the Customer on how to configure the hardware. • Review Deployment Checklist with the Customer. • Develop and submit a Trip Report. • Update Customer IP Map. Professional Services Engineer (if applicable) The Professional Services Engineer is engaged on projects that include integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party software application. Their responsibilities include: • Delivery of the interface between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third- party software (e.g. CAD). Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training on-site or remote depending on the training topic and deployment services purchased. • Deliver provisioning education and guidance to the Customer for operating and maintaining their system. • Provide product education as defined by this SOW and described in the Education Plan. Motorola-Certified Installer (if applicable) The Motorola-certified installer is primarily responsible for installing in-car video systems (ICVs) into Customer vehicles. There are specific requirements the 3rd party partner must meet in order to be considered a Motorola- certified installer, and they include the following: • Required Training - WTG0501 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Remote) or WTG0503 - M500 Vehicle Installation Certification (Live)  Needs to be renewed yearly.  Needs to be submitted to the PM by the technician completing the installation no less than thirty (30) days prior to the installation. - Review of any previous Motorola Solutions Technical Notifications (MTNs). • Optional Training - WGD00186 - M500 Installation Overview and Quick Start (NA)  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. - WGD00177 - M500 In-Car Video System Installation Guide  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. - MN010272A01 - M500 In-Car Video System Basic Service Manual  Not required for installation. Available for the installing technician. Other responsibilities the Motorola-certified installer may be involved in include the installation of cellular routers or Access Points. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 146 of 522 Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost. Project Manager The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to: • Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. • Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities. • Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM. • Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule. • Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM. • Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola. • Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities. • Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. • Monitor Project to ensure resources are available as required. • Attend status meetings. • Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. • Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contractors, and common carriers. • Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date. • Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date. • Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department. • Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certificates, as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner. • Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if required for access. • Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources. • Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project. • Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. • Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel. • Identify and manage project risks.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 147 of 522 • Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to: • Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system. • Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training. • Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems. • Maintain provisioning. • Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Video Management Point of Contact (POC) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Video Manager POC will educate users on digital media policy, participate in Discovery tasks, and complete the Video Management Administration training. The Customer is responsible for its own creation and enforcement of media protection policies and procedures for any digital media created, extracted, or downloaded from the digital evidence management system. Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis, training and provisioning process, including making decisions on global provisioning. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective field (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on provisioning, workflows, and department policies related to the proposed system. Training POC The Training POC will act as the course facilitator and is considered the Customer’s educational monitor. The Training POC will work with Motorola when policy and procedural questions arise. They will be responsible for developing any agency specific training material(s) and configuring new users on the Motorola Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) system. This role will serve as the first line of support during Go-Live for the Customer’s end users. General Customer Responsibilities In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following: • All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, connectivity etc. • Configure, test, and maintain third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system. • Establish an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and provide documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system (if applicable).    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 148 of 522 • Coordinate and facilitate communication between Motorola and Customer third-party vendor(s) as required. • Mitigate the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action. • Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system. • Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions. • Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer- provided remote conferencing tool. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to Motorola installing the proposed system: • Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system. • Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. • Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s). • Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Active Directory for the purpose of installation, configuration, and support. • Provide all environmental conditions such as power, uninterruptible power sources (UPS), HVAC, firewall and network requirements. • Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall. Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 149 of 522 PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. PROJECT PLANNING SESSION A Project Planning Session will occur after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet before the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include: • A high-level review of the following project elements: - Quoting/ordering documents - A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. - Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. - Data Migration questionnaire if migration is included in the Solution - The Business Process Review (BPR), used to document system configuration, agency recording, and retention policies - A high-level Project Schedule with milestones and dates. • Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors. • Determine Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities • Contact the customer to complete the Project Planning Session. • Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Baseline the Project Schedule, if applicable. • Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. Customer Responsibilities • Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting. Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Data Migration Questionnaire (if applicable) • BPR Workbook    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 150 of 522 PROJECT KICKOFF Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation. Note – The IT Questionnaire is completed during the pre-sales process and prior to Contract award. The IT Questionnaire is given to Motorola at the time of offer acceptance. A delay in completing the IT Questionnaire may delay the shipment of equipment. Motorola will not be responsible for any delays associated with or related to the completion of the IT Questionnaire. Motorola Responsibilities • Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW. • Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist. • Discuss the equipment inventory process • Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW. • Review resource requirements. • Provide the initial Project Schedule • Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements. • Review the BPR. • Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Review the LXP training portal. • Request user information required to establish the Customer in LXP. • Review and agree on completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support. Customer Responsibilities • Provide feedback and approval on project delivery requirements and schedule. • Review the Deployment Checklist. • Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority. • Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable). • Complete the BPR Workbook within 5 business days after the conclusion of the Project Kickoff for review during the Discovery Teleconference • Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Provide Motorola with names and contact information of the designated LXP Administrator(s). Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes. • Deployment Checklist. DISCOVERY TELECONFERENCE During the Discovery Teleconference, Motorola will meet with the Customer to review information documented in the BPR Workbook. The Data Migration Questionnaire will also be reviewed if migration is part of the Solution.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 151 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate Discovery Teleconference. • Confirm Customer-provided configuration inputs. Customer Responsibilities • Gather and review the information required to complete the BPR Workbook. • Schedule Customer Project Team and SMEs to attend the Discovery Teleconference. SMEs should be present to weigh in on hardware, software, and network components. Customer attendees should be empowered to convey policies and make modifications to policies as necessary. Motorola Deliverables • Completed BPR Workbook.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 152 of 522 PROJECT EXECUTION HARDWARE PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The hardware will be configured with a basic profile in line with the information provided by the IT Questionnaire or Discovery Teleconference for installation and configuration of the system. The Customer is responsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to: • Power • Heating and Cooling • Network Connectivity • Access and Security • Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities • Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location. • Inventory equipment after arrival at Customer location • Conduct a power-on test to validate that the installed hardware is ready for configuration. • Verify remote connection to hardware. • Complete Deployment Checklist which outlines the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware. Customer Responsibilities • Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location. • Confirm the installation room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.). • Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software workstation(s). • Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System by utilizing the Customer’s Internet connection. • Confirm access to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System cloud on Customer-provided workstation(s). Motorola Deliverables • Contracted Equipment. • Equipment Inventory SVX Configuration as a Remote Speaker Microphone (if applicable) The Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to manage firmware updates on each SVX. In order for this process to be successfully completed, each Smart Dock must be connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Solution through the Customer’s internet connection. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Smart Dock(s) for connectivity to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 153 of 522 • Verifying the SVX Smart Dock(s) are connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System through the Customer’s network. The Customer is responsible for ensuring Motorola has the correct IP address(es) for configuring the Smart Dock(s), and the Customer’s network is operational. • Verify all slots in each Smart Dock are functional. • Provide documentation on how to pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s) using Secure Near-Field Communications (NFC). Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Smart Dock(s). • Provide network information (IP address, gateway, DNS, and subnet mask) to Motorola for each Smart Dock(s). • Enable Bluetooth, Bluetooth Tones, and Secure NFC Touch Pairing on Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s). • Motorola recommends “Power Down Standby Mode (hrs) = 1” to allow the SVX Bluetooth connection to quickly reconnect after power up within the 1-hour timeframe. • Pair the SVX(s) to Motorola APX NEXT and/or APX N70 radio(s) using Secure NFC. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. SVX Configuration as a Body Camera (if applicable) If CommandCentral DEMS Standard, CommandCentral DEMS Plus, or VideoManager EL Cloud device license(s) are included in the contract, the Smart Dock(s) will be utilized to configure each SVX as a body camera. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure SVX(s) within Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System. • Check out SVX(s) and create a test recording. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for up to 25% of purchased SVX(s). • Provide a demonstration of client software. Customer Responsibilities • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. • The Customer will verify whether the Smart Docks(s) are connected to their network. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for the remainder of purchased SVX(s). V700 Body Camera Configuration (if applicable) The Transfer Station(s) will be utilized to configure each V700 body camera according to the Business Process Review. In order for this process to be successfully completed, each Transfer Station must be connected to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management Solution through the Customer’s internet connection. Motorola Responsibilities • Configure Transfer Station(s) for connectivity to the digital evidence management system. • Verify the Transfer Station(s) is configured properly and connected to the network.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 154 of 522 • Configure body camera(s) within the digital evidence management system. • Check out body camera(s) and create a test recording. • Verify video and audio upload to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System for up to 25% of purchased V700(s). • Verify completion of upload from body-worn camera(s) after it is docked in a Transfer Station or USB dock. • Install and provide a demonstration of client software as part of the same on-site engagement as Go-Live, unless otherwise outlined in this SOW. Customer Responsibilities • Select physical location(s) for Transfer Station(s). • Provide and install workstation hardware. • Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and mobile devices. • Validate functionality of components and solution utilizing the Deployment Checklist. • Provide Motorola remote connection information and necessary credentials. In-Car Video System Configuration (if applicable) The Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the in-car video (ICV) system(s) within the Customer-provided vehicle(s). The installer may also be responsible for installing cellular routers or WiFi radios inside the vehicle(s) for wireless upload of video to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer. The Customer vehicles must be available for the FE to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of ICVs. If the Customer does not have all vehicles available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of ICV configurations completed. If the Customer requires the FE to complete the full contractual number of ICVs at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. The following table shows the number of ICVs an FE is contractually obligated to configure and test based on the number of ICVs purchased. Table 1:Number of Contractual ICV Configurations Number of ICV Purchased Number of ICV to Test 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 - 25 5 26 - 50 10 51 - 75 15 76 - 100 20 101 - 150 30    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 155 of 522 Number of ICV Purchased Number of ICV to Test 151 - 200 40 201+ 20% Note – The Pricing Page will reflect in-car video installation services by Motorola if Motorola is responsible for the vehicle installations. Motorola Responsibilities • Setup ICV digital video recorder (DVR) configuration. • Create configuration USB used to complete ICV hardware configuration and validation. • Travel to the Customer site to conduct configuration and testing of ICVs. • The FE will verify whether the AP(s) are properly installed and connected to the network for in-car video system WiFi upload (if applicable). • Complete ICV configuration on a single vehicle, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining ICV configurations. • Complete remaining contracted vehicle configurations. • Test a subset of completed ICV hardware configurations. Motorola-Certified Installer Responsibilities (if applicable) These activities will only be completed by Motorola if Motorola quotes these services; otherwise, the completion of these services are solely the responsibility of the Customer. • Complete the installation of ICV hardware in Customer provided vehicles. • Complete the installation of cellular router and confirm placement of antenna mounting with Customer (if applicable). • Install Customer-provided SIM card into cellular router and connect cellular router to ICV (if applicable). • Installation of Access Point(s) (APs) if provided by Motorola for in-car video system WiFi upload (if applicable). Customer Responsibilities • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete ICV hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the vehicle installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for ICV hardware configuration(s). • Make ICV hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Provide cellular SIM Card for Internet connectivity to the installer at time of vehicle installation (if applicable). • Install Customer-supplied APs (if applicable). • Verify APs are properly installed and connected to the network (if applicable). Motorola Deliverables • Complete Functional Validation Plan as it applies to the proposed solution.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 156 of 522 NOTE - The Customer is responsible for having all vehicles and devices available for installation per the Project Schedule. All cellular data fees and Internet connectivity charges are the responsibility of the Customer. If a Motorola-certified installer is not used to install the ICV(s), Motorola is not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. In the event the Customer takes on the responsibility of installing the ICV(s) through a Motorola-certified installer, Motorola is also not responsible for any errors in hardware installation, performance or delays in the Project Schedule. For ALPR installations, an MDT is required for all vehicles. M500 Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR) Configuration (if applicable) This section highlights the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer when an M500 in-car video system interfaces with the VehicleManager database. Motorola Responsibilities • Create a Customer account in the VehicleManager system with user emails. • Verify the Customer has installed and launched the Vigilant Car Detector Mobile Software per the VehicleManager Quickstart Guide. • Provide Mobile ALPR - Officer Safety Basic and Advanced Pre-Installation Checklist. • Provide Agency Manager with Training Materials and Car Detector Mobile MDC software installation guide. • Advise Agency Manager of different options available to add new users. • Confirm Agency Manager is aware of registration required for Hotlists. • Confirm Agency Manager understands how to set up data-sharing. Customer Responsibilities • Identify the Agency Manager. • Register to receive access to Hotlists. Interview Recording System Configuration (if applicable) When installation services are included as part of the contract, the Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the Interview Recording System(s) within the Customer-provided location(s). The Customer location(s) must be available for the Motorola Resource and/or contracted third party to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of systems. If the Customer does not have all locations available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of configurations completed. If the Customer requires the Motorola Resource and/or contracted third party to complete the full contractual number of systems at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. Motorola Responsibilities • Create configuration USB used to complete hardware configuration and validation. • Conduct configuration and testing of system(s). • Complete configuration on a single system, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining configurations. • Complete remaining contracted system configurations. • Test a subset of completed hardware configurations. • When installation services for Motorola-certified installer are in the contract, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable).    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 157 of 522 Customer Responsibilities • When installation services are being provided by the Customer, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable). • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for hardware configuration(s). • Make hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverables • Complete the Deployment Checklist and testing as it applies to the proposed solution. SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION CommandCentral DEMS (if applicable) CommandCentral DEMS software is a cloud solution that does not require an onsite server. Section 3.2 does not apply to existing Motorola customers using VideoManager EL Cloud. Motorola Responsibilities • Use information provided in BPR Workbook to configure CommandCentral DEMS software. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: • Create users, groups, and setup permissions. • Create event categories. • Set retention policies. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Use the CommandCentral Admin Portal to provision users, groups, and rules based on Customer Active Directory data. • Guide the Customer in the configuration of CommandCentral DEMS. • Ensure training POC can access the system. Customer Responsibilities • Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Active Directory for the purpose of Motorola conducting CommandCentral DEMS provisioning. • Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups, and agency mapping to CommandCentral DEMS. • Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions. • Configure evidence as directed by Motorola. • Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end-user workstations. DATA MIGRATION SERVICES (IF APPLICABLE*) The Customer is responsible for partitioning data to be converted from Motorola on-premises digital evidence management system, or Customer’s Non-Motorola Digital Evidence Management System to Motorola’s cloud solution as part of this offer. The Customer will have ten (10) business days to provide feedback after Motorola validates the migrated data. If feedback is not received on or before ten (10) business days, Motorola will assume the migration is complete. *Data Migration Services may be subject to additional fees.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 158 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Receive access to Customer video data. • Perform contracted data migration and validation. Customer Responsibilities • Provide 24/7 remote access to partitioned data to be migrated. • Customer hardware or virtualization environment will be the sole responsibility of the Customer to troubleshoot and resolve issues. • Validate migrated dataset and provide Motorola with feedback within ten (10) business days. Completion Criteria • A migrated dataset as defined in the Contract. Motorola On-Premises Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola supports data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from our on-premises evidence management systems, Evidence Library 4 and VideoManager EL On-Prem (formally known as Evidence Library 5), to Motorola’s cloud solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Verify compatible platform(s) and upgrade if applicable Customer Responsibilities • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources Non-Motorola Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola will perform data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from the Customer’s Non-Motorola Evidence Management system to the new Motorola Cloud Evidence Management System. Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate the method of obtaining and consuming the data • Review data in the Motorola systems with the customer Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the Non- Motorola digital evidence management system. • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources, if applicable. • Provide API connection to the source, if applicable • Provide data and metadata information in a readable and consumable format • Assist with mapping metadata information into Motorola system INTEGRATIONS AND THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE) The integration between Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System and the Customer’s third-party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the complexity of accessing the third-party system.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 159 of 522 Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third-party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities • Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. • Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third-party systems. • Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the third- party system. • Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts. • Provide network connectivity between digital evidence management system and the third-party system(s). • Provide hardware to run any required interface components for on-prem interfaces when required. • Provide sample data and information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulties with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or non-functional interface. Providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will potentially allow us to mitigate these issues. If the resolution requires additional third-party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or Customer-provided third-party hardware or software.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 160 of 522 SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer-based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote) depending on what is purchased. Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training will be delivered in accordance with the Education Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format. ONLINE TRAINING Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP. This subscription service provides customers with unlimited access to our online training content and provides users with the flexibility of learning the content at their own pace. Training content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Through LXP, a list of available online training courses, Motorola User Guides, and Training Material are accessible in electronic format. Motorola Responsibilities • Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer. • Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer. • Configure a Customer-specific portal view. • Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies. • Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account. • During onboarding, assist the Customer with LXP usage. • Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content. • Provide instruction to Customer LXP Administrator on building groups. Customer Responsibilities • Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts. • Complete LXP Administrator training. • Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to LXP. • Customer's primary LXP Administrator is required to complete the following self-paced training: LXP Introduction (LXP0001), LXP Primary Site Administrator Overview (LXP0002), and LXP Group Administrator Overview (LXP0003). • Advise users on the availability of training through LXP. • Ensure users complete LXP training in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Build groups as needed. ON-SITE TRAINING Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Education Plan. On-site instructor- led classes will utilize the Customer’s hardware and software in order to provide the best training environment. This will allow the Customer to engage in an environment that has been configured and deployed in alignment with this SOW.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 161 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format. • Perform training in accordance with the Education Plan. • Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities • Supply classroom(s) based on the requirements listed in the Education Plan. • Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content. • Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Deliverables • Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials. • Attendance rosters.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 162 of 522 PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the assigned Motorola Resource demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipment has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities • Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement process and contact information. • Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support. • Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete. • Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate. Customer Responsibilities • Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure. • Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motorola’s Technical Support. • Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 163 of 522 ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions: • Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System must be connected to the Microsoft Entra ID (formally known as Microsoft Azure Active Directory) for user authentication to the application. Microsoft Entra ID can be synchronized with the Customer's on-premises Active Directory using Azure AD Connect. If the Customer is using Microsoft Office 365, Motorola will be able to integrate with this Microsoft Entra ID. - If Microsoft Entra ID is not utilized by the Customer, Motorola will provide a free version of Entra ID for user authentication to the application. • Must be 2003 or later for Microsoft Entra ID integration. • Upload Speed Requirements for SVX when used as a body camera: - 5 Mbps + 3 Mbps per additional device.  This assumes it will take 8 hours to upload 5 GB of video on a device. - 40-50 Mbps per concurrent uploading device.  This assumes video is required to upload within 30-40 minutes with approximately 5 GB to upload. • Cellular upload of ICVs and BWCs (if applicable) requires an Ethernet connection to an LTE modem in the vehicle. • If the Customer is supplying their own Access Point for ICV WiFi upload, it must be 5 GHz 802.11n compatible.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 164 of 522 M500 INTERVIEW RECORDING SYSTEM SOLUTION DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW Motorola Solution’s M500 Interview Recording System enables public safety agencies to efficiently manage the interview process from capture to case closure. This solution combines the power of the M500 video system and Pelco ONVIF compliant cameras to ensure every interaction is captured and securely saved. While interviews are being captured, approved users can stay informed in real-time through live streaming capabilities. Integrations with other Motorola Solutions products allows users to manage the interview recordings with tools like interview tagging, redaction and secure sharing while maximizing the value of existing investments. CAMERAS AND HARDWARE The M500 Interview Recording System offers a robust and adaptable solution for capturing and securely managing interview recordings. Designed for individual interview rooms, each system includes a dedicated DVR, a user-friendly display, an omnidirectional Louroe microphone, and flexible camera configurations. Camera Options: The system integrates seamlessly with select M500 cameras and Pelco ONVIF-compliant cameras. Pelco camera configurations require a Power over Ethernet (POE) switch for reliable power and data transmission. Available camera combinations include: • Two (2) Pelco Sarix Pro 4 dome cameras for comprehensive room coverage. • Two (2) Pelco Sarix Modular covert cameras for discreet surveillance. • Mixed configuration of one (1) Pelco Sarix Pro 4 and one (1) Modular covert camera for versatile perspectives. • One (1) M5F and one (1) M5P camera combination. Secure Local Storage and Centralized Video Management: The M500 DVR provides secure local storage for captured audio and video data. This data is then efficiently and securely transferred to VideoManager EL, VideoManager EX, or CommandCentral DEMS, enabling centralized review, management, and archiving. Flexible Recording Initiation: Users can initiate and terminate recordings conveniently via an optional rocker switch or directly through the system's intuitive display, ensuring operational flexibility. VIDEO EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT AND STORAGE Centralized Video Management with VideoManager: The M500 Interview Recording System leverages VideoManager EL Cloud, VideoManager EX, or CommandCentral DEMS for secure and comprehensive management of all captured audio and video. Efficient Evidence Organization and Retrieval: VideoManager and CommandCentral DEMS provide a robust platform for containing, organizing, and managing multimedia evidence from interviews and other sources. Users can efficiently search, correlate, and review video evidence alongside related case information, enabling rapid contextual analysis and case building. Advanced search and filtering capabilities facilitate the discovery of relevant cases and incident details, allowing for seamless integration with interview recordings.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 165 of 522 Secure Access and Informed Decision-Making: VideoManager and CommandCentral DEMS empower personnel to make informed decisions by providing a consolidated and organized view of case evidence. Access- control ensures that only authorized personnel and judiciary partners can access sensitive information, maintaining data integrity and security. LIVE-STREAMING CAPABILITIES Real-Time Interview Streaming: The Interview Streaming Application provides authorized personnel with the ability to live-stream audio and video directly from connected interview rooms. Flexible Configuration and Access Control: Administrators can configure camera groups and manage user access permissions within the application. This ensures controlled and secure live-streaming operations. Remote Live-Streaming Capabilities: Authorized remote users can access live streams from internet-connected computers. Recording initiation and termination are controlled via a wall-mounted switch within the interview room. Network Performance and Video Quality: Live-streaming performance is dependent on the agency's internet connection. Each live stream requires a sustained speed of 1.1 Mbps for optimal viewing. Remote viewers can simultaneously monitor a single camera from each Interview Recording System, with a maximum of 16 concurrent streams. Live streams are displayed in 480p resolution, while recordings are captured at up to 1080p resolution. *For purposes of clarification: Customer acknowledges that this product is an interview room solution and not an alarm system, nor is it intended for use as such.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 166 of 522 MOBILE VIDEO PRODUCTS NEW SYSTEM STATEMENT OF WORK OVERVIEW This Statement of Work (SOW) outlines the responsibilities of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (Motorola) and the Customer for the implementation of the Motorola Interview Recording System and your digital evidence management solution. For the purpose of this SOW, the term “Motorola” may refer to our affiliates, subcontractors, or certified third-party partners. This SOW addresses the responsibilities of Motorola and the Customer that are relevant to the implementation of the hardware and software components listed in the Solutions Description. Any changes or deviations from this SOW must be mutually agreed upon by Motorola and the Customer and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. The Customer acknowledges any changes or deviations from this SOW may incur additional cost. Motorola and the Customer will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule must be mutually agreed upon by both parties in accordance with the change provisions of the Contract. Unless specifically stated, Motorola will perform the work remotely. The Customer will provide Motorola personnel with access to their network and facilities so Motorola is able to fulfill its obligations. All work will be performed during normal business hours based on the Customer’s time zone (Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). The number and type of software subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola are specifically listed in the Contract and referenced in the SOW. Services & Products provided under this SOW are governed by the mutually executed Contract between the parties, or Motorola’s Master Customer Agreement and applicable addenda (“Contract”). AWARD, ADMINISTRATIO N, AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following the execution of the Contract between Motorola and the Customer. At the conclusion of Project Planning, Motorola’s Project Manager (PM) will begin status meetings and provide status reports on a regular cadence with the Customer’s PM. The status report will provide a summary of activities completed, activities planned, progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention, as well as, potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Google Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Customer desires to use an alternative teleconferencing tool, any costs incurred from the use of this alternate teleconferencing tool will be the responsibility of the Customer. FBI-CJIS SECURITY POLICY – CRIMINAL JUSTICE INFORMATION CJIS Security Policy Compliance Motorola believes our solution is not in scope of the FBI-CJIS Security Policy (CJISSECPOL) based on the definition in Section 4 of CJISSECPOL and how the FBI-CJIS defines Criminal Justice Information. However, Motorola does design its products with the CJISSECPOL security controls as a guide. Motorola’s design and    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 167 of 522 features support best practice security controls and policy compliance. In the event of a CJIS technical audit request, Motorola will support the Customer throughout this process. Personnel Security – Background Screening Motorola will assist the Customer with completing the CJIS Security Policy Section Personnel Security related to authorized personnel background screening when requested to do so by the Customer. Based on the Personnel Security section of the CJISSECPOL, a Motorola employee is defined as someone who is required to be on the Customer’s property with unescorted logical or physical access to any information system resulting in the ability, right, or privilege to view, modify, or make use of unencrypted CJI. Motorola employees will also have access to the Customer’s network(s) and stored information and Motorola has remote access tools to support virtual escorted access to on-premises customer assets. Additionally, Motorola performs independent criminal background investigations including name based background checks, credential and educational vetting, credit checks, U.S. citizen and authorized worker identity verification on its employees. Motorola will support the Customer in the event of a CJIS audit request to validate employees assigned to the project requiring CJIS Personnel Security fingerprint based background screening and determine whether this list is up to date and accurate. Motorola will notify the Customer within 24 hours or next business day of a personnel status change. Security Awareness Training Motorola requires all employees who will support the Customer to undergo Level 3 Security Awareness Training provided by Peak Performance and their CJIS online training platform. If the Customer does not have access to these records, Motorola can facilitate proof of completion. If the Customer requires additional and/or separate training, Motorola will work with the Customer to accommodate this request at an additional cost. CJIS Security Addendum Motorola requires all employees directly supporting the Customer to sign the CJIS Security Addendum if required to do so by the Customer. Third Party Installer The Motorola-certified third-party installer (if applicable) will work independently with the Customer to complete the CJISSECPOL Personnel Security checks, complete Security Awareness Training and execute the CJIS Security Addendum. COMPLETION CRITERIA The project is considered complete once Motorola has completed all responsibilities listed in this SOW. The Customer’s task completion will occur based on the Project Schedule to ensure Motorola is able to complete all tasks without delays. Motorola will not be held liable for project delays due to incomplete Customer tasks. The Customer must provide Motorola with written notification if they do not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities. Written notification must be provided to Motorola within ten (10) business days of task completion. The project will be deemed accepted if no written notification is received within ten (10) business days.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 168 of 522 In the absence of written notification for non-acceptance, beneficial use will occur thirty (30) days after functional demonstration of the system. SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE PERIOD If the contracted system includes a subscription, the subscription service period will begin upon the Customer’s receipt of credentials for access or for hardware, upon shipment of the hardware. The provision and use of the subscription service is governed by the Contract. PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities The Motorola Project Team will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Each team member will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. Some team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fulfill more than one role. In order to maximize effectiveness, the Motorola Project Team will provide various services remotely by teleconference, web-conference, or other remote method in order to fulfill our commitments as outlined in this SOW. Our experience has shown customers who take an active role in the operational and educational process of their system realize user adoption sooner and achieve higher levels of success with system operation. The subsections below provide an overview of each Motorola Project Team Member. Project Manager (PM) The PM will be the principal business representative and point of contact for Motorola. The PM’s responsibilities may include but are not limited to the following tasks: • Manage Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. • Maintain the Project Schedule, and manage assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Coordinate schedules of assigned Motorola personnel, subcontractors, and suppliers as applicable. • Conduct equipment inventory. • Perform discovery validation. • Maintain project communications with the Customer. • Identify and manage project risks. • Coordinate collaboration of Customer resources to minimize project delays. • Evaluate project status against Project Schedule. • Conduct status meetings on mutually agreed upon dates to discuss project status. • Provide timely responses to Customer inquiries and issues related to project progress. • Conduct daily status calls with the Customer during Go-Live. Post Sales Engineer The Post Sales Engineer will work with the Customer’s Project Team on: • System provisioning. • Data Migration.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 169 of 522 • Contracted data migration between two disparate digital evidence management systems (if applicable, additional fees may apply). Field Engineer (FE) The FE will collaborate with the Customer’s Project Team, focusing on the following tasks: • Inspect installation and configure hardware devices. • Provide instructions to the Customer on how to configure the hardware. • Review Deployment Checklist with the Customer. • Develop and submit a Trip Report. • Update Customer IP Map. Professional Services Engineer (if applicable) The Professional Services Engineer is engaged on projects that include integration between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third-party software application. Their responsibilities include: • Delivery of the interface between Motorola’s digital evidence management system and the Customer’s third- party software (e.g. CAD). Technical Trainer / Instructor The Technical Trainer / Instructor provides training on-site or remote depending on the training topic and deployment services purchased. Their responsibilities include the following tasks: • Deliver provisioning education and guidance to the Customer for operating and maintaining their system. • Provide product education as defined by this SOW and described in the Education Plan. Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services Team will provide on-going support to the Customer following Go-Live and final acceptance of the project. Customer Project Roles and Responsibilities Motorola has defined key resources that are critical to this project and must participate in all the activities defined in this SOW. During the Project Planning phase, the Customer will be required to provide names and contact information for the roles listed below. It is critical that these resources are empowered to make decisions based on the Customer’s operational and administration needs. The Customer Project Team will be engaged from Project Initiation through Beneficial Use of the system. In the event the Customer is unable to provide the resources identified in this section, Motorola may be able to supplement these resources at an additional cost. Project Manager The PM will act as the primary point of contact for the duration of the project. In the event the project involves multiple locations, Motorola will work exclusively with the Customer’s primary PM. The PM’s responsibilities will include, but are not limited to the following tasks: • Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. • Manage the Customer Project Team including subcontractors and third-party vendors. This includes timely facilitation of tasks and activities. • Maintain project communications with the Motorola PM. • Identify tasks required of Customer staff that are outlined in this SOW and the Project Schedule.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 170 of 522 • Consolidate all project inquiries from Customer staff to present to Motorola PM. • Approve a deployment date offered by Motorola. • Review Project Schedule with the Motorola PM and finalize tasks, dates, and responsibilities. • Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. • Monitor Project to ensure resources are available as required. • Attend status meetings. • Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. • Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Customer vendors, contractors, and common carriers. • Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to meet the deployment date. • Ensure Customer vendors’ readiness ahead of the deployment date. • Assign one or more personnel to work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including one or more representatives from the IT department. • Identify a resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve milestone recognition certificates, as well as, approve and release payments in a timely manner. • Provide Motorola personnel with access to all Customer facilities where system equipment is to be installed. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel, if required for access. • Ensure remote network connectivity and access for Motorola resources. • Assume responsibility for all fees pertaining to licenses, inspections and any delays associated with inspections due to required permits as applicable to this project. • Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure from contaminants that may cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. • Ensure a safe working environment for Motorola personnel. • Identify and manage project risks. • Provide signature(s) of Motorola-provided milestone recognition certificate(s) within ten (10) business days of receipt. IT Support IT Support manages the technical efforts and ongoing activities of the Customer’s system. IT Support will be responsible for managing Customer provisioning and providing Motorola with the required information for LAN, WAN and client infrastructure. The IT Support Team responsibilities include but are not limited to the following tasks: • Participate in delivery and training activities to understand the software and functionality of the system. • Participate with Customer Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) during the provisioning process and associated training. • Authorize global provisioning decisions and be the Point of Contact (POC) for reporting and verifying problems. • Maintain provisioning. • Implement changes to Customer infrastructure in support of the proposed system. Video Management Point of Contact (POC) The Video Manager POC will educate users on digital media policy, participate in Discovery tasks, and complete the Video Management Administration training. The Customer is responsible for their own creation and enforcement of media protection policies and procedures for any digital media created, extracted, or downloaded from the digital evidence management system.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 171 of 522 Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) SMEs are a core group of users involved with the analysis, training and provisioning process, including making decisions on global provisioning. The SMEs should be experienced users in their own respective fields (evidence, dispatch, patrol, etc.) and should be empowered by the Customer to make decisions based on provisioning, workflows, and department policies related to the proposed system. Training POC The Training POC will act as the course facilitator and is considered the Customer’s educational monitor. The Training POC will work with Motorola when policy and procedural questions arise. They will be responsible for developing any agency specific training material(s) and configuring new users on the Motorola Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) system. This role will serve as the first line of support during Go-Live for the Customer’s end users. General Customer Responsibilities In addition to the Customer responsibilities listed above, the Customer is responsible for the following: • All Customer-provided equipment, including third-party hardware, network connectivity, and software needed for the proposed system but not listed as a Motorola deliverable. Examples include end user workstations, network equipment, connectivity etc. • Configuring, testing, and maintaining third-party system(s) that will interface with the proposed system. • Establishing an Application Programming Interface (API) for applicable third-party system(s) and providing documentation that describes the integration to the Motorola system. • Coordinating and facilitating communication between Motorola and Customer third-party vendor(s) as required. • Mitigating the impact of upgrading Customer third-party system(s) that will integrate with the proposed system. Motorola strongly recommends working with the Motorola Project Team to understand the impact of such upgrades prior to taking action. • Upgrades to Customer’s existing system(s) in order to support the proposed system. • Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions. • Ability to participate in remote project meetings using Google Meet or a mutually agreed upon Customer- provided remote conferencing tool. Motorola is not responsible for any delays that arise from Customer’s failure to perform the responsibilities outlined in this SOW or delays caused by Customer’s third-party vendor(s) or subcontractor(s). NETWORK AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following requirements must be met by the Customer prior to the installation of the proposed system: • Provide network connectivity for the transfer and exchange of data for the proposed system. • Provide devices such as workstations, tablets, and smartphones with Internet access for system usage. Chrome is the recommended browser for optimal performance. • Provide and install antivirus software for workstation(s). • Provide Motorola with administrative rights to Microsoft Entra ID (Active Directory) for the purpose of installation, configuration, and support. • Provide all environmental conditions such as power, uninterruptible power sources (UPS), HVAC, firewall and network requirements. • Ensure required traffic is routed through Customer’s firewall.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 172 of 522 Motorola is not responsible for any costs or delays that arise from Customer’s failure to meet network and hardware requirements.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 173 of 522 PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of Motorola and the Customer is critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of specific information to set clear project expectations and guidelines, as well as lay the foundation for a successful implementation. PROJECT PLANNING SESSION A Project Planning Session will occur after the Contract has been executed. The Project Planning Session is an opportunity for the Motorola and Customer PM to meet before the Project Kickoff Meeting and review key elements of the project and expectations. Depending on the items purchased, the agenda will typically include: • A high-level review of the following project elements: • Quoting/ordering documents. • A summary of contracted applications and hardware as purchased. • Customer’s involvement in project activities to confirm understanding of scope and required time commitments. • Data Migration questionnaire if migration is included in the Solution. • The Business Process Review (BPR), used to document system configuration, agency recording, and retention policies. • A high-level Project Schedule with milestones and dates. • Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or subcontractors. • Determine Customer location for Motorola to ship their equipment for installation. Motorola Responsibilities • Contact the customer to complete the Project Planning Session. • Request the assignment of Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Baseline the Project Schedule, if applicable. • Document mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. Customer Responsibilities • Identify Customer Project Team and any additional Customer resources that are instrumental to the project’s success. • Acknowledge the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff Meeting. Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. • Data Migration Questionnaire (if applicable). • BPR Workbook.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 174 of 522 PROJECT KICKOFF Motorola will work with the Customer to understand the impact of introducing a new solution and the preparedness needed for a successful implementation. Note – The IT Questionnaire is completed during the pre-sales process and prior to Contract award. The IT Questionnaire is given to Motorola at the time of offer acceptance. A delay in completing the IT Questionnaire may delay the shipment of equipment. Motorola will not be responsible for any delays associated with or related to the completion of the IT Questionnaire. Motorola Responsibilities • Review Contract documents including project delivery requirements as described in this SOW. • Discuss the deployment start date and deliver the Deployment Checklist. • Discuss the equipment inventory process • Discuss project team participants and their role(s) in the project with fulfilling the obligations of this SOW. • Review resource requirements. • Provide the initial Project Schedule • Discuss Motorola remote system access requirements. • Review the BPR. • Complete all necessary documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Review the LXP training portal. • Request user information required to establish the Customer in LXP. • Review and agree on completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support. Customer Responsibilities • Provide feedback and approval on project delivery requirements and schedule. • Review the Deployment Checklist. • Review the roles of project participants to identify decision-making authority. • Validate non-disclosure agreements, approvals, and other related items are complete (if applicable). • Complete the BPR Workbook within 5 business days after the conclusion of the Project Kickoff for review during the Discovery Teleconference. • Provide all documentation (i.e. fingerprints, background checks, card keys, etc.) required for Motorola resources to gain access to Customer facilities. • Provide Motorola with names and contact information of the designated LXP Administrator(s). Motorola Deliverables • Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes. • Deployment Checklist. DISCOVERY TELECONFERENCE During the Discovery Teleconference, Motorola will meet with the Customer to review information documented in the BPR Workbook. The Data Migration Questionnaire will also be reviewed if migration is part of the Solution.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 175 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate Discovery Teleconference. • Confirm Customer-provided configuration inputs. Customer Responsibilities • Gather and review the information required to complete the BPR Workbook. • Schedule Customer Project Team and SMEs to attend the Discovery Teleconference. SMEs should be present to weigh in on hardware, software, and network components. Customer attendees should be empowered to convey policies and make modifications to policies as necessary. Motorola Deliverables • Completed BPR Workbook.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 176 of 522 PROJECT EXECUTION HARDWARE PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION Motorola will procure contracted hardware as part of the ordering process. The hardware will be configured with a basic profile in line with the information provided by the IT Questionnaire or Discovery Teleconference for installation and configuration of the system. The Customer is responsible for providing an installation environment that meets manufacturer’s specifications for the hardware, which includes but is not limited to: • Power • Heating and Cooling • Network Connectivity • Access and Security • Conduit and Cabling Motorola Responsibilities • Procure contracted equipment and ship to the Customer's designated location. • Inventory equipment after arrival at Customer location. • Conduct a power-on test to validate that the installed hardware is ready for configuration. • Verify remote connection to hardware. • Verify the Interview Recording System(s) are connected to Motorola’s Evidence Management System through the Customer’s network. • Complete Deployment Checklist which outlines the activities completed during configuration and testing of system hardware. Customer Responsibilities • Procure Customer-provided equipment and make it available at the installation location. • Confirm the installation room complies with environmental requirements (i.e. power, uninterruptible power, surge protection, heating/cooling, etc.). • Provide, install, and maintain antivirus software on workstation(s). • Provide Motorola the correct IP address(es) for configuring the system and the Customer’s network is operational. • Enable outgoing network connection (external firewall) to Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System by utilizing the Customer’s Internet connection. • Confirm access to Motorola’s Evidence Management System on Customer-provided workstation(s). • The Customer will verify whether the Interview Recording System(s) are connected to their network. Motorola Deliverables • Contracted Equipment. • Equipment Inventory. Interview Recording System Configuration When installation services are included as part of the contract, the Motorola-certified installer will complete the installation of the Interview Recording System(s) within the Customer-provided location(s).    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 177 of 522 The Customer location(s) must be available for the Motorola Resource and/or contracted third party to complete the configuration and testing of the contractual number of systems. If the Customer does not have all locations available during the agreed upon date and time, the Customer may opt to sign-off on the number of configurations completed. If the Customer requires the Motorola Resource and/or contracted third party to complete the full contractual number of systems at a later date and time, additional cost may be incurred. Motorola Responsibilities • Create configuration USB used to complete hardware configuration and validation. • Conduct configuration and testing of system(s). • Complete configuration on a single system, and validate the configuration with the Customer. • Receive Customer approval to proceed with remaining configurations. • Complete remaining contracted system configurations. • Test a subset of completed hardware configurations. • When installation services for Motorola-certified installer are in the contract, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable). Customer Responsibilities • When installation services are being provided by the Customer, complete the installation of the Interview Recording System (if applicable). • Provide Motorola with remote connection and access credentials to complete hardware configuration. • Notify Motorola of the installation location. • Coordinate and schedule date and time for hardware configuration(s). • Make hardware available to Motorola for configuration and testing in accordance with the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverables • Complete the Deployment Checklist and testing as it applies to the proposed solution. SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION (IF APPLICABLE) Motorola will perform Cloud provisioning services, or On-Premises provisioning services for new customers that are not utilizing Motorola’s VideoManager EL, VideoManager EL Cloud, VideoManager EX, or CommandCentral DEMS evidence management systems. For Customers with existing Motorola On-Premises or Cloud evidence management systems, Section 3.2 does not apply. Motorola will configure the new Interview Recording System in the Customer’s existing Motorola evidence management solution in accordance with Section 3.1. On-Premises Solution Software The VideoManager EL and VideoManager EX software are on-premises solutions that require an onsite server and support the Interview Recording system. Motorola will install VideoManager EL software on a specified number of workstations dictated by the Contract. The Customer will be responsible for installing the software on the remaining workstations. Provisioning of VideoManager EL software will be done in accordance with the information contained in the BPR Workbook.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 178 of 522 Installation of VideoManager EL software consists of the following activities: • Delivery and installation of server hardware (if applicable). • Network discovery. • Operating system and software installation. • Onboarding user / group identity set up. • Provide access to the application. Motorola Responsibilities • Install software on a specified number of customer workstations. • Use information provided in the BPR Workbook to configure VideoManager EL or VideoManager EX software. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: • Create users, groups, and setup permissions. • Create event categories. • Set retention policies. • Create Device Configurations. Customer Responsibilities • Provide a network environment that conforms to the requirements presented in the Solution Description. • Procure and install server and storage hardware at desired location in accordance with Solution Description requirements. • Perform a power on test with Motorola. • Provide assigned Motorola System Administrator with access to SQL database for installation purposes (Motorola’s access will be revoked upon conclusion of the installation). • For Active Directory integration, provide domain user (service account), security group (for application administrators including service account), and domain read access. • Provide workstation hardware. • Complete online training. • Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and/or mobile devices. Cloud Solution Software The CommandCentral DEMS and VideoManager EL Cloud are cloud solutions that do not require an onsite server and support the Interview Recording System. Motorola Responsibilities • Use information provided in BPR Workbook to configure software. • Based on Customer feedback, perform the following activities: • Create users, groups, and setup permissions. • Create event categories. • Set retention policies. • Create Device Configurations. • Create Camera Groups. • Test software using applicable portions of the Functional Validation Plan.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 179 of 522 • Provision users, groups, and rules based on Customer Active Directory data. • Guide the Customer in the configuration of the cloud solution purchased. • Ensure training POC can access the system. Customer Responsibilities • Supply access and credentials to Customer’s Microsoft Entra ID (Active Directory) for the purpose of Motorola conducting cloud provisioning. • Respond to Motorola’s inquiries regarding users, groups, and agency mapping to the cloud solution. • Provision policies, procedures, and user permissions. • Configure evidence as directed by Motorola. • Verify traffic can be routed through Customer’s firewall and reaches end-user workstations. DATA MIGRATION SERVICES (IF APPLICABLE*) The Customer is responsible for partitioning data to be converted from Motorola on-premises digital evidence management system, or Customer’s Non-Motorola Digital Evidence Management System to Motorola’s cloud solution as part of this offer. The Customer will have ten (10) business days to provide feedback after Motorola validates the migrated data. If feedback is not received on or before ten (10) business days, Motorola will assume the migration is complete. *Data Migration Services may be subject to additional fees. Motorola Responsibilities • Receive access to Customer video data. • Perform contracted data migration and validation. Customer Responsibilities • Provide 24/7 remote access to partitioned data to be migrated. • Customer hardware or virtualization environment will be the sole responsibility of the Customer to troubleshoot and resolve issues. • Validate migrated dataset and provide Motorola with feedback within ten (10) business days. Completion Criteria • A migrated dataset as defined in the Contract. Motorola On-Premises Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola supports data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from our on-premises evidence management systems, Evidence Library 4 and VideoManager EL to Motorola’s cloud solution. Motorola Responsibilities • Verify compatible platform(s) and upgrade if applicable Customer Responsibilities • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources. Non-Motorola Evidence Management System (if applicable) Motorola will perform data migration of digital assets and associated metadata from the Customer’s Non-Motorola Evidence Management system to the new Motorola Cloud Evidence Management System.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 180 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Facilitate the method of obtaining and consuming the data. • Review data in the Motorola systems with the customer. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the Non- Motorola digital evidence management system. • Provide internet connectivity from on-premises server to destination resources, if applicable. • Provide API connection to the source, if applicable. • Provide data and metadata information in a readable and consumable format. • Assist with mapping metadata information into Motorola system. INTEGRATIONS AND THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE) The integration between Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System and the Customer’s third-party system may consist of an iterative series of activities depending on the complexity of accessing the third-party system. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Customer is responsible for engaging third-party vendors as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interface(s). Motorola Responsibilities • Develop and configure interface(s) to support the functionality described in the Solution Description. • Establish and validate connectivity between Motorola and third-party systems. • Perform functional demonstration to confirm the interface(s) can transmit and receive data to the Customer’s digital evidence management system. Customer Responsibilities • Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendor(s) as required to establish connectivity to the third- party system. • Provide personnel authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support Motorola’s integration efforts. • Provide network connectivity between digital evidence management system and the third-party system(s). • Provide hardware to run any required interface components for on-prem interfaces when required. • Provide sample data and information on API, SDKs, data scheme, and any documentation necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems. This information should be provided to the Motorola PM within ten (10) business days of the Interface Engagement Meeting. NOTE - At the time of initial design, unknown circumstances, requirements or anomalies may present difficulties with interfacing Motorola products to a third-party application. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or non-functional interface. Providing Motorola with this information early in the deployment process, will potentially allow us to mitigate these issues. If the resolution requires additional third-party integration, application upgrades, APIs, and/or additional software licenses, the Customer is responsible for addressing these issues at their cost. Motorola is not responsible for any delays or costs associated with third-party applications or Customer-provided third-party hardware or software.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 181 of 522 SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this section is to prepare for and deliver training. Motorola training consists of computer-based (online) and instructor-led (on-site or remote) depending on what is purchased. Our training delivery methods will vary depending on course content. Training will be delivered in accordance with the Education Plan. As part of our training delivery, Motorola will provide user guides and training materials in an electronic format. ONLINE TRAINING Online training is made available to the Customer through LXP. This subscription service provides customers with unlimited access to our online training content and provides users with the flexibility of learning the content at their own pace. Training content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Through LXP, a list of available online training courses, Motorola User Guides, and Training Material are accessible in electronic format. Motorola Responsibilities • Designate a LXP Administrator to work with the Customer. • Establish an accessible instance of LXP for the Customer. • Configure a Customer-specific portal view. • Organize content to align with Customer’s selected technologies. • Create initial Customer user accounts and a single Primary Administrator account. • During onboarding, assist the Customer with LXP usage. • Provide technical support for user account and access issues, LXP functionality, and Motorola managed content. • Provide instruction to Customer LXP Administrator on building groups. Customer Responsibilities • Provide user information for the initial creation of accounts. • Complete LXP Administrator training. • Ensure network and Internet connectivity for Customer access to LXP. • Customer's primary LXP Administrator is required to complete the following self-paced training: LXP Introduction (LXP0001), LXP Primary Site Administrator Overview (LXP0002), and LXP Group Administrator Overview (LXP0003). • Advise users on the availability of training through LXP. • Ensure users complete LXP training in accordance with the Project Schedule. • Build groups as needed. ON-SITE TRAINING Instructor-led courses are based on products purchased and the Customer’s Education Plan. On-site instructor- led classes will utilize the Customer’s hardware and software in order to provide the best training environment. This will allow the Customer to engage in an environment that has been configured and deployed in alignment with this SOW.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 182 of 522 Motorola Responsibilities • Deliver User Guides and training materials in an electronic format. • Perform training in accordance with the Education Plan. • Provide the Customer with training attendance rosters and summarize any pertinent information that may impact end user training. Customer Responsibilities • Supply classroom(s) based on the requirements listed in the Education Plan. • Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainer(s) to deliver the training content. • Facilitate training of all Customer end users in accordance with the Customer’s Education Plan. Motorola Deliverables • Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials. • Attendance rosters.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 183 of 522 PROJECT GO-LIVE, CLOSURE, AND HANDOVER TO SUPPORT Motorola will utilize the Deployment Checklist throughout the deployment process to verify features and functionality are in line with installation and configuration requirements. The Customer will witness the assigned Motorola Resource demonstrating the Deployment Checklist and provide feedback as features and functionality are demonstrated. The Customer is considered Live on the system after the equipment has been installed, configured, and made available for use, and training has been delivered or made available to the Customer. Upon the conclusion of Go-Live, the project is prepared for closure. Project closure is defined as the completion of tasks and the Customer’s receipt of contracted components. The Deployment Checklist serves as the artifact that memorializes a project closure. A System Acceptance Certificate will be provided to the Customer for signature to formally close out the project. The Customer has ten (10) business days to provide Motorola with a signed System Acceptance Certificate. If the Customer does not sign off on this document or provide Motorola written notification rejecting project closure, the project will be deemed closed. Upon project closure, the Customer will engage with Technical Support for on-going needs in accordance with the Customer’s specific terms and conditions of support. Motorola Responsibilities • Provide the Customer with Motorola Technical Support engagement process and contact information. • Provide Technical Support with the contact information of Customer users who are authorized to engage Technical Support. • Ensure Deployment Checklist is complete. • Obtain Customer signature on the System Acceptance Certificate. Customer Responsibilities • Within ten (10) business days of receiving the System Acceptance Certificate, provide signatory approval signifying project closure. • Provide Motorola with the contact information of users who are authorized to engage Motorola’s Technical Support. • Engage Technical Support as needed. Motorola Completion Criteria Provide Customer with survey upon closure of the project.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 184 of 522 ASSUMPTIONS This SOW is based on the following list of assumptions: • Motorola’s Cloud Evidence Management System must be connected to the Microsoft Entra ID (formerly known as Microsoft Azure Active Directory) for user authentication to the application. Microsoft Entra ID can be synchronized with the Customer's on-premises Active Directory using Azure AD Connect. If the Customer is using Microsoft Office 365, Motorola will be able to integrate with this Microsoft Entra ID. - If Microsoft Entra ID is not utilized by the Customer, Motorola will provide a free version of Entra ID for user authentication to the application. • Must be 2003 or later for Microsoft Entra ID integration. • Upload Speed Requirements: - 5 Mbps + 3 Mbps per additional device.  This assumes it will take 8 hours to upload 5 GB of video on a device. - 40-50 Mbps per concurrent uploading device.  This assumes video is required to upload within 30-40 minutes with approximately 5 GB to upload.    QUOTE-3152576      Any sales transaction following Motorola's quote is based on and subject to the terms and conditions of the valid and executed written contract between Customer and Motorola (the""Underlying Agreement"") that authorizes Customer to purchase equipment and/or services or license software (collectively ""Products""). If no Underlying Agreement exists betweenMotorola and Customer, then Motorola's Standard Terms of Use and Motorola's Standard Terms and Conditions of Sales and Supply shall govern the purchase of the Products.  Page 185 of 522 Page 1 of 8 GOVERNMENT CONTRACT AND PURCHASING RIDER FOR CONTRACTS WITH THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS (For Use with Motorola Solutions, Inc.) By entering into a contract, issuing or accepting a purchase order, or otherwise procuring goods or services from Motorola Solutions, Inc. (“Motorola”), the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home rule municipality (“Town”) and Motorola (together, the “Parties”) agree that this Government Contract and Purchasing Rider (“Rider”) is incorporated into, governs, and supersedes any conflicting term in, the underlying agreement, quotes, statements of work (SOWs), order forms, invoices, or online/click-through terms (collectively, the “Agreement”), except where expressly approved by the Town Council in writing and permissible by Texas law. SECTION 1. TIME FOR PAYMENT AND INTEREST. Town payments are governed by the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Tex. Gov’t Code Ch. 2251. Payment is due within thirty (30) days of the latest of: (i) Town’s receipt of goods; (ii) completion of services; or (iii) Town’s receipt of a proper invoice. Interest on overdue amounts shall not exceed the rate permitted by Chapter 2251. Any conflicting late-fee, penalty, or higher interest provision is deleted from the Agreement. SECTION 2. INDEMNIFICATION; LIABILITY; NO FUTURE DEBT. (a) Multiyear Contracts & No Future Debt. All Town payment obligations are subject to the availability and annual appropriation of funds consistent with Tex. Const. art. XI, §5 and applicable law. If funds are not appropriated for any subsequent fiscal year, the Agreement terminates at the end of the then-current funded period without penalty. Nothing herein creates an unconstitutional debt or requires a sinking fund. (b) Limitation of Liability; Damages. Neither party is liable for incidental or consequential damages to the extent permitted by law. Town’s monetary liability, if any, shall not exceed amounts paid by Town in the twelve (12) months preceding the event giving rise to the claim, subject to Tex. Loc. Gov’t Code § 271.153 and applicable law. Any liability caps do not apply to the carve-outs specified in subsection (c)(iii)–(iv) below. (c) Motorola Indemnity; Town Non-Indemnity. (i) Motorola shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Town, its officers, employees, and agents from third-party claims to the extent arising out of: (A) bodily injury or property damage caused by Motorola or its subcontractors; (B) any data breach or security incident involving Town Data caused by Motorola or its subcontractors; and (C) actual or alleged infringement or misappropriation of intellectual property by Motorola-provided software, services, or equipment (excluding Town materials). Page 186 of 522 Page 2 of 8 (ii) IP Remedies. Motorola shall procure the right for continued use, or replace/modify the affected item to be non-infringing without material loss of functionality; if not feasible, Motorola shall accept return and refund unused, prepaid amounts. (iii) Limitation Carve-Outs. Any contractual caps do not apply to Motorola’s indemnities, breaches of confidentiality/CJIS/security obligations, data breach remediation caused by Motorola or its subcontractors, or Motorola’s willful misconduct or fraud. (iv) Town Non-Indemnity. Any provision requiring the Town to defend or indemnify is void to the extent it would create an unconstitutional debt or otherwise violate Texas law. The Town is not required to create a sinking fund. SECTION 3. TERMINATION. (a) Convenience. Either party may terminate for convenience on thirty (30) days’ prior written notice. Town shall pay for conforming goods/services received during the Term of the Agreement, until the date of termination. (b) Non-Appropriation. The Town may terminate the Agreement without penalty, or any liability to Motorola, if funds are not appropriated for any fiscal period after the Agreement’s effective fiscal period. (c) Cause/Non-Compliance. Town may terminate due to Motorola’s material breach after notice and the applicable cure period as provided in the Agreement. (d) No Auto-Renew. Automatic renewals are ineffective unless expressly approved by the Town in writing. SECTION 4. INSURANCE. (a) Motorola Insurance. Motorola shall maintain at minimum: Commercial General Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence / $2,000,000 aggregate; Automobile Liability $1,000,000 CSL; Workers’ Compensation statutory & Employers’ Liability $1,000,000; and Technology Errors & Omissions/Cyber Liability (network security, privacy, media) $5,000,000 per claim. Except Workers’ Compensation, policies shall name the Town as Additional Insured where available, on a primary and non-contributory basis, with waiver of subrogation. Certificates due before work and upon renewal. (b) Town Self-Insurance. The Town is a governmental unit and self-insured under Tex. Gov’t Code Ch. 2259; it is not required to purchase insurance. Page 187 of 522 Page 3 of 8 SECTION 5. CONFIDENTIALITY; TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT. All information related to the Agreement is subject to the Texas Public Information Act (TPIA), Tex. Gov’t Code Ch. 552. Any conflicting nondisclosure term is unenforceable to the extent it prevents disclosure required by law. Motorola shall promptly assist the Town, at no additional charge, with searches, exports, and necessary chain-of-custody declarations for responsive records, including digital evidence. SECTION 6. TAX EXEMPTION. The Town is exempt from state sales and use tax under Tex. Tax Code §151.309 and federal excise taxes, as applicable. Motorola shall not charge exempt taxes. The Town will provide exemption documentation upon request. SECTION 7. GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE. This Agreement is governed by Texas law, without regard to conflict of law principles. Exclusive venue lies in a court of competent jurisdiction in Denton County, Texas. Any requirement for foreign law or venue is void. SECTION 8. ATTORNEYS’ FEES; PENALTIES; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. The Town’s liability for attorneys’ fees and damages, if any, is limited as permitted by Tex. Loc. Gov’t Code §271.153. Any penalties, liquidated damages, or fee-shifting obligations inconsistent with §271.153 are void. SECTION 9. SOVEREIGN/GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY; GOVERNMENTAL FUNCTION. The Town enters the Agreement in performance of governmental functions for public health, safety, and welfare. Nothing waives the Town’s sovereign or governmental immunity. Any waiver of immunity is limited to Subchapter I, Chapter 271, Texas Local Government Code, to the extent applicable. SECTION 10. ASSIGNMENT. Neither party may assign or transfer rights or interests without the other party’s prior written consent (not unreasonably withheld). Any contrary boilerplate permitting unilateral assignment (including to affiliates) is inoperative without Town consent. Page 188 of 522 Page 4 of 8 SECTION 11. RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY. The Town retains its right to trial by jury. Any waiver of jury trial is void. The Town expressly reserves its legislative and municipal police power in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas. Any provision, term, or condition in the Agreement requiring the Town to waive its rights under the Texas or Federal Constitution, or under any foreign law(s), or limiting the claims or remedies available to the Town, or requiring settlement of claims through mandatory binding mediation or arbitration are void and shall be given no effect. SECTION 12. ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION. Binding arbitration requirements are void. Before litigation, the Parties may agree in writing to non-binding mediation held in Denton County, Texas (AAA rules or as mutually agreed). Each party bears its own fees and shares mediator costs equally. SECTION 13. LIMITATION ON CLAIMS. Any claim for breach must be brought within four (4) years consistent with Tex. Civ. Prac. & Rem. Code §16.004 and Tex. Bus. & Com. Code § 2.725, as applicable. SECTION 14. FORCE MAJEURE. Neither party is liable for delay or failure to perform due to Force Majeure (e.g., acts of God, war, civil commotion, epidemics, pandemics, governmental restrictions, strikes, material shortages). If such event continues for thirty (30) or more days, either party may terminate affected services without penalty, paying only for conforming goods or services actually received. SECTION 15. RIGHT TO AUDIT; RECORDS RETENTION. The Town may, until three (3) years after final payment (or longer as required by law or litigation hold), access and examine any directly pertinent Motorola books and records (electronic or hardcopy) related to the Agreement. Access shall occur during normal business hours upon at least ten (10) business days’ notice. SECTION 16. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. This Rider binds the Parties and their successors and permitted assigns. Page 189 of 522 Page 5 of 8 SECTION 17. TOWN MARKS; PUBLICITY; DATA MONETIZATION. Motorola shall not use the Town’s name, logos, or seals in publicity without the Town’s prior written consent and shall not use them in any demeaning or detrimental manner. Motorola shall not sell, license, mine, or otherwise monetize Town Data (including analytics or derivatives). SECTION 18. RIDER CONTROLLING; ORDER OF PRECEDENCE; NO CLICK-THROUGH TERMS. This Rider controls over any conflicting term in the Agreement, SOW, proposal/quote, invoice, website, or click-through terms. Order of precedence: (1) this Rider; (2) the Agreement as approved by Town Council; (3) SOW(s); (4) Motorola proposal/quote; (5) Motorola online/standard terms. Any click-through/shrink-wrap terms are rejected and have no effect unless separately approved by the Town Council in writing. SECTION 19. GIFT TO PUBLIC SERVANT. The Town may terminate immediately if Motorola offers, confers, or agrees to confer any benefit on a Town officer or employee that such person is prohibited by law from accepting. SECTION 20. ACCESSIBILITY. Any web-based components or public-facing portals shall conform to WCAG 2.1 AA. Upon notice of non-conformance, Motorola shall cure within a commercially reasonable time. SECTION 21. SECURITY; CJIS; ACCESS CONTROLS. (a) CJIS. Motorola shall comply with the FBI CJIS Security Policy controls applicable to the services. All Motorola and subcontractor personnel with access to Town systems or Town Data shall complete CJIS fingerprint backgrounding and security awareness training and sign the CJIS Security Addendum. CJIS audit cooperation shall be provided at no additional cost to the Town. (b) Security Standards. Motorola shall maintain controls aligned to NIST SP 800-53 Moderate (or ISO/IEC 27001 with equivalent controls); encrypt Town Data in transit and at rest; maintain vulnerability management and timely patching; and provide an annual SOC 2 Type II (or equivalent) report upon request. (c) Breach Notice & Response. Motorola shall notify the Town within twenty-four (24) hours of discovery of any Security Incident involving Town Data or Town systems, provide updates at least every twenty-four (24) hours until containment, cooperate fully, and bear reasonable remediation costs where caused by Motorola or its subcontractors. Page 190 of 522 Page 6 of 8 (d) Least-Privilege Access. All Motorola access must be least-privilege, time-bound, MFA-protected, and fully logged. No persistent domain or local administrator rights. Remote access tools require Town’s prior written approval. SECTION 22. DATA OWNERSHIP; RESIDENCY; OPEN RECORDS/LITIGATION HOLD; EXIT/EXPORT. (a) Ownership. All video, audio, images, interview recordings, ALPR/LPR data, hotlists, logs, metadata, annotations, configurations, training records, and derivatives (“Town Data”) are solely the Town’s property. Motorola receives no rights except to perform contracted services. (b) Residency. Town Data shall be stored and processed only within the United States. (c) Open Records/Litigation Hold. Motorola shall maintain immutable audit logs and promptly implement and honor litigation holds. Motorola shall assist the Town with searches/exports reasonably required for TPIA, subpoenas, discovery, or audits at Town-approved rates (if any). (d) Self-Service & Assisted Export; Exit. During the term and for ninety (90) days after termination/expiration, Motorola shall provide (i) self-service exports and (ii) one assisted export of all Town Data (including metadata/logs) in reasonably usable, non-proprietary formats (e.g., MP4/CSV/JSON) at no additional fee to the Town. Upon Town’s written direction, Motorola shall certify secure deletion of Town Data, subject to legal holds. SECTION 23. ACCEPTANCE; GO-LIVE; SUBSCRIPTION START; CHANGE ORDERS. (a) Acceptance. No “deemed” or “beneficial use” acceptance applies. Deliverables are accepted only upon Town’s written acceptance following a mutually agreed Acceptance Test Plan. (b) Go-Live & Training. Go-Live occurs only after acceptance testing passes and designated end-user/admin training is completed. “Made available” training is insufficient. (c) Subscription Start. Any subscription/service period begins on the Town’s written acceptance of applicable deliverables (not on shipment or credential issuance). (d) Change Orders. Any change in scope, schedule, or price requires a Town-approved written change order. SECTION 24. SERVICE LEVELS & REMEDIES (HOSTED SERVICES). Unless otherwise agreed, hosted services will meet: 99.9% monthly uptime (excluding Town-approved maintenance windows); P1 response ≤ 1 hour and restore ≤ 4 hours; P2 response Page 191 of 522 Page 7 of 8 ≤ 4 hours and restore ≤ 1 business day. Service credits apply for SLA misses; chronic failure provides a termination-for-cause right without early termination fees. SECTION 25. INTEGRATIONS; THIRD-PARTY SYSTEMS; DATA MIGRATION; ALPR. (a) Integrations. Motorola is responsible for delivering in-scope integrations described in the SOW. Additional work (e.g., new APIs, licenses, upgrades) requires a Town-approved change order. (b) Data Migration. Migration is complete only upon Town’s written sign-off. The Town has thirty (30) days to validate migrated datasets. Motorola is responsible for accurate mapping/ingestion and shall use secure transfer methods. (c) ALPR/LEARN (if applicable). ALPR configuration and data-sharing must comply with Town policy and applicable law. No external sharing (e.g., regional networks or LEARN) may be enabled without Town’s prior written approval. SECTION 26. SUBCONTRACTORS; INSTALLERS. Motorola remains prime and fully responsible for all subcontractors/installers. Use of subcontractors requires the Town’s prior written consent. Motorola shall flow down all obligations in this Rider (including CJIS, security, insurance, and indemnity) to all subcontractors. SECTION 27. SHIPPING; RMAs; FIRMWARE & SECURITY PATCHES. For covered devices, Motorola shall provide two-way shipping (pre-paid labels) for RMAs. Turnaround commitments include transit time unless otherwise agreed. Motorola shall provide timely firmware and security patches, notify the Town of security-relevant updates, and reasonably assist in deployment. SECTION 28. TEXAS LAW CERTIFICATIONS; ETHICS DISCLOSURE. (a) Additional Verifications. To the extent required by Texas law, Motorola verifies that: 1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the Agreement discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code § 808.001 and 2271.001, and it will not boycott Israel during the term of the Agreement; (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or Page 192 of 522 Page 8 of 8 the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. (b) Ethics Disclosure. To the extent required by law, Motorola represents that it has completed a Texas Ethics Commission (the “TEC”) form 1295 (“Form 1295”) generated by the TEC’s electronic filing application in accordance with the provisions of Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2252.908 and the rules promulgated by the TEC. The parties agree that, with the exception of the information identifying the Town and the contract identification number, the Town is not responsible for the information contained in the Form 1295. The information contained in the Form 1295 has been provided solely by Motorola and the Town has not verified such information. EXECUTED to be effective as of the date last signed below. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“Motorola”) By: _______________________________ Name: _____________________________ Title: ______________________________ Date: ______________________________ THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS (“Town” or “Customer”) By: ____________________________________ Brandon Wright, Town Manager Date: ___________________________________ ATTEST: By: __________________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary Date: ___________________________________ Page 193 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a 5-year contract with Axon in the amount of $119,590.80 for Police Department Taser 10 conducted energy weapons, training, software, and support. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department’s inventory of conducted energy weapons (CEWs) is outdated and requires replacement to ensure officer safety, compliance with training standards, and effectiveness in the field. Axon Enterprise, Inc., the industry leader in CEW technology, proposes a contract for the deployment of 23 Axon Taser 10 devices, along with supporting equipment, training, warranties, and integration with Axon’s evidence management platform (Evidence.com). The Taser 10 represents the latest in CEW technology, offering improved accuracy, range, and effectiveness, while reducing the risk of injury to both officers and subjects. The five-year Axon contract has the following benefits for the Trophy Club Police Department: • Enhances officer and community safety by providing the latest non-lethal technology. • Provides consistent officer training and certification with Axon VR and instructor courses. • Integrates with Axon’s digital evidence platform for accountability and ease of case management. • Includes warranties and replacements to reduce long-term costs. • Spreads payments across five years, minimizing budget impact. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The proposed five-year contract with Axon totals $119,590.80. Payments will be structured as follows: • Year 1 (Oct 2025): $50,000.00 • Year 2 (Oct 2026): $17,397.70 • Year 3 (Oct 2027): $17,397.70 • Year 4 (Oct 2028): $17,397.70 • Year 5 (Oct 2029): $17,397.70 Funding will be provided through the FY 2026 Budget in the Police Department Equipment Page 194 of 522 Replacement Fund. The Town will utilize BuyBoard Contract Proposal No. 698-23 for the purchase. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Purchasing Agreement 2. Axon Quote 3. Contract Addendum 4. Cloud Services Privacy Notice ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a 5-year contract with Axon in the amount of $119,590.80 for Police Department Taser 10 conducted energy weapons, training, software, and support. Page 195 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 1 of 42 This Master Services and Purchasing Agreement ("Agreement") is between Axon Enterprise, Inc. ("Axon"), and the Customer listed below or, if no Customer is listed below, the customer on the Quote (as defined below) ("Customer"). This Agreement is effective as of the later of the (a) last signature date on this Agreement or (b) date of acceptance of the Quote ("Effective Date"). Axon and Customer are each a "Party" and collectively "Parties". This Agreement governs Customer ’s purchase and use of the Axon Devices and Services detailed in the Quote. It is the intent of the Parties that this Agreement will govern all subsequent purchases by Customer for the same Axon Devices and Services in the Quote, and all such subsequent quotes accepted by Customer shall be also incorporated into this Agreement by reference as a Quote. The Parties agree as follows: 1. Definitions. 1.1. "Axon Cloud Services" means Axon’s web services, including, but not limited to, Axon Evidence, Axon Records, Axon Dispatch, FUSUS services, and interactions between Axon Evidence and Axon Devices or Axon client software. Axon Cloud Service excludes third-party applications, hardware warranties, and my.evidence.com. 1.2. "Axon Device" means all hardware provided by Axon under this Agreement. Axon-manufactured Devices are a subset of Axon Devices. 1.3. "Quote" means an offer to sell and is only valid for devices and services on the offer at the specified prices. Any inconsistent or supplemental terms within Customer’s purchase order in response to a Quote will be void. Orders are subject to prior credit approval. Changes in the deployment estimated ship date may change charges in the Quote. Shipping dates are estimates only. Axon is not responsible for typographical errors in any Quote by Axon, and Axon reserves the right to cancel any orders resulting fr om such errors. 1.4. "Services" means all services provided by Axon under this Agreement, including software, Axon Cloud Services, and professional services. 2. Term. This Agreement begins on the Effective Date and continues until all subscriptions hereunder have expired or have been terminated ("Term"). 2.1. All subscriptions including Axon Evidence, Axon Fleet, Officer Safety Plans, Technology Assurance Plans, and TASER 7 or TASER 10 plans begin on the date stated in the Quote. Each subscription term ends upon completion of the subscription stated in the Quote ("Subscription Term"). 2.2. Upon completion of the Subscription Term, the Subscription Term will automatically renew for an additional 5 year term ("Renewal Term"). For purchase of TASER 7 or TASER 10 as a standalone, Axon may increase pricing to its then-current list pricing for any Renewal Term. New devices and services may require additional terms. Axon will not authorize new services until Axon receives a signed Quote or accepts a purchase order, whichever is first. 3. Payment. Axon invoices for Axon Devices upon shipment, or on the date specified within the invoicing plan in the Quote. Payment is due net 30 days from the invoice date. Axon invoices for Axon Cloud Services on an upfront annual basis prior to the beginning of the Subscription Term and upon the anniversary of the Subscription Term . Payment obligations are non-cancelable. Unless otherwise prohibited by law, Customer will pay interest on all past-due sums at the lower of one-and-a-half percent (1.5%) per month or the highest rate allowed by law. Customer will pay invoices without setoff, deduction, or withholding. If Axon sends a past due account to collections, Customer is responsible for collection and attorneys’ fees. 4. Taxes. Customer is responsible for sales and other taxes associated with the order unless Customer provides Axon a valid tax exemption certificate. 5. Shipping. Axon may make partial shipments and ship Axon Devices from multiple locations. All shipments are EXW (Incoterms 2020) via common carrier. Title and risk of loss pass to Customer upon Axon’s delivery to the common carrier. Customer is responsible for any shipping charges in the Quote. 6. Returns. All sales are final. Axon does not allow refunds or exchanges, except warranty returns or as provided by state or federal law. 7. Warranty. 7.1. Limited Warranty. Axon warrants that Axon-manufactured Devices, except for TASER devices covered under the TASER Appendix, are free from defects in workmanship and materials for one (1) year from the date of Customer’s receipt, except Signal Sidearm which Axon warrants for thirty (30) months from Customer’s receipt and Axon-manufactured accessories, which Axon warrants for ninety (90) days from Customer’s receipt, respectively, from the date of Customer’s receipt. Extended warranties run from the expiration of the one- (1-) year hardware warranty through the extended warranty term purchased. Page 196 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 2 of 42 7.2. Disclaimer. All software and Axon Cloud Services are provided "AS IS," without any warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement. Axon Devices and Services that are not manufactured, published or performed by Axon ("Third-Party Products") are not covered by Axon’s warranty and are only subject to the warranties of the third-party provider or manufacturer. If Customer purchases Axon Loki, Customer acknowledges the Loki device is designed for operation in enclosed, controlled environments and must be used in compliance with all applicable laws and safety guidelines. Operation in open or unapproved areas may result in signal interfere nce, loss of control, or damage, and Axon assumes no liability for improper use, including any resulting harm or regulatory violations. 7.3. Claims. If Axon receives a valid warranty claim for an Axon -manufactured Device during the warranty term, Axon’s sole responsibility is to repair or replace the Axon-manufactured Device with the same or like Axon- manufactured Device, at Axon’s option. A replacement Axon-manufactured Device will be new or like new. Axon will warrant the replacement Axon-manufactured Device for the longer of (a) the remaining warranty of the original Axon-manufactured Device or (b) ninety (90) days from the date of repair or replacement. 7.3.1. If Customer exchanges an Axon Device or part, the replacement item becomes Customer’s property, and the replaced item becomes Axon’s property. Before delivering an Axon-manufactured Device for service, Customer must upload Axon-manufactured Device data to Axon Evidence or download it and retain a copy. Axon is not responsible for any loss of software, data, or other information contained in storage media or any part of the Axon-manufactured Device sent to Axon for service. 7.4. Spare Axon Devices. At Axon's reasonable discretion, Axon may provide Customer a predetermined number of spare Axon Devices as detailed in the Quote ("Spare Axon Devices"). Spare Axon Devices are intended to replace broken or non-functioning units while Customer submits the broken or non-functioning units, through Axon’s warranty return process. Axon will repair or replace the unit with a replacement Axon Device. Title and risk of loss for all Spare Axon Devices shall pass to Customer in accordance with shipping terms of this Agreement. Axon assumes no liability or obligation in the event Customer does not utilize Spare Axon Devices for the intended purpose. 7.5. Limitations. Axon’s warranty excludes damage related to: (a) failure to follow Axon Device use instructions; (b) Axon Devices used with equipment not manufactured or recommended by Axon; (c) abuse, misuse, or intentional damage to Axon Device; (d) force majeure; (e) Axon Devices repaired or modified by persons other than Axon without Axon’s written permission; or (f) Axon Devices with a defaced or removed serial number. Axon’s warranty will be void if Customer resells Axon Devices. 7.5.1. To the extent permitted by law, the above warranties and remedies are exclusive. Axon disclaims all other warranties, remedies, and conditions, whether oral , written, statutory, or implied. If statutory or implied warranties cannot be lawfully disclaimed, then such warranties are limited to the duration of the warranty described above and by the provisions in this Agreement. Customer confirms and agrees that, in deciding whether to sign this Agreement, Customer has not relied on any statement or representation by Axon or anyone acting on behalf of Axon related to the subject matter of this Agreement that is not in this Agreement. 7.5.2. Axon’s cumulative liability to any party for any loss or damage resulting from any claim, demand, or action arising out of or relating to this Agreement will not exceed the purchase price paid to Axon for the Axon Device, or if for Services, the amount paid for such Services over the twelve (12) months preceding the claim. Neither Party will be liable for special, indirect, incidental, punitive or consequential damages, however caused, whether for breach of warranty or contract, negligence, strict liability, tort or any other legal theory. 7.6. Online Support Platforms. Use of Axon's online support platforms (e.g., Axon Academy and MyAxon) is governed by the Axon Online Support Platforms Terms of Use Appendix available at www.axon.com/sales- terms-and-conditions. 7.7. Third-Party Hardware, Software and Services. Use of hardware, software, or services other than those provided by Axon is governed by the terms, if any, entered into between Customer and the respective third- party provider, including, without limitation, the terms applicable to such software or services located at www.axon.com/sales-terms-and-conditions, if any. Page 197 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 3 of 42 7.8. Axon Aid. Upon mutual agreement between Axon and Customer, Axon may provide certain products and services to Customer, as a charitable donation under the Axon Aid program. In such event, Customer expressly waives and releases any and all claims, now known or hereafter known, against Axon and its officers, directors, employees, agents, contractors, affiliates, successors, and assigns (collectively, "Releasees"), including but not limited to, on account of injury, death, property damage, or loss of data, arising out of or attributable to the Axon Aid program whether arising out of the negligence of any Releasees or otherwise. Customer agrees not to make or bring any such claim against any Release, and forever release and discharge all Releasees from liability under such claims. Customer expressly allows Axon to publicly announce its participation in Axon Aid and use its name in marketing materials. Axon may terminate the Axon Aid program without cause immediately upon notice to the Customer. 8. Free Trial. 8.1. Trial Period and License. At any time during the Term, Customer and Axon may elect to enter a free trial of Axon Devices and Services new to the Customer for a designated period (“Trial Period”) as described in a quote issued (“Trial Quote”). During the Trial Period, Axon grants Customer a nonexclusive, terminable, non- transferable, license to use new Axon Devices and Services provided for trial to the Customer (“Trial Products”). Trial Products may include Axon beta software or firmware which additional terms may be required and included within the Trial Quote. Axon may limit the number of Trial Products Customer receives within the Trial Quote. Axon may supply refurbished Trial Products. ALL FREE TRIAL PRODUCTS INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, AXON CLOUD SERVICES, ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, AXON DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY REGARDLESS OF THE CLAIM. 8.2. Trial Quote Termination. Upon at least 10 business days’ prior written notice to Axon at any time prior to the end of the Trial Period, Customer may as its sole option, terminate the free Trial Period and underlying Trial Quote associated with the Trial Products for convenience. Customer’s rights to the Trial Products will immediately terminate at the end of the Trial Period, and Customer will return any Trial Products hardware to Axon within 10 days after the effective date of such termination or at the end of the Trial Period, excluding used CEW cartridges. If any individual component of the Trial Products is not returned, Axon will invoice Customer the MSRP of the unreturned items. Customer agrees to pay the invoice along with any applicable taxes and shipping. Customer will return the Trial Products to Axon in good working condition, minus normal wear and tear. Axon may charge Customer if there is damage beyond normal wear and tear. Any Customer Content shall be stored and returned pursuant to the Axon Cloud Services Terms of Use Appendix 9. Statement of Work. Certain Axon Devices and Services, including, but not limited to, Axon Interview Room, Axon Channel Services, Axon Justice Implementation, FUSUS, and Axon Fleet, may require a Statement of Work that details Axon’s Service deliverables ("SOW"). In the event Axon provides an SOW to Customer, Axon is only responsible for the performance of Services described in the SOW. Additional services outside of the SOW, Quote, or this Agreement are out of scope. The Parties must document scope changes in a written and signed change order. Changes may require an equitable adjustment in fees or schedule. Any applicable SOW is incorporated into this Agreement by reference. 10. Axon Device Warnings. See www.axon.com/legal for the most current Axon Device warnings. 11. Design Changes. Axon may make design or feature changes to any Axon Device or Service without notifying Customer or making the same change to Axon Devices and Services previously purchased by Customer. 12. Combined Offerings. Some offerings in a Quote combine existing and pre-released Axon Devices or Services. Some offerings may not be available at the time of Customer’s purchase. Axon will not provide a refund, credit, or additional discount beyond what is in the Quote due to delay of availability or Customer’s choice not to utilize any portion of a combined offering. 13. Insurance. Axon will maintain General Liability, Workers’ Compensation, and Automobile Liability insurance. Upon request, Axon will supply certificates of insurance. 14. IP Rights. Axon owns and reserves all right, title, and interest in Axon-manufactured Devices and Services and suggestions to Axon, including all related intellectual property rights. Customer will not cause any Axon proprietary rights to be violated. 15. IP Indemnification. Axon will indemnify Customer against all claims, losses, and reasonable expenses from any third-party claim alleging that the use of Axon-manufactured Devices, Axon Cloud Services or Axon software (“Axon Products”) infringes or misappropriates the third-party’s intellectual property rights. Customer must promptly provide Axon with written notice of such claim, tender to Axon the defense or settlement of such claim at Axon’s expense and cooperate fully with Axon in the defense or settlement of such claim. Axon’s IP indemnification obligations do not apply to claims based on (a) modification of Axon Products by Customer or a third-party not approved by Axon; (b) use of Axon Products in combination with hardware or services not approved by Axon; (c) use of Axon Products other Page 198 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 4 of 42 than as permitted in this Agreement; or (d) use of Axon Products that is not the most current software release provided by Axon. 16. Customer Responsibilities. Customer is responsible for (a) Customer’s use of Axon Devices; (b) Customer or a Customer-authorized user’s breach of this Agreement or violation of applicable law; (c) disputes between Customer and a third-party over Customer’s use of Axon Devices; (d) secure and sustainable destruction and disposal of Axon Devices at Customer’s cost; and (e) any regulatory violations or fines, as a result of improper destruction or disposal of Axon Devices. 17. Termination. 17.1. For Breach. A Party may terminate this Agreement for cause if it provides thirty (30) days written notice of the breach to the other Party, and the breach remains uncured thirty (30) days after written notice. If Customer terminates this Agreement due to Axon’s uncured breach, Axon will refund prepaid amounts on a prorated basis based on the effective date of termination. 17.2. By Customer. If sufficient funds are not appropriated or otherwise legally available to pay the fees, Customer may terminate this Agreement. Customer will deliver notice of termination under this section as soon as reasonably practicable. 17.3. Effect of Termination. Upon termination of this Agreement, Customer rights immediately terminate. Customer remains responsible for all fees incurred before the effective date of termination. If Customer purchases Axon Devices for less than the manufacturer’s suggested retail price ("MSRP") and this Agreement terminates before the end of the Term, Axon will invoice Customer the difference between the MSRP for Axon Devices procured, including any Spare Axon Devices, and amounts paid towards those Axon Devices. Only if terminating for non- appropriation, Customer may return Axon Devices to Axon within thirty (30) days of termination. MSRP is the standalone price of the individual Axon Device at the time of sale. For multiple Axon Devices that may be combined as a single offering on a Quote, MSRP is the standalone price of all individual components. 18. Confidentiality. "Confidential Information" means nonpublic information designated as confidential or, given the nature of the information or circumstances surrounding disclosure, should reasonably be understood to be confidential. Each Party will take reasonable measures to avoid disclosure, dissemination, or unauthorized use of the other Party’s Confidential Information. Unless required by law, neither Party will disclose the other Party’s Confidential Information during the Term and for five (5) years thereafter. To the extent permissible by law, Axon pricing is Confidential Information and competition sensitive. If Customer receives a public records request to disclose Axon Confidential Information, to the extent allowed by law, Customer will provide notice to Axon before disclosure. Axon may publicly announce information related to this Agreement. 19. General. 19.1. Force Majeure. Neither Party will be liable for any delay or failure to perform due to a cause beyond a Party’s reasonable control. 19.2. Independent Contractors. The Parties are independent contractors. Neither Party has the authority to bind the other. This Agreement does not create a partnership, franchise, joint venture, Customer, fiduciary, or employment relationship between the Parties. 19.3. Third-Party Beneficiaries. There are no third-party beneficiaries under this Agreement. 19.4. Non-Discrimination. Neither Party nor its employees will discriminate against any person based on race; religion; creed; color; sex; gender identity and expression; pregnancy; childbirth; breastfeeding; medical conditions related to pregnancy, childbirth, or breastfeeding; sexual orientation; marital status; age; national origin; ancestry; genetic information; disability; veteran status; or any class protected by local, state, or federal law. 19.5. Compliance with Laws. Each Party will comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, including without limitation, import and export control laws and regulations as well as firearm regulations and the Gun Control Act of 1968. Customer acknowledges that Axon Devices and Services are subject to U.S. and international export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR). Customer represents and warrants that neither it nor any End User is a "Restricted Person," meaning any individual or entity that (1) is subject to U.S. sanctions or trade restrictions, (2) appears on any U.S. government restricted party list, (3) engages in prohibited weapons proliferation activities, or (4) is owned or controlled by, or acting on behalf of, such persons or entities. Customer must promptly notify Axon of any change in status, and Axon may terminate this Agreement if Customer or any End User becomes a Restricted Person or violates export laws. 19.6. Assignment. Neither Party may assign this Agreement without the other Party’s prior written consent. Axon may assign this Agreement, its rights, or obligations without consent: (a) to an affiliate or subsidiary; or (b) for Page 199 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 5 of 42 purposes of financing, merger, acquisition, corporate reorganization, or sale of all or substantially all its assets. This Agreement is binding upon the Parties respective successors and assigns. 19.7. Waiver. No waiver or delay by either Party in exercising any right under this Agreement constitutes a waiver of that right. 19.8. Severability. If a court of competent jurisdiction holds any portion of this Agreement invalid or unenforceable, the remaining portions of this Agreement will remain in effect. 19.9. Survival. The following sections will survive termination: Payment, Warranty, Axon Device Warnings, Indemnification, IP Rights, Customer Responsibilities and any other Sections detailed in the survival sections of the Appendices. 19.10. Governing Law. The laws of the country, state, province, or municipality where Customer is physically located, without reference to conflict of law rules, govern this Agreement and any dispute arising from it. The United Nations Convention for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement . 19.11. Notices. All notices must be in English. Notices posted on Customer’s Axon Evidence site are effective upon posting. Notices by email are effective on the sent date of the email. Notices by personal delivery are effective immediately. Notices to Customer shall be provided to the address on file with Axon. Notices to Axon shall be provided to Axon Enterprise, Inc. Attn: Legal, 17800 North 85th Street, Scottsdale, Arizona 85255 with a copy to legal@axon.com. 19.12. Entire Agreement. This Agreement, the Appendices, including any applicable Appendices not attached herein for the products and services purchased, which are incorporated by reference and located in the Master Purchasing and Services Agreement located at https://www.axon.com/sales-terms-and-conditions,Quote and any SOW(s), represents the entire agreement between the Parties. This Agreement supersedes all prior agreements or understandings, whether written or verbal, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. This Agreement may only be modified or amended in a writing signed by the Parties. Each Party, by and through its respective representative authorized to execute this Agreement, has duly executed and delivered this Agreement as of the date of signature. AXON: CUSTOMER: Axon Enterprise, Inc. Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Date: Date: Page 200 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 6 of 42 Axon Cloud Services Terms of Use Appendix 1. Definitions. 1.1. “Data Controller” means the natural or legal person, public authority, or any other body which alone or jointly with others determines the purposes and means of the processing of Personal Data. 1.2. “Data Processor” means a natural or legal person, public authority or any other body which processes Personal Data on behalf of the Data Controller. 1.3. "Customer Content" is data uploaded into, ingested by, or created in Axon Cloud Services within Customer’s tenant, including media or multimedia uploaded into Axon Cloud Services by Customer. Customer Content includes Evidence but excludes Non-Content Data. 1.4. "Evidence" is media or multimedia uploaded into Axon Evidence as 'evidence' by Customer. Evidence is a subset of Customer Content. 1.5. “End User” means the natural person subject to Customer’s authorized license grant who ultimately uses the Cloud Services as provided under this Agreement. End Users must adhere to the terms of use and are subject to any usage restrictions or limitations specified in this Agreement. 1.6. "Non-Content Data" is data, configuration, and usage information about Customer’s Axon Cloud Services tenant, Axon Devices and client software, and users that is transmitted or generated when using Axon Devices. Non-Content Data includes data about users captured during account management and customer support activities. Non-Content Data does not include Customer Content. 1.7. "Personal Data" means any information relating to an identified or identifiable natural person. An identifiable natural person is one who can be identified, directly or indirectly, in particular by reference to an identifier such as a name, an identification number, location data, an online identifier or to one or more factors specific to the physical, physiological, genetic, mental, economic, cultural or social identity of that natural person. 1.8. "Provided Data" means de-identified, de-personalized, data derived from Customer's TASER energy weapon deployment reports, related TASER energy weapon logs, body-worn camera footage, and incident reports. 1.9. “Subprocessor” means any third party engaged by the Data Processor to assist in data processing activities that the Data Processor is carrying out on behalf of the Data Controller. 1.10. "Transformed Data" means the Provided Data used for the purpose of quantitative evaluation of the performance and effectiveness of TASER energy weapons in the field across a variety of circumstances. 2. Access. Upon Axon granting Customer a subscription to Axon Cloud Services, Customer may access and use Axon Cloud Services to store and manage Customer Content. Customer may not exceed the total number of End Users specified in the Quote. Axon Air requires an Axon Evidence subscription for each drone operator. For Axon Evidence access granted solely for TASER, Customer may access and use Axon Evidence only to store and manage TASER CEW data ("TASER Data") and Customer may not upload non-TASER Data to Axon Evidence. 3. Customer Owns Customer Content. Customer controls and owns all rights, title, and interest in Customer Content. Except as outlined herein, Axon obtains no interest in Customer Content, and Customer Content is not Axon’s business records. Customer is solely responsible for uploading, sharing, managing, and deleting Customer Content. Axon will only have access to Customer Content for the limited purposes set forth herein. Customer agrees to allow Axon access to Customer Content to (a) perform troubleshooting, maintenance, or diagnostic screenings; and (b) enforce this Agreement or policies governing use of the Axon products. 4. Security. Axon will implement commercially reasonable and appropriate measures to secure Customer Content against accidental or unlawful loss, access or disclosure. Axon will maintain a comprehensive information security program to protect Axon Cloud Services and Customer Content including logical, physical access, vulnerability, risk, and configuration management; incident monitoring and response; encryption of uploaded digital evidence; security education; and data protection. Axon agrees to the Federal Bureau of Investigation Criminal Justice Information Services Security Addendum for its digital evidence or records management systems . 5. Customer Responsibilities. Customer is responsible for (a) ensuring Customer owns Customer Content or has the necessary rights to use Customer Content (b) ensuring no Customer Content or Customer End User’s use of Customer Content or Axon Cloud Services violates this Agreement or applicable laws; (c) maintaining necessary Page 201 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 7 of 42 computer equipment and Internet connections for use of Axon Cloud Services and (d) verify the accuracy of any auto generated or AI-generated reports. If Customer becomes aware of any violation of this Agreement by an End User, Customer will immediately terminate that End User’s access to Axon Cloud Services. 5.1 Customer will also maintain the security of End User usernames and passwords and security and access by end users to Customer Content. Customer is responsible for ensuring the configuration and utilization of Axon Cloud Services meet applicable Customer regulation and standards. Customer may not sell, transfer, or sublicense access to any other entity or person. If Customer provides access to unauthorized third-parties, Axon may assess additional fees along with suspending Customer’s access. Customer shall contact Axon immediately if an unauthorized party may be using Customer’s account or Customer Content, or if account information is lost or stolen. 5.2 To the extent Customer uses the Axon Cloud Services to interact with YouTube®, such use may be governed by the YouTube Terms of Service, available at https://www.youtube.com/static?template=terms. 6. Privacy. Customer’s use of Axon Cloud Services is subject to the Axon Cloud Services Privacy Policy, a current version of which is available at https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy. Customer agrees to allow Axon access to Non-Content Data from Customer to (a) perform troubleshooting, maintenance, or diagnostic screenings; (b) provide, develop, improve, and support current and future Axon products and related services; and (c) enforce this Agreement or policies governing the use of Axon products. 7. Axon Body Wi-Fi Positioning. Axon Body cameras may offer a feature to enhance location services where GPS/GNSS signals may not be available, for instance, within buildings or underground. Customer administrators can manage their choice to use this service within the administrative features of Axon Cloud Services. If Customer chooses to use this service, Axon must also enable the usage of the feature for Customer’s Axon Cloud Services tenant. Customer will not see this option with Axon Cloud Services unless Axon has enabled Wi-Fi Positioning for Customer’s Axon Cloud Services tenant. 8. Storage. For Axon Unlimited Device Storage subscriptions, Customer may store unlimited data in Customer's Axon Evidence account only if the Axon Device data is shared to Customer through Axon Evidence from a partner agency using Axon Evidence, or the data originates from Axon Capture or an Axon Device. Axon may charge Customer additional fees for exceeding purchased storage amounts. Axon may place Customer Content that Customer has not viewed or accessed for six (6) months into archival storage. Customer Content in archival storage will not have immediate availability and may take up to twenty-four (24) hours to access. 8.1. Third-Party Unlimited Storage. For Third-Party Unlimited Storage the following restrictions apply: (i) it may only be used in conjunction with a valid Axon Evidence user license; (ii) is limited to data of the law enforcement Customer that purchased the Third-Party Unlimited Storage and the Axon Evidence End User; (iii) Customer is prohibited from storing data for other customers or law enforcement agencies; and (iv) Customer may only upload and store data that is directly related to (1) the investigation of, or the prosecution or defense of a crime, (2) common law enforcement activities, or (3) any Customer Content created by Axon Devices or Axon Evidence. 8.2. Location of Storage. Axon may transfer Customer Content to third-party subcontractors for storage. Axon will determine the locations of data centers for storage of Customer Content If Customer is located in the United States, Canada, or Australia, Axon will ensure all Customer Content stored in Axon Cloud Services remains in the country where Customer is located Ownership of Customer Content remains with Customer. 9. Suspension. Axon may temporarily suspend Customer’s or any End User’s right to access or use any portion or all of Axon Cloud Services immediately upon notice, if Customer or End User’s use of or registration for Axon Cloud Services may (a) pose a security risk to Axon Cloud Services or any third-party; (b) adversely impact Axon Cloud Services, the systems, or content of any other customer; (c) subject Axon, Axon’s affiliates, or any third-party to liability; or (d) be fraudulent. Customer remains responsible for all fees incurred through suspension. Axon will not delete Customer Content because of suspension, except as specified in this Agreement. 10. Axon Cloud Services Warranty. Axon disclaims any warranties or responsibility for data corruption or errors before Customer uploads data to Axon Cloud Services Service Offerings will be subject to the Axon Cloud Services Service Level Agreement, a current version of which is available at https://www.axon.com/products/axon -evidence/sla. 11. Roles of the Parties. To the extent that Customer is the Data Controller of Personal Data, Axon is its Data Processor. To the extent that Customer is a Data Processor of Personal Data, Axon is its Subprocessor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent any usage data (including query logs and metadata) and/or operations data (including billing Page 202 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 8 of 42 and support data) in connection with Customer’s use of the Services (collectively “Usage and Operations Data”) is considered Personal Data, Axon is an independent Data Controller and shall Process such data in accordance with the Agreement and applicable data protection laws to develop, improve, support, and operate its products and services. For the avoidance of doubt, Axon will not disclose any Usage and Operations Data that includes confidential information with a third party except (a) in accordance with the relevant confidentiality provisions in the Agreement, or (b) to the extent the Usage and Operations Data is, in accordance with applicable data protection laws, anonymized, de-identified, and/or aggregated such that it can no longer directly or indirectly identify Customer or any particular individual. 12. TASER Data Science Program. Axon will provide a quantitative evaluation on the performance and effectiveness of TASER energy weapons in the field across a variety of circumstances. 12.1. If Customer purchases the TASER Data Science Program, Customer grants Axon, its affiliates, and assignees an irrevocable, perpetual, fully paid, royalty-free, and worldwide right and license to use Provided Data solely for the purposes of this Agreement and to create Transformed Data. Customer shall own all rights and title to Provided Data. Axon shall own all rights and title to Transformed Data and any derivatives of Transformed Data. 12.2. Axon grants to Customer an irrevocable, perpetual, fully paid, royalty-free, license to use to TASER Data Science report provided to Customer for its own internal purposes. The Data Science report is provided “as is” and without any warranty of any kind. 12.3. In the event Customer seeks Axon’s deletion of Provided Data, it may submit a request to privacy@axon.com. Where reasonably capable of doing so, Axon will implement the request but at a minimum will not continue to collect Provided Data from Customer. 13. Axon Records. The following terms apply to Axon Records. Customers may purchase Axon Records either as part of an OSP 7 or OSP 10 plan or individually through a Quote. 13.1. Axon Record subscription begins on the later of the (1) start date of the Quote, or (2) the date Axon provisions Axon Records to Customer. The Axon Records Subscription Term will end upon the completion of the Axon Records Subscription as documented in the Quote, or if purchased as part of an OSP 7 or OSP 10 plan, upon completion of the OSP 7 or OSP 10 Term ("Axon Records Subscription Term"). 13.2. An "Update" is a generally available release of Axon Records that Axon makes available from time to time. An "Upgrade" includes (i) new versions of Axon Records that enhance features and functionality, as solely determined by Axon; and/or (ii) new versions of Axon Records that provide additional features or perform additional functions. Upgrades exclude new products that Axon introduces and markets as distinct products or applications. During the Customer’s Axon Records Subscription Term Axon will provide Update and Upgrade releases to the Customer on an if-and-when available basis. 13.3. New or additional Axon products and applications, as well as any Axon professional services needed to configure Axon Records, are not included as part of the Axon Records Subscription. 13.4. End Users of Axon Records may upload files to entities (incidents, reports, cases, etc.) in Axon Records with no limit to the number of files and amount of storage. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Axon may limit usage should the Customer exceed an average rate of one-hundred (100) GB per user per year of uploaded files. Axon will not bill for overages. 14. FUSUS. If Customer purchases a subscription to FUSUS, the following terms apply: 14.1. License and Storage. The specific license number(s) and associated data storage terms for FUSUS subscription and Axon Devices shall be set forth in the applicable Quote provided by Axon. 14.2. Third party Components. Customer is responsible for use of any internet access devices and/or all third-party hardware, software, services, telecommunication services (including Internet connectivity), or other items used by Customer to access the service (“Third-Party Components”) are the sole and exclusive responsibility of Customer, and Axon has no responsibility for such Third-party Components, FUSUS cloud services, or Customer relationships with such third parties. Customer agrees to at all times comply with the lawful terms and conditions of agreements with such third parties. Axon does not represent or warrant that the FUSUS cloud services and the Customer Content are compatible with any specific third-party hardware or software or any other Third-Party Components. Customer is responsible for providing and maintaining an operating environment as reasonably necessary to accommodate and access the FUSUS cloud services. Page 203 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 9 of 42 14.3. Data Privacy. Axon may collect, use, transfer, disclose and otherwise process Customer Content in the context of facilitating communication of data with Customer through their use of FUSUS cloud services FUSUS app (iOS or Android interface), complying with legal requirements, monitoring the Customer’s use of FUSUS systems, and undertaking data analytics. 15. Axon Community Request Storage. If Community Request is included as part of Customer’s Quote or combined offering, Customer may store an unlimited amount of data submitted through the public portal ("Portal Content"), within Customer’s Axon Evidence instance. The post-termination provisions outlined in the Axon Cloud Services Terms of Use Appendix also apply to Portal Content. 16. Performance Auto-Tagging Data. If Axon Performance is included in Customer’s Quote or a combined offering, Axon will store call for service data from Customer’s CAD or RMS in order to provide services and features of Axon Performance to Customer. 17. Axon Cloud Services Restrictions. Customer and Customer End Users (including employees, contractors, agents, officers, volunteers, and directors), may not, or may not attempt to: 17.1. copy, modify, tamper with, repair, or create derivative works of any part of Axon Cloud Services; 17.2. reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile Axon Cloud Services or apply any process to derive any source code included in Axon Cloud Services, or allow others to do the same; 17.3. access or use Axon Cloud Services with the intent to gain unauthorized access, avoid incurring fees or exceeding usage limits or quotas; 17.4. use trade secret information contained in Axon Cloud Services, except as expressly permitted in this Agreement; 17.5. access Axon Cloud Services to build a competitive device or service or copy any features, functions, or graphics of Axon Cloud Services; 17.6. remove, alter, or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon’s or Axon’s licensors on or within Axon Cloud Services; or 17.7. use Axon Cloud Services to store or transmit infringing, libelous, or other unlawful or tortious material; material in violation of third-party privacy rights; or malicious code. 18. After Termination. Axon will not delete Customer Content for ninety (90) days following termination. Axon Cloud Services will not be functional during these ninety (90) days other than the ability to retrieve Customer Content. Customer will not incur additional fees if Customer downloads Customer Content from Axon Cloud Services during this time. Axon has no obligation to maintain or provide Customer Content after these ninety (90) days and will thereafter, unless legally prohibited, delete all Customer Content. Upon request, Axon will provide written proof that Axon successfully deleted and fully removed all Customer Content from Axon Cloud Services. 19. Post-Termination Assistance. Axon will provide Customer with the same post-termination data retrieval assistance that Axon generally makes available to all customers. Requests for Axon to provide additional assistance in downloading or transferring Customer Content, including requests for Axon’s data egress service, will result in additional fees and Axon will not warrant or guarantee data integrity or readability in the external system. 20. U.S. Government Rights. If Customer is a U.S. Federal department or using Axon Cloud Services on behalf of a U.S. Federal department, Axon Cloud Services is provided as a "commercial item," "commercial computer software," "commercial computer software documentation," and "technical data", as defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulation and Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement. If Customer is using Axon Cloud Services on behalf of the U.S. Government and these terms fail to meet the U.S. Government’s needs or are inconsistent in any respect with federal law, Customer will immediately discontinue use of Axon Cloud Services. 21. Survival. Upon any termination of this Agreement, the following sections in this Appendix will survive: Customer Owns Customer Content, Privacy, Storage, Axon Cloud Services Warranty, Customer Responsibilities and Axon Cloud Services Restrictions. Page 204 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 10 of 42 AI Technology Appendix This AI Technology Appendix shall only apply to Customers who license Axon Cloud Services in a Quote that specifically utilizes AI Technology. Unless explicitly defined otherwise, capitalized terms used in this Appendix have the same meaning as those in the Agreement. 1. Definitions. 1.1. AI Technology. Refers to artificial intelligence functionalities embedded in Axon’s Cloud Services, which may include: (a) Enhanced Evidence Management; (b) AI-powered redaction tools; (c) Large Language Model- based tools (e.g., "Draft One" “Policy Chat”); (d) Predictive Analytics for operational insights; or (e) Natural Language Processing (NLP) for text and speech analysis. 1.2. Model Drift. The degradation of AI model performance due to changes in input data or external conditions, requiring retraining or updates. 1.3. Bias Mitigation. Strategies and techniques used to identify, measure, and minimize bias in AI Technology. 2. Scope and Usage. 2.1. Integration. Axon AI Technology is intended to improve public safety, streamline operations, and ensure data accuracy. The AI functionalities will only be used as described in the Agreement or applicable documentation. 2.2. Data Use. Axon acts as a Data Processor for AI Technology. All inquiries submitted are processed solely to provide accurate responses based on Customer Content submitted. Customer remains the Data Controller of all Customer Content. Axon and Axon’s subprocessors do not train their models on Customer Content. Customers who elect to participate in Axon’s ACEIP program can enter into custom agreements to assist in product development efforts like AI model training. Even in those cases, Axon operates carefully on redacted data and not on Customer Content. 2.3. Automatic Data Collection. AI Technology may automatically collect Non-Content Data about user interactions with the service and their devices to enhance the functionality and security of the system. The details collected include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.3.1. User Engagement and Activity Metrics. AI Technology may track key engagement statistics, including Daily Active Users (DAUs), Weekly Active Users (WAUs), and Monthly Active Users (MAUs). Additional metrics include new user activations, repeat usage rates, total queries submitted, follow-up query volume, session lengths, retention rates, and user satisfaction ratings (e.g., thumbs up/down feedback). 2.3.2. Sales and Adoption Tracking. Axon monitors the number of licenses and agencies purchasing the service, including those in trial phases, fully deploying the service, and conversion rates from trials to paid subscriptions. 2.3.3. End User inputs. Axon may process de-identified end-user inputs to the AI Technology, excluding Customer Content or any data that directly or indirectly identifies individuals. 3. Axon Responsibilities. 3.1. Ethical AI Development. Axon shall: (a) Follow its responsible innovation framework; (b) Engage with the Ethics and Equity Advisory Council (EEAC) for feedback; (c) Conduct testing to minimize bias and ensure reliability; and (d) Implement Bias Mitigation techniques in model development and deployment. 3.2. Security Program. Axon will maintain a comprehensive information security program, including logical and physical access, vulnerability, risk, and configuration management; incident monitoring and response; encryption of digital evidence; and security education. 3.3. Transparency. Axon will provide documentation describing AI functionalities and their intended use and disclose any material limitations, risks, or Model Drift incidents. 3.4. Incident Response. Axon will promptly address and rectify anomalies in AI functionalities, as outlined in its incident management procedures. 3.5. Compliance. Axon will ensure compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and standards, including but not limited to the EU AI Act, NIST AI standards, and ISO/IEC 27001. Page 205 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 11 of 42 4. Customer Responsibilities. 4.1. Ownership of Customer Content. Customer controls and owns all rights, title, and interest in Customer Content. Axon obtains no interest in Customer Content and will only access Customer Content for limited purposes as outlined in the Agreement. 4.2. Use of AI Technologies. Customer must: (a) review AI-generated outputs to ensure accuracy and appropriateness; (b) maintain control over Customer Content shared with AI Technologies (c) comply with applicable laws when using Axon AI Technology and Axon Services; (d) monitor for potential issues with AI outputs, including false positives or negatives; (e) actively opt-in for programs involving data sharing through Axon’s ACEIP program; and (f) provide timely feedback on Axon AI Technology performance. 4.3. Restrictions. AI Technology is not designed for emergencies, and in such cases, users should contact appropriate emergency services directly. Axon disclaims liability for queries containing prohibited content, such as hate, sexual material, or violence, and reserves the right to restrict such usage. 5. Policy Chat. This section outlines the specific terms and conditions related to the use of Policy Chat by the Customer. By utilizing Policy Chat, the Customer agrees to comply with the following provisions : 5.1. License and Content Restrictions. Any uploads beyond 5,000 pages may be limited by Axon. It is the Customer's responsibility to manage uploads to ensure system efficiency and compliance with these terms. 5.2. Data Processing. Inquiries submitted to Policy Chat are processed solely to provide accurate responses based on existing policy documents provided by the Customer. The Customer remains the Data Controller of all policy content, and Axon's role is strictly limited to facilitating access to this information through Policy Chat. 5.3. Policy Chat Restrictions. The information provided by Policy Chat is for informational purposes only and is based on the policy documents uploaded by the Customer. Axon does not guarantee the accuracy, completeness, or timeliness of the information, and disclaims all liability for any reliance placed on such information. Policy Chat is not a substitute for official policy documents, legal advice, or comprehensive training. Users should consult their supervisors, legal advisors, or official sources for the m ost accurate and up-to-date policy guidance. Changes to policies may not be reflected immediately, and it is the Customer's responsibility to ensure data integrity by uploading the most current documents and removing outdated versions. 6. Draft One. Specifically for Customers who utilize Draft One, Axon may impose usage restrictions if a single user generates more than three hundred (300) reports per month for two or more consecutive months. 7. Brief One. Brief One includes automatic summarization of all products that can be transcribed. If Customer subscribes to Brief One, Customer may utilize Brief One with no limit on the number of pieces of evidence or cases. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Axon may limit evidence and case summaries for cases with over one thousand (1000) pieces of evidence or after three hundred (300) cases per End User per month for two (2) consecutive months in a row. 8. Auto-Transcribe. This section outlines licensing terms for Customer’s subscription of Auto-Transcribe: 8.1. A-La-Carte Minutes. Upon Axon granting Customer a set number of minutes, Customer may utilize Axon Auto- Transcribe, subject to the number of minutes allowed on the Quote. Customers cannot roll over unused minutes to future Auto-Transcribe terms. Axon may charge Customer additional fees for exceeding the number of purchased minutes. Axon Auto-Transcribe minutes expire one year after being provisioned to Customer by Axon. 8.2. Axon Unlimited Transcribe. Upon Axon granting Customer an Unlimited Transcribe subscription to Axon Auto-Transcribe, Customer may utilize Axon Auto-Transcribe with no limit on the number of minutes. Unlimited Transcribe includes automatic transcription of all Axon BWC and Axon Capture footage. With regard to Axon Interview Room, Axon Fleet, Axon Community Request, or third-party transcription, transcription must be requested on demand. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Axon may limit usage after 5,000 minutes per user per month for multiple months in a row. Axon will not bill for overages. 9. Amendments. Axon reserves the right to amend this Appendix to reflect changes in applicable laws or improvements in AI Technologies. Axon will provide at least 30 days’ notice for any substantive changes. Continued use of Axon Devices and Services after the effective date constitutes acceptance of the updated terms. Page 206 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 12 of 42 Axon Customer Experience Improvement Program Appendix 1. Axon Customer Experience Improvement Program (ACEIP). The ACEIP is designed to accelerate Axon’s development of technology, such as building and supporting automated features, to ultimately increase safety within communities and drive efficiency in public safety. To this end, subject to the limitations on Axon as described below, Axon, where allowed by law, may make limited use of Customer Content from all of its customers to provide, develop, improve, and support current and future Axon products (collectively, "ACEIP Purposes"). However, at all times, Axon will comply with its obligations pursuant to the Axon Cloud Services Terms of Use Appendix to maintain a comprehensive data security program (including compliance with the CJIS Security Policy for Criminal Justice Information), privacy program, and data governance policy, including high industry standards of de-identifying Personal Data, to enforce its security and privacy obligations for the ACEIP. ACEIP has 2 tiers of participation, Tier 1 and Tier 2. By default, Customer will be a participant in ACEIP Tier 1. If Customer does not want to participate in ACEIP Tier 1, Customer can revoke its consent at any time. If Customer wants to participate in Tier 2, as detailed below, Customer can check the ACEIP Tier 2 box below. If Customer does not want to participate in ACEIP Tier 2, Customer should leave box unchecked. At any time, Customer may revoke its consent to ACEIP Tier 1, Tier 2, or both Tiers. 2. ACEIP Tier 1. 2.1. When Axon uses Customer Content for the ACEIP Purposes, Axon will extract from Customer Content and may store separately copies of certain segments or elements of the Customer Content (collectively, "ACEIP Content"). When extracting ACEIP Content, Axon will use commercially reasonable efforts to aggregate, transform or de-identify Customer Content so that the extracted ACEIP Content is no longer reasonably capable of being associated with, or could reasonably be linked directly or indirectly to a particular individual ("Privacy Preserving Technique(s)"). For illustrative purposes, some examples are described in footnote 11. For clarity, ACEIP Content will still be linked indirectly, with an attribution, to the Customer from which it was extracted. This attribution will be stored separately from the data itself, but is necessary for and will be solely used to enable Axon to identify and delete all ACEIP Content upon Customer request. Once de-identified, ACEIP Content may then be further modified, analyzed, and used to create derivative works. At any time, Customer may revoke the consent granted herein to Axon to access and use Customer Content for ACEIP Purposes. Within 30 days of receiving the Customer ’s request, Axon will no longer access or use Customer Content for ACEIP Purposes and will delete any and all ACEIP Content. Axon will also delete any derivative works which may reasonably be capable of being associated with, or could reasonably be linked directly or indirectly to Customer. In addition, if Axon uses Customer Content for the ACEIP Purposes, upon request, Axon will make available to Customer a list of the specific type of Customer Content being used to generate ACEIP Content, the purpose of such use, and the retention, privacy preserving extraction technique, and relevant data protection practices applicable to the Customer Content or ACEIP Content ("Use Case"). From time to time, Axon may develop and deploy new Use Cases. At least 30 days prior to authorizing the deployment of any new Use Case, Axon will provide Customer notice (by updating the list of Use Case at https://www.axon.com/aceip and providing Customer with a mechanism to obtain notice of that update or another commercially reasonable method to Customer designated contact) ("New Use Case"). 2.2. Expiration of ACEIP Tier 1. Customer consent granted herein will expire upon termination of the Agreement. In accordance with section 1.1.1, within 30 days of receiving the Customer’s request, Axon will no longer access or use Customer Content for ACEIP Purposes and will delete ACEIP Content. Axon will also delete any derivative works which may reasonably be capable of being associated with, or could reasonably be linked directly or indirectly to, Customer. 3. ACEIP Tier 2. In addition to ACEIP Tier 1, if Customer wants to help further improve Axon’s services, Customer may choose to participate in Tier 2 of the ACEIP. ACEIP Tier 2 grants Axon certain additional rights to use Customer 1 For example; (a) when extracting specific text to improve automated transcription capabilities, text that could be used to di rectly identify a particular individual would not be extracted, and extracted text would be disassociated from identifying metadata of any speakers, and the extracted text would be split into individual words and aggregated with other data sources (including publicly available data) to remove any reasonable ability to link any specific text directly or indirectly back to a particular individual; (b) when extracting license plate data to improve Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) capabilities, individual license plate characters would be e xtracted and disassociated from each other so a complete plate could not be reconstituted, and all association to other elements of the source video, such as the vehicle, location, time, and the surrounding environment would also be removed; (c) when extracting audio of potential acoustic events (such as glass breaking or gun shots), very short segments (<1 second) of audio that only contains the likely acoustic events would be extracted and all human utterances would be removed. Page 207 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 13 of 42 Content, in addition to those set forth in Tier 1 above, without the guaranteed deployment of a Privacy Preserving Technique to enable product development, improvement, and support that cannot be accomplished with aggregated, transformed, or de-identified data. ☐ Check this box if Customer wants to help further improve Axon’s services by participating in ACEIP Tier 2 in addition to Tier 1. Axon will not enroll Customer into ACEIP Tier 2 until Axon and Customer agree to terms in writing providing for such participation in ACEIP Tier 2. Page 208 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 14 of 42 Professional Services Appendix If any of the Professional Services specified below are included on the Quote, this Appendix applies. 1. Utilization of Services. Customer must use professional services as outlined in the Quote and this Appendix within six (6) months of the Effective Date. 2. Axon Full Service (Axon Full Service). Axon Full Service includes advance remote project planning and configuration support and up to four (4) consecutive days of on-site service and a professional services manager to work with Customer to assess Customer ’s deployment and determine which on-site services are appropriate. If Customer requires more than four (4) consecutive on-site days, Customer must purchase additional days. Axon Full- Service options include: System set up and configuration • Instructor-led setup of Axon View on smartphones (if applicable) • Configure categories and custom roles based on Customer need • Register cameras to Customer domain • Troubleshoot IT issues with Axon Evidence and Axon Dock ("Dock") access • One on-site session included Dock configuration • Work with Customer to decide the ideal location of Docks and set configurations on Dock • Authenticate Dock with Axon Evidence using admin credentials from Customer • On-site assistance, not to include physical mounting of docks Best practice implementation planning session • Provide considerations for the establishment of video policy and system operations best practices based on Axon’s observations with other customers • Discuss the importance of entering metadata in the field for organization purposes and other best practices for digital data management • Provide referrals of other customers using the Axon camera devices and Axon Evidence • Recommend rollout plan based on review of shift schedules System Admin and troubleshooting training sessions Step-by-step explanation and assistance for Customer’s configuration of security, roles & permissions, categories & retention, and other specific settings for Axon Evidence Axon instructor training (Train the Trainer) Training for Customer ’s in-house instructors who can support Customer ’s Axon camera and Axon Evidence training needs after Axon has fulfilled its contractual on-site obligations Evidence sharing training Tailored workflow instruction for Investigative Units on sharing cases and evidence with local prosecuting agencies Users go-live training and support sessions • Assistance with device set up and configuration • Training on device use, Axon Evidence, and Evidence Sync Implementation document packet Axon Evidence administrator guides, camera implementation guides, network setup guide, sample policies, and categories & roles guide Post go-live review 3. Body-Worn Camera Starter Service (Axon Starter). Axon Starter includes advance remote project planning and configuration support and one (1) day of on-site Services and a professional services manager to work closely with Customer to assess Customer ’s deployment and determine which Services are appropriate. If Customer requires more than one (1) day of on-site Services, Customer must purchase additional on-site Services. The Axon Starter options include: System set up and configuration (Remote Support) • Instructor-led setup of Axon View on smartphones (if applicable) • Configure categories & custom roles based on Customer need Page 209 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 15 of 42 • Troubleshoot IT issues with Axon Evidence and Dock access Dock configuration • Work with Customer to decide the ideal location of Dock setup and set configurations on Dock • Authenticate Dock with Axon Evidence using "Administrator" credentials from Customer • Does not include physical mounting of docks Axon instructor training (Train the Trainer) Training for Customer ’s in-house instructors who can support Customer ’s Axon camera and Axon Evidence training needs after Axon’s has fulfilled its contracted on-site obligations User go-live training and support sessions • Assistance with device set up and configuration • Training on device use, Axon Evidence, and Evidence Sync Implementation document packet Axon Evidence administrator guides, camera implementation guides, network setup guide, sample policies, and categories & roles guide 4. Body-Worn Camera Virtual 1-Day Service (Axon Virtual). Axon Virtual includes all items in the BWC Starter Service Package, except one (1) day of on-site services. 5. CEW Services Packages. CEW Services Packages are detailed below: System set up and configuration • Configure Axon Evidence categories & custom roles based on Customer need. • Troubleshoot IT issues with Axon Evidence. • Register users and assign roles in Axon Evidence. • For the CEW Full-Service Package: On-site assistance included • For the CEW Starter Package: Virtual assistance included Dedicated Project Manager Assignment of specific Axon representative for all aspects of planning the rollout (Project Manager). Ideally, Project Manager will be assigned to Customer 4–6 weeks before rollout Best practice implementation planning session to include: • Provide considerations for the establishment of CEW policy and system operations best practices based on Axon’s observations with other customers • Discuss the importance of entering metadata and best practices for digital data management • Provide referrals to other customers using TASER CEWs and Axon Evidence • For the CEW Full-Service Package: On-site assistance included • For the CEW Starter Package: Virtual assistance included System Admin and troubleshooting training sessions On-site sessions providing a step-by-step explanation and assistance for Customer’s configuration of security, roles & permissions, categories & retention, and other specific settings for Axon Evidence Axon Evidence Instructor training • Provide training on the Axon Evidence to educate instructors who can support Customer’s subsequent Axon Evidence training needs. • For the CEW Full-Service Package: Training for up to 3 individuals at Customer • For the CEW Starter Package: Training for up to 1 individual at Customer TASER CEW inspection and device assignment Axon’s on-site professional services team will perform functions check on all new TASER CEW Smart weapons and assign them to a user on Axon Evidence. Post go-live review For the CEW Full-Service Package: On-site assistance included. For the CEW Starter Package: Virtual assistance included. 6. Smart Weapon Transition Service. The Smart Weapon Transition Service includes: Archival of CEW Firing Logs Axon’s on-site professional services team will upload CEW firing logs to Axon Evidence from all TASER CEW Smart Weapons that Customer is replacing with newer Smart Weapon models. Page 210 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 16 of 42 Return of Old Weapons Axon’s on-site professional service team will ship all old weapons back to Axon’s headquarters. Axon will provide Customer with a Certificate of Destruction *Note: CEW Full-Service packages for TASER 7 or TASER 10 include Smart Weapon Transition Service instead of 1-Day Device Specific Instructor Course. 7. VR Services Package. VR Service includes advance remote project planning and configuration support and one (1) day of on-site service and a professional services manager to work with Customer to assess Customer's deployment and determine which Services are appropriate. The VR Service training options include: System set up and configuration (Remote Support) • Instructor-led setup of Axon VR headset content • Configure Customer settings based on Customer need • Troubleshoot IT issues with Axon VR headset Axon instructor training (Train the Trainer) Training for up to five (5) Customer's in-house instructors who can support Customer's Axon VR CET and SIM training needs after Axon has fulfilled its contracted on-site obligations Classroom and practical training sessions Step-by-step explanation and assistance for Customer's configuration of Axon VR CET and SIM functionality, basic operation, and best practices 8. Axon Air, On-Site Training. Axon Air, On-Site training includes advance remote project planning and configuration support and one (1) day of on-site Services and a professional services manager to work closely with Customer to assess Customer's deployment and determine which Services are appropriate. If Customer requires more than one (1) day of on-site Services, Customer must purchase additional on-site Services. The Axon Air, On-Site training options include: System set up and configuration (Remote Support) • Instructor-led setup of Axon Air App (ASDS) • Configure Customer settings based on Customer need • Configure drone controller • Troubleshoot IT issues with Axon Evidence Axon instructor training (Train the Trainer) Training for Customer's in-house instructors who can support Customer's Axon Air and Axon Evidence training needs after Axon’s has fulfilled its contracted on-site obligations Classroom and practical training sessions Step-by-step explanation and assistance for Customer's configuration of Axon Respond+ livestreaming functionality, basic operation, and best practices 9. Axon Air, Virtual Training. Axon Air, Virtual training includes all items in the Axon Air, On-Site Training Package, except the practical training session, with the Axon Instructor training for up to four hours virtually. 10. Signal Sidearm Installation Service. a. Purchases of 50 SSA units or more: Axon will provide one (1) day of on-site service and one professional services manager and will provide train the trainer instruction, with direct assistance on the first of each unique holster/mounting type. Customer is responsible for providing a suitable work/training area. b. Purchases of less than 50 SSA units: Axon will provide a 1-hour virtual instruction session on the basics of installation and device calibration. 11. Axon Justice Implementation. Axon Justice Implementation includes advanced remote project planning, configuration support, and training. Axon Justice Implementation includes: System set up and configuration • Axon performs discovery to understand and document the Agency’s needs. • Axon collaborates with the Client to configure workflows, permissions, and privileges within Axon Evidence based on the Client’s needs. • Axon will facilitate a workflow discussion with the core admin team. Page 211 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 17 of 42 Disclosures • Axon enables the Client to share digital evidence to the defense through the following methods as determined by Client and Axon: 1. Public Defender Case Sharing 2. Disclosure Portal 3. Download Links Training • Agency Trainers. Axon works with the Agency to identify the Agency trainers receiving instruction on the product. Axon provides a training guide that outlines the covered topics, intended audience, facility needs, and duration of the training. Axon will schedule a cadence of remote training sessions as needed, which are not to exceed three (3) 2-hour training sessions for Agency staff. Each session can accommodate up to 20 users and will train them in full system functionality. Training sessions provided by Axon are conducted on consecutive weekdays (Tuesday-Thursday) during normal business hours (9am-6pm with an hour break in between sessions). After the initial training, is responsible for any future training. Axon provides all training materials for successful training. • Partner Agencies: Axon will provide Train the Trainer training to the Agency so that it is equipped to train and support their partner agencies. Ensuring the partner agencies are trained to follow the ingestion method is the Agency’s responsibility. Go-Live Plan • Axon works in partnership with the Agency to build, coordinate, and execute a Go-Live plan to ensure successful system acceptance. Axon coordinates the Go-Live event. Implementation document packet • Axon Evidence administrator guides, camera implementation guides, network setup guide, sample policies, and categories & roles guide Post go-live review 12. Out of Scope Services. Axon is only responsible to perform the professional services described in the Quote, this Appendix, and any applicable SOW. Any additional professional services are out of scope. The Parties must document scope changes in a written and signed change order. Changes may require an equitable adjustment in the charges or schedule. 13. Delivery of Services. Axon personnel will work Monday through Friday, 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m., except holidays. Axon will perform all on-site tasks over a consecutive timeframe. Axon will not charge Customer travel time by Axon personnel to Customer premises as work hours. 14. Access Computer Systems to Perform Services. Customer authorizes Axon to access relevant Customer computers and networks, solely for performing the Services. Axon will work to identify as soon as reasonably practicable resources and information Axon expects to use and will provide an initial itemized list to Customer. Customer is responsible for and assumes the risk of any problems, delays, losses, claims, or expenses resulting from the content, accuracy, completeness, and consistency of all data, materials, and information supplied by Customer. 15. Site Preparation. Axon will provide a hardcopy or digital copy of current user documentation for the Axon Devices ("User Documentation"). User Documentation will include all required environmental specifications for the professional services and Axon Devices to operate per the Axon Device User Documentation. Before installation of Axon Devices (whether performed by Customer or Axon), Customer must prepare the location(s) where Axon Devices are to be installed ("Installation Site") per the environmental specifications in the Axon Device User Documentation. Following installation, Customer must maintain the Installation Site per the environmental specifications. If Axon modifies Axon Device User Documentation for any Axon Devices under this Agreement, Axon will provide the update to Customer when Axon generally releases it. 16. Acceptance. When Axon completes professional services, Axon will present an acceptance form ("Acceptance Form") to Customer. Customer will sign the Acceptance Form acknowledging completion. If Customer reasonably believes Axon did not complete the professional services in substantial conformance with this Agreement, Customer must notify Axon in writing of the specific reasons for rejection within seven (7) calendar days from delivery of the Acceptance Form. Axon will address the issues and re-present the Acceptance Form for signature. If Axon does not receive the signed Acceptance Form or written notification of reasons for rejection wit hin seven (7) calendar days of Page 212 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 18 of 42 delivery of the Acceptance Form, the professional services will be deemed accepted by Customer. 17. Customer Network. For work performed by Axon transiting or making use of Customer ’s network, Customer is solely responsible for maintenance and functionality of the network. In no event will Axon be liable for loss, damage, or corruption of Customer ’s network from any cause. Page 213 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 19 of 42 Technology Assurance Plan Appendix If Technology Assurance Plan ("TAP") or a combined offering including TAP is on the Quote, this appendix applies. 1. TAP Warranty. The TAP specific warranty is an extended warranty that starts at the end of the one- (1-) year hardware limited warranty. 2. Officer Safety Plan. If Customer purchases an Officer Safety Plan ("OSP"), Customer will receive the deliverables detailed in the Quote. Customer must accept delivery of the TASER CEW and accessories as soon as available from Axon. 3. OSP 7 or OSP 10 Term. OSP 7 or OSP 10 begins on the date specified in the Quote ("OSP Term"). 4. TAP Refresh. If Customer has no outstanding payment obligations and purchased TAP, Axon will provide Customer a new Axon Device ("Device Refresh") as scheduled in the Quote. If Customer purchased TAP, Axon will provide a Device Refresh that is the same or like Axon Device, at Axon’s option. Axon makes no guarantee the Device Refresh will utilize the same accessories or Axon Dock. 5. TAP Dock Refresh. If Customer has no outstanding payment obligations and purchased TAP, Axon will provide Customer a new Axon Dock as scheduled in the Quote ("Dock Refresh"). Accessories associated with any Dock Refreshes are subject to change at Axon discretion. Dock Refreshes will only include a new Axon Dock Bay configuration unless a new Axon Dock core is required for Axon Device compatibility. If Customer originally purchased a single-bay Axon Dock, the Dock Refresh will be a single-bay Axon Dock model that is the same or like Axon Device, at Axon’s option. If Customer originally purchased a multi-bay Axon Dock, the Dock Refresh will be a multi-bay Axon Dock that is the same or like Axon Device, at Axon’s option. 6. Refresh Delay. Axon may ship the Axon Device and Dock Refreshes as scheduled in the Quote without prior confirmation from Customer unless the Parties agree in writing otherwise at least ninety (90) days in advance. Axon may ship the final Axon Device and Dock Refreshes as scheduled in the Quote sixty (60) days before the end of the Subscription Term without prior confirmation from Customer. 7. Upgrade Change. If Customer wants to upgrade Axon Device models from the current Axon Device to an upgraded Axon Device, Customer must pay the price difference between the MSRP for the current Axon Device and the MSRP for the upgraded Axon Device. If the model Customer desires has an MSRP less than the MSRP of the offered Axon Device Refreshes or Dock Refresh, Axon will not provide a refund. The MSRP is the MSRP in effect at the time of the upgrade. 8. Return of Original Axon Device. Within thirty (30) days of receiving a BWC or Dock Refresh, Customer must return the original Axon Devices to Axon or destroy the Axon Devices and provide a certificate of destruction to Axon including serial numbers for the destroyed Axon Devices. If Customer does not return or destroy the Axon Devices, Axon will deactivate the serial numbers for the Axon Devices received by Customer. 9. Termination. If TAP or OSP terminates or expires: 9.1. TAP and OSP coverage terminate as of the date of termination and no refunds will be given. 9.2. Axon will not and has no obligation to provide the Upgrade Models. 9.3 Customer must make any missed payments due to the termination before Customer may purchase any future TAP or OSP. Page 214 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 20 of 42 TASER Device Appendix This TASER Device Appendix applies to Customer ’s TASER 7, TASER 10, OSP 7, OSP 10, OSP Plus, OSP 7 Plus Premium and OSP 10 Plus Premium purchase from Axon, if applicable. 1. Duty Cartridge Replenishment Plan. If the Quote includes "Duty Cartridge Replenishment Plan", Customer must purchase the plan for each CEW user. A CEW user includes officers that use a CEW in the line of duty and those that only use a CEW for training. Customer may not resell cartridges received. Axon will only replace cartridges used in the line of duty. 2. Training. If the Quote includes a TASER On Demand Certification subscription, Customer will have on-demand access to TASER Instructor and TASER Master Instructor courses only for the duration of the TASER Subscription Term. Axon will issue a maximum of ten (10) TASER Instructor vouchers and ten (10) TASER Master Instructor vouchers for every thousand TASER Subscriptions purchased. Customer shall utilize vouchers to register for TASER courses at their discretion; however, Customer may incur a fee for cancellations less than 10 business days prior to a course date or failure to appear to a registered course. The voucher has no cash value. Customer cannot exchange voucher for any other Device or Service. Any unused vouchers at the end of the Term will be forfeited. A voucher does not include any travel or other expenses that might be incurred related to attending a course . 3. Limited Warranty. 3.1. “Deployment” means use of the TASER weapon resulting in the discharge of the conducted energy weapon (“CEW”) cartridge probe. For TASER 10 each probe discharged is consider one Deployment and for TASER 7 the dual probe discharged is considered one Deployment. 3.2. Single User Warranty. If the TASER Device is assigned and used by a single user, Axon warrants that Axon- manufactured TASER Device is free from defects in workmanship and materials for the earlier of: (i) one (1) year from the date of Customer’s receipt or (ii) 100 Deployments per year or a total of 500 Deployments over 5 years. 3.3. Pooled User Warranty. If the TASER Device is assigned and used by multiple users, Axon warrants that Axon- manufactured TASER Device is free from defects in workmanship and materials for the earlier of: (i) one (1) year from the date of Customer’s receipt or (ii) 100 Deployments per year or a total of 500 Deployments over 5 years. 3.4. Training User Devices. If the TASER Device is used for training, Axon warrants that Axon-manufactured TASER Device is free from defects in workmanship and materials for the earlier of: (i) one (1) year from the date of Customer’s receipt or (ii) 100 Deployments per year or a total of 500 Deployments over 5 years. 3.5. CEW Cartridges. Used CEW cartridges are deemed to have operated properly. 3.6. Remaining Terms. The remaining Warranty terms of the Agreement including Disclaimer, Claims, Spare Axon Devices and Limitations shall apply to this TASER Device Appendix 3.7. Registration. Prior to use of the TASER Device, Customer must register each TASER Device in TASER Device Axon Evidence tenancy as a single user, pooled or training device. Failure to properly register the TASER Device prior to its use may void the warranty at Axon’s sole discretion. 4. Extended Warranty. If the Quote includes an extended warranty, the extended warranty coverage period begins upon the expiration of the Limited Warranty. Each additional year of the warranty purchased will be in accordance with the applicable Limited Warranty category above. The maximum warranty period for an individual TASER Device will be five (5) years including the initial Limited Warranty. 5. Upgrade Change. If Customer wants to upgrade TASER Device from the current TASER Device to an upgraded Axon TASER Device that was not available at the time the parties entered into the original Quote, Customer must pay the price difference between the MSRP for the current TASER Device and the MSRP for the upgraded TASER Device. If the model Customer desires has an MSRP less than the MSRP of the offered new TASER Device, Axon will not provide a refund. The MSRP is the MSRP in effect at the time of the upgrade. 6. Trade-in. If the Quote contains a discount on CEW-related line items and that discount is contingent upon the trade- in of hardware, Customer must return used hardware and accessories associated with the discount ("Trade-In Units") to Axon within the below prescribed timeline. Customer must ship batteries via ground shipping. Axon will provide Customer with a pre-paid shipping label for the return of the Trade-In Units. If Axon does not receive Trade-In Units within the timeframe below, Axon will invoice Customer the value of the trade-in credit. Customer may not destroy Trade-In Units and receive a trade-in credit. Page 215 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 21 of 42 Customer Size Days to Return from Start Date of TASER 10 Subscription Less than 100 officers 60 days 100 to 499 officers 90 days 500+ officers 180 days 7. Customer Warranty. If Customer is located in the US, Customer warrants and acknowledges that TASER 10 is classified as a firearm and is being acquired for official Customer use pursuant to a law enforcement agency transfer under the Gun Control Act of 1968. 8. Purchase Order. To comply with applicable laws and regulations, Customer must provide a purchase order to Axon prior to shipment of TASER 10. 9. Apollo Grant (US only). If Customer has received an Apollo Grant from Axon, Customer must pay all fees in the Quote prior to upgrading to any new TASER Device offered by Axon. 10. Termination. If payment for TASER Device is more than thirty (30) days past due, Axon may terminate Customer’s TASER Device plan by notifying Customer. Upon termination for any reason, then as of the date of termination: 10.1. TASER Device extended warranties and access to Training Content will terminate. No refunds will be given. 10.2. Customer will be responsible for payment of any missed payments due to the termination before being allowed to purchase any future TASER Device plan. 10.3. Axon will invoice Customer the remaining MSRP for TASER Devices received before termination. If terminating for non-appropriation, Axon will not invoice Customer if Customer returns the TASER Device, rechargeable battery, holster, dock, core, training suits, and unused cart ridges to Axon within thirty (30) days of the date of termination. Page 216 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 22 of 42 Axon Auto-Tagging Appendix If Auto-Tagging is included on the Quote, this Appendix applies. 1. Scope. Axon Auto-Tagging consists of the development of a module to allow Axon Evidence to interact with Customer’s Computer-Aided Dispatch ("CAD") or Records Management Systems ("RMS"). This allows End Users to auto-populate Axon video meta-data with a case ID, category, and location-based on data maintained in Customer’s CAD or RMS. 2. Support. For thirty (30) days after completing Auto-Tagging Services, Axon will provide up to five (5) hours of remote support at no additional charge. Axon will provide free support due to a change in Axon Evidence, if Customer maintains an Axon Evidence and Auto-Tagging subscription. Axon will not provide support if a change is required because Customer changes its CAD or RMS. 3. Changes. Axon is only responsible to perform the Services in this Appendix for Auto-Tagging and any applicable SOW. Any additional Services are out of scope. The Parties must document scope changes in a written and signed change order. Changes may require an equitable adjustment in fees or schedule. 4. Customer Responsibilities. Axon’s performance of Auto-Tagging Services requires Customer to: 4.1. Make available relevant systems, including Customer’s current CAD or RMS, for assessment by Axon (including remote access if possible); 4.2. Make required modifications, upgrades or alterations to Customer’s hardware, facilities, systems and networks related to Axon’s performance of Auto-Tagging Services; 4.3. Provide access to the premises where Axon is performing Auto-Tagging Services, subject to Customer safety and security restrictions, and allow Axon to enter and exit the premises with laptops and materials needed to perform Auto-Tagging Services; 4.4. Provide all infrastructure and software information (TCP/IP addresses, node names, network configuration) necessary for Axon to provide Auto-Tagging Services; 4.5. Promptly install and implement any software updates provided by Axon; 4.6. Ensure that all appropriate data backups are performed; 4.7. Provide assistance, participation, and approvals in testing Auto-Tagging Services; 4.8. Provide Axon with remote access to Customer’s Axon Evidence account when required; 4.9. Notify Axon of any network or machine maintenance that may impact the performance of the module at Customer; and 4.10. Ensure reasonable availability of knowledgeable staff and personnel to provide timely, accurate, complete, and up-to-date documentation and information to Axon. 5. Access to Systems. Customer authorizes Axon to access Customer’s relevant computers, network systems, and CAD or RMS solely for performing Auto-Tagging Services. Axon will work diligently to identify the resources and information Axon expects to use and will provide an initial list to Customer. Customer is responsible for and assumes the risk of any problems, delays, losses, claims, or expenses resulting from the content, accuracy, completeness, and consistency of all data, materials, and information supplied by Customer. Page 217 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 23 of 42 Axon ALPR Appendix If Axon Fleet 2, Axon Fleet 3, or any future generation of Axon Fleet (collectively, “Axon Fleet”) or Axon Outpost or Axon Lightpost (collectively all “ALPR Products”) is included on the Quote, this Appendix applies. 1. Customer Responsibilities. 1.1. Customer must ensure its infrastructure and vehicles adhere to the minimum requirements to operate Axon ALPR Products as established by Axon during the qualifier call and on-site assessment at Customer and in any technical qualifying questions. If Customer’s representations are inaccurate, the Quote is subject to change. 1.2. Customer is responsible for providing a suitable work area for Axon or Axon third-party providers to install Axon ALPR Products into Customer vehicles and/or at designated installation location(s).s Customer is responsible for making available all vehicles for which installation services were purchased and preparing all installation sites, during the agreed upon onsite installation dates, Failure to make vehicles available or prepare installation sites may require an equitable adjustment in fees or schedule 2. Third-party Installer. Axon will not be liable for the failure of Axon Fleet, Axon Outpost, or Axon Lightpost hardware to operate per specifications if such failure results from installation not performed by, or as directed by Axon . 3. Upgrade. If Customer has no outstanding payment obligations and has purchased the "Fleet Technology Assurance Plan" (Fleet TAP) or “Outpost Technology Assurance Plan” (Outpost TAP) or any lightpost extended warranty or refresh, Axon will provide Customer with the same or like model of applicable Axon Devices included in the applicable TAP ("Axon Upgrade") as scheduled on the Quote. 3.1. If Customer would like to change models for the Axon Upgrade, Customer must pay the difference between the MSRP for the offered Axon Upgrade and the MSRP for the model desired. The MSRP is the MSRP in effect at the time of the upgrade. Customer is responsible for the removal of previously installed hardware and installation of the Axon Upgrade. 3.2. Within thirty (30) days of receiving the Axon Upgrade, Customer must return the original Axon Devices to Axon or destroy the Axon Devices and provide a certificate of destruction to Axon, including serial numbers of the destroyed Axon Devices. If Customer does not destroy or return the Axon Devices to Axon, Axon will deactivate the serial numbers for the Axon Devices received by Customer. 4. Axon Fleet Specific Terms. 4.1. Cradlepoint. If Customer purchases Cradlepoint hardware, software, or services, Customer will comply with Cradlepoint’s end user license agreement. The term of the Cradlepoint license may differ from the Axon Evidence Subscription. If Customer requires Cradlepoint support, Customer will contact Cradlepoint directly. By accepting a Quote including Cradlepoint products, Customer designates and authorizes Axon as its partner of record for purposes of Cradlepoint product renewals, support coordination, and other relevant functions. This designation applies to all Cradlepoint products acquired by Customer during the Subscription Term of the applicable Quote whether directly from Cradlepoint, through Axon, or through any third-party vendor or distributor. Axon shall have no liability to Customer or any third party arising out of or relating to Axon’s acts or omissions as the Partner of Record. Customer has the right to opt out of this authorization at any time by providing prior written notification to both Axon and Cradlepoint. Upon such notification, the designation will be removed. This authorization remains effective until formally removed in accordance with this section or as otherwise agreed between the parties in the Agreement. 4.2. Axon Vehicle Software License. Axon grants Customer a non-exclusive, royalty-free, worldwide, perpetual license to use ViewXL or Dashboard (collectively, "Axon Vehicle Software".) "Use" means storing, loading, installing, or executing Axon Vehicle Software solely for data communication with Axon Devices. The Axon Vehicle Software term begins upon the start of the Axon Evidence Subscription 4.3. Restrictions. Customer may not: (a) modify, alter, tamper with, repair, or create derivative works of Axon Vehicle Software; (b) reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile Axon Vehicle Software, apply any process to derive the source code of Axon Vehicle Software, or allow others to do so; (c) access or use Axon Vehicle Software to avoid incurring fees or exceeding usage limits; (d) copy Axon Vehicle Software in whole or part; (e) use trade secret information contained in Axon Vehicle Software; (f) resell, rent, loan or sublicense Axon Vehicle Software; (g) access Axon Vehicle Software to build a competitive device or service or copy any features, functions or graphics of Axon Vehicle Software; or (h) remove, alter or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon or Axon’s licensors on or within Page 218 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 24 of 42 Axon Vehicle Software. 5. Axon Outpost Specific Terms. 5.1. Outpost License and Permits. Customers will obtain, maintain all legally required permits, authorizations, and/or licensing in order to place, maintain, and/or remove the Axon Outpost device at the installation location including licenses or permits for fixed installation of poles. If mutually agreed by the parties, Axon or an Axon authorized subcontractor may assist with obtaining the necessary local, state, or Federal approvals before installing Axon Outpost. 5.2. Installation. Customer will adhere to the installation requirements as agreed in the Outpost SOW. 6. Axon Lightpost Specific Terms. 6.1. Ubicquia. If Customer purchases Lightpost hardware and installation services, any warranties for the hardware are provided exclusively by the third-party manufacturer Ubicquia. All hardware-related support or warranty claims must be directed to the respective third-party provider. Axon is not responsible for servicing or replacing hardware. Axon will provide and support software components in accordance with the applicable Quote. 6.2. Installation. Installation of Axon Lightpost equipment will be performed by a third-party service provider authorized by Axon. Axon does not directly perform installation services. 6.3. Power. Customer agrees to supply a power source, in compliance with Lightpost requirements, at each site where a Lightpost device is installed. The power must be available on a 24-hour, 7 days per week (24/7) basis. 7. Wireless Offload Server 7.1 License Grant. Axon grants Customer a non-exclusive, royalty-free, worldwide, perpetual license to use Wireless Offload Server ("WOS"). "Use" means storing, loading, installing, or executing WOS solely for data communication with Axon Devices for the number of licenses purchased. The WOS term begins upon the start of the Axon Evidence Subscription. 7.2 Restrictions. Customer may not: (a) modify, alter, tamper with, repair, or create derivative works of WOS; (b) reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile WOS, apply any process to derive the source code of WOS, or allow others to do so; (c) access or use WOS to avoid incurring fees or exceeding usage limits; (d) copy WOS in whole or part; (e) use trade secret information contained in WOS; (f) resell, rent, loan or sublicense WOS; (g) access WOS to build a competitive device or service or copy any features, functions or graphics of WOS; or (h) remove, alter or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon or Axon’s licensors on or within WOS. 7.3 Updates. If Customer purchases WOS maintenance, Axon will make updates and error corrections to WOS ("WOS Updates") available electronically via the Internet or media as determined by Axon. Customer is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate Internet access to receive WOS Updates and maintaining computer equipment necessary for use of WOS. The Quote will detail the maintenance term. 7.4 WOS Support. Upon request by Axon, Customer will provide Axon with access to Customer’s store and forward servers solely for troubleshooting and maintenance. 8. Acceptance Checklist. If Axon provides Services to Customer pursuant to any statement of work in connection with Axon ALPR Products, within seven (7) days of the date on which Customer retrieves Customer's vehicle(s) from the Axon installer or Axon Outpost or Axon Lightpost installation is complete, said ALPR Products having been installed and configured with tested and fully and properly operational hardware and software identified above, Customer will receive a Professional Services Acceptance Checklist to submit to Axon indicating acceptance or denial of said deliverables. In the event Customer does not respond to the Professional Services Acceptance Checklist within seven (7) business days, the installation of the ALPR Products and services shall be deemed accepted. Page 219 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 25 of 42 Axon Respond Appendix This Axon Respond Appendix applies to Axon Respond, Axon Respond Device Plus, and Device Connectivity if any are included on the Quote. 1. Axon Respond Subscription Term. If Customer purchases Axon Respond as part of a combined offering on a Quote, the Axon Respond subscription begins on the later of the (1) start date of that offering within the Quote, or (2) date Axon provisions Axon Respond to Customer. If Customer purchases Axon Respond as a standalone, the Axon Respond subscription begins the later of the (1) date Axon provisions Axon Respond to Customer, or (2) first day of the month following the Effective Date. The Axon Respond subscription term will end upon the completion of the Axon Evidence Subscription associated with Axon Respond. 2. Scope of Axon Respond. The scope of Axon Respond is to assist Customer with real-time situational awareness during critical incidents to improve officer safety, effectiveness, and awareness. In the event Customer uses Axon Respond outside this scope, Axon may initiate good-faith discussions with Customer on upgrading Customer’s Axon Respond to better meet Customer ’s needs. 3. Axon Body LTE Requirements. Axon Respond is only available and usable with an LTE enabled body-worn camera. Axon is not liable if Customer utilizes the LTE device outside of the coverage area or if the LTE carrier is unavailable. LTE coverage is available in the United States including U.S. territories, Additional verification will be required for use in select international regions. Axon may utilize a carrier of Axon’s choice to provide LTE service. Axon may change LTE carriers during the Term without Customer ’s consent. 4. Axon Fleet LTE Requirements. Axon Respond is only available and usable with a Fleet 3 system configured with LTE modem and service. Customer is responsible for providing LTE service for the modem. Coverage and availability of LTE service is subject to Customer’s LTE carrier. 5. Axon Respond Service Limitations. Customer acknowledges that LTE service is made available only within the operating range of the networks. Service may be temporarily refused, interrupted, or limited because of: (a) facilities limitations; (b) transmission limitations caused by atmospheric, terrain, other natural or artificial conditions adversely affecting transmission, weak batteries, system overcapacity, movement outside a service area or gaps in coverage in a service area, and other causes reasonably outside of the carrier’s control such as intentional or negligent acts of third parties that damage or impair the network or disrupt service; or (c) equipment modifications, upgrades, relocations, repairs, and other similar activities necessary for the proper or improved operation of service. 5.1. With regard to Axon Body, Partner networks are made available as-is and the carrier makes no warranties or representations as to the availability or quality of roaming service provided by carrier partners, and the carrier will not be liable in any capacity for any errors, outages, or failures of carrier partner networks. Customer expressly understands and agrees that it has no contractual relationship whatsoever with the underlying wireless service provider or its affiliates or contractors and Customer is not a third-party beneficiary of any agreement between Axon and the underlying carrier. 6. Termination. Upon termination of this Agreement, or if Customer stops paying for Axon Respond or combined offerings that include Axon Respond, Axon will end Axon Respond services, including any Axon-provided LTE service. Page 220 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 26 of 42 Axon Virtual Reality Content Terms of Use Appendix If Virtual Reality is included on the Quote, this Appendix applies. 1. Term. The Quote will detail the products and license duration, as applicable, of the goods, services, and software, and contents thereof, provided by Axon to Customer related to virtual reality (collectively, "Virtual Reality Media"). 2. Headsets. Customer may purchase additional virtual reality headsets from Axon. In the event Customer decides to purchase additional virtual reality headsets for use with Virtual Reality Media, Customer must purchase those headsets from Axon. 3. License Restrictions. All licenses will immediately terminate if Customer does not comply with any term of this Agreement. If Customer utilizes more users than stated in this Agreement, Customer must purchase additional Virtual Reality Media licenses from Axon. Customer may not use Virtual Reality Media for any purpose other than as expressly permitted by this Agreement. Customer may not: 3.1. modify, tamper with, repair, or otherwise create derivative works of Virtual Reality Media; 3.2. reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile Virtual Reality Media or apply any process to derive the source code of Virtual Reality Media, or allow others to do the same; 3.3. copy Virtual Reality Media in whole or part, except as expressly permitted in this Agreement; 3.4. use trade secret information contained in Virtual Reality Media; 3.5. resell, rent, loan or sublicense Virtual Reality Media; 3.6. access Virtual Reality Media to build a competitive device or service or copy any features, functions, or graphics of Virtual Reality Media; or 3.7. remove, alter, or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon or Axon’s licensors on or within Virtual Reality Media or any copies of Virtual Reality Media. 4. Privacy. Customer’s use of the Virtual Reality Media is subject to the Axon Virtual Reality Privacy Policy, a current version of which is available at https://www.axon.com/axonvrprivacypolicy. 5. Termination. Axon may terminate Customer’s license immediately for Customer’s failure to comply with any of the terms in this Agreement. Page 221 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 27 of 42 Axon Evidence Local Software Appendix This Appendix applies if Axon Evidence Local is included in the Quote. 1. License. Axon owns all executable instructions, images, icons, sound, and text in Axon Evidence Local. All rights are reserved to Axon. Axon grants a non-exclusive, royalty-free, worldwide right and license to use Axon Evidence Local. "Use" means storing, loading, installing, or executing Axon Evidence Local exclusively for data communication with an Axon Device. Customer may use Axon Evidence Local in a networked environment on computers other than the computer it installs Axon Evidence Local on, so long as each execution of Axon Evidence Local is for data communication with an Axon Device. Customer may make copies of Axon Evidence Local for archival purposes only. Customer shall retain all copyright, trademark, and proprietary notices in Axon Evidence Local on all copies or adaptations. 2. Term. The Quote will detail the duration of the Axon Evidence Local license, as well as any maintenance. The term will begin upon installation of Axon Evidence Local. 3. License Restrictions. All licenses will immediately terminate if Customer does not comply with any term of this Agreement. Customer may not use Axon Evidence Local for any purpose other than as expressly permitted by this Agreement. Customer may not: 3.1. modify, tamper with, repair, or otherwise create derivative works of Axon Evidence Local; 3.2. reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile Axon Evidence Local or apply any process to derive the source code of Axon Evidence Local, or allow others to do the same; 3.3. access or use Axon Evidence Local to avoid incurring fees or exceeding usage limits or quotas; 3.4. copy Axon Evidence Local in whole or part, except as expressly permitted in this Agreement; 3.5. use trade secret information contained in Axon Evidence Local; 3.6. resell, rent, loan or sublicense Axon Evidence Local; 3.7. access Axon Evidence Local to build a competitive device or service or copy any features, functions, or graphics of Axon Evidence Local; or 3.8. remove, alter, or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon or Axon’s licensors on or within Axon Evidence Local or any copies of Axon Evidence Local. 4. Support. Axon may make available updates and error corrections ("Updates") to Axon Evidence Local. Axon will provide Updates electronically via the Internet or media as determined by Axon. Customer is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate access to the Internet to receive Updates. Customer is responsible for maintaining the computer equipment necessary to use Axon Evidence Local. Axon may provide technical support of a prior release/version of Axon Evidence Local for six (6) months from when Axon made the subsequent release/version available. 5. Termination. Axon may terminate Customer’s license immediately for Customer’s failure to comply with any of the terms in this Agreement. Upon termination, Axon may disable Customer’s right to login to Axon Evidence Local. Page 222 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 28 of 42 Axon Application Programming Interface Appendix This Appendix applies if Axon’s API Services or a subscription to Axon Cloud Services are included on the Quote. 1. Definitions. 1.1. "API Client" means the software that acts as the interface between Customer’s computer and the server, which is already developed or to be developed by Customer. 1.2. "API Interface" means software implemented by Customer to configure Customer’s independent API Client Software to operate in conjunction with the API Service for Customer ’s authorized Use. 1.3. "Axon Evidence Partner API, API or Axon API" (collectively "API Service") means Axon’s API which provides a programmatic means to access data in Customer’s Axon Evidence account or integrate Customer’s Axon Evidence account with other systems. 1.4. "Use" means any operation on Customer’s data enabled by the supported API functionality. 2. Purpose and License. 2.1. Customer may use API Service and data made available through API Service, in connection with an API Client developed by Customer. Axon may monitor Customer ’s use of API Service to ensure quality, improve Axon devices and services, and verify compliance with this Agreement. Customer agrees to not interfere with such monitoring or obscure from Axon Customer’s use of API Service. Customer will not use API Service for commercial use. 2.2. Axon grants Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferable, non-sublicensable, worldwide, revocable right and license during the Term to use API Service, solely for Customer’s Use in connection with Customer ’s API Client. 2.3. Axon reserves the right to set limitations on Customer ’s use of the API Service, such as a quota on operations, to ensure stability and availability of Axon’s API. Axon will use reasonable efforts to accommodate use beyond the designated limits. 3. Configuration. Customer will work independently to configure Customer’s API Client with API Service for Customer’s applicable Use. Customer will be required to provide certain information (such as identification or contact details) as part of the registration. Registration information provided to Axon must be accurate. Customer will inform Axon promptly of any updates. Upon Customer’s registration, Axon will provide documentation outlining API Service information. 4. Customer Responsibilities. When using API Service, Customer and its End Users shall not: 4.1. use API Service in any way other than as expressly permitted under this Agreement; 4.2. use in any way that results in, or could result in, any security breach to Axon; 4.3. perform an action with the intent of introducing any virus, worm, defect, Trojan horse, malware, or any item of a destructive nature to Axon Devices and Services; 4.4. interfere with, modify, disrupt or disable features or functionality of API Service or the servers or net works providing API Service; 4.5. reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or translate or attempt to extract the source code from API Service or any related software; 4.6. create an API Interface that functions substantially the same as API Service and offer it for use by third parties; 4.7. provide use of API Service on a service bureau, rental or managed services basis or permit other individuals or entities to create links to API Service; 4.8. frame or mirror API Service on any other server, or wireless or Internet-based device; 4.9. make available to a third-party, any token, key, password or other login credentials to API Service; 4.10. take any action or inaction resulting in illegal, unauthorized or improper purposes; or 4.11. disclose Axon’s API manual. 5. API Content. All content related to API Service, other than Customer Content or Customer ’s API Client content, is considered Axon’s API Content, including: Page 223 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 29 of 42 5.1. the design, structure and naming of API Service fields in all responses and requests; 5.2. the resources available within API Service for which Customer takes actions on, such as evidence, cases, users, or reports; 5.3. the structure of and relationship of API Service resources; and 5.4. the design of API Service, in any part or as a whole. 6. Prohibitions on API Content. Neither Customer nor its End Users will use API content returned from the API Interface to: 6.1. scrape, build databases, or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header; 6.2. copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease, lend, convey, distribute, publicly display, or sublicense to any third-party; 6.3. misrepresent the source or ownership; or 6.4. remove, alter, or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights not ices (including copyright and trademark notices). 7. API Updates. Axon may update or modify the API Service from time to time ("API Update"). Customer is required to implement and use the most current version of API Service and to make any applicable changes to Customer’s API Client required as a result of such API Update. API Updates may adversely affect how Customer’s API Client access or communicate with API Service or the API Interface. Each API Client must contain means for Customer to update API Client to the most current version of API Service . Axon will provide support for one (1) year following the release of an API Update for all depreciated API Service versions. Page 224 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 30 of 42 Axon Channel Services Appendix This Appendix applies if Customer purchases Axon Channel Service, as set forth on the Quote. 1. Definitions. 1.1. "Axon Digital Evidence Management System" means Axon Evidence or Axon Evidence Local, as specified in the attached Channel Services Statement of Work. 1.2. "Active Channel" means a third-party system that is continuously communicating with an Axon Digital Evidence Management System. 1.3. "Inactive Channel" means a third-party system that will have a one-time communication to an Axon Digital Evidence Management System. 2. Scope. Customer currently has a third-party system or data repository from which Customer desires to share data with Axon Digital Evidence Management. Axon will facilitate the transfer of Customer ’s third-party data into an Axon Digital Evidence Management System or the transfer of Customer data out of an Axon Digital Evidence Management System as defined in the Channel Services Statement of Work ("Channel Services SOW"). Channel Services will not delete any Customer Content. Customer is responsible for verifying all necessary data is migrated correctly and retained per Customer policy. 3. Changes. Axon is only responsible to perform the Services described in this Appendix and Channel Services SOW. Any additional services are out of scope. The Parties must document scope changes in a written and signed change order. Changes may require an equitable adjustment in the charges or schedule. 4. Purpose and Use. Customer is responsible for verifying Customer has the right to share data from and provide access to third-party system as it relates to the Services described in this Appendix and the Channel Services SOW. For Active Channels, Customer is responsible for any changes to a third-party system that may affect the functionality of the channel service. Any additional work required for the continuation of the Service may require additional fees. An Axon Field Engineer may require access to Customer’s network and systems to perform the Services described in the Channel Services SOW. Customer is responsible for facilitating this access per all laws and policies applicable to Customer. 5. Project Management. Axon will assign a Project Manager to work closely with Customer ’s project manager and project team members and will be responsible for completing the tasks required to meet all contract deliverables on time and budget. 6. Warranty. Axon warrants that it will perform the Channel Services in a workmanlike manner. 7. Monitoring. Axon may monitor Customer ’s use of Channel Services to ensure quality, improve Axon devices and services, prepare invoices based on the total amount of data migrated, and verify compliance with this Agreement. Customer agrees not to interfere with such monitoring or obscure from Axon Customer ’s use of channel services. 8. Customer’s Responsibilities. Axon’s successful performance of the Channel Services requires Customer: 8.1. Make available its relevant systems for assessment by Axon (including making these systems available to Axon via remote access); 8.2. Provide access to the building facilities and where Axon is to perform the Channel Services, subject to safety and security restrictions imposed by the Customer (including providing security passes or other necessary documentation to Axon representatives performing the Channel Services permitting them to enter and exit Customer premises with laptop personal computers and any other materials needed to perform the Channel Services); 8.3. Provide all necessary infrastructure and software information (TCP/IP addresses, node names, and network configuration) for Axon to provide the Channel Services; 8.4. Ensure all appropriate data backups are performed; 8.5. Provide Axon with remote access to the Customer’s network and third-party systems when required for Axon to perform the Channel Services; 8.6. Notify Axon of any network or machine maintenance that may impact the performance of the Channel Services; and 8.7. Ensure the reasonable availability by phone or email of knowledgeable staff, personnel, system administrators, and operators to provide timely, accurate, complete, and up-to-date documentation and information to Axon (these contacts are to provide background information and clarification of information required to perform the Channel Services). Page 225 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 31 of 42 Axon Technical Account Manager Appendix This Appendix applies if Axon Support Engineer services are included in the Quote. 1. Axon Technical Account Manager Payment. Axon will invoice for Axon Technical Account Manager ("TAM") services, as outlined in the Quote, when the TAM commences work on-site at Customer. 2. Full-Time TAM Scope of Services. 2.1. A Full-Time TAM will work on-site four (4) days per week, unless an alternate schedule or reporting location is mutually agreed upon by Axon and Customer. 2.2. Customer’s Axon sales representative and Axon’s Customer Success team will work with Customer to define its support needs and ensure the Full-Time TAM has skills to align with those needs. There may be up to a six- (6-) month waiting period before the Full-Time TAM can work on-site, depending upon Customer’s needs and availability of a Full-Time TAM. 2.3. The purchase of Full-Time TAM Services includes two (2) complimentary Axon Accelerate tickets per year of the Agreement, so long as the TAM has started work at Customer, and Customer is current on all payments for the Full-Time TAM Service. 2.4. The Full-Time TAM Service options are listed below: Ongoing System Set-up and Configuration Assisting with assigning cameras and registering docks Maintaining Customer ’s Axon Evidence account Connecting Customer to "Early Access" programs for new devices Account Maintenance Conducting on-site training on new features and devices for Customer leadership team(s) Thoroughly documenting issues and workflows and suggesting new workflows to improve the effectiveness of the Axon program Conducting weekly meetings to cover current issues and program status Data Analysis Providing on-demand Axon usage data to identify trends and insights for improving daily workflows Comparing Customer's Axon usage and trends to peers to establish best practices Proactively monitoring the health of Axon equipment and coordinating returns when needed Direct Support Providing on-site, Tier 1 and Tier 2 (as defined in Axon's Service Level Agreement) technical support for Axon Devices Proactively monitoring the health of Axon equipment Creating and monitoring RMAs on-site Providing Axon app support Monitoring and testing new firmware and workflows before they are released to Customer’s production environment Customer Advocacy Coordinating bi-annual voice of customer meetings with Axon’s Device Management team Recording and tracking Customer feature requests and major bugs 3. Regional TAM Scope of Services. 3.1. A Regional TAM will work on-site for three (3) consecutive days per quarter. Customer must schedule the on- site days at least two (2) weeks in advance. The Regional TAM will also be available by phone and email during regular business hours up to eight (8) hours per week. 3.2. There may be up to a six- (6-) month waiting period before Axon assigns a Regional TAM to Customer, depending upon the availability of a Regional TAM. 3.3. The purchase of Regional TAM Services includes two (2) complimentary Axon Accelerate tickets per year of the Agreement, so long as the TAM has started work at Customer and Customer is current on all payments for the Regional TAM Service. 3.4. The Regional TAM service options are listed below: Page 226 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 32 of 42 Account Maintenance Conducting remote training on new features and devices for Customer’s leadership Thoroughly documenting issues and workflows and suggesting new workflows to improve the effectiveness of the Axon program Conducting weekly conference calls to cover current issues and program status Visiting Customer quarterly (up to 3 consecutive days) to perform a quarterly business review, discuss Customer's goals for your Axon program, and continue to ensure a successful deployment of Axon Devices Direct Support Providing remote, Tier 1 and Tier 2 (As defined Axon's Service Level Agreement) technical support for Axon Devices Creating and monitoring RMAs remotely Data Analysis Providing quarterly Axon usage data to identify trends and program efficiency opportunities Comparing Customer's Axon usage and trends to peers to establish best practices Proactively monitoring the health of Axon equipment and coordinating returns when needed Customer Advocacy Coordinating bi-yearly Voice of Customer meetings with Device Management team Recording and tracking Customer feature requests and major bugs 4. Out of Scope Services. The TAM is responsible to perform only the Services described in this Appendix. Any additional Services discussed or implied that are not defined explicitly in this Appendix will be considered out of the scope. 5. TAM Leave Time. The TAM will be allowed up to seven (7) days of sick leave and up to fifteen (15) days of vacation time per each calendar year. The TAM will work with Customer to coordinate any time off and will provide Customer with at least two (2) weeks’ notice before utilizing any vacation days. Page 227 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 33 of 42 Axon Investigate Appendix If the Quote includes Axon's On Prem Video Suite known as Axon Investigate or Third-Party Video Support License, the following appendix shall apply. 1. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions specified below and upon payment of the applicable fees set forth in the Quote, Axon grants to Customer a nonexclusive, nontransferable license to install, use, and display the Axon Investigate software ("Software") solely for its own internal use only and for no other purpose, for the duration of subscription term set forth in the Quote. This Agreement does not grant Customer any right to enhancements or updates, but if such are made available to Customer and obtained by Customer, they shall become part of the Software and governed by the terms of this Agreement. 2. Third-Party Licenses. Axon licenses several third-party codecs and applications that are integrated into the Software. Users with an active support contract with Axon are granted access to these additional features. By accepting this agreement, Customer agrees to and understands that an active support contract is required for all of the following features: DNxHD output formats, decoding files via the "fast indexing" method, proprietary file metadata, telephone and email support, and all future updates to the software. If Customer terminates the annual support contract with Axon, the features listed above will be disabled within the Software. It is recommended that users remain on an active support contract to maintain the full functionality of the Software. 3. Restrictions on Use. Customer may not permit any other person to use the Software unless such use is in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Customer may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, reverse compile, decompile, disassemble or create derivative works with respect to the Software, except to the extent applicable laws specifically prohibit such restrictions. Customer may not rent, lease, sublicense, grant a security interest in or otherwise transfer Customer ’s rights to or to use the Software. Any rights not granted are reserved to Axon. 4. Title. Axon and its licensors shall have sole and exclusive ownership of all right, title, and interest in and to the Software and all changes, modifications, and enhancements thereof (including ownership of all trade secrets and copyrights pertaining thereto), regardless of the form or media in which the original or copies may exist, subject only to the rights and privileges expressly granted by Axon. This Agreement does not provide Customer with title or ownership of the Software, but only a right of limited use. 5. Copies. The Software is copyrighted under the laws of the United States and international treaty provisions. Customer may not copy the Software except for backup or archival purposes, and all such copies shall contain all Axon’s notices regarding proprietary rights as contained in the Software as originally provided to Customer. If Customer receives one copy electronically and another copy on media, the copy on media may be used only for archival purposes and this license does not authorize Customer to use the copy of media on an additional server. 6. Actions Required Upon Termination. Upon termination of the license associated with this Agreement , Customer agrees to destroy all copies of the Software and other text and/or graphical documentation, whether in electronic or printed format, that describe the features, functions and operation of the Software that are provided by Axon to Customer ("Software Documentation") or return such copies to Axon. Regarding any copies of media containing regular backups of Customer's computer or computer system, Customer agrees not to access such media for the purpose of recovering the Software or online Software Documentation. 7. Export Controls. None of the Software, Software Documentation or underlying information may be downloaded or otherwise exported, directly or indirectly, without the prior written consent, if required, of the office of Export Administration of the United States, Department of Commerce, nor to any country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods, to any person on the U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nations, or the U.S. Department of Commerce’s Table of Denials. 8. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software and Software Documentation are Commercial Computer Software provided with Restricted Rights under Federal Acquisition Regulations and Customer supplements to them. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 255.227 -7013 et. Seq. or 252.211-7015, or subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable, or similar clauses in the NASA FAR Supplement. Contractor/manufacturer is Axon Enterprise, Inc., 17800 North 85th Street, Scottsdale, Arizona 85255. Page 228 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 34 of 42 My90 Terms of Use Appendix 1. Definitions. 1.1. "My90" means Axon’s proprietary platform and methodology to obtain and analyze feedback, and other related offerings, including, without limitation, interactions between My90 and Axon products. 1.2. "Recipient Contact Information" means contact information, as applicable, including phone number or email address (if available) of the individual whom Customer would like to obtain feedback. 1.3. "Customer Data" means 1.3.1. "My90 Customer Content" which means data, including Recipient Contact Information, provided to My90 directly by Customer or at their direction, or by permitting My90 to access or connect to an information system or similar technology. My90 Customer Content does not include My90 Non- Content Data. 1.3.2. "My90 Non-Content Data" which means data, configuration, and usage information about Customer's My90 tenant, and client software, users, and survey recipients that is Processed (as defined in Section 1.6 of this Appendix) when using My90 or responding to a My90 Survey. My90 Non-Content Data includes data about users and survey recipients captured during account management and customer support activities. My90 Non-Content Data does not include My90 Customer Content. 1.3.3. "Survey Response" which means survey recipients' response to My90 Survey. 1.4. "My90 Data" means 1.4.1. "My90 Survey" which means surveys, material(s) or content(s) made available by Axon to Customer and survey recipients within My90. 1.4.2. "Aggregated Survey Response" which means Survey Response that has been de-identified and aggregated or transformed so that it is no longer reasonably capable of being associated with, or could reasonably be linked directly or indirectly to, a particular individual. 1.5. "Personal Data" means any information relating to an identified or identifiable natural person. An identifiable natural person is one who can be identified, directly or indirectly, in particular by reference to an identifier such as a name, an identification number, location data, an online identifier or to one or more factors specific to the physical, physiological, genetic, mental, economic, cultural, or social identity of that natural person. 1.6. "Processing" means any operation or set of operations which is performed on data or on sets of data, whether or not by automated means, such as collection, recording, organization, structuring, storage, adaptation or alteration, retrieval, consultation, use, disclosure by transmission, dissemination or otherwise making available, alignment or combination, restriction, erasure, or destruction. 1.7. "Sensitive Personal Data" means Personal Data that reveals an individual’s health, racial or ethnic origin, sexual orientation, disability, religious or philosophical beliefs, or trade union membership. 2. Access. Upon Axon granting Customer a subscription to My90, Customer may access and use My90 to store and manage My90 Customer Content, and applicable My90 Surveys and Aggregated Survey Responses. This Appendix is subject to the Terms and Conditions of Axon’s Master Service and Purchasing Agreement or in the event you and Axon have entered into a prior agreement to govern all futu re purchases, that agreement shall govern. 3. IP address. Axon will not store survey respondents’ IP address. 4. Customer Owns My90 Customer Content. Customer controls or owns all rights, titles, and interests in My90 Customer Content. Except as outlined herein, Axon obtains no interest in My90 Customer Content, and My90 Customer Content is not Axon’s business records. Except as set forth in this Agreement, Customer is responsible for uploading, sharing, managing, and deleting My90 Customer Content. Axon will only have access to My90 Customer Content for the limited purposes set forth herein. Customer agrees to allow Axon access to My90 Customer Content to (a) perform troubleshooting, maintenance, or diagnostic screenings; and (b) enforce this Agreement or policies governing use of My90 and other Axon products. 5. Details of the Processing. The nature and purpose of the Processing under this Appendix are further specified Page 229 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 35 of 42 in Schedule 1 Details of the Processing, to this Appendix. 6. Security. Axon will implement commercially reasonable and appropriate measures to secure Customer Data against accidental or unlawful loss, access, or disclosure. Axon will maintain a comprehensive information security program to protect Customer Data including logical, physical access, vulnerability, risk, and configuration management; incident monitoring and response; security education; and data protection. Axon will not treat Customer Data in accordance with FBI CJIS Security Policy requirements and does not agree to the CJIS Security Addendum for this engagement or any other security or privacy related commitments that have been established between Axon and Customer, such as ISO 27001 certification or SOC 2 Reporting. 7. Privacy. Customer use of My90 is subject to the My90 Privacy Policy, a current version of which is available at https://www.axon.com/legal/my90privacypolicy. Customer agrees to allow Axon access to My90 Non-Content Data from Customer to (a) perform troubleshooting, maintenance, or diagnostic screenings; (b) provide, develop, improve, and support current and future Axon products including My90 and related services; and (c) enforce this Agreement or policies governing the use of My90 or other Axon products. 8. Location of Storage. Axon may transfer Customer Data to third-party subcontractors for Processing. Axon will determine the locations for Processing of Customer Data. For all Customer, Axon will Process and store Customer Data within the country in which Customer is located. Ownership of My90 Customer Content remains with Customer. 9. Required Disclosures. Axon will not disclose Customer Data that Customer shares with Axon except as compelled by a court or administrative body or required by any law or regulation. Axon will notify Customer if any disclosure request is received for Customer Data so Customer may file an objection with the court or administrative body, unless prohibited by law. 10. Data Sharing. Axon may share data only with entities that control or are controlled by or under common control of Axon, and as described below: 10.1. Axon may share Customer Data with third parties it employs to perform tasks on Axon’s behalf to provide products or services to Customer. 10.2. Axon may share Aggregated Survey Response with third parties, such as other Axon customers, local city agencies, private companies, or members of the public that are seeking a way to collect analysis on general policing and community trends. Aggregated Survey Response will not be reasonably capable of being associated with or reasonably linked directly or indirectly to a particular individual. 11. License and Intellectual Property. Customer grants Axon, its affiliates, and assignees the irrevocable, perpetual, fully paid, royalty-free, and worldwide right and license to use Customer Data for internal use including but not limited to analysis and creation of derivatives. Axon may not release Customer Data to any third party under this right that is not aggregated and de-identified. Customer acknowledges that Customer will have no intellectual property right in any media, good or service developed or improved by Axon. Customer acknowledges that Axon may make any lawful use of My90 Data and any derivative of Customer Data including, without limitation, the right to monetize, redistribute, make modification of, and make derivatives of the surveys, survey responses and associated data, and Customer will have no intellectual property right in any good, service, media, or other product that uses My90 Data. 12. Customer Use of Aggregated Survey Response. Axon will make available to Customer Aggregated Survey Response and rights to use for any Customer purpose. 13. Data Subject Rights. Taking into account the nature of the Processing, Axon shall assist Customer by appropriate technical and organizational measures, insofar as this is reasonable, for the fulfilment of Customer's obligation to respond to a Data Subject Request regarding any Personal Data contained within My90 Customer Content. If in regard to My90 Customer Content, Axon receives a Data Subject Request from Customer's data subject to exercise one or more of its rights under applicable Data Protection Law, Axon will redirect the data subject within seventy-two (72) hours, to make its request directly to Customer. Customer will be responsible for responding to any such request. 14. Assistance with Requests Related to My90 Customer Content. With regard to the processing of My90 Customer Content, Axon shall, if not prohibited by applicable law, notify Customer without delay after receipt, if Axon: (a) receives a request for information from the Supervisory Authority or any other competent authority regarding My90 Customer Content; (b) receives a complaint or request from a third party regarding the obligations of Customer or Axon under applicable Data Protection Law; or (c) receives any other communication which directly or indirectly pertains to My90 Customer Content or the Processing or protection of My90 Customer Content. Axon Page 230 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 36 of 42 shall not respond to such requests, complaints, or communications, unless Customer has given Axon written instructions to that effect or if such is required under a statutory provision. In the latter case, prior to responding to the request, Axon shall notify Customer of the relevant statutory provision and Axon shall limit its response to what is necessary to comply with the request. 15. Axon Evidence Partner Sharing. If Axon Evidence partner sharing is used to share My90 Customer Content, Customer will manage the data sharing partnership with Axon and access to allow only for authorized data sharing with Axon. Customer acknowledges that any applicable audit trail on the original source data will not include activities and processing performed against the instances, copies or clips that has been shared with Axon. Customer also acknowledges that the retention policy from the original source data is not applied to any data shared with Axon. Except as provided herein, data shared with Axon may be retained indefinitely by Axon. 16. Data Retention. Phone numbers provided to Axon directly by Customer or at their direction, or by permitting My90 to access or connect to an information system or similar technology will be retained for twenty-four (24) hours. Axon will not delete Aggregated Survey Response for four (4) years following termination of this Agreement. There will be no functionality of My90 during these four (4) years other than the ability to submit a request to retrieve Aggregated Survey Response. Axon has no obligation to maintain or provide Aggregated Survey Response after these four years and may thereafter, unless legally prohibited, delete all Aggregated Survey Response. 17. Termination. Termination of an My90 Agreement will not result in the removal or modification of previously shared My90 Customer Content or the potential monetization of Survey Response and Aggregated Survey Response. 18. Managing Data Shared. Customer is responsible for: 18.1. Ensuring My90 Customer Content is appropriate for use in My90. This includes, prior to sharing: (a) applying any and all required redactions, clipping, removal of metadata, logs, etc. and (b) coordination with applicable public disclosure officers and related legal teams; 18.2. Ensuring that only My90 Customer Content that is authorized to be shared for the purposes outlined is shared with Axon. Customer will periodically monitor or audit this shared data; 18.3. Using an appropriately secure data transfer mechanism to provide My90 Customer Content to Axon; 18.4. Immediately notify Axon if My90 Customer Content that is not authorized for sharing has been shared. Axon may not be able to immediately retrieve or locate all instances, copies or clips of My90 Customer Content in the event Customer requests to un-share previously shared My90 Customer Content; 19. Prior to enrollment in My90. Prior to enrolling in My90, Customer will: 19.1. determine how to use My90 in accordance with applicable laws and regulations including but not limited to consents, use of info or other legal considerations; 19.2. develop a set of default qualification criteria of what My90 Customer Content may be shared with Axon; and 19.3. assign responsibilities for managing what My90 Customer Content is shared with Axon and educate users on what data may or not be shared with Axon. 20. Customer Responsibilities. Customer is responsible for: 20.1. ensuring no My90 Customer Content or Customer End User’s use of My90 Customer Content or My90 violates this Agreement or applicable laws; 20.2. providing, and will continue to provide, all notices and has obtained, and will continue to obtain, all consents and rights necessary under applicable laws for Axon to process Customer Data in accordance with this Agreement; and 20.3. maintaining necessary computer equipment and Internet connections for use of My90. If Customer becomes aware of any violation of this Agreement by an End User, Customer will immediately terminate that End User’s access to My90. Customer will also maintain the security of End User’s usernames and passwords and security and access by End Users to My90 Customer Content. Customer is responsible for ensuring the configuration and utilization of My90 meets applicable Customer regulations and standards. Customer may not sell, transfer, or sublicense access to any other entity or person. Customer shall contact Axon immediately if an unauthorized party may be using Customer's account or My90 Customer Content or if account information is lost or stolen. Page 231 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 37 of 42 21. Suspension. Axon may temporarily suspend Customer's or any End User’s right to access or use any portion or all of My90 immediately upon notice, if Customer or End User’s use of or registration for My90 may (a) pose a security risk to Axon products including My90, or any third-party; (b) adversely impact My90, the systems, or content of any other customer; (c) subject Axon, Axon’s affiliates, or any third-party to liability; or (d) be fraudulent. Customer remains responsible for all fees, if applicable, incurred through suspension. Axon will not delete My90 Customer Content or Aggregated Survey Response because of suspension, except as specified in this Agreement. 22. My90 Restrictions. Customer and Customer End Users, may not, or may not attempt to: 22.1. copy, modify, tamper with, repair, or create derivative works of any part of My90; 22.2. reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile My90 or apply any process to derive any source code included in My90, or allow others to do the same; 22.3. access or use My90 with the intent to gain unauthorized access, avoid incurring fees or exceeding usage limits or quotas; 22.4. use trade secret information contained in My90, except as expressly permitted in this Agreement; 22.5. access My90 to build a competitive product or service or copy any features, functions, or graphics of My90; 22.6. remove, alter, or obscure any confidentiality or proprietary rights notices (including copyright and trademark notices) of Axon’s or Axon’s licensors on or within My90; or 22.7. use My90 to store or transmit infringing, libelous, or other unlawful or tortious material; to store or transmit material in violation of third-party privacy rights; or to store or transmit malicious code. Page 232 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 38 of 42 Schedule 1- Details of the Processing 1. Nature and Purpose of the Processing. To help Customer obtain feedback from individuals, such as members of their community, staff, or officers. Features of My90 may include: 1.1. Survey Tool where Customer may create, distribute, and analyze feedback from individuals it designates. Customer may designate members of the community, staff or officers from whom they would like to obtain feedback; 1.2. Creation of custom forms for surveys. Customer may select questions from a list of pre-drafted questions or create their own; 1.3. Distribution of survey via multiple distribution channels such as text message; 1.4. Ability to access and analyze Survey Response. Axon may also provide Customer Aggregated Survey Responses which contain analysis and insights from the Survey Response; 1.5. Direct integration into information systems including Computer Aided Dispatch ("CAD"). This will enable Customer to share contact information easily and quickly with Axon of any individuals from whom it wishes to obtain feedback, enabling Axon to communicate directly with these individuals; 1.6. Data Dashboard Beta Test ("Data Dashboard") where Survey Response and Aggregated Survey Response will be displayed for Customer use. Customer will be able to analyze, interpret, and share results of the Survey Response. My90 may provide beta versions of the Data Dashboard that are specifically designed for Customer to test before they are publicly available; 1.7. Survey Responses will be aggregated and de-identified and may be subsequently distributed and disclosed through various mediums to: (1) Customer; (2) other Axon Customer; (3) private companies; and (4) members of the public. The purpose of disclosure is to provide ongoing insights and comparisons on general policing and community trends. Prior to disclosing this information, Axon will ensure that the Survey Response has been de-identified and aggregated or transformed so that it is no longer reasonably capable of being associated with, or could reasonably be linked directly or indirectly to a particular individual; and 1.8. Provide services and materials to engage Customer stakeholders, market the partnership to the public, and facilitate training. Page 233 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 39 of 42 Axon Event Offer Appendix If the Agreement includes the provision of, or Axon otherwise offers, ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation for select events hosted by Axon (“Axon Event”), the following shall apply: 1. General. Subject to the terms and conditions specified below and those in the Agreement, Axon may provide Customer with one or more offers to fund Axon Event ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation for Customer-selected employee(s) to attend one or more Axon Events. By entering into the Agreement, Customer warrants that it is appropriate and permissible for Customer to receive the referenced Axon Event offer(s) based on Customer’s understanding of the terms and conditions outlined in this Axon Event Offer Appendix. 2. Attendee/Employee Selection. Customer shall have sole and absolute discretion to select the Customer employee(s) eligible to receive the ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation that is the subject of any Axon Event offer(s). 3. Compliance. It is the intent of Axon that any and all Axon Event offers comply with all applicable laws, regulations and ethics rules regarding contributions, including gifts and donations. Axon’s provision of ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation for the applicable Axon Event to Customer is intended for the use and benefit of Customer in furtherance of its goals, and not the personal use or benefit of any official or employee of Customer. Axon makes this offer without seeking promises or favoritism for Axon in any bidding arrangements. Further, no exclusivity will be expected by either party in consideration for the offer. Axon makes the offer with the understanding that it will not, as a result of such offer, be prohibited from any procurement opportunit ies or be subject to any reporting requirements. If Customer’s local jurisdiction requires Customer to report or disclose the fair market value of the benefits provided by Axon, Customer shall promptly contact Axon to obtain such information, and Axon shall provide the information necessary to facilitate Customer's compliance with such reporting requirements. 4. Assignability. Customer may not sell, transfer, or assign Axon Event ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation provided under the Agreement. 5. Availability. The provision of all offers of Axon Event ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation is subject to availability of funds and resources. Axon has no obligation to provide Axon Event ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation. 6. Revocation of Offer. Axon reserves the right at any time to rescind the offer of Axon Event ticket(s), travel and/or accommodation to Customer if Customer or its selected employees fail to meet the prescribed conditions or if changes in circumstances render the provision of such benefits impractical, inadvisable, or in violation of any applicable laws, regulations, and ethics rules regarding contributions, including gifts and donations. Page 234 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 40 of 42 Axon Training Pod Appendix 1. Customer Responsibilities. Customer is responsible for: (i) all permits to use the Axon Training Pod; (ii) complying with all applicable laws pertaining to the use of the Axon Training Pod; (iii) any maintenance required for the Axon Training Pod; and (iv) disposal of the Axon Training Pod. 2. Warranties. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, AXON TRAINING POD IS SOLD “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON - INFRINGEMENT. 3. Placement. Axon will make its best efforts to work with Customer on the initial placement of the Axon Training Pod. After the initial placement, it is the Customer’s responsibility to make any adjustments to the Axon Training Pod’s placement. 4. Deemed Acceptance. The Axon Training Pod will be deemed accepted by Customer upon delivery. Customer waives any right to reject the Axon Training Pod except in the event of damage during shipment, which must be reported to Axon in writing within five (5) business days of delivery. Page 235 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 41 of 42 Dedrone Product Appendix If the Quote includes Dedrone Hardware, Dedrone Software, and/or Airspace Security as a Service (collectively, “Dedrone Products”), this Dedrone Product Appendix shall apply. 1. Definitions. 1.1 “Dedrone Data” means data that Axon maintains regarding a wide variety of drone models and manufacturers in the marketplace (“DedroneDNA”, formerly “DroneDNA”), as well as usability information that Axon collects regarding the performance of the Dedrone Software and Dedrone Hardware, aggregate or de-identified Collected Data compiled or used by Axon in accordance with Section 4.2, and any other information that Axon makes available to Customer by means of the Dedrone Software 1.2 “Dedrone Hardware” means the Axon drone detection hardware sensor or mitigation products set forth on a Quote and does not include any Third-Party Hardware. 1.3 “Sensor” means a radio frequency, video, radar or other hardware sensor for drone detection purchased by Customer from Axon or obtained from any third-party vendor. 1.4 “Dedrone Software” means (i) Axon’s proprietary drone-tracking software, known as DedroneTracker (formerly DroneTracker), whether deployed on-premise or hosted by Axon as a cloud-based solution, (ii) Axon’s video analytics software (currently known as Analytics Server), and/or (iii) software and/or firmware deployed or installed on the Dedrone Hardware or available for download and installation onto Customer’s Third-Party Hardware. 1.5 “Third-Party Hardware” means hardware products owned by Customer or purchased by Customer from third parties that are used by Customer in conjunction with the Software. 2. Customer License. 2.1 Software License. Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Axon grants Customer a royalty -free, nonexclusive, nontransferable, worldwide right during each Quote Term to use the Dedrone Software, including the Dedrone Data and Collected Data, subject to the terms of the Agreement and this Appendix (the “License”). Customer must purchase a License to the Software for each unit of Dedrone Hardware and/or Third -Party Hardware using Dedrone Software. Accordingly, Customer may only use the Software quantity and type of Hardware an d/or Third-Party Hardware units specified on the applicable Quote. If Customer purchases additional Licenses during a current Term, the Term of the new License(s) will be pro-rated to terminate at the end of the then-current License Term. Use of the Dedrone Software is subject to the terms of the Agreement between the parties 2.2 Restrictions. Customer will not: (i) use (or allow a third party to use) the Dedrone Products in order to monitor the availability, security, performance, or functionality of the Dedrone Products, or for any other benchmarking or competitive purposes; (ii) market, sublicense, resell, lease, loan, transfer, or otherwise commercially exploit the Dedrone Products; (iii) modify, create derivative works, decompile, reverse engineer, attempt to gain access to the source code, or copy the Dedrone Products or any of their components; (iv) use the Dedrone Products to conduct any fraudulent, malicious, or illegal activities; or (v) use the Dedrone Products in contravention of any applicable laws or regulations (each of (i) through (v), a (“Prohibited Use”). 3. Customer Obligations. 3.1 Compliance. Customer will use the Dedrone Products only in accordance with applicable specifications (the “Specifications”) and in compliance with all applicable laws, including all applicable export laws and regulations of the United States or any other country. Customer acknowledges that due to the nascent nature of drone detection and mitigation technologies applicable laws and regulations may be changing or emerging over time, and agrees that it is Customer’s responsibility to keep itself aware and remain compliant with the current laws and regulations that may apply, including but not limited to those that may apply to advanced features available at Customer’s option in the Dedrone Software. Customer will ensure that none of the Dedrone Products are directly or indirectly exported, re-exported, or used to provide services in violation of such export laws and regulations. Axon reserves the right to suspend use of any Dedrone Products operating in violation of such laws, following written notice to Customer. If Customer uses a radio jammer, or any other controlled device, in connection with the Dedrone Software, Customer represents to Axon that it is authorized to do so by the relevant authorities, that it will do so only in accordance with such authorization, and it will provide supporting documentation regarding such authorization upon request. Customer may be required to obtain legal Page 236 of 522 Master Services and Purchasing Agreement Version: 24 Release Date: August 2025 Page 42 of 42 authorization before any purchase or use of hardware sold by third parties. Axon shall not be liable if any government export authorization is delayed, denied, revoked, restricted or not renewed, nor shall any such delay, denial, revocation, restriction or non-renewal shall not constitute a breach of the Agreement by Axon. 3.2 Computing Environment. Customer is responsible for the maintenance and security of its own network and computing environment that it uses to host and/or access the Dedrone Products and for ensuring that any Third- Party Hardware meets the necessary specifications for use with the Dedrone Software. 4. Data Protection. 4.1 Data. If Customer licenses Dedrone Software, as part of its operation, the Dedrone Software may collect and send to servers owned, operated or controlled by Axon data or other information regarding Customer’s use of the Dedrone Software, which may include (i) information generated by each Sensor deployed by Customer, including information related to the date, time, and duration of the detection of the drone, as well as the locations of the detected drones and remote controls and of the Sensor itself (collectively, “Sensor Data”), and (ii) video recording of the detected drones, including flight path ("Video Data") (Sensor Data and Video Data are collectively referred to as “Collected Data”). 4.2 Use of Collected Data. Axon has the right to use Collected Data for any purpose, including: (i) improving any Dedrone Product; (ii) analyzing any Dedrone Product or the performance of any Dedrone Product; or (iii) compiling or using aggregate or de-identified Collected Data with other customers, or government and law enforcement entities, with or without compensation. Customer acknowledges that Axon may learn from the performance or use of any Dedrone Product, and Axon shall have the sole right to exploit any modification, enhancement or improvement of any Dedrone Product resulting from such learning. 4.3 User Data. To the extent Axon uses User login information, including name, email, username, and password (collectively, “User Data”) for any purpose other than to provide services to the Customer, such User Data will be deidentified and anonymized, and will not be identified as having come from Customer, except that Axon may disclose User Data where Axon, in good faith, believes that the law or legal process (such as a court order, search warrant or subpoena) requires Axon to do so. 4.4 Security. Axon maintains industry standard physical, technical, and administrative safeguards (the “Security Measures”) to protect Collected Data. 4.5 No Access. Except for User Data, Axon does not (and will not) collect, process, store, or otherwise have access to any personal information, about End Users or users of Customer’s products or services. 5. Ownership. 5.1 Axon Property. Axon owns and retains all rights, title, and interest in and to the Dedrone Data, Collected Data, the Dedrone Software, and all intellectual property embodied in the Dedrone Hardware, if the Dedrone Hardware is provided by Axon. Except for the limited license granted to Customer in Section 2.1, Axon does not by means of this Agreement or otherwise transfer or license any rights in the Dedrone Products to Customer, whether by implication, estoppel or otherwise. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Customer will take no action inconsistent with Axon intellectual property rights in the Dedrone Products or any Dedrone Data. 5.2 Customer Property. Customer owns and retains all right, title, and interest in and to the User Data and does not by means of this Agreement or otherwise transfer any rights in the User Data to Axon, except for the limited rights set forth in Section 4.3. 6. Government Restricted Rights. To the extent that Customer is an agency or instrumentality of the U.S. government, the parties agree that the Dedrone Software and documentation are commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation, respectively, and Customer’s rights therein are as specified in this License, per FAR 12.212 and DFARS 227.7202-3, as applicable, or in the case of NASA, subject to NFS 1852.22. 7. Updates. The Dedrone Software may include functionality that allows it to automatically download updates that may be made available by Axon. Customer consents to the installation of such functionality. Page 237 of 522 Page 1 Q-731818-45902RS Q-731818-45902RS Issued: 09/02/2025 Quote Expiration: 09/24/2025 Estimated Contract Start Date: 12/01/2025 Account Number: 108542 Payment Terms: N30 Mode of Delivery: UPS-GND Credit/Debit Amount: $0.00 SHIP TO BILL TO SALES REPRESENTATIVE PRIMARY CONTACT Trophy Club Police Dept. - TX 1 TROPHY WOOD DR ROANOKE, TX 76262-9700 USA Trophy Club Police Dept. - TX 1 TROPHY WOOD DR ROANOKE TX 76262-9700 USA Email: Ryan Sabo Phone: (480) 716-3516 Email: rsabo@axon.com Fax: Patrick Arata Phone: (682) 831-4655 Email: parata@trophyclub.org Fax: Quote Summary Discount Summary Program Length 60 Months Average Savings Per Year $8,242.57 TOTAL COST $119,590.80 ESTIMATED TOTAL W/ TAX $119,590.80 TOTAL SAVINGS $41,212.87 Axon Enterprise, Inc. 17800 N 85th St Scottsdale, Arizona 85255 United States VAT: 86-0741227 Domestic:(800) 978-2737 International: +1.800.978.2737 Page 238 of 522 Page 2 Q-731818-45902RS Payment Summary Date Subtotal Tax Total Nov 2025 $50,000.00 $0.00 $50,000.00 Nov 2026 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2027 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2028 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2029 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Total $119,590.80 $0.00 $119,590.80 Page 239 of 522 Page 3 Q-731818-45902RS Quote Unbundled Price:$160,817.40 Quote List Price:$128,290.80 Quote Subtotal:$119,590.80 Pricing All deliverables are detailed in Delivery Schedules section lower in proposal Item Description Qty Term Unbundled List Price Net Price Subtotal Tax Total Program C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 60 $110.23 $86.66 $86.66 $119,590.80 $0.00 $119,590.80 A la Carte Services 20379 AXON VR - PSO - FULL INSTALLATION - INSIDE SALES 1 $6,000.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 101208 AXON TASER 10 - 2 DAY INSTRUCTOR COURSE - INSIDE SALES 1 $2,700.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Total $119,590.80 $0.00 $119,590.80 Delivery Schedule Hardware Bundle Item Description QTY Shipping Location Estimated Delivery Date BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100126 AXON VR - TACTICAL BAG 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100390 AXON TASER 10 - HANDLE - YELLOW CLASS 3R 23 2 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100394 AXON TASER 10 - MAGAZINE - HALT TRAINING BLUE 4 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100396 AXON TASER 10 - MAGAZINE - INERT RED 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100399 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - LIVE 350 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100400 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - HALT 170 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100401 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - INERT 10 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100591 AXON TASER - CLEANING KIT 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100611 AXON TASER 10 - SAFARILAND HOLSTER - RH 23 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100623 ENHANCED HOOK-AND-LOOP TRAINING (HALT) SUIT (V2)1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100748 AXON VR - CONTROLLER - TASER 10 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101122 AXON VR - HOLSTER - T10 SAFARILAND GRAY - RH 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101455 AXON TASER 10 - REPLACEMENT TOOL KIT - INTERPOSER BUCKET 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101456 AXON TASER 10 - REPLACEMENT INTERPOSER BUCKET 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101751 AXON VR - HEADSET - HTC FOCUS VISION 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101755 AXON TASER 10 - MAGAZINE - LIVE DUTY BLACK V2 23 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101757 AXON TASER 10 - MAGAZINE - LIVE TRAINING PURPLE V2 3 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 20018 AXON TASER - BATTERY PACK - TACTICAL 23 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 20018 AXON TASER - BATTERY PACK - TACTICAL 5 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 70033 AXON - DOCK WALL MOUNT - BRACKET ASSY 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 71019 AXON BODY - DOCK POWERCORD - NORTH AMERICA 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 74200 AXON TASER - DOCK - SIX BAY PLUS CORE 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 80087 AXON TASER - TARGET - CONDUCTIVE PROFESSIONAL RUGGEDIZED 1 1 11/01/2025 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 80090 AXON TASER - TARGET FRAME - PROFESSIONAL 27.5 IN X 75 IN 1 1 11/01/2025 Page 240 of 522 Page 4 Q-731818-45902RS Hardware Bundle Item Description QTY Shipping Location Estimated Delivery Date BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100400 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - HALT 120 1 11/01/2026 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100400 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - HALT 110 1 11/01/2027 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101012 AXON VR - TAP REFRESH 1 - CONTROLLER 1 1 05/01/2028 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 20373 AXON VR - TAP REFRESH 1 - HEADSET 1 1 05/01/2028 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100400 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - HALT 120 1 11/01/2028 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100400 AXON TASER 10 - CARTRIDGE - HALT 110 1 11/01/2029 Software Bundle Item Description QTY Estimated Start Date Estimated End Date BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101180 AXON TASER - DATA SCIENCE PROGRAM 23 12/01/2025 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101703 AXON VR - USER ACCESS - TASER SKILLS 23 12/01/2025 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 20248 AXON TASER - EVIDENCE.COM LICENSE 23 12/01/2025 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 20248 AXON TASER - EVIDENCE.COM LICENSE 1 12/01/2025 11/30/2030 Services Bundle Item Description QTY BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100751 AXON TASER 10 - REPLACEMENT ACCESS PROGRAM - DUTY CARTRIDGE 23 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101193 AXON TASER - ON DEMAND CERTIFICATION 23 A la Carte 101208 AXON TASER 10 - 2 DAY INSTRUCTOR COURSE - INSIDE SALES 1 A la Carte 20379 AXON VR - PSO - FULL INSTALLATION - INSIDE SALES 1 Warranties Bundle Item Description QTY Estimated Start Date Estimated End Date BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100197 AXON VR - EXT WARRANTY - HEADSET 1 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 100704 AXON TASER 10 - EXT WARRANTY - HANDLE 23 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 101007 AXON VR - EXT WARRANTY - CONTROLLER 1 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 80374 AXON TASER - EXT WARRANTY - BATTERY PACK T7/T10 5 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 80374 AXON TASER - EXT WARRANTY - BATTERY PACK T7/T10 23 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 80396 AXON TASER - EXT WARRANTY - DOCK SIX BAY T7/T10 1 11/01/2026 11/30/2030 Page 241 of 522 Page 5 Q-731818-45902RS Shipping Locations Location Number Street City State Zip Country 1 1 TROPHY WOOD DR ROANOKE TX 76262-9700 USA 2 1 TROPHY WOOD DR ROANOKE TX 76262-9700 USA Payment Details Nov 2025 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Year 1 C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 $50,000.00 $0.00 $50,000.00 Total $50,000.00 $0.00 $50,000.00 Dec 2025 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Invoice Upon Fulfillment 101208 AXON TASER 10 - 2 DAY INSTRUCTOR COURSE - INSIDE SALES 1 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Invoice Upon Fulfillment 20379 AXON VR - PSO - FULL INSTALLATION - INSIDE SALES 1 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Total $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Nov 2026 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Year 2 C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Total $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2027 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Year 3 C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Total $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2028 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Year 4 C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Total $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Nov 2029 Invoice Plan Item Description Qty Subtotal Tax Total Year 5 C00024 BUNDLE - TASER 10 CERTIFICATION STANDARD 23 $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Total $17,397.70 $0.00 $17,397.70 Page 242 of 522 Page 6 Q-731818-45902RS Tax is estimated based on rates applicable at date of quote and subject to change at time of invoicing. If a tax exemption certificate should be applied, please submit prior to invoicing. Contract BuyBoard Proposal No. 698-23 (CEW only) is incorporated by reference into the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event of conflict the terms of Axon's Master Services and Purchasing Agreement shall govern. Standard Terms and Conditions Axon Enterprise Inc. Sales Terms and Conditions Axon Master Services and Purchasing Agreement: This Quote is limited to and conditional upon your acceptance of the provisions set forth herein and Axon’s Master Services and Purchasing Agreement (posted at https://www.axon.com/sales-terms-and-conditions), as well as the attached Statement of Work (SOW) for Axon Fleet and/or Axon Interview Room purchase, if applicable. In the event you and Axon have entered into a prior agreement to govern all future purchases, that agreement shall govern to the extent it includes the products and services being purchased and does not conflict with the Axon Customer Experience Improvement Program Appendix as described below. ACEIP: The Axon Customer Experience Improvement Program Appendix, which includes the sharing of de-identified segments of Agency Content with Axon to develop new products and improve your product experience (posted at www.axon.com/legal/sales-terms-and-conditions), is incorporated herein by reference. By signing below, you agree to the terms of the Axon Customer Experience Improvement Program. Acceptance of Terms: Any purchase order issued in response to this Quote is subject solely to the above referenced terms and conditions. By signing below, you represent that you are lawfully able to enter into contracts. If you are signing on behalf of an entity (including but not limited to the company, municipality, or government agency for whom you work), you represent to Axon that you have legal authority to bind that entity. If you do not have this authority, please do not sign this Quote. Page 243 of 522 Page 7 Q-731818-45902RS \s1\\d1\ Signature Date Signed 9/2/2025 Page 244 of 522 Page 1 of 4 Addendum to Services Agreement Between the Town of Trophy Club, Texas, and Axon Enterprise, Inc. This Addendum to Agreement for Services (the “Addendum”) is attached to and hereby made a part of the Master Services and Purchasing Agreement, Quote Number Q-731818- 45874RS, and other related Axon contract documents (collectively the “Agreement”) between the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home-rule municipal corporation located in Denton County, Texas (“Town” or “Customer”), and Axon Enterprise, Inc., a corporation authorized to do business in the State of Texas (“Axon”). 1. Gift to Public Servant. Customer may terminate the Agreement immediately if Axon has offered, or agreed to confer any benefit upon a Town employee or official that the Town employee or official is prohibited by law from accepting. Axon represents and warrants that Axon has not given, made, promised, or paid, nor offered to give, make, promise, or pay any gift, bonus, commission, money, or other consideration prohibited by law to any person as an inducement to obtain the services to be provided to the Town under this Agreement. 2. Texas Public Information Act. Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in the Agreement, all information, documents, and communications relating to the Agreement shall be subject to the Texas Public Information Act (“Act”) and any opinion of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction relating to the Act. 3. Indemnity and Exculpatory Provisions. Customer is a Texas home-rule municipality operating in the exercise of its governmental functions. Accordingly, any and all provisions, terms, or conditions in the Agreement requiring Customer to defend or indemnify Axon or any third- party from any and all costs, liabilities, penalties, sanctions, fines, or any other claims whatsoever, are void and of no effect to the extent they may obligate the Town to create an unconstitutional debt, and shall be construed as against public policy in accordance with the Texas Constitution and the laws of the State of Texas. Customer shall not be required to fund any obligations under the Agreement by the creation of a sinking fund. 4. Governing Law and Venue. The Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws and court decisions of the State of Texas, without regard to conflict of law or choice of law principles of Texas, or of any other state or country. The obligations of the parties to the Agreement shall be performable in Denton County, Texas, and if legal action is necessary in connection with or to enforce rights under the Agreement, exclusive venue shall lie in Denton County, Texas. 5. Governmental Function(s) and Immunity. A. Immunity retained. The Customer and Axon hereby acknowledge and agree that Customer is entering into the Agreement in the performance of and pursuant to its governmental functions for the health, safety, and welfare of the citizens of the Town, the general public, and the State of Texas, and nothing contained in the Agreement shall be construed as constituting a waiver of the Customer’s governmental immunity from suit or liability, which is expressly reserved to the fullest extent allowed by law. Page 245 of 522 Page 2 of 4 B. Limited Waiver of Immunity. Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in the Agreement, the Customer and Axon hereby acknowledge and agree that to the extent the Agreement is subject to the provisions of Subchapter I of Chapter 271, Texas Local Gov’t Code, as amended, the Customer’s immunity from suit is waived only as set forth in Subchapter I of Chapter 271, Texas Local Gov’t Code. C. Rights Retained. The Town expressly reserves its legislative and municipal police power in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas. Any provision, term, or condition in the Agreement requiring the Town to waive its rights under the Texas or Federal Constitution, or under any foreign law(s), or limiting the claims or remedies available to the Town, or requiring settlement of claims through binding mediation or arbitration are void and shall be given no effect. 6. Controlling Document. In the event any term, condition, or provision of this Addendum conflicts with any term, condition, or provision of the Agreement or the Amendment, the terms, conditions, and provisions of this Addendum shall supersede and control the terms, conditions, and provisions of the Agreement and Amendment. 7. Prompt Payment Act. Customer shall pay Axon the amounts due in accordance with the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2251. Despite any other provision to the contrary in the Agreement, interest, collections, and penalties related to overdue payment shall be governed by Subchapter B of Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2251. 8. Multiyear Contracts & No Future Debt. Notwithstanding any renewal term in the Agreement any automatic renewal of the Agreement must be approved or acknowledged by the Town in writing. The Town’s payment obligations are subject to the availability and annual appropriation of funds consistent with Tex. Const. art. XI, §5 and applicable law. If funds are not appropriated for any subsequent fiscal year, the Agreement terminates at the end of the then- current funded period without penalty. Nothing herein creates an unconstitutional debt or requires a sinking fund. Accordingly, the second sentence in Section 17.3 of the Agreement is hereby deleted. 9. Limitation of Liability; Damages. Neither party is liable for incidental or consequential damages to the extent permitted by law. Town’s monetary liability, if any, shall not exceed amounts paid by Town in the twelve (12) months preceding the event giving rise to the claim, subject to Tex. Loc. Gov’t Code § 271.153 and applicable law. 10. Insurance. In addition to Section 13 of the Agreement, Axon shall maintain at minimum: Commercial General Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence / $2,000,000 aggregate; Automobile Liability $1,000,000 CSL; Workers’ Compensation statutory & Employers’ Liability $1,000,000; and Technology Errors & Omissions/Cyber Liability (network security, privacy, media) $5,000,000 per claim. Except Workers’ Compensation, policies shall name the Town as Additional Insured where available, on a primary and non-contributory basis, with waiver of subrogation. Certificates due before work and upon renewal. 11. Non-discrimination. To the extent required by law, Axon shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Axon shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are Page 246 of 522 Page 3 of 4 treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Axon agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants, notices setting forth the nondiscrimination policies as required by law. 12. Tax Exempt; Annual Appropriations. Customer is tax exempt and shall not be subject to or pay for any charges for taxes under the Agreement. All payments by the Town under the Agreement, including any provision in the Agreement relating to penalties, overages, interest, collections, or any other additional costs, shall be subject to and conditioned upon the annual appropriation of public funding budgeted for the specific purposes of the Agreement in accordance with the Town Charter and Texas law. The Town shall make a good faith effort to appropriate funds in accordance with Texas law; however, in the event funds are not appropriated, the Agreement shall automatically terminate without any liability to Axon and without regard for any renewal or other notice requirements in the Agreement. 13. Additional Verifications. To the extent required by Texas law, Axon verifies that: 1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the Agreement discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code § 808.001 and 2271.001, and it will not boycott Israel during the term of the Agreement; (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. 14. Ethics Disclosure. To the extent required by law, Axon represents that it has completed a Texas Ethics Commission (the “TEC”) form 1295 (“Form 1295”) generated by the TEC’s electronic filing application in accordance with the provisions of Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2252.908 and the rules promulgated by the TEC. The parties agree that, with the exception of the information identifying the Town and the contract identification number, the Town is not responsible for the information contained in the Form 1295. The information contained in the Form 1295 has been provided solely by Axon and the Town has not verified such information. [Signatures on following page] Page 247 of 522 Page 4 of 4 EXECUTED to be effective the same date as the effective date of the Amendment to the Agreement executed by Customer and Axon. AXON, INC., THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS (“Axon”): (“Town” or “Customer”): By: By: (name and title) Brandon Wright, Town Manager Date: Date: ATTEST: By: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary Page 248 of 522 AXON CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY NOTICE Last Updated: February 1 , 2025 This Axon Cloud Services Privacy Notice (“Notice”) applies only to the information that Axon Enterprise, Inc. and its other legal entities (“Axon” “we”, “us”, “our”) collect from Customers and their users (collectively, “Customer” “you” and “your”) and provide to Axon in connection with Customer’s use of Axon Cloud Services (as defined below). Axon's marketing sites and other public websites are governed by the Axon Global Privacy Notice. Unless otherwise provided in this Notice, this Notice is subject to the terms of the Master Services Purchasing Agreement, or other similar agreement, if any, between Axon and Customer (“Agreement”). A concept or principle covered in this Notice shall apply and be incorporated into all other provisions of the Agreement in which the concept or principle is also applicable, notwithstanding the absence of any specific cross-reference thereto. All capitalized terms referenced, but not defined, in this Notice shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Agreement. By using Axon Cloud Services, Customer acknowledges that Customer has read and understands this Notice. Axon may occasionally update this Notice. When Axon posts changes, Axon will revise the "last updated" date at the top of this page. Customer’s continued use of Axon Cloud Services will signify Customer’s acknowledgement, and to the extent allowed by law agreement to and acceptance of any such changes. Definitions st 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 1/22Page 249 of 522 · “Axon Cloud Services” means Axon’s web services hosted on evidence.com including Axon Evidence and other related offerings, including, without limitation, interactions between Axon Cloud Services and Axon Products (as defined below). · “Axon Products” means: (1) Axon Cloud Services; (2) devices sold by Axon (including, without limitation, conducted energy weapons, cameras, sensors, and docking systems) (collectively, “Axon Devices”); (3) other software offered by Axon (including, without limitation, Axon Investigate, Axon Capture, Axon Evidence SYNC, Axon Device Manager, Axon View, Axon Interview, Axon Commander, Axon Uploader XT, and Axon View XL) (collectively, “Axon Client Applications”); and (4) ancillary hardware, equipment, software, services, cloud-based services, documentation, and software maintenance releases and updates. Axon Products do not include any third-party applications, hardware, warranties, or the 'my.evidence.com' services. “Customer Data” means: (1) “Customer Content”, which means data uploaded into, ingested by, or created in Axon Cloud Services within Customer’s tenant, including, without limitation, media or multimedia uploaded into Axon Cloud Services by Customer (“Evidence”); and (2) “Non-Content Data”, which means: (a) “Customer Entity and User Data”, which means Personal Data and non-Personal Data regarding Customer’s Axon Cloud Services tenant configuration; (b) “Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data” which means data regarding Customer's interactions with Axon Cloud Services and Axon Client Applications; (c) “Service Operations and Security Data”, which means data within service logs, metrics and events and vulnerability data, including, without limitation: (i) application, host, and infrastructure logs; (ii) Axon Device and Axon Client Application logs; (iii) service metrics and events logs; and (iv) web transaction logs; (d) “Account Data”, which means information provided to Axon during sign-up, purchase, or administration of Axon Cloud Services, including, without limitation, the name, address, phone number, and email address Customer provides, as well as aggregated usage information related to Customer’s account and administrative data associated with the 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 2/22Page 250 of 522 account; and (e) “Support Data”, which means the information Axon collects when Customer contacts or engages Axon for support, including, without limitation, information about hardware, software, and other details gathered related to the support incident, such as contact or authentication information, chat session personalization, information about the condition of the machine and the application when the fault occurred and during diagnostics, system and registry data about software installations and hardware configurations, and error-tracking files. · “Data Controller” means the natural or legal person, public authority, or any other body which alone or jointly with others determines the purposes and means of the processing of Personal Data (as defined below). · “Data Processor” means a natural or legal person, public authority or any other body which processes Personal Data on behalf of the Data Controller. · “Personal Data” means information about or relating to an individual, whether recorded or not, whether or not true or factual, which can be used to uniquely identify the individual either on its own or by reference to an identifier such as an identification number, location data, an online identifier or to one or more factors specific to the physical, physiological, genetic, mental, economic, cultural or social identity of that natural person. · “Sensitive Personal Data” means any information related to genetic, biometric and health data, as well as personal data revealing racial and ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or ideological convictions or trade union membership. Specific information types connected to an individual where misuse could negatively impact fundamental rights and freedoms of the data subject. This includes financial data of an individual, racial, genetic, health or lifestyle data. · “Processing” means any operation or set of operations which is performed on Personal Data or on sets of Personal Data, whether or not by automated means, such as · collection, recording, organization, structuring, storage, adaptation or alteration, retrieval, consultation, use, disclosure by transmission, CONTACT SALESSIGN IN 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 3/22Page 251 of 522 dissemination or otherwise making available, alignment or combination, restriction, erasure or destruction. · “Sub-processor” means any third party engaged by the Data Processor to assist in data processing activities that the Data Processor is carrying out on behalf of the Data Controller. Axon's Role Data Processor Axon is a Data Processor of Customer Content and Axon obtains no rights to Customer Content. The Customer is a Data Controller and controls and owns all right, title, and interest in and to Customer Content. Axon only processes Customer Content on behalf of the Customer in accordance with the Agreement and the Data Processing Agreement entered into between the parties. Data Controller Axon is a Data Controller for Non-Content Data. In regard to Customer Entity & User Data, Axon is a Data Controller and Customer is an independent Data Controller, not a joint Data Controller. Axon processes Non-Content Data to provide Axon Cloud Services and to support the overall delivery and improvement of Axon Products including business, operational, and security purposes. Axon may analyze and report anonymized and aggregated Non-Content Data to communicate with external and internal stakeholders. Data Collection Purposes and Processing Activities Customer Content Axon will only process Customer Content to provide Customer Axon Cloud Services including, without limitation, user authentication and authorization functionality, and to enable the functionalities according to the configuration selected by the Customer. Axon only processes Customer Content on behalf of the Customer in accordance with the Agreement and the Data Processing Agreement entered into between the parties. Axon will not use Customer Content for any advertising or other commercial purposes. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 4/22Page 252 of 522 Axon periodically upgrades or changes Axon Cloud Services to provide customers with new features and enhancements in alignment with the Axon Evidence Maintenance Schedule. Axon communicates such upgrades or changes to customers one week prior to release via mechanisms outlined in the Maintenance Schedule. Non-Content Data Axon processes Non-Content Data to provide Axon Cloud Services and to support the overall delivery of Axon Products including business, operational, and security purposes. Non-Content Data includes the following: Customer Entity and User Data Axon uses Customer Entity and User Data to: (1) provide Axon Cloud Services, including, without limitation, user authentication and authorization functionality; (2) improve the quality of Axon Products or provide enhanced functionality and features; (3) contact Customer to provide information about its account, tenant, subscriptions, billing, and updates to Axon Cloud Services, including, without limitation, information about new features, security and other technical issues; and (4) market our products or services to Customer via email, by sending promotional communication including targeted advertisements, or presenting a Customer with relevant offers. Customer cannot unsubscribe from non-promotional communications, such as maintenance schedules, or similar notifications, but may unsubscribe from promotional communications at any time such as by clicking on an unsubscribe button at the bottom of such communications. Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data includes data regarding Customers' interactions with Axon Cloud Services and Axon Client Applications. Axon processes Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data to improve the quality of Axon Products and provide enhanced functionality and features. Service Operations and Security Data 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 5/22Page 253 of 522 Axon processes "Service Operations and Security Data" to provide service operations and monitoring for its own purposes of ensuring the security of its services and systems. The processing of "Service Operations and Security Data" is necessary for Axon to monitor the security of its services, detect vulnerabilities, and act promptly on security breaches. Therefore, the processing is necessary to meet Axon's legal obligations, to maintain security standards and to fulfil our contractual commitments to the Customer. Account Data Axon uses Account Data to provide Axon Cloud Services, manage Customer's accounts, to market, and communicate with Customer by carrying out the administrative management of your registration and/or updating as a client, and the management and development of the contractual relationship with Customer and to contact Customer to provide information about its account, tenant, subscriptions, billing and updates to Axon Cloud Services, and to market our products or services to Customer via email, by sending promotional communications, including targeted advertisements, or by presenting Customer with relevant offers. Support Data Axon uses Support Data to resolve Customer’s support incident, and to operate, improve, and personalize Axon Products, including, without limitation, information about hardware, software, and other details gathered related to the support incident, such as contact or authentication information, chat session personalization, information about the condition of the device and the application when the fault occurred and during diagnostics, system and registry data about software installations and hardware configurations, and error-tracking files. Service Operations and Security Data may be part of the Support Data when required for this purpose. If Customer shares Customer Content to Axon in a support scenario, or access to or processing of Customer Content is necessary to provide support, the Customer Content will be processed as Support Data and will only be used for resolving support incidents. Axon may provide support through phone, email, online chat or sessions. Phone conversations, online chat sessions, or online sessions with Axon 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 6/22Page 254 of 522 support professionals may be recorded and/or monitored for efforts such as training, future support, and evidentiary purposes. Legal Basis for Processing Personal Data CUSTOMER CONTENT Axon’s legal basis for the collection and processing of Personal Data within Customer Content is to fulfill obligations to facilitate and process contractual transactions that take place when you interact with Axon Cloud Services. NON-CONTENT DATA Axon’s legal basis for the collection and processing of Personal Data within Non-Content Data is the legitimate interest to provide and support the delivery of our Services; investigate and help prevent security threats, fraud, or other malicious activity; enforce & protect the rights and properties of Axon or its affiliates; protect the rights and personal safety of Axon employees and third parties on or using the Services or Axon Products; and for the purposes which may be required by applicable laws and regulations. Server and Data Location Customer Content Axon offers Axon Cloud Services in numerous geographic regions. Before creating an account, Customer determines where Axon will store Customer Content by designating an economic area. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 7/22Page 255 of 522 Axon ensures that all Customer Content in Axon Evidence remains within the selected economic area, including, without limitation, all backup data, replication sites, and disaster recovery sites. Customer selected economic areas can be determined through review of Customer's Axon Cloud Services URL. Customer URLs conform to the <youragency>. <regioncode>.evidence.com scheme with the exception of US customers where the scheme may exclude the region code and is <youragency>.evidence.com. US Federal customers conform to the scheme <youragency>.us.evidence.com Non-Content Data Customer Entity and User Data Customer Entity and User Data is located in Customer's selected economic area for Customer Content. Customer Entity and User Data may be copied or transferred to the United States. Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data Customer Entity and User Service Interaction Data is located in Customer's selected economic area for Customer Content and the United States. Service Operations and Security Data Service Operations and Security Data is located in Customer's selected economic area for Customer Content and the United States. Account Data and Support Data Account and Support Data may be located in the United States and may be located in Customer's selected economic area for Customer Content. Axon Cloud Services Sub-processors Axon may rely on Sub-processors to provide or enhance Axon Products on its behalf. Axon only permits Sub-processors to use Customer Content to deliver to the Customer services that Axon offers. Axon prohibits Sub- processors from using Customer Content for any other purpose. Ownership of rights, titles, and interest in and to Customer Content remain with Customer. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 8/22Page 256 of 522 Axon exercises commercially reasonable efforts in connection with contractual obligations to ensure its Sub-processors are compliant with all applicable data protection laws and regulations surrounding the Sub- processors access and scope of work in connection with Customer Content. Prior to onboarding Sub-processors, Axon audits the security and privacy practices of Sub-processors to ensure Sub-processors provide a level of security and privacy appropriate to the scope of their services. Axon maintains an up-to-date list of the names and locations of the required Customer Content sub-processor(s) used to for standard Axon Cloud Services here. Please note, additional Sub-processors may be included depending on additional functionality requested during contracting and implementation. If additional information is needed, please contact Axon at privacy@axon.com. Axon will give Customer notice of any new Sub-processor. If you are a current Axon Cloud Services customer with a data processing agreement in place with Axon, you may subscribe here to receive notifications of a new Sub-processor(s) before Axon authorizes any new Sub-processor to process Customer Content in connection with the provision of your service. International Data Transfers Personal Data within Non-Content Data may be subject to international data transfers outside the European Economic Area (EEA), United Kingdom, and Switzerland, which will be regulated in accordance with the mechanisms set out in the GDPR, UK-GDPR, and the Swiss FADP respectively, to safeguard the rights and freedoms of the data subject and ensure a level of protection equivalent to that required by European, United Kingdom, and Swiss regulations. Axon and Fusus Inc. (‘Axon’) comply with the EU-U.S. Data Privacy Framework (EU-U.S. DPF), the UK Extension to the EU-U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. Data Privacy Framework (Swiss-U.S. DPF) as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce. Axon has certified to the U.S. Department of Commerce that it adheres to the EU-U.S. Data Privacy Framework Principles (EU-U.S. DPF Principles) with regard to the processing of personal data received from the European Union in reliance on the EU-U.S. DPF and from the United Kingdom (and Gibraltar) in reliance on the UK Extension to the EU-U.S. DPF. Axon has certified to the 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 9/22Page 257 of 522 U.S. Department of Commerce that it adheres to the Swiss-U.S. Data Privacy Framework Principles (Swiss-U.S. DPF Principles) with regard to the processing of personal data received from Switzerland in reliance on the Swiss-U.S. DPF. If there is any conflict between the terms in this Notice and the EU-U.S. DPF Principles and/or the Swiss-U.S. DPF Principles, the Principles shall govern. To learn more about the Data Privacy Framework (DPF) program, and to view our certification, please visit https://www.dataprivacyframework.gov/. In compliance with the EU-U.S. DPF, the UK Extension to the EU-U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. DPF, Axon commits to resolve DPF Principles-related complaints about our collection and use of your personal information. EU, UK, and Swiss individuals with inquiries or complaints regarding our handling of personal data received in reliance on the EU-U.S. DPF, the UK Extension to the EU-U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. DPF should first contact Axon at privacy@axon.com. In compliance with the EU-U.S. DPF, the UK Extension to the EU-U.S. DPF and the Swiss-U.S. DPF, Axon commits to cooperate and comply respectively with the advice of the panel established by the EU data protection authorities (DPAs), the UK Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) and the Gibraltar Regulatory Authority (GRA), and the Swiss Federal Data Protection and Information Commissioner (FDPIC) with regard to unresolved complaints concerning our handling of personal data received in reliance on the EU-U.S. DPF, the UK Extension to the EU- U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. DPF. If your DPF complaint cannot be resolved through the above channels, under certain conditions, you may invoke binding arbitration for some residual claims not resolved by other redress mechanisms. If you are an EU, Swiss or UK Individual, where we transfer your personal data to third party service providers (see above) who perform services for us or on our behalf, we are responsible for the processing of that data by them and shall remain liable if they process your personal data in a manner inconsistent with the DPF Principles referred to below, unless we prove that we are not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. Axon is subject to the investigatory and enforcement powers of the United States Federal Trade Commission regarding compliance with the EU-U.S. Data Privacy Framework (EU-U.S. DPF) and the UK Extension to 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 10/22Page 258 of 522 the EU-U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. Data Privacy Framework (Swiss-U.S. DPF). To the extent the above mechanisms cannot be used to adequately safeguard transfers outside the EEA, United Kingdom, or Switzerland, Axon will put in place alternate safeguards, as appropriate (such as Standard Contractual Clauses (SCCs) and Transfer Impact Assessments (TIA). Information Sharing Axon may share data with its subsidiaries, legal entities, third party service providers and other partners to help us operate, including for providers to facilitate: (1) user account management, authentication, analytics, and communication, (2) product features, e.g. product development, and error analytics, (3) customer service and support, and (4) security monitoring and investigation. Required Disclosures Axon will not disclose Customer Content or Non-Content Data to Government Authorities except as required by any law or regulation. If permitted, Axon will notify Customer if any disclosure request is received for Customer Content so Customer may challenge or object. Data Security Measures Axon is committed to helping protect the security of Customer Data. Axon has established and implemented policies, programs, and procedures that are commercially reasonable and in compliance with applicable industry practices, including administrative, technical, and physical safeguards to protect the confidentiality, integrity and security of Customer Content and Non-Content Data against unauthorized access, use, modification, disclosure, or other misuse. Axon will take appropriate steps to ensure compliance with the data security measures by its employees, contractors, and Sub-processors, to the extent applicable to the respective scope of performance. Additional information regarding Axon’s Data Security program can be found by visiting https://trust.axon.com Confidentiality 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 11/22Page 259 of 522 Customer Content and Non-Content Data is encrypted in transit over public networks. Customer Content is encrypted at rest in all Axon Cloud Service regions. Axon protects all Customer Content and Non-Content Data with strong logical access control mechanisms to ensure only users with appropriate business needs have access to data. Third-party specialized security firms periodically validate access control mechanisms. Access control lists are reviewed periodically by Axon. Integrity As Evidence is ingested into Axon Cloud Services, a Secure Hash Algorithm (“SHA”) checksum is generated on the upload device and again upon ingestion into Axon Cloud Services. If the SHA checksum does not match, the upload will be reinitiated. Once upload of Evidence is successful, the SHA checksum is retained by Axon Cloud Services and is made viewable by users with access to the Evidence audit trail for the specific piece of Evidence. Tamper-proof audit trails are created automatically by Axon Cloud Services upon ingestion of any Evidence. Availability Axon takes a comprehensive approach to ensure the availability of Axon Cloud Services. Axon replicates Customer Content over multiple systems to help to protect against accidental destruction or loss. Axon Cloud Services systems are designed to minimize single points of failure. Axon has designed and regularly plans and tests its business continuity planning and disaster recovery programs. Isolation Axon logically isolates Customer Content. Customer Content for an authenticated customer will not be displayed to another customer (unless Customers explicitly create a sharing relationship between their tenants or shared data between themselves). Centralized authentication systems are used across an Axon Cloud Service region to increase uniform data security. Additional role-based access control is leveraged within Customer’s Axon Cloud Service tenant to define what users can interact with or access Customer Content. Customer solely manages the role-based access control mechanisms within its Axon Cloud Services tenant. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 12/22Page 260 of 522 Within the Axon Cloud Services supporting infrastructure, access is granted based on the principle of least privilege. All access must be approved by system owners and undergo at least quarterly user access reviews. Any shared computing or networking resource will undergo extensive hardening and is validated periodically to ensure appropriate isolation of Customer Content. Non-Content Data is logically isolated within information systems such that only appropriate Axon personnel have access. Personnel Axon personnel are required to conduct themselves in a manner consistent with applicable law, the company’s guidelines regarding confidentiality, business ethics, acceptable usage, and professional standards. Axon personnel must complete security training upon hire in addition to annual and role-specific security training. Axon personnel undergo an extensive background check process to the extent legally permissible and in accordance with applicable local labor laws and statutory regulations. Axon personnel supporting Axon Cloud Services are subject to additional role-specific security clearances or adjudication processes, including Criminal Justice Information Services background screening and national security clearances and vetting. Data Breach Notification If Axon becomes aware of unlawful or unauthorized access to, disclosure, alteration, or destruction of Non-Content or Customer Data, we will notify affected Customers and relevant authorities as necessary. Data Portability, Migration, and Transfer Back Assistance Data Portability Evidence uploaded to Axon Cloud Services is retained in original format. Evidence may be retrieved and downloaded by Customer from Axon Cloud Services to move data to an alternative information system. Evidence audit trails and system reports may also be downloaded in various industry-standard, non-proprietary formats. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 13/22Page 261 of 522 Data Migration In the event Customer’s Axon Cloud Services is terminated, Axon will not delete any Customer Content during the 90 days following termination. During this 90-day period, Customer may retrieve Customer Content only if Customer has paid all amounts due (there will be no application functionality of the Axon Cloud Services during this 90-day period other than the ability for Customer to retrieve Customer Content). Customer will not incur any additional fees if Customer downloads Customer Content from Axon Cloud Services during this 90-day period. Axon has no obligation to maintain or provide any Customer Content after the 90- day period and thereafter, unless legally prohibited, will delete Customer Content upon termination as part of normal retention and data management instructions from customers. Upon written request, Axon will provide written proof that all Customer Content has been successfully deleted and removed from Axon Cloud Services. Post-Termination Assistance Axon will provide Customer with the same post-termination data retrieval assistance that is generally made available to all customers. Requests for additional assistance to Customer in downloading or transferring Customer Content will result in additional fees and Axon cannot warrant or guarantee data integrity or readability in the external systems. Children's online privacy protection Axon takes seriously its obligations under the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act. We do not knowingly collect Non-Content Data regarding children under 18. Data Subject Rights Non-Content Data You have the rights described below with respect to your Personal Data. You may have the rights described below: · Access and obtain a copy of your Personal Data on request; · Require Axon to change incorrect or incomplete Personal Data; 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 14/22Page 262 of 522 · Require Axon to delete or stop processing your Personal Data, for example where the Personal Data is no longer necessary for the purposes of processing; · Object to the processing of your Personal Data where Axon is relying on its legitimate interests as the legal ground for processing; and · Withdraw your consent in circumstances where consent is the legal basis for processing. If you would like to exercise any of these rights or have any questions, please contact us at privacy@axon.com. To submit a deletion request, please complete this form. If you believe that Axon has not complied with your data protection rights, you may have the right to lodge a complaint with a supervisory authority, in particular in the jurisdiction where you work, normally live or where any alleged infringement of data protection laws occurred. In the EEA: the data protection authority of their place of residence; In the United Kingdom: the UK Information Commissioner’s Office (“ICO”); In Switzerland: the Federal Data Protection and Information Commissioner (“FDPIC”). In the United States, please contact your applicable State Attorney General. In other locations around the world, their local data protection authority. If personal data covered by this Privacy Notice is to be used for a new purpose that is materially different from that for which the personal data was originally collected or subsequently authorized, or is to be disclosed to a non-agent third party in a manner not specified in this policy, Axon will provide you with an opportunity to choose whether to have your personal data so used or disclosed. Requests to opt out of such uses or disclosures of Personal Data should be sent to us as specified in the “How to Contact Us” section below. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 15/22Page 263 of 522 Certain personal data, such as information about medical or health conditions, racial or ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, is considered “Sensitive Information.” Axon will not use Sensitive Personal for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual unless Axon has received your affirmative and explicit consent (opt-in). Customer Content Customers may process Personal Data regarding an individual when leveraging Axon Cloud Services. In such cases, we are processing such personal data purely on behalf of our Customers and any individuals who seek to exercise their rights should first direct their query to our Customer, the Data Controller. Axon will work with Customers to provide access to Personal Data that Axon or Sub-processors hold. Axon will also take reasonable steps to enable Customers to correct, amend, or delete Personal Data that is demonstrated to be inaccurate. Data Retention Customer Content Customer defines Evidence retention periods pursuant to Customer’s internal retention policies and procedures. Customer can establish its retention policies within Axon Cloud Services. Therefore, Customer controls the retention and deletion of its Evidence within Axon Cloud Services. Non-Content Data Axon maintains internal disaster recovery and data retention policies in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. The disaster recovery plan relates to Axon's data and extends to Axon Cloud Services and Customer Content stored within. Axon's data retention policies relate to Axon's Non-Content Data. Axon's data retention policies instruct for the secure disposal of Non-Content Data when such data is no longer necessary for the delivery and support of Axon products and services and in accordance with applicable regulations. We will retain Non-Content Data for as long as needed to 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 16/22Page 264 of 522 provide services, comply with our legal obligations, resolve disputes, and enforce our agreements. Your California Privacy Rights Pursuant to the California Consumer Privacy Act (“CCPA”), as amended by the California Privacy Rights Act ("CPRA"), we provide this California Consumer Privacy Act Addendum (the "CCPA Addendum") to California residents ("consumers" or "you" or “your”). This CCPA Addendum supplements the information contained in our Axon Cloud Services Privacy Notice. Any capitalized term used but not defined in this Notice has the meaning given in our Axon Cloud Services Privacy Notice. This CCPA Addendum does not apply to information we collect about individuals in their capacity as present or former job applicants or employees of Axon or the use of the Axon website. Nor does this amendment cover processing of Customer Content within Axon Cloud Services. Categories of Personal Information Collected Sources of Personal Information We obtain the categories of Personal Information listed above directly from you as well as from the following categories of sources: our corporate affiliates, third-party business partners, and other third-party sources. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 17/22Page 265 of 522 Use of Personal Information We use Personal Information for a variety of business and commercial purposes, as described this Axon Cloud Services Privacy Notice. Your Consumer Rights under the CCPA California law grants state residents certain rights, including the rights to know and access specific types of Personal Data, to learn how we process Personal Data, to request deletion of Personal Data, to request correction of Personal Data, to opt-out of sharing your Personal Data for third party advertising purposes, and not to be denied goods or services for exercising these rights. If you would like to exercise any of these rights please contact us at privacy@axon.com. Right to Opt-Out of Selling or Sharing In the preceding 12 months, Axon has not sold or shared (as those terms are defined in the CCPA) any Personal Data. Authorized Agents To make a request as an authorized agent on behalf of a California resident, you may use the submission methods noted above. Please provide us with a copy of the consumer’s written authorization designating you as their agent. Nondiscrimination We will not unlawfully discriminate against you for exercising your rights under the CCPA. Additional Information about specific Axon Cloud Services The following information pertains to specific privacy and data processing activities associated with certain Axon Cloud Services. If you are a user of any of the below products, please read the applicable language carefully. Community Request 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 18/22Page 266 of 522 Community Request services may facilitate the transmission of information and content voluntarily submitted including certain metadata associated therewith, (collectively, “Submissions”) by an individual completing questionnaires, while using Community Request (“Survey Participant”), to our Customer that uses the Community Request service. Our Customer which requests Submissions through Community Request receives those Submissions - once transmitted, the Submissions remain in the possession of the requesting Customer and Axon does not own or control any copies. The Customer is thus the Data Controller of Submissions data. The Customer to which a Survey Participants transmits the Submission will own and control such Submission, and the privacy practices of Axon’s Customer will apply. Additionally, Community Request automatically collects certain details about a Survey Participant usage of Community Request and their device. Axon may automatically collect certain details of your access to and use of Community Request, including traffic data, location data, logs, and other communication data and the resources that you access and use on or through Community Request. We may collect information about your mobile device and internet connection, including the operating system, IP address, browser type, and mobile network information. My90 My90 services may facilitate the transmission of information and content voluntarily submitted including certain metadata associated therewith, (collectively, “Submissions”) by an individual completing questionnaires, while using My90 (“Survey Participant”), to our Customer that uses the My90 service. Survey Participants should not submit Personal Data as part of a Submission. If Personal Data is submitted, Axon will remove or de-identify the Submission. Axon will analyze and aggregate Submissions to evaluate Customer interactions with respondents or to obtain insight. For example, this is done to understand the effectiveness of existing emergency response processes or to understand sentiment towards My90 Customers. This information can help Axon, and its Customers obtain insights and comparison on community trends and accordingly implement or recommend implementation of measures to improve policing. Axon may also share aggregated Submissions publicly or privately through various mediums. We share this information to provide insights and comparisons on general policing and community trends. Prior to 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 19/22Page 267 of 522 sharing this information, Axon will ensure that the Submission has been aggregated and de-identified so it can no longer be linked directly to a respondent. Outside of the usage of Submissions, My90 automatically collects certain details about a Survey Participant usage of My90 and their device. Axon may automatically collect certain details of your access to and use of My90, including traffic data, location data, logs, and other communication data and the resources that you access and use on or through My90. We may collect information about your mobile device and internet connection, including the operating system, IP address, browser type, and mobile network information. Axon Fusus We process Customer Content on behalf of and as a Data Processor, and to the extent necessary to provide Services to our Customers. To provide our Customers with our Services, we may process and store Customer Content that is captured and recorded when our Customers and their users operate our Products and other Services, such as video or audio recordings, live video or audio streams, images, comments, and data our products collect from their surrounding environment to perform their functions (such as motion, events, temperature and ambient light). The Customer is thus the Data Controller of Customer Content collected by Fusus and the privacy practices of Axon’s Customer will apply. Axon Fusus Terms of Use prohibits the use of cameras set by our Customers with our Platform or other Services in locations where a person has a reasonable expectation of privacy. We require our Customers to conduct any video monitoring through our Services in compliance with applicable laws, regulations and policies, including non- discrimination, sexual harassment, among others. Therefore, monitoring in the bathrooms, locker rooms, or other areas where individuals have a reasonable expectation of privacy is prohibited; Axon Fusus Terms of Use also specifies that the camera positions and views are limited to open, common and public areas, unless otherwise permitted by a court order authorized by a court of competent jurisdiction relating to an investigation by a law enforcement agency. Additionally, Axon Fusus may automatically collect certain details about users of Axon Fusus Products or Services. Axon may automatically collect certain details of your access to and use of Axon Fusus Products or 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 20/22Page 268 of 522 Services, including traffic data, location data, logs, and other communication data and the resources that you access and use on or through Axon Fusus Products or Services. How to Contact Us If you have any questions or concerns regarding Axon's privacy practices or the content of this Notice, please contact privacy@axon.com. Get in touch Learn how Axon's ecosystem helps protect more lives in more places. Contact Axon WHO WE SERVE COMPANY PRODUCT SITES GET IN TOUCH Legal Newsroom Terms & Conditions Privacy Policy Trust & Security Medical Testing Diversity & Inclusion Axon Environmental Policy United States 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 21/22Page 269 of 522 The Delta Logo, the Axon & Design Logo, Axon, TASER, Bolt with Circle Logo, and Protect Life are trademarks of Axon Enterprise, Inc., some of which are registered in the US and other countries. © 2024 Axon Enterprise, Inc. 9/7/25, 10:31 PM CLOUD SERVICES PRIVACY POLICY - Axon.com https://www.axon.com/legal/cloud-services-privacy-policy 22/22Page 270 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with BMW Motorcycle of North Dallas for the purchase of a BMW R1250 RT-P police motorcycle in the amount of $40,726.99. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department has identified the need to purchase a new police motorcycle to enhance patrol, traffic enforcement, and community policing operations. The BMW R1250 RT-P unit is a law enforcement–specific motorcycle designed for reliability, maneuverability, and officer safety. This purchase will be made through BMW Motorcycles of North Dallas using City of Fort Worth Contract #24-0107, which the Town is eligible to utilize under cooperative purchasing provisions. The BMW R1250 RT-P is a purpose-built police motorcycle featuring: • Enhanced braking and handling systems. • Emergency lighting and siren equipment package. • Integrated communications and mounting options for law enforcement technology. • Long-term durability and service support through authorized BMW dealerships. This acquisition will provide officers with a highly reliable and efficient patrol vehicle, reducing response times, improving traffic enforcement capabilities, and increasing police visibility in the community. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The total cost for the motorcycle and outfitting is $40,726.99, as quoted by BMW Motorcycles of North Dallas. Funding is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Police Department Capital Equipment Replacement Fund. The Town will utilize a cooperative purchasing agreement through the City of Fort Worth, Contract #24-0107. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Purchase Agreement Page 271 of 522 2. BMW Motorcycles of North Dallas Quote 3. Detailed Pricing Form 4. Fort Worth Cooperative Purchasing Agreement ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with BMW Motorcycle of North Dallas for the purchase of a BMW R1250 RT-P police motorcycle in the amount of $40,726.99. Page 272 of 522 Page 1 of 5 COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS This Vendor/Member Agreement (the “Agreement”) is hereby entered into by and between Retail Motorcycle Ventures, Inc., DBA BMW Motorcycles of North Dallas, located at 900 K Avenue Plano, Texas 75074 (“Vendor”), and the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home-rule municipality (the “Town”), for the purchase of vehicles. RECITALS WHEREAS, the Vendor submitted bid pricing to the City of Fort Worth for vehicles IFB No. 24-0107 pursuant to competitive bidding laws of the State of Texas; and WHEREAS, the Vendor and the City of Fort Worth have entered into agreements, whereby the Vendor has agreed to sell to the City of Fort Worth and its members, including the Town of Trophy Club, certain goods and services of a nature and quality as represented in the specifications and proposals, and at a specified price; and WHEREAS, the Town entered into an Interlocal Cooperative Purchasing Agreement with the City of Fort Worth (“Contract No. 42329”) dated September 12, 2011, to purchase specified goods and services at the prices listed pursuant to the City of Fort Worth’s agreements; and WHEREAS, the Town is authorized pursuant to Texas Local Gov’t Code Ch. 271, and Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 791, to enter into cooperative purchasing agreements and is deemed thereby to satisfy state laws requiring competitive bidding; and WHEREAS, the purchase of goods or services under this Agreement is authorized by the Town Council and the Town desires to purchase, and Vendor desires to sell and provide, certain goods and services to the Town pursuant to Contract No. 42329 and IFB No. 24-0107; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor desire to enter into this legally enforceable Agreement to clarify and make explicit the rights, duties, and responsibilities between the parties, and in case of any conflicts between this Agreement and the provisions of Contract No. 42329, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor recognize and agree that this Agreement does not amend or alter the rights, duties, and obligations between Vendor and the City of Fort Worth, or between the Town and the City of Fort Worth under their respective contracts with the City of Fort Worth. NOW, THEREFORE, the Town and Vendor agree that the recitals above are true and correct, and further agree mutually agree as follows: 1. Vendor agrees to furnish and deliver to the Town, the goods or services requested by the Town as further detailed on the quote attached to this Agreement as Exhibit A. The Town agrees to pay Vendor for the goods or services at the prices shown on Exhibit A, which are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. 2. If applicable, the Town shall make payment for goods or services in accordance with the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Chapter 2251, Texas Government Code. The date of any payment, whether net or gross, shall be determined by calculating the number of days after receipt of invoices from the Vendor. 3. This Agreement is made and shall be construed according to the laws of the State of Texas, without Page 273 of 522 Page 2 of 5 regard for conflicts of law principles. Venue of any court action brought directly or indirectly by reason of this Agreement shall be in Denton County, Texas. This Agreement is made and is to be performed in Denton County, Texas. 4. All written notices shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to an individual, officer, legal representative, or member of the party for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to the person giving the notice. 5. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this agreement. 6. If any provision of this agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 7. INDEMNIFICATION. THE VENDOR (THE “INDEMNIFYING PARTY”), SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE TOWN (THE “TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTY”), FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, DEMANDS, CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS, JUDGMENTS, SUITS, COSTS AND EXPENSES (INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS’ FEES) MADE BY ANY THIRD-PARTY, TO THE EXTENT ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE GOODS OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE VENDOR PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT (COLLECTIVELY, “INDEMNIFIED CLAIMS”), REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED BY ANY THIRD PARTIES AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE DAMAGES OR CLAIMS OF THIRD-PARTIES ARE KNOWN OR FULLY APPRECIATED AT THIS TIME BY VENDOR OR THE TOWN. VENDOR SHALL GIVE TO THE TOWN REASONABLE NOTICE OF ANY SUCH CLAIMS OR ACTIONS. VENDOR SHALL USE LEGAL COUNSEL REASONABLY ACCEPTABLE TO THE TOWN IN CARRYING OUT ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR EARLY TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS INDEMNIFICATION IS NOT INTENDED TO APPLY TO CLAIMS MADE AGAINST THE TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTIES RESULTING FROM THE WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF TOWN EMPLOYEES COVERED UNDER SECTION 101.021 OF THE TEXAS CIVIL PRACTICE AND REMEDIES CODE. 8. Governmental Functions/Immunities. The parties hereby acknowledge and agree that Town is entering this Agreement pursuant to its governmental functions and that nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as constituting a waiver of the Town’s governmental immunity from suit or liability, which is expressly reserved to the extent allowed by law. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the parties hereby acknowledge and agree that to the extent this Agreement is subject to the provisions of Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE, as amended, the Town’s immunity from suit is waived only as set forth in Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE. Further, the parties agree that this Agreement is made subject to all applicable provisions of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, including, but not limited to all defenses, limitations, and exceptions to the limited waiver of immunity from liability provided in Chapter 101 and Chapter 75. 9. Warranty: All products and manufacturers guarantees and warranties shall be assigned to or owned by the Town upon inspection and acceptance of delivery of the goods. MISCELLANEOUS 1. The terms and conditions of any exculpatory or indemnity provisions in the Agreement shall construed in favor of the party being protected and shall survive the termination and completion of the Agreement. The judicial doctrine that provides that documents or exculpatory provisions are to be construed against the drafter Page 274 of 522 Page 3 of 5 or provider of such documents or provisions does not apply to this Agreement, as each party has had a reasonable opportunity to obtain and consult with their own legal counsel regarding this Agreement. 2. VENDOR shall perform its obligations under this Agreement as an independent contractor and shall not be considered an employee of the Town for any purpose whatsoever, including, but not limited to, entitlement to Town employee benefits. VENDOR hereby expressly waives any claim or entitlement to such benefits. Furthermore, this Agreement is not intended to create, nor should it be construed as creating, a partnership, association, joint venture, or trust. 3. If any provision of this Agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 4. No right or remedy granted herein or reserved to either party is exclusive of any other right or remedy provided or permitted by law or equity, but each shall be cumulative of every other right or remedy given hereunder. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise, in any respect, any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. 5. This Agreement is subject to the appropriation of public funds by the Town in its budget adopted for any fiscal year for the specific purpose of making payments pursuant to this Agreement for that fiscal year. The obligation of the Town pursuant to this Agreement in any fiscal year for which this Agreement is in effect shall constitute a current expense of the Town for that fiscal year only, and shall not constitute an indebtedness of the Town of any monies other than those lawfully appropriated in any fiscal year. In the event of non- appropriation of funds in any fiscal year to make payments pursuant to this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated without any liability to either party. 6. To the extent required by Texas law, the VENDOR verifies that: (1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the Agreement discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code § 808.001 and 2271.001, and it will not boycott Israel during the term of the Agreement; (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. 7. Waiver of Attorney’s Fees. The parties expressly covenant and agree that in the event of any litigation arising between the parties to this Agreement, each party shall be solely responsible for payment of its attorneys and that in no event shall either party be responsible for the other party’s attorneys’ fees regardless of the outcome of the litigation. 8. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and constitute one and the same instrument. 9. This Agreement, together with all exhibits referenced herein, and any purchase order forms used by the Town, embody the complete agreement of the parties hereto, superseding all oral or written previous and contemporary agreements between the parties and relating to matters in this Agreement. Page 275 of 522 Page 4 of 5 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have accepted the terms of this Agreement and caused this Agreement, including the exhibits attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference for all purposes, to be executed as of the dates set forth below. TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS By: __________________________ Brandon Wright, Town Manager ATTEST: ____________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary RETAIL MOTORCYCLE VENTURES, INC., DBA BMW MOTORCYCLES OF NORTH DALLAS, LOCATED AT 900 K AVENUE PLANO, TEXAS 75074 (THE “VENDOR”): By:__________________________ Name:________________________ Title:_________________________ Date:_________________________ Page 276 of 522 Page 5 of 5 EXHIBIT A Page 277 of 522 FROM: Invoice order # quote TO: Date 5/29/2025 Item Quantity Unit Price Ext. Unit Price 1 1 $40,726.99 $40,726.99 Terms: Date $40,726.99 $0.00 $40,726.99 R1250RTP vin# Plano, TX 75074 P) 972-881-0774 F) 972-881-1326 900 Avenue K INVOICE Description Purchase of one BMW motorcycles per bid specs accepted by the city of on PO # Per state wide open contract with the the city of Frot Worth contract# 24-0107 SUB-TOTAL TAX TAX # Total Amount Owed BMW Motorcycles Of North Dallas City of Trophyclub Due upon receipt of invoice 5/29/2025 Page 278 of 522 Page 279 of 522 Page 280 of 522 R 1250 RT-P Motor Pricing Form (2024 Model Year) Color Option Code 0 Night Black & Alpine White III 753 1 Night Black 716 0 Alpine White III (special order)751 0 Black Blue (special order +60 days)754 0 Saphir Blue (special order + 60 days)755 0 Violet Blue (special order +60 days)756 0 Glacier Silver Metallic (special order)N99 Quotation:Motorcycle Trophyclub PD Option Code Retail Price $21,250.00 Factory Special-Order Options - Plan 90-120 Days for Delivery 0 Adaptive Headlight (includes 219)134 $625.00 $0.00 0 Keyless Ride w/two transmitters 193 $375.00 $0.00 0 Gear Shift Assist Pro 222 $495.00 $0.00 0 Ride Modes Pro (includes 18B)224 $215.00 $0.00 0 GPS Prep 272 $200.00 $0.00 0 Chrome Exhaust (includes 19F)340 $150.00 $0.00 0 Additional LED Headlights (driving lights)562 $450.00 $0.00 0 PA Microphone 599 $595.00 $0.00 0 High Seat Black 610 $0.00 $0.00 0 Low Seat Black 776 $0.00 $0.00 0 Enhanced Smart Phone Connectivity 6NS $250.00 $0.00 The Options Below denote Standard Order Deck - Removal is only by Special Order - Option Delete 1 Heated Seat 518 $225.00 $225.00 1 Tire Pressure Monitoring 530 $225.00 $225.00 1 Cruise Control (standard feature)538 $0.00 $0.00 1 Weather Protection 649 $195.00 $195.00 1 $36.00 1 $9.50 1 $10.00 1 $9.50 1 $33.00 1 $26.95 1 $49.00 1 $45.00 1 $9.50 1 $75.00 1 $195.00 1 $39.00 2 $396.00 2 $18.00 Units Quotation valid for 60 days Total Price - Page 1 $22,846.45 1 from date noted below.Total Price - Page 2 $4,762.10 Total Price - Page 3 $822.44 Date of Quote: Parts From Other Suppliers - Page 4 $6,985.00 $4,321.00 $990.00 $40,726.99 0.00%$0.00 $40,726.99 BMW Motorcycles of North Dallas 900 K Avenue Plano, Tx 75074 Brien Mehler brien@bmwmotorcyclesdallas.com FMSA-EL-FFH FORNT FUSED POWER SCOCKET HARNESS FMSA-MT-LGAP LIDAR GUN HOLSTER ADAPTER PLATE FMSA-EA-USB FAIRING USB OULET Dealer Basic Assembly / Preparation Total Retail Price per Unit with Options Note: Prices subject to change without notice. Final price is always determined by the selling authorized BMW Motorcycle dealer. State Sales Tax (if applicable) FMSA-MT-SSE SIDE STAND EXTENSION Additional Labor Operations Provided by Dealer FMSA-EL-FF FENIX LED LIGHTS (RED/BLUE) FMSA-LED-SMFF FMSA-EL-ACP ACC 1-3 CONNECTION PLUG FMSA-EA-LSF FIARING MOUNT POWER SOCKET FMSA-EL-RCP RADAR CONNECTION PLUG FMSA-BTA BLUE TOOTH AMP FMSA-ELM LIGHTING MODULE FMSA-MT-RSFM SIDE MOUNT LIGHTS Motorcycle Freight FMSA-EL-RPP RADIO CONNECTION PLUG CODE A FMSA-EL-SCP SPEAKER CONNECTION PLUG Total Retail Price per Unit with Options Page 281 of 522 R 1250 RT-P Motor Pricing Form - Page 2 See Special Notation Comment Quotation for: Trophyclub PD Blue ID Light Selection (1) 1 Standard Blue Pod-Mounted ID Lights - SID 63 17 2 361 717 $0.00 $0.00 0 Round Blue License Plate ID Lights - RID 71 60 2 452 897 $0.00 $0.00 Per Emergency Warning Lights (10)BMW P/N Order #Retail $0.15 Total Retail 5 Red LED-X Light 63 17 2 361 718 5 $135.00 $675.00 5 Blue LED-X Light 63 17 2 361 719 5 $135.00 $675.00 0 Amber LED-X Light 63 17 2 361 720 0 $135.00 $0.00 0 White LED-X Light 63 17 2 361 721 0 $146.00 $0.00 0 Green LED-X Light 63 17 2 450 782 0 $146.00 $0.00 Rear Duplex Emergency Warning Light (1) 0 Duplex LED-X Red / Red 63 17 2 361 728 0 $431.00 $0.00 0 Duplex LED-X Blue / Blue 63 17 2 361 729 0 $471.50 $0.00 1 Duplex LED-X Red / Blue 63 17 2 361 730 1 $451.50 $451.50 0 Duplex LED-X Blue / Amber 63 17 2 361 731 0 $451.50 $0.00 0 Duplex LED-X Green / Green 63 17 2 450 783 0 $410.35 $0.00 0 Duplex LED-X Amber / Amber 63 17 2 450 784 0 $451.50 $0.00 Take-Down (4) Alley (2) TS (2) BT (2) Saddlebag Light (1) Red ID (1) 6 White Torus LED TDL/Alley 63 17 2 361 722 6 $96.00 $576.00 2 Auxiliary LED Turn Signals 63 17 2 361 725 2 $80.29 $160.58 2 Auxiliary LED Brake/Tail Light 63 17 2 361 726 2 $70.50 $141.00 1 Saddlebag LED Lights w/sensor switch 63 17 2 361 727 1 $179.00 $179.00 0 Red ID Lights (replacing blue ID lights)63 17 2 361 724 0 $134.00 $0.00 0 Round Blue License Plate ID Light Kit 71 60 2 452 876 0 $146.50 $0.00 Dealer Installed Options / Retrofits 1 Shift Assistant Pro (hardware)23 41 8 536 884 1 $804.00 $804.00 1 Shift Assistant Pro - Enabling Code 77 15 8 395 839 1 $50.08 $50.08 1 Ride Modes Pro - Enabling Code 77 53 8 395 840 1 $250.65 $250.65 1 Also Requires DTC Enabling Code 77 53 9 480 108 1 $65.11 $65.11 1 Also Requires DTC Enabling Code 77 53 8 395 841 1 $65.11 $65.11 2 LED Auxiliary Headlights Nano (order 2)63 17 9 457 322 2 $203.00 $406.00 2 Bolt 6 x 40 (order 2)63 12 7 699 141 2 $7.18 $14.36 2 M6 Hex Nut (order 2)07 12 9 905 826 2 $4.36 $8.72 Requires Activation by Dealer - No Code Needed Convenience Options 0 Extra Ignition Key - No Keyless Ride 51 25 8 540 950 0 $111.46 $0.00 0 Extra Ignition Key - Keyless Fob Transmitter 66 12 7 105 699 0 $390.14 $0.00 0 Heated Seat - Low 52 53 8 544 786 0 $740.20 $0.00 0 Heated Seat - High 52 53 8 544 792 0 $740.20 $0.00 0 Tire Pressure Gauge 82 12 0 140 377 0 $39.00 $0.00 1 BMW Motorrad Battery Charger (2.5 Ah)77 02 5 B5B 631 1 $239.99 $239.99 0 BMW Charger pig tail 61 43 2 411 680 0 $24.99 $0.00 0 Motorcycle Full Cover 71 60 2 450 408 0 $179.00 $0.00 Final price is always determined by the selling authorized BMW Motorcycle dealer. Note: Prices subject to change without notice. Always verify accuracy of part pricing before submitting quotations. Page 282 of 522 R 1250 RT-P Motor Pricing Form - Page 3 Quotation for: Trophyclub PD Additional Accessories Qty Item Description Page 3 Per Additional Accessories BMW P/N Order #Retail Total Retail Storage Options 0 Saddlebag Liners (each)71 60 7 704 109 0 $172.40 $0.00 0 Tank Top Bag 77 45 8 543 227 0 $318.00 $0.00 Engine Protection 1 Rocker Cover Protection 77 14 8 406 187 1 $252.35 $252.35 1 Sump / Engine Protection Guard (order 1)11 84 8 532 939 1 $318.00 $318.00 5 Fillister Head Screws M6 x 20 (order 5) 07 12 9 908 076 5 $4.30 $21.50 5 Grommet (order 5)13 53 1 341 283 5 $3.68 $18.40 5 Bushing (order 5)11 84 8 544 832 5 $7.21 $36.05 1 Bracket front (order 1)11 84 8 532 937 1 $73.28 $73.28 1 Bracket Rear (order 1)11 84 8 532 940 1 $91.66 $91.66 0 C-Clip Nut M6 (have been included w/brackets)07 14 7 693 887 0 $3.68 $0.00 5 Fillister Head Screws M8 x 25 (order 5) 07 12 9 907 382 5 $2.24 $11.20 Note: Prices subject to change without notice. Always verify accuracy of part pricing before submitting quotations. Final price is always determined by the selling authorized BMW Motorcycle dealer. Page 283 of 522 Qty Description PN Price Each Total Price 1 LONG ASSAULT RIFLE MOUNT FMSA-MT-RMBRL 59.00$ 59.00$ 1 ASSAULT RIFLE HOLSTER FMSA-GL-ARM 767.00$ 767.00$ 1 DUAL RADAR W/COMPACT DISPLAY 805-0030-00 2,985.00$ 2,985.00$ 1 STALKER X-SERIES LIDAR HOLSTER FMSA-GHST-X 299.00$ 299.00$ 1 STALKER XLR LIDAR 808-5025-00 2,875.00$ 2,875.00$ Additional Accessories From Other Suppliers - Page 4 Page 284 of 522 City of Fort Worth & The Town of Trophy Club Cooperative Purchasing Agreement FORT WORTH CITY SECRETARY CONTRACT NO. 4 o),3.;}.C\ COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT This Cooperative Purchasing Agreement ("Agreement") is made and entered into as of the date written below between the Town of Trophy Club ("Trophy Club") and the City of Fort Worth , Texas ("Fort Worth "). WHEREAS , both Trophy Club and Fort Worth have each determined a need for a cooperative agreement to purchase like goods and services to avoid duplicate procurement efforts and obtain the benefits of volum e purchasing; and WHEREAS , Trophy Club and Fort Worth are authorized by Section 271.102 of the Local Government Code to pursue mutually beneficial and cooperative purchasing programs . NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the mutual obligations and benefits contained herein, Trophy Club and Fort Worth agree as follows : SECTION 1. The purpose of this Agreement is to provide Trophy Club and Fort Worth with additional purchasing options by satisfying the provisions of Section 271. l 02 of the Local Government Code. SECTION 2 . The parties agree that each of the parties shall respectively designate a person to act under the direction of, and on behalf of, the designating party (the "Designated Representative"). SECTION 3 . At the request of the other party , a party that enters into a contract with a vendor for goods or services (the "First Purchasing Party") shall attempt to obtain the vendor's agreement to offer those goods and services to the other party (the "Second Purchasing Party") for the same price and on the same terms and conditions as have been offered to the First Purchasing Party . If the vendor so agrees , and if the Second Purchasing Party is agre eable to such terms and conditions, the Second Purchasing Party may enter into its own separate contract with the ven dor for the purchase of such goods or services . SECTION 4 . Unless otherwise agreed between the Designated Representatives , payments for a purchase made by the Second Purchasing Party shall be paid direct ly to the vend or and not to th e First Purchasing Party . The Second Purchasing Party shall have the respon sibility of determining whether the vendor has complied with any provisions in its contract with the vendor, including but not limited to those relating to the quality of items and terms of deliv ery, and shall be respon si ble for enforcement of its contract against the vendor, including all cost of enforcement. Page 285 of 522 City of Fort Worth & The Town of Trophy Club Cooperative Purchasing Agreement SECTION 5 . This Agreement will be subject to all applicable federal , state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. SECTION 6 . This Agreement may be tenninated by either party, without cause or penalty, upon not less than thirty days written notice to the other party . SECTION 7. The parties acknowledge that each party and , if it so chooses , its counsel have reviewed and revised this Agreement and that the normal rule of construction to the effect that any ambiguities are to be resolved against the drafting party must not be employed in the interpretation of this Agreement or any amendments or exhibits hereto . SECTION 8. If any action, whether real or asserted, at law or in equity, arises on the basis of any provision of this Agreement, venue for such action shall lie in state courts located in Tarrant County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Northern District of Texas -Fort Worth Division. This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas . SECTION 9. If any term or provision of this Agreement is held to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining terms or provisions of this Agreement shall not be affected thereby , and in lieu of each such illegal, invalid or unenforceable term or provision, the parties shall endeavor to agree to a legal , valid or enforceable term or provision as similar as possible to the term or provision declared illegal, invalid or unenforceable. SECTION 10. Execution of this Agreement does not obligate Trophy Club or Fort Worth to make any purchase, to pay any membership fee or to otherwise or in any manner incur any cost or obligation. SECTION 11. This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts , each of which shall be deemed an original, and all of which shall constitute but one and the same instrument. SECTION 12 . The undersigned officers and/or agents are properly authorized to execute this Agreement on behalf of the parties hereto and each party hereby certifies to the other that any necessary actions extending such authority have been duly passed and are now in full force and effect. SECTION 13. All notices, requests, demands, and other communications which are required or permitted to be given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given upon the delivery or receipt thereof, as the case may be, if delivered personally or sent by registered or certified mail , return receipt requested , postage prepaid, to the respective city representative set out below, or his/her designee. Page 286 of 522 City of Fort Worth & The Town of Trophy Club Cooperative Purchasing Agreement EXECUTED this 1th day of September. 2011 . CITY OF FORT WORTH 1000 Throckmorton Street Fort Worth, Texas 76102 B Title: Assistant City Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: CA~o .~ --== Charlene Sanders Assistant City Attorney Contract Authorization ~~m~ q \ ~ 7\ '"1--0 \ \ Date TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB 100 Municipal Drive Trophy Club, Texas 76262 By :~~ Cofinie White Title : Mayor Patricia Adams . Town Attorney ~{111n@~ annon DePrater, ~Seaetafy q /'l I Date Page 287 of 522 TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS RESOLUTION NO . 2019-39 A RESOLUTION OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, REPEALING RESOLUTION NO. 2019-01 AUTHORIZING PARTICIPATION IN VARIOUS COOPERATIVE PURCHASING PROGRAMS AND ADOPTING A NEW RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING PARTICIPATION IN VARIOUS COOPERATIVE PURCHASING PROGRAMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TOWN'S PROCUREMENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES; IDENTIFYING THOSE COOPERATIVE PURCHASING PROGRAMS APPROVED FOR TOWN PARTICIPATION; APPOINTING THE TOWN MANAGER OR HIS DESIGNEE AS THE PROGRAM COORDINATOR OF COOPERATIVE PURCHASING PROGRAMS; AUTHORIZING EXECUTION OF ANY AND ALL NECESSARY AGREEMENTS FOR PARTICIPATION IN THE COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS BY THE MAYOR OR HIS DESIGNEE AND APPROVING RELATED CONTRACTS AND THE PAYMENT OF RELATED FEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUDGET; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE . WHEREAS, Chapter 271 of the Texas Local Government Code authorizes a local government to part icipate in a cooperative purchasing program and provides t hat pu rchases made pursuant to an agreement w ith a local cooperat ive organization sat isfy state laws requiring the local government to seek competitive bids for the purchase of t he goods or services ; and WHEREAS, the Procurement Policies and Procedu res of the Town of Trophy Club authorize purchases from a cooperative purchasing program or ot her approved state program provided that the Town Council has approved participation ; and WHEREAS, Town 's partic ipat ion in the cooperative purchasing programs and ot her approved state programs will improve effic iency in the purchas ing process by allowing the Town to meet competitive bid requirements , to identify and purchase goods and services from qualified vendors , to relieve the burdens of the governmenta l pu rchasing function, and to realize the var ious potent ial econom ies , includ ing administra ti ve cost sav ings that such programs provide ; and WHEREAS, upon considerat ion of the cooperative purchasing programs specified in th is Resolut ion , and all matters attendan t and re lated thereto , the Town Council is of the opinion that the Town 's participation in these programs is beneficia l and should be approved , that Resolution No . 2019 -01 should be repealed in its entirety , t ha t th is Resolution be adopted , and that the Town Manager or his designee is appointed as the Program Coord inator for the Town 's membership in such cooperat ive programs ; and Page 288 of 522 WHEREAS, in the event that participation in any of the cooperative purchasing programs approved by this Resolution requires the execution of an Agreement and I or the payment of a fee , such Agreement and fee are hereby approved and the Mayor or his designee is hereby authorized to execute any necessary Agreements for participation in such program(s) and the Program Coordinator is authorized to approve the payment of applicable fees provided that funds are budgeted and available for such participation . NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, THAT: Section 1. The foregoing premises, which are hereby found to be true and to be in the best interest of the Town of Trophy Club and its citizens, are hereby adopted. Section 2. The Town Council hereby authorizes participation in any cooperative purchasing program that satisfies the laws of the State of Texas. Section 3. The Town Manager or his designee is appointed as the Program Coordinator for the Town 's membership in approved cooperative purchasing programs . The Program Coordinator is authorized to approve the payment of applicable fees for approved programs provided that funds are budgeted and available for such participation. Section 4. The Mayor or his designee is hereby authorized to execute any necessary Agreements for participation in such program(s) according to the terms and conditions set forth in this Resolution and the Town 's Procurement Policies and Procedures. Section 5. This Resolution shall become effective immediately upon its passage . RES 2019-39 Page 2 of 3 Page 289 of 522 PASSED AND APPROVED by the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club , Texas, this 10th day of December 2019 . ATTEST : Holly Fi bes, Town Secretary Town of Trophy Club , Texas RES 2019-39 n Attorney , Texas C. Nick Sanders, Mayor Town of Trophy Club , Texas [SEAL] Page 3 of 3 Page 290 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Classic Chevrolet for the purchase of two Police Department vehicles in the amount of $116,437.49. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department’s current fleet includes vehicles that are aging, require frequent maintenance, and are no longer reliable for daily patrol or specialized operations. To maintain officer readiness and operational efficiency, the department has identified the need to purchase a new Chevrolet Tahoe for patrol operations and a Chevrolet Silverado equipped for K9 deployment. Classic Chevrolet, a regional dealer, has provided pricing for both vehicles under the City of Denton Cooperative Purchase Contract #7661, which the Town is authorized to use through interlocal purchasing agreements. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: The replacement of two police patrol vehicles from the Crime Control and Prevention District (CCPD) Budget was approved by the CCPD Board and Council as part of the FY 2026 Budget. FISCAL IMPACT: The total cost for both vehicles is $116,437.49. This amount covers only the vehicles themselves and does not include outfitting costs. Outfitting costs are estimated at under $25,000 for the Tahoe and slightly under $42,000 for the Silverado K9 unit. Funding is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Crime Control and Prevention District Fund. The Town will utilize City of Denton Contract #7661, a cooperative purchase agreement, for this acquisition. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Purchase Agreement 2. Tahoe Quote 3. Silverado Quote 4. City of Denton Cooperative Purchasing Agreement ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Classic Chevrolet for the purchase of two Police Department vehicles in the amount of $116,437.49. Page 291 of 522 Page 292 of 522 Page 1 of 4 COOPERATIVE PURCHASING AGREEMENT TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS This Vendor/Member Agreement (the “Agreement”) is hereby entered into by and between Classic Chevrolet, Inc. (“Vendor”), and the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home-rule municipality (the “Town”), for the purchase of vehicles. RECITALS WHEREAS, the Vendor submitted bid pricing to the City of Denton (“Contract No. 7661”) for light duty vehicles (RFP-7661), pursuant to competitive bidding laws of the State of Texas; and WHEREAS, the Vendor and the City of Denton have entered into agreements, whereby the Vendor has agreed to sell to the City of Denton and its members, including the Town of Trophy Club, certain goods and services of a nature and quality as represented in the specifications and proposals, and at a specified price; and WHEREAS, the Town entered into an Interlocal Cooperative Purchasing Agreement with the City of Denton to purchase specified goods and services at the prices listed pursuant to the City of Denton’s agreements; and WHEREAS, the Town is authorized pursuant to Texas Local Gov’t Code Ch. 271, and Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 791, to enter into cooperative purchasing agreements and is deemed thereby to satisfy state laws requiring competitive bidding; and WHEREAS, the purchase of goods or services under this Agreement is authorized by the Town Council and the Town desires to purchase, and Vendor desires to sell and provide, certain goods and services under Contract No. 7661; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor desire to enter into this legally enforceable Agreement to clarify and make explicit the rights, duties, and responsibilities between the parties, and in case of any conflicts between this Agreement and the provisions of Contract No. 7661, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor recognize and agree that this Agreement does not amend or alter the rights, duties, and obligations between Vendor and the City of Denton, or between the Town and the City of Denton under their respective contracts with the City of Denton. NOW, THEREFORE, the Town and Vendor agree that the recitals above are true and correct, and further agree mutually agree as follows: 1. Vendor agrees to furnish and deliver to the Town, the goods or services requested by the Town as further detailed on the quote attached to this Agreement as Exhibit A. The Town agrees to pay Vendor for the goods or services at the prices shown on Exhibit A, which are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. 2. If applicable, the Town shall make payment for goods or services in accordance with the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Chapter 2251, Texas Government Code. The date of any payment, whether net or gross, shall be determined by calculating the number of days after receipt of invoices from the Vendor. 3. This Agreement is made and shall be construed according to the laws of the State of Texas, without regard for conflicts of law principles. Venue of any court action brought directly or indirectly by reason of this Page 293 of 522 Page 2 of 4 Agreement shall be in Denton County, Texas. This Agreement is made and is to be performed in Denton County, Texas. 4. All written notices shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to an individual, officer, legal representative, or member of the party for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to the person giving the notice. 5. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this agreement. 6. If any provision of this agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 7. INDEMNIFICATION. THE VENDOR (THE “INDEMNIFYING PARTY”), SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE TOWN (THE “TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTY”), FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, DEMANDS, CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS, JUDGMENTS, SUITS, COSTS AND EXPENSES (INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS’ FEES) MADE BY ANY THIRD-PARTY, TO THE EXTENT ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE GOODS OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE VENDOR PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT (COLLECTIVELY, “INDEMNIFIED CLAIMS”), REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED BY ANY THIRD PARTIES AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE DAMAGES OR CLAIMS OF THIRD-PARTIES ARE KNOWN OR FULLY APPRECIATED AT THIS TIME BY VENDOR OR THE TOWN. VENDOR SHALL GIVE TO THE TOWN REASONABLE NOTICE OF ANY SUCH CLAIMS OR ACTIONS. VENDOR SHALL USE LEGAL COUNSEL REASONABLY ACCEPTABLE TO THE TOWN IN CARRYING OUT ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR EARLY TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS INDEMNIFICATION IS NOT INTENDED TO APPLY TO CLAIMS MADE AGAINST THE TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTIES RESULTING FROM THE WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF TOWN EMPLOYEES COVERED UNDER SECTION 101.021 OF THE TEXAS CIVIL PRACTICE AND REMEDIES CODE. 8. Governmental Functions/Immunities. The parties hereby acknowledge and agree that Town is entering this Agreement pursuant to its governmental functions and that nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as constituting a waiver of the Town’s governmental immunity from suit or liability, which is expressly reserved to the extent allowed by law. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the parties hereby acknowledge and agree that to the extent this Agreement is subject to the provisions of Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE, as amended, the Town’s immunity from suit is waived only as set forth in Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE. Further, the parties agree that this Agreement is made subject to all applicable provisions of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, including, but not limited to all defenses, limitations, and exceptions to the limited waiver of immunity from liability provided in Chapter 101 and Chapter 75. 9. Warranty: All products and manufacturers guarantees and warranties shall be assigned to or owned by the Town upon inspection and acceptance of delivery of the goods. MISCELLANEOUS 1. The terms and conditions of any exculpatory or indemnity provisions in the Agreement shall construed in favor of the party being protected and shall survive the termination and completion of the Agreement. The judicial doctrine that provides that documents or exculpatory provisions are to be construed against the drafter or provider of such documents or provisions does not apply to this Agreement, as each party has had a Page 294 of 522 Page 3 of 4 reasonable opportunity to obtain and consult with their own legal counsel regarding this Agreement. 2. VENDOR shall perform its obligations under this Agreement as an independent contractor and shall not be considered an employee of the Town for any purpose whatsoever, including, but not limited to, entitlement to Town employee benefits. VENDOR hereby expressly waives any claim or entitlement to such benefits. Furthermore, this Agreement is not intended to create, nor should it be construed as creating, a partnership, association, joint venture, or trust. 3. If any provision of this Agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 4. No right or remedy granted herein or reserved to either party is exclusive of any other right or remedy provided or permitted by law or equity, but each shall be cumulative of every other right or remedy given hereunder. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise, in any respect, any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. 5. This Agreement is subject to the appropriation of public funds by the Town in its budget adopted for any fiscal year for the specific purpose of making payments pursuant to this Agreement for that fiscal year. The obligation of the Town pursuant to this Agreement in any fiscal year for which this Agreement is in effect shall constitute a current expense of the Town for that fiscal year only, and shall not constitute an indebtedness of the Town of any monies other than those lawfully appropriated in any fiscal year. In the event of non- appropriation of funds in any fiscal year to make payments pursuant to this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated without any liability to either party. 6. To the extent required by Texas law, the VENDOR verifies that: (1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the Agreement discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code § 808.001 and 2271.001, and it will not boycott Israel during the term of the Agreement; (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. 7. Waiver of Attorney’s Fees. The parties expressly covenant and agree that in the event of any litigation arising between the parties to this Agreement, each party shall be solely responsible for payment of its attorneys and that in no event shall either party be responsible for the other party’s attorneys’ fees regardless of the outcome of the litigation. 8. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and constitute one and the same instrument. 9. This Agreement, together with all exhibits referenced herein, and any purchase order forms used by the Town, embody the complete agreement of the parties hereto, superseding all oral or written previous and contemporary agreements between the parties and relating to matters in this Agreement. Page 295 of 522 Page 4 of 4 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have accepted the terms of this Agreement and caused this Agreement, including the exhibits attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference for all purposes, to be executed as of the dates set forth below. TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS By: __________________________ Brandon Wright, Town Manager ATTEST: ____________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary CLASSIC CHEVROLET, INC. (THE “VENDOR”): By:__________________________ Name:________________________ Title:_________________________ Date:_________________________ Page 296 of 522 BID PROPOSAL 1101 W State Hwy 114 To: City of Trophy Club TX Grapevine TX 76051 Attn: Patrick Arata EIN 75-2249022 Scope of Work/Materials Quantity 1 2026 Chevrolet Tahoe LT vehicle Build Specifications attached as Order #FNSDJB Bid Price as configured: $60,472.34 Pricing guaranteed until:11/08/25 Attachments included as part of Bid Proposal General Motors Build Configuration City of Denton Piggyback Letter Ken W. Knezek Classic Chevrolet Grapevine Page 297 of 522 Order Details - Order #FNSDJB Displayed: 8/21/25 at 04:13:19 PM EDT Printed By: Knezek, Ken Order Workbench BAC Information Charge-to-BAC 112295 Ship-to BAC 112295 Contact Name KEN KNEZEK Charge-to-BFC 1 Ship-to BFC 1 Contact Phone 8174760323 DAN Stock No. Model/Order Information Configuration Description ARATA Current Event 0500 MSRP W/DFC $65,995.00 Model Year 2026 Estimated Delivery Date MSRP $63,400.00 Division CHEVROLET VIN Invoice W/DFC W/A Distribution Entity RET Priority 0 Invoice W/A Order Type TRE - Retail Stock GMS W/DFC $60,472.34 Allocation Group TAHOE GMS $57,877.34 Model CC10706 - Tahoe: 2WD Supplier W/DFC $62,871.40 TPW Supplier $60,276.40 Vehicle Specifications PEG 1LT - LT Preferred Equipment Group Trim H0Y - 1LT/1SP/2LT/2Z7-Leather, Jet Black, Interior Trim Transmission MHS - 10-Speed Automatic Color GBA - Black Engine L84 - Engine: 5.3L, EcoTec3 V-8, DI, Dynamic Fuel Mgt, V V T Emissions FE9 - Federal Emissions Ordered Options 1LT LT Preferred Equipment Group QDF Tires: 265/65 R18L All Season, Blackwall A2X Power Seat Adjuster (Driver's Side)R6Q Processing Option A50 Seats: Front, Bucket, Full Feature RCV Wheels: 18" Aluminum, Bright Silver ARN Seat, 3rd row 60/40 Bench, manual T8Z Buckle-To-Drive AT6 Seat, 2nd row 60/40 Bench, manual TB5 Liftgate, Power ATH Keyless Open & Keyless Start TGD HEADLAMP LEVEL MIDLEVEL B30 Floor Covering: Carpet, Color Keyed TQ5 Headlamps, Intellibeam B58 Floor Mats, color-keyed, carpeted 1st and 2nd row U2K SiriusXM Satellite Radio (subscription) BTV Remote Engine Starting Pkg UE1 OnStar Communication System Page 1 of 2 Version 5.6.1 © General Motors 2025. All Rights ReservedPage 298 of 522 BVE Assist Steps, Black UEU Sensor, Forward Collision Alert C6C GVW Rating 7400 Lbs UFB Rear Cross Traffic Alert Braking CJ2 Climate Control, Electronic - Multi-zone UGN Enhanced Automatic Emergency Braking CTB Cross Traffic Alert Braking UK3 Radio Controls -Steering Wheel CWA Rear Camera, Mirror Washer UKI Side Active Safety D07 Center Floor Console, fixed UKK Sensor, Pedestrian Detection DLF Mirrors, O/S: Power, Heated UKM LANE ACTIVE SAFETY KEEP ASSIST (OPTIMAL RETURN) FE9 Federal Emissions UKT Pedestrian and Bicyclist Detection, Front GBA Black UKZ Obstacle Detection Enhanced, Extended Trailer View GU5 Rear Axle: 3.23 Ratio UOW DETECTION SIDE DOOR OPENING WARNING, PEDESTRIANS/BICYLI H0Y 1LT/1SP/2LT/2Z7-Leather, Jet Black, Interior Trim UQF Speaker System: Standard Sound System KA1 Heated Seats, Front URF DISPLAY INSTRUMENT DRIVER INFO, DISPLAY ONLY, FAMILY C, KC4 Cooler, Engine Oil URW Audio System, Adv Color LCD display w/Google Built-in KI4 120 Volt Electrical Receptacle, In Cab UTJ Theft Protection System, Unauthorized Entry KNP Transmission Cooling System UV2 Surround Vision, HD KSG Adaptive Cruise Control UVZ SENSOR COLLISION AVOIDANCE & MITIGATION, VEHICLE REVERS KW5 Alternator, 220 AMP V55 Luggage Rack, side rails, chrome L84 Engine: 5.3L, EcoTec3 V-8, DI, Dynamic Fuel Mgt, V V T VK3 Front License Plate Mounting Provisions MHS 10-Speed Automatic Z82 Trailering Package N37 Steering Column, Manual Tilt & Telescoping ZW7 Suspension Package, Premium Smooth Ride Page 2 of 2 Version 5.6.1 © General Motors 2025. All Rights ReservedPage 299 of 522 Page 300 of 522 Page 301 of 522 Page 302 of 522 Page 303 of 522 Page 304 of 522 Page 305 of 522 Page 306 of 522 Page 307 of 522 Page 308 of 522 Page 309 of 522 Page 310 of 522 Page 311 of 522 Page 312 of 522 Page 313 of 522 Page 314 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with SupplyCore for the purchase of Modular Vehicle Barriers in the amount of $158,204.10. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department has identified the need to purchase a mobile barrier system to improve public safety and enhance the Town’s ability to secure large events, roadways, and community gatherings. The MVB3X Trailer and Barrier Package is designed for rapid deployment of protective barriers capable of covering up to eight lanes of traffic. This system will allow the Department to quickly establish secure perimeters, manage vehicle access, and protect both residents and visitors during parades, festivals, and other community activities where large crowds gather. The MVB3X Trailer and Barrier Package includes: • One DOT-compliant trailer • 60 MVB3X barriers (covers up to eight lanes of traffic) • 32 pivots for flexible configurations • Three lighting kits for nighttime or low-visibility operations • One slide wheel kit for efficient deployment • Additional lighting kit and freight included Purchasing the MVB3X Trailer and Barrier Package provides the following benefits to the Town of Trophy Club: • Provides rapid deployment of high-security barriers for events and emergencies. • Enhances protection of pedestrians, crowds, and officers against vehicle threats. • Increases operational flexibility with modular and scalable design. • Secures the Town’s ability to host community events safely. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A Page 315 of 522 FISCAL IMPACT: The total cost for the package is $158,204.10, which includes the trailer, barriers, lighting kits, and freight. Funding is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Police Department's Capital Equipment Replacement Fund. The Town will utilize a cooperative purchasing contract with SupplyCore, GSA Contract #47QSHA21D0004. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Vendor Agreement 2. SupplyCore Quote 3. Product Brochure ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase contract with SupplyCore for the purchase of Modular Vehicle Barriers in the amount of $158,204.10. Page 316 of 522 Page 1 of 5 VENDOR/MEMBER AGREEMENT TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS This Vendor/Member Agreement (the “Agreement”) is hereby entered into by and between SupplyCore, Inc., a corporation authorized to do business in the State of Texas, with offices located at 303 North Main Street, Suite 800, Rockford, IL 61101 (the “Vendor”), and the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home-rule municipality (the “Town”), for the purchase of the MVB3X Trailer Package (Quote Number 1368857). RECITALS WHEREAS, the Vendor submitted RFP No. 47QSHA21D0004 to the U.S. General Services Administration (“GSA”), which is an agency of the federal government, or an authorized government purchasing cooperative under the laws of the State of Texas; and WHEREAS, the Vendor and GSA have entered into agreements, whereby the Vendor has agreed to sell to GSA and its members certain goods and services of a nature and quality as represented in the specifications and proposals, and at a specified price; and WHEREAS, the Town has entered into an agreement with GSA to be a member and may purchase specified goods and services at the prices listed pursuant to the GSA agreements; and WHEREAS, the Town is authorized pursuant to Texas Local Gov’t Code Ch. 271, and Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 791, to enter into cooperative purchasing agreements and is deemed thereby to satisfy state laws requiring competitive bidding; and WHEREAS, the purchase of goods or services under this Agreement is authorized by the Town Council and the Town desires to purchase, and Vendor desires to sell and provide, certain goods and services under the GSA agreement referenced above; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor desire to enter into this legally enforceable Agreement to clarify and make explicit the rights, duties, and responsibilities between the parties, and in case of any conflicts between this Agreement and the provisions of the GSA agreement, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail; and WHEREAS, the Town and Vendor recognize and agree that this Agreement does not amend or alter the rights, duties, and obligations between Vendor and GSA, or between the Town and GSA under their respective contracts with GSA; NOW, THEREFORE, the Town and Vendor agree that the recitals above are true and correct, and further agree mutually agree as follows: 1. Vendor agrees to furnish and deliver to the Town, the goods or services requested by the Town as further detailed on the quote attached to this Agreement as Exhibit A, which the parties agree is still valid as of the effective date of this Agreement regardless of any contrary conditions on the quote. The Town agrees to pay Vendor for the goods or services at the prices shown on Exhibit A, which are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. 2. If applicable, the Town shall make payment for goods or services in accordance with the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Chapter 2251, Texas Government Code. The date of any payment, whether net or gross, shall be determined by calculating the number of days after receipt of invoices from Vendor. Page 317 of 522 Page 2 of 5 3. This Agreement is made and shall be construed according to the laws of the State of Texas, without regard for conflicts of law principles. Venue of any court action brought directly or indirectly by reason of this Agreement shall be in Denton County, Texas. This Agreement is made and is to be performed in Denton County, Texas. 4. All written notices shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to an individual, officer, legal representative, or member of the party for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to the person giving the notice. 5. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this agreement. 6. If any provision of this agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 7. INDEMNIFICATION. THE VENDOR (THE “INDEMNIFYING PARTY”), SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE TOWN (THE “TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTY”), FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, DEMANDS, CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS, JUDGMENTS, SUITS, COSTS AND EXPENSES (INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS’ FEES) MADE BY ANY THIRD-PARTY, TO THE EXTENT ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE GOODS OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE VENDOR PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT (COLLECTIVELY, “INDEMNIFIED CLAIMS”), REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED BY ANY THIRD PARTIES AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE DAMAGES OR CLAIMS OF THIRD-PARTIES ARE KNOWN OR FULLY APPRECIATED AT THIS TIME BY VENDOR OR THE TOWN. VENDOR SHALL GIVE TO THE TOWN REASONABLE NOTICE OF ANY SUCH CLAIMS OR ACTIONS. VENDOR SHALL USE LEGAL COUNSEL REASONABLY ACCEPTABLE TO THE TOWN IN CARRYING OUT ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR EARLY TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS INDEMNIFICATION IS NOT INTENDED TO APPLY TO CLAIMS MADE AGAINST THE TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTIES RESULTING FROM THE WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF TOWN EMPLOYEES COVERED UNDER SECTION 101.021 OF THE TEXAS CIVIL PRACTICE AND REMEDIES CODE. 8. Governmental Functions/Immunities. The parties hereby acknowledge and agree that Town is entering this Agreement pursuant to its governmental functions and that nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as constituting a waiver of the Town’s governmental immunity from suit or liability, which is expressly reserved to the extent allowed by law. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the parties hereby acknowledge and agree that to the extent this Agreement is subject to the provisions of Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE, as amended, the Town’s immunity from suit is waived only as set forth in Subchapter I of Chapter 271, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE. Further, the parties agree that this Agreement is made subject to all applicable provisions of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, including, but not limited to all defenses, limitations, and exceptions to the limited waiver of immunity from liability provided in Chapter 101 and Chapter 75. 9. Warranty: All products and manufacturer’s guarantees or warranties shall be assigned to the Town upon acceptance of delivery of the goods, identified in Exhibit A, and the goods shall only be accepted after delivery by the Vendor and inspection and approval in writing by the Town. In the event the Town does not accept the delivered goods, the Vendor shall reimburse the Town for the cost of the goods and provide any replacement goods acceptable to the Town, and the Vendor shall pay any costs to return the goods to the Vendor, or shall reimburse the Town for the cost to return the same. Page 318 of 522 Page 3 of 5 MISCELLANEOUS 1. The terms and conditions of any exculpatory or indemnity provisions in the Agreement shall construed in favor of the party being protected and shall survive the termination and completion of the Agreement. The judicial doctrine that provides that documents or exculpatory provisions are to be construed against the drafter or provider of such documents or provisions does not apply to this Agreement, as each party has had a reasonable opportunity to obtain and consult with their own legal counsel regarding this Agreement. 2. Vendor shall perform its obligations under this Agreement as an independent contractor and shall not be considered an employee of the Town for any purpose whatsoever, including, but not limited to, entitlement to Town employee benefits. Vendor hereby expressly waives any claim or entitlement to such benefits. Furthermore, this Agreement is not intended to create, nor should it be construed as creating, a partnership, association, joint venture, or trust. 3. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise, in any respect, any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. 4. If any provision of this Agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 5. No right or remedy granted herein or reserved to either party is exclusive of any other right or remedy provided or permitted by law or equity, but each shall be cumulative of every other right or remedy given hereunder. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise, in any respect, any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. 6. This Agreement is subject to the appropriation of public funds by the Town in its budget adopted for any fiscal year for the specific purpose of making payments pursuant to this Agreement for that fiscal year. The obligation of the Town pursuant to this Agreement in any fiscal year for which this Agreement is in effect shall constitute a current expense of the Town for that fiscal year only, and shall not constitute an indebtedness of the Town of any monies other than those lawfully appropriated in any fiscal year. In the event of non- appropriation of funds in any fiscal year to make payments pursuant to this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated without any liability to either party. 7. To the extent required by Texas law, the Vendor verifies that: (1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the Agreement discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code § 808.001 and 2271.001, and it will not boycott Israel during the term of the Agreement; (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. 8. Waiver of Attorney’s Fees. The parties expressly covenant and agree that in the event of any litigation arising between the parties to this Agreement, each party shall be solely responsible for payment of its attorneys and that in no event shall either party be responsible for the other party’s attorneys’ fees regardless of the outcome of the litigation. Page 319 of 522 Page 4 of 5 9. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and constitute one and the same instrument. 10. This Agreement, together with all exhibits referenced herein and any purchase order of the Town, embodies the complete agreement of the parties hereto, superseding all oral or written previous and contemporary agreements between the parties and relating to matters in this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have accepted the terms of this Agreement and caused this Agreement, including the exhibits attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference for all purposes, to be executed as of the dates set forth below. TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS By: __________________________ Brandon Wright, Town Manager ATTEST: ____________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: _____________________________ Dean Roggia, Town Attorney SUPPLYCORE, INC. 303 North Main Street, Suite 800, Rockford, IL 61101 (THE “VENDOR”): By:__________________________ Name:________________________ Title:_________________________ Date:_________________________ Page 320 of 522 Page 5 of 5 EXHIBIT A Page 321 of 522 SALES QUOTE QUOTE NUMBER: DATE: 1368857 06/25/2025 CUSTOMER CONTRACT / PO#:47QSHA21D0004 QUOTE VALID UNTIL:07/25/2025 PROJECT:MVB3X Trailer Package - Trophy Club, TX Work Order Num: SOLD TO:SHIP TO:Town of Trophy Club 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 Town of Trophy Club 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 CONTACT:SupplyCore 303 N. Main Street, Suite 800 Rockford, IL 61101-1018 Phone: (815) 964-7940 Customer Service Representative: Nate Johnson Phone: 815-997-1667 152332 152332 Line Total SC Item # Cust Item # Cust Doc PO / Release #Unit Price Lead TimeUOMQTY Mfg. Name / Part Number Country of OriginDescription 1 Israel 1375226 1 EA $152,024.10 $152,024.10 60-unit MVB3X trailer package. DOT Compliant Trailer, (60) MVB3X barriers, (32) pivots, (3) lighting kits, (1)Slide Wheel Kit. Covers up to 8 lanes of traffic . Advanced Security Technologies SCAST3X-60/60 -320000-30 121 2 United States 1375227 1 EA $780.00 $780.00 Additional lighting kit. ** OPEN MARKET **Advanced Security Technologies LIGHTING KIT 121 3 United States 1375228 1 EA $5,400.00 $5,400.00 Freight N/A FREIGHT 121 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: $158,204.10 Adjustments: Tax: Total:TERMS: Net 30 Days Lead Time represents the expected delivery days after receipt of order. The items being provided by SupplyCore may be subject to export controls under the Export Administration Regulations or the International Traffic in Arms Regulations. Product may have additional lead time due to obtaining export license if required. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations regarding export controlled items. Quote Number: June 25, 2025 1:25 pmPage 1 of 11368857 Page 322 of 522 • Each MVBJX unit is lightweight at 531bs • Easily connect units to close any street • One person to assemble/ dismantle • Open/ close a street in seconds • Use as an operational gate • No tools required & zero maintenance • Custom trailer systems for storage & transportation of up to 10 lanes Page 323 of 522 TESTED & CERTIFIED IWA 14 -1 :2013 Tested & Cert ified at 2,500 kg @ 48 km /hr [ 5,513 lbs .@ 29.83 mi/h] Penetration l 0.9 m [35 .76 ft . Tes ted & Cert ified at 7,500 kg @ 32 km/hr [16 ,538 lbs .@ 19.88 mi/h] Penetrat ion 10.4 m [34 .12 ft .] Tested & Cert ified at 7,200 kg @ 48 km /hr [15 ,876 lbs .@ 29.83 mi/h] Penetration 17.8 m [58.4 ft .] ASTM -F2656-15 Tested & Certified at 2,500 kg @ 48 km /hr : [ 5 ,513 lbs .@ 29.83 mi/h] Penetrat ion 9.7 m [31 .83 ft .] Tested & Certified at 7,500 kg @ 50 km /hr [16 ,538 lbs .@ 31.06 mi/h] Penetration 19 m [62 .3 ft .] MVB TM 3X by MIFRAM PAS 68:2013 Tested & Certified at 2 ,500 kg @ 48 km/hr [ 5 ,513 lbs .@ 29.83 mi/h] Penetration 9 .7 m [31 .83 ft .] Tested & Certified at 7,500 kg @ 32 km /hr [16 ,538 lbs .@ 19 .88 mi/h] Penetration 9 m [29.53 ft .] Tested & Certified at 7,500 kg @ 48 km /hr [16 ,538 lbs.@ 29.83 mi/h] Penetration 17.8 m [58 .4 ft .] ~667 KJ Energy Absorption Equal to 89 Concrete blocks of 1 M 3 [2.4 Ton - 5,292 lbs .] Movement for 1 M Distance at 7,500 kg @ 50 km/hr [16 ,538 lbs.@ 31.06 mi/h] AST trailers are made in the United States and comply with US DOT regulations. Each trailer is specially designed to safely store and transport the MVB3X system inventory. Built with ease of use in mind, every complete system includes the specific number of MVB3X barriers, appropriate size trailer and the accessories to meet your operational requirements. Page 324 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Patrick Arata, Chief of Police AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Stolz Telecom for the purchase of police emergency equipment to outfit a new Chevrolet K9 response unit in the amount of $41,283.98. (Patrick Arata, Chief of Police) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Trophy Club Police Department is in the process of equipping its new Chevrolet Silverado K9 unit. As part of this effort, Stolz Telecom has provided an estimate for a comprehensive upfit that will include safety lighting, communications equipment, K9 transport systems, weapons storage, and other specialized law enforcement features. The upfit ensures the vehicle is ready for deployment as a fully functional K9 patrol unit. The Stolz Telecom scope of work includes: • Emergency lighting system (Whelen, ION, and Vertex components) • Siren, speakers, and control systems • K9 transport system with safety features (Ace K9 HOT-N-POP® Pro, No K9 Left Behind Kit, smoke detector, AceWatchDog monitoring) • Havis vehicle-specific console, docking station, and accessories • Weapons storage system (Setina rifle mount, TruckVault storage, CargoGlide tray) • Opticom traffic pre-emption system • Kussmaul vehicle charger and electrical upgrades • Window tinting, inverter installation, wiring, and other labor and materials BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The total cost for the vehicle outfitting is $41,283.98, as quoted by Stolz Telecom. Funding is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Crime Control and Prevention District Fund. The Town will utilize a cooperative purchasing agreement with Tarrant County through Contract #F2024142. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: Page 325 of 522 1. Stolz Quote ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with Stolz Telecom for the purchase of police emergency equipment to outfit a new Chevrolet K9 response unit in the amount of $41,283.98. Page 326 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 1 Estimate Date :February 04, 2025 Expiration Date :April 25, 2025 Reference# :Silverado K9 Salesperson :Shannon Farnan Contract :Tarrant County F2024142 Delivery Preference :Upfit Stolz Telecom Estimate # EST-007899 Bill To Trophy Club Police Department 1 Trophy Wood Dr Trophy Club, Texas 76262 U.S.A. Ship To 1 Trophy Wood Dr Trophy Club, Texas 76262 U.S.A. #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 1 Est. | Trophy Club Police Department | Silverado K9 1.00 0.00 0.00 Whelen 41% off MSRP 2 BSFW49X I-E FST WCX S/D 12LT SILVERADO IEXD1224 Expires 6/30/2025 (Items 2-10) MSRP $1420 1.00 3,394.00 3,394.00 3 BSSP2XJW 6/6 DUO D/E LTHD D/P PROMO PKG 1.00 0.00 0.00 4 BSRW10 Inner Edge RST WCX 10-LT Tray MSRP $ 1525 1.00 0.00 0.00 5 ISR49 Chevy Silverado 1500, 2019-2023, Mounting Kit for use with BSRW*, ISRL* or ISRW* Lamp Trays (Not for Use with Sliding Rear Windows), No Charge When Ordered with Inner Edge® (Available November 2022) 1.00 0.00 0.00 6 CCTL7 WeCanX 21 BUTTON/SLIDE CTRL HD MSRP $473 1.00 0.00 0.00 7 C399 CENCOM CORE WCX CONTROL CENTER MSRP $1411 1.00 0.00 0.00 8 SA315P SA315P SPEAKER, BLACK PLASTIC MSRP $412 1.00 0.00 0.00 Page 327 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 2 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 9 SAK70 SA-315 MT KIT 2021 CHEVY TAHOE MSRP $53 1.00 0.00 0.00 10 C399SP SCANport KIT FOR C399 MSRP $189 1.00 0.00 0.00 11 CEXAMP WeCanX EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER MSRP $376 1.00 221.84 221.84 12 SA315P SA315P SPEAKER, BLACK PLASTIC MSRP $412 1.00 243.08 243.08 13 SAK70 MSRP $53SA-315 MT KIT 2021 CHEVY TAHOE 1.00 31.27 31.27 14 CEM24 WeCanX 24 OUTPUT EXPANSION MOD MSRP $399 3.00 235.41 706.23 15 I2D DUO LINEAR ION RED/WHITE BLK 2 in Westin HDX light channel, 1 mounted on side in swivel Bracket **White with Takedowns MSRP $206 3.00 121.54 364.62 16 I2E DUO LINEAR ION BLUE/WHITE BLK 2 in Westin HDX, 1 mounted on side with swivel bracket **White with Takedowns MSRP $206 3.00 121.54 364.62 17 IONK1B SWIVEL MOUNT KIT FOR ION BLK Used to mount Ions on side of Westin Bumper MSRP $45 2.00 26.55 53.10 18 TLI2D ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/W 1 Mounted in Fog Light Area 1 mounted on Mirror as "Mirror Beam" **White with Takedown MSRP $199 2.00 117.41 234.82 19 TLI2E ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO B/W 1 Mounted in Fog Light Area 1 mounted on Mirror as "Mirror Beam" **White with Takedown MSRP $199 2.00 117.41 234.82 Page 328 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 3 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 20 TLI2D ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/W Driver Side Front Fender, Driver Side Rear Fender, Driver side rear step near Tail Light **White with Left Alley MSRP $199 3.00 117.41 352.23 21 TLI2E ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO B/W Passenger Side Front Fender, Passenger Side Rear Fender, Passenger side rear step near Tail Light **White with Left Alley MSRP $199 3.00 117.41 352.23 22 U180D DUO™, Red/White Driver Side Mirror MSRP $309 1.00 182.31 182.31 23 U180E DUO, Blue/White Passenger Side Mirror MSRP $309 1.00 182.31 182.31 24 U18013 U-SERIES MIRROR MT SILVERADO MSRP $35 1.00 20.65 20.65 25 PSKC3FCR Trio Mega T Series R/B/W Mounted in Rear passenger windows MSRP $238 2.00 140.42 280.84 26 TCRWX6 WeCanX TRACER 6-LAMP HOUSING JWA Tracer 1224 Expires 6/30/2025 Trio Tracer R/B/W MSRP $1364 2.00 550.00 1,100.00 27 TCRWXPJC WCX TRACER PRIMARY TRIO R/B/W MSRP $116 2.00 12.00 24.00 28 TCRWXSJC WCX TRACER SECONDARY TRIO RBW MSRP $116 10.00 12.00 120.00 29 TCRB49 TRACER MT KIT 2019 SILVERADO MSRP $63 2.00 0.00 0.00 Page 329 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 4 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 30 PSKC3FCR Trio Mega T Series R/B/W 2 mounted near top of tailgate 2 mounted on lower bumper MSRP $238 4.00 140.42 561.68 31 TLI2D ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/W Driver side center of Tail Gate MSRP $199 1.00 117.41 117.41 32 TLI2E ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO B/W Passenger side center of Tail Gate MSRP $199 1.00 117.41 117.41 33 VTX9D VERTEX SUPER-LED DUO RED/WHT Driver side reverse light MSRP $150 1.00 88.50 88.50 34 VTX9E VERTEX SUPER-LED DUO BLU/WHT Passenger side reverse light MSRP $150 1.00 88.50 88.50 35 ARGES2 ARGES PROFOCUS REMOTE SPOTLT MSRP $912 1.00 538.08 538.08 36 ARG49D DRVR FENDER MT SILVERADO 1500 MSRP $116 1.00 68.44 68.44 37 ARGCH1 ARGES BAIL MT CONTROL HEAD MSRP $352 1.00 207.68 207.68 38 TLI2J ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Mounted inside portion of K9 Door. Flash when Emergency Lights on and K9 door open MSRP $199 2.00 117.41 234.82 39 60CREGCS 12V WHT/RED 6" COMPARTMENT LT Driver compartment dome light MSRP $258 1.00 152.22 152.22 Page 330 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 5 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 40 PSD02FCR STRIP-LITE+ DUO FLASHR RED/WHT K9 Dome Light, 2 in bed (With Switch to control) Ran with rocker switch in console MSRP $218 3.00 128.62 385.86 41 PSBKT45 45� Mounting Bracket for 1 Strip-Lite Plus� Lighthead MSSRP $32 2.00 18.88 37.76 Havis 20% off MSRP 42 C-VSW-2600-SILV 12.5" Wide Flat 26" Vehicle-Specific Console for 2019-2021 Chevrolet Silverado and GMC Sierra MSRP $913.16 CCS-1P for Whelen 21 Slide WSB-1P for Arges control head C-Eb25-XTL-1P for Motorola C-EB25-MWG-1P for Watchguard C-EB35-RHP-1P for Ace K9 (Recessed into Ceiling) 1.00 730.52 730.52 43 CUP2-1001 Self-Adjusting Double Cup Holder MSRP $67 1.00 53.60 53.60 44 C-ARM-102 Side mount armrest MSRP $94 1.00 75.20 75.20 45 C-APW-1390 13" Accessory Pocket, 9." Deep for 3.3"W Section of Wide Consoles MSRP $84 1.00 67.20 67.20 46 C-MCB Mic clip bracket MSRP $19 2.00 15.20 30.40 47 DS-DELL-426 Docking Station With Standard Port Replication & Power Supply For Dell Latitude Rugged Notebooks 5430, 7330, 5420, 5424 & 7424 MSRP $1040.97 1.00 832.77 832.77 48 C-MD-112 Tilt/swivel slide motion adapter MSRP $367 1.00 293.60 293.60 49 C-HDM-214 8.5" Heavy Duty Telescoping Pole, side mount MSRP $184 1.00 147.20 147.20 K9 Insert and accessories (Havis 20%, Ace K9 5%) Page 331 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 6 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 50 K9-C29-B Standard K9 Transport System For 2021-2025 Chevrolet Silverado – Black MSRP $6292 1.00 5,033.60 5,033.60 51 K9-A-104 Window guard & K9 Transport fan option MSRP $675 1.00 540.00 540.00 52 K9-A-103 K9 Transport water bowl option MSRP $84 1.00 67.20 67.20 53 HP-5020 Ace K9 HOT-N-POP® PRO 2022 Chevrolet Tahoe Includes: • Control Head • IntelaBox • Protective Relay Module • S.O.S Horn Honk™ Output • Siren Activation Output • Lightbar Activation Output • Dual Window Drop Kit • Dual Temperature Sensors • Remote with Holster for Door Popper • Heavy-Duty Solenoid Kit • Gas Spring with Heavy-Duty Stainless Steel Mounts • System Wiring Harnesses • Installation Instructions • Vehicle Specific Wiring Information *Vehicle Make, Model and Year Required When Ordering • User Guide • Two Year Warranty • Tech Support MSRP $1595 1.00 1,500.00 1,500.00 54 H-NKLBK-P No K9 Left Behind Kit for Pro series products with PRM MSRP $69 1.00 65.55 65.55 55 HA-SDM-D Smoke Detector & Interface Module Remote MSRP $104.95 1.00 99.70 99.70 56 AWD-7040 AceWatchDog Proactive monitoring that displays System Temperatures on your cell phone. Calls and/or sends text alert to the K9 Handler and four other contacts. MSRP $899 1.00 854.00 854.00 Rifle Mount (Setina 10%) Page 332 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 7 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 57 GK10271UTHK Single rail T mount Trunk Tray Universal Gun Lock w HK key MSRP $399 Mounted above officers head on K9 System. Barrel pointed to Passenger side. Do not inhibit the K9 pas through. 1.00 359.10 359.10 Truck Vault (10%) Decked (10%) 58 T-CHSILM1-19S-PC-HP-PW Silverado Mag 1 Dwr Half Width 5' 6", All Wthr;Passenger Side Magnum Height TruckVault Silverado 1500 Vehicle Year: 2025 Chevrolet Silverado Bed Length: 5.5' Heavy Duty Exterior Coating Drawer Interior Carpet: Grey Compression Locks MSRP $3375 1.00 3,037.50 3,037.50 59 DCG600-6324 CargoGlide 600 MSRP $899.99 75% Slide Out. 600Lb capacity 1.00 800.00 800.00 Diamondback Bed Cover 60 Diamondback Switchback Bed Cover ALL-NEW 2019–2025 | Chevy | Silverado 1500 | 5'10" Bed 1.00 1,949.00 1,949.00 Opticom 61 110286 Model 795 Low Profile Emitter MSRP $1981 Mounted to Front Inner Edge on Passenger Side. 1.00 1,550.00 1,550.00 Kussmaul (5%) 62 091-266-12-60-RCP Chief Series Charger, 60 AMP w/onboard & Remote Control Display MSRP $1698 1.00 1,600.00 1,600.00 63 091-55-20-120T-BW-BLK BLK S.A.E. 120VAC,20A,TRA.DISC,BACK WIR MSRP $545.8 1.00 500.00 500.00 Labor and Materials 64 285080F-121-S Hi-Amp Circuit Breaker, Type III Reset, 80A, 48V 1.00 57.00 57.00 65 MXRNMO58U-NC 3/4" Hole NMO Brass Mount with Gold Pin 17' RG58U, No Connector 1.00 23.81 23.81 Page 333 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 8 Sub Total 41,283.98 Total $41,283.98 #Item & Description Qty Rate Amount 66 BMLPV700 Maxrad 740 – 870 MHz low profile vertical 2 dB gain black antenna, 2.4 in high. 1.00 50.80 50.80 67 MMSU-1 Magnetic Mic Single Unit 2.00 39.95 79.90 68 ST CM Consumable Materials Wire, Loom, Fasteners, etc. 2 boxes for 110V outlets in bed. Mount Remote in Bed to activate inverter 1.00 500.00 500.00 69 Renogy 700W Pure Sine Wave Inverter 12V DC to 120V AC Converter for Home, RV, Truck, Off-Grid Solar Power Inverter 12V to 110V with Built-in 5V /2.1A USB Port, AC Hardwire Port, Remote Controller 1.00 125.00 125.00 70 ST UTL-TX Upfit Technician Labor Flush mount Radio speaker in roof Flush mount K9 into roof Install customer supplied Radar Install customer supplied Radio Install Customer Supplied Camera System Install Customer supplied Wifi Station 100.00 90.00 9,000.00 71 ST EL External Labor Tint rear door windows Limo Tint Front side windows 15% 1.00 200.00 200.00 Notes Looking forward to your business. Please advise if you have any questions.  Your estimate can be viewed, printed and downloaded as a PDF from the link below. If accepting the estimate, please reply to this email with a copy of your Purchase Order, or a PDF copy of the signed estimate. Terms & Conditions ORDERING – Stolz Telecom reserves the right to accept or reject any order, in our sole discretion. Order acceptance is expressly limited by and to the terms and conditions stated herein, which supersede any terms and conditions set forth in any document you provided to us. The minimum order value is $50.00 and orders may be either shipped complete or shipped allowing for backorder merchandise, at our option. Orders may also be picked-up at our facilities or be staged for delivery / pick-up at a future date by advance arrangement.  PRICING – Prices are subject to change, without advance notice, and are exclusive of any applicable sales or other taxes, freight, handling and insurance charges. Freight quotations are provided as estimates only – actual freight charges are determined at the time of shipping and may differ from the amount originally quoted. PAYMENT TERMS - We accept Visa and MasterCard credit cards at the point of sale. For information on establishing an open account with us, please contact our Credit Department at 877.457.2262. For amounts due on account, Check is accepted.  Accounts not paid within 30 days of the date of the invoice are subject to a 1.5% monthly finance charge. TAXES - If applicable, sales tax will be added to your invoice unless an acceptable resale tax exemption certificate is provided. Page 334 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 9 DELIVERY – We will make reasonable efforts to meet delivery and performance dates, but we are not liable for delays due to causes beyond our control. We will endeavor to ship all orders for in-stock merchandise placed before 2:00 PM each day. Orders requiring cable processing, component assembly or specialized packaging may require extra processing time. Will Call pick-up service is also available by advance arrangement. SHIPMENT & RISK OF LOSS - Domestic U.S. orders are tendered to carrier with freight prepaid and billed to you, unless otherwise specified at time of quotation. We will prepay and bill to you all shipping, handling and insurance charges on all domestic orders, unless otherwise specified at the time of the order. We reserve the right to choose the freight carrier unless otherwise specified by you, the customer. International orders are tendered as EXW Origin (Incoterms 2010) and will be shipped via Collect or 3rd-party freight terms via your preferred carrier or shipped to your freight forwarder with any freight charges prearranged by you. Export packaging is available at an additional charge. You will be responsible for all insurance, customs, and duty charges. For domestic and international orders, title and risk of loss shall pass to you upon delivery to carrier, risk of loss or damage from point of shipment shall fall upon you and it is your responsibility to file all claims with the carrier. DAMAGES IN TRANSIT/CLAIMS – All shipments must be thoroughly inspected for visible damage and completeness by the recipient before accepting delivery from the carrier. If any damage is found or a shortage determined, the delivery bill-of-lading should be A) noted as such prior to acceptance or B) the shipment may be partially or completely refused. If no exceptions are noted at the time of receipt, the delivery will be deemed as “accepted in good condition” by you, releasing the carrier and us from further liability or recourse. Any claims for concealed damage or material shortages must be promptly reported to us within 24 hours of the receipt. CUSTOM PRODUCTS & ASSEMBLIES – We require an engineering and purchasing approval sign-off for special orders and custom products, including non-stock cable assemblies. All such items are considered non-cancelable, non-returnable and non-refundable, unless defective. Any such defective items will be repaired or replaced only, at our option. WARRANTIES - All warranty items shall be repaired, replaced or credited in accordance with the manufacturer’s warranty policy. Any warranty, expressed or implied, is set forth and limited by and to the manufacturer’s written warranty policy on the products that we sell. STOLZ TELECOM MAKES NO WARRANTY RESPECTING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCTS IT SELLS OR THE SUITABLITY OR FITNESS OF A PRODUCT FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE. SPECIFICATIONS – All product specifications represented are derived from the manufacturer. Changes in specification and / or design by the manufacturer may occur at any time, without advance notice. CHANGES / CANCELLATIONS – Orders may not be cancelled or modified, either in whole or in part, without our written consent, and may then be subject to payment of a reasonable charge for costs incurred in cancelling or modifying the order. RETURN POLICY – Before any merchandise may be returned, a Return Goods Authorization (RGA) number must be obtained. An RGA may be requested by calling 877.457.2262 or by e-mailing Orders@StolzTele.com. All inquiries will be evaluated and a determination will be made to approve, or deny, the request within 3 business days. If approved, an RGA number and set of return instructions will be provided by our Customer Service Department. All requests to return merchandise must be made within 30 days from the date of purchase and RGA’s are valid for 30 days only. It is your responsibility to coordinate return logistics and you will be responsible for any associated shipping charges. All returned items will be thoroughly inspected to validate its condition. In-store credit will be issued for items that are returned complete & unused, in the original manufacturers’ packaging, in like-new condition. Any returned goods received by us in unsatisfactory condition will be returned to you. Authorized returns are subject to a restocking fee of no less than 20%. Special orders, cut- to-length cable and made-to-order jumper assemblies are non-returnable. DEFECTIVE MERCHANDISE POLICY - An RGA may also be obtained, per above, to facilitate the servicing of an item that is inoperable due to a possible manufacturing concern. When requesting service for a warranty-related matter, a detailed report of the defective issue must be included. An RGA number and set of return instructions will be provided by our Customer Service Department. Reportedly defective items will be returned to and evaluated by the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). Upon their verification of a warrantable defect, such item(s) will be repaired, replaced or credited as determined by the OEM’s warranty policy. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY – In no event shall we be liable to you, under any cause of action or claim of any nature whatsoever, regardless of whether characterized as tort, negligence, contract, warranty, or otherwise, (A) for any loss of profits or other economic loss, including, but not limited to, such losses as: (i) wages paid to Buyer’s employees or other manual labor costs, (ii) lost revenue, (iii) lost use of equipment, (iv) purchase, lease, or other acquisition of replacement or temporary equipment, facilities or services, (v) cost of capital or (vi) costs or losses relating to downtime, or (B) any other indirect, special, consequential, punitive, exemplary or other similar damages arising out of any claim relating to Buyer’s purchases of goods or services gives rise to Stolz Telecom’s liability to Buyer. AMENDMENTS – You agree to be bound by these Terms and Conditions in effect at the time of purchase. You also agree that we may change any of the Terms and Conditions upon 15 days written notice to you and that such changed Terms and Conditions will apply to any subsequent transactions with us. Additionally, you agree that in the event that any portion of these Terms and Conditions are found to be unenforceable, the remainder will remain in full force and effect. GOVERNING LAW – These Terms and Conditions shall be governed by and construed in accordance with laws of the State of Oklahoma for agreements to be performed entirely within the State of Oklahoma, and the State of Texas for agreements to be performed entirely within the State of Texas without regard to choice of law provisions. GENERAL – You acknowledge that you have read these Terms and Conditions, understand them and agree to be bound by such Terms and Conditions. All typographical errors are subject to correction. Page 335 of 522 6825 Camille Avenue Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73149     2832 Geesling Road, Suite 100 Denton, Texas 76208 405.632.2262 Oklahoma City     972.465.9299 Denton     918.921.1928 Tulsa     580.215.6753 Lawton     580.701.2032 Enid     877.457.2262 Toll Free      www.StolzTele.com 10Page 336 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Matt Cox, Director of Community Development AGENDA ITEM: Consider ratifying the Town Manager's execution of a contract with H&G Systems for the emergency purchase and installation of a replacement RTU HVAC system at Town Hall in the amount of $75,398. (Matt Cox, Director of Community Development) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: Due to ongoing issues with the rooftop HVAC unit serving the Police Department side of Town Hall, immediate action was necessary to maintain building operations and ensure the safety and comfort of staff and visitors. The Town Manager authorized and executed a contract with H&G Systems for the replacement of the unit. The rooftop HVAC units are approximately 10 years old. The Police Department unit operates 24 hours a day and was originally placed on an annual maintenance program. Over the past four years, this program was increased to quarterly service in response to recurring issues. Despite these measures, the unit has broken down several times over the past two months and is currently operating only with rented emergency portable air conditioning units. The Town Hall rooftop units were originally scheduled for replacement in the Capital Improvement Program in 2030. However, due to increased strain, age, and repeated failures of the Police Department unit, early replacement has become necessary to ensure continued operation and reliability. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The Town sought bids from four companies, and H&G Systems provided the lowest responsive bid of $75,398 for the replacement of one 25-ton rooftop HVAC system. The purchase includes a 15-year warranty on the stainless steel heat exchanger (parts only), a 5- year warranty on the compressor (parts only), and a 3-year warranty covering parts, coils, and controls. The contract with H&G Systems is available through BuyBoard Contract #720-23. Funding for this project is available in the Community Development Equipment Replacement Fund. A budget amendment is necessary to appropriate funding in FY 2026, which will be presented to the Town Council in October 2025. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Contract Page 337 of 522 ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council ratify the Town Manager's execution of a contract with H&G Systems for the emergency purchase and installation of a replacement RTU HVAC system at Town Hall in the amount of $75,398. Page 338 of 522 9150 Markville Dr. Dallas, TX 75243 ph. 214 341-5486 www.HandGSystems.com HVAC TACLA53390C, Regulated by the Texas Department of Licensing and Registration PO Box 12157, Austin, TX 78711, 1-800-803-9202 or 512-463-6599, www.license.state.tx.us Plumbing M-13879, Rick Baskin, Texas State Board of Plumbing Examiners, PO Box 4200, Austin, TX 78765, 1-800-845-6584 Date: August 22, 202 Attention: Paul Brandon Buyboard # 720-23 Subject: Replace (1) one 25 Ton RTU_1801 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, Tx 76262 H&G Systems is pleased to supply the following proposal for the subject referenced above. HVAC Scope of Work ➢ Schedule critical shutdown of unit for replacement with the customer. ➢ Lockout tagout roof top unit. ➢ Disconnect unit from curb. ➢ Disconnect the electrical / controls /sensors. ➢ Provide a crane for the removal and the installation of new unit. ➢ Remove / dispose of old unit according to EPA standards. ➢ Provide and install (1) RTU. ➢ Reconnect electrical / controls / thermostat and secure units to the curbs. ➢ Remove LOTO. ➢ Provide start up on the units. ➢ Verify proper operation. ➢ Clean up all debris and remove from the premises. Price …….$ 75,398.00 Page 339 of 522 9150 Markville Drive Dallas, Texas 75243 ph. 214 341-5486 www.HandGSystems.com HVAC TACLA53390C, Regulated by the Texas Department of Licensing and Registration PO Box 12157, Austin, TX 78711, 1-800-803-9202 or 512-463-6599, www.license.state.tx.us Plumbing M-13879, Rick Baskin, Texas State Board of Plumbing Examiners, PO Box 4200, Austin, TX 78765, 1-800-845-6584 2 2 Product Data - 3 - 25 Ton Precedent Unitary Rooftop Item: A1 Qty: 1 Tag(s): PREC-1 DX Cooling / Gas Heat High Efficiency R-454B Refrigerant 25 Ton 460/60/3 Symbio 700 unit controls Hail Guard standard Stainless steel gas heat Low capacity gas heat 0-100% Economizer, dry bulb control, with barometric relief damper Multiple Zone Variable Air Volume with standard motor Hinged access panels with 2-in MERV 8 filter Through-the-base electric connections Non-fused disconnect switch Powered 15A convenience outlet Advanced Controller with BACnet communications interface Clogged filter switch and condensate overflow switch Stainless steel drain pan 3-year parts, coils & controls warranty 5-year compressor parts only warranty 15-year stainless steel heat exchanger parts only warranty We EXCLUDE the following: • Anything not mentioned in the above scope. • Overtime • Taxes • Any existing code violations Page 340 of 522 9150 Markville Drive Dallas, Texas 75243 ph. 214 341-5486 www.HandGSystems.com HVAC TACLA53390C, Regulated by the Texas Department of Licensing and Registration PO Box 12157, Austin, TX 78711, 1-800-803-9202 or 512-463-6599, www.license.state.tx.us Plumbing M-13879, Rick Baskin, Texas State Board of Plumbing Examiners, PO Box 4200, Austin, TX 78765, 1-800-845-6584 3 3 Please let us know if you have any comments or questions about anything in our proposal . Thanks again for the opportunity to partner with you and your team on this project. Do to the validity of the market this Proposal is valid for 30 days. Sincerely, Dirk Suitt Account Manager 7534 Kathy Lane suite 102 Benbrook, Texas 76126 817.219.3096 cell 817.756.7177 Office dirks@HandGSystems.com www.HandGSystems.com This agreement is subject to Customer’s acceptance of the attached TERMS AND CONDITIONS- QUOTED SERVICE & EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT PROJECTS. Accepted By:__________________________________Date_______________ 04 SEPT 2025 Page 341 of 522 9150 Markville Drive Dallas, Texas 75243 ph. 214 341-5486 www.HandGSystems.com HVAC TACLA53390C, Regulated by the Texas Department of Licensing and Registration PO Box 12157, Austin, TX 78711, 1-800-803-9202 or 512-463-6599, www.license.state.tx.us Plumbing M-13879, Rick Baskin, Texas State Board of Plumbing Examiners, PO Box 4200, Austin, TX 78765, 1-800-845-6584 4 4 TERMS AND CONDITIONS – QUOTED SERVICE & EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT PROJECTS 1. Complete Agreement Our proposal and these terms and conditions combine to form the entire agreement between H&G Systems (H&G) and our customer with respect to the matters covered herein. No other agreements, representations, warranties, or other matters, oral or written, shall be considered to bind the parties hereto, unless specifically and expressly agreed upon in writing by both parties. There are no oral agreements. By signing this document, the Customer agrees to H&G’s terms and conditions, as detailed here. 2. H&G Systems’ Scope of Work H&G shall perform all work and shall give all supervision, labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, and all other things necessary to supply the services detailed in this proposal. H&G shall not be responsible for any work associated with other components of the facility that are not related to the project, but that are noted as non-compliant during the permitting process. Unless noted in this proposal, H&G shall also not be responsible for any work associated with obtaining a certificate of occupancy (CO) for the fa cility. 3. Insurance H&G agrees to keep the following insurance during the term of the contract with limits not less than shown below and will, upon request from the Customer, supply a certificate of insurance showing the following coverage: • Commercial General Liability $2,000,000 General Aggregate • Automobile Liability $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit • Workers Compensation Statutory Limits 4. Indemnity 4.1 H&G (INDEMNITOR) WILL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CUSTOMER, AND ITS RESPECTIVE AGENTS, SUCCESSORS, ASSIGNS, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, AND EMPLOYEES (CUSTOMER PARTIES OR INDEMNITEES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS CAUSED BY ANY ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF H&G’S EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, OR REPRESENTATIVES, INCLUDING ANY CLAIM FOR THE BODILY INJURY OR DEATH OF AN EMPLOYEE OF THE INDEMNITOR, ITS AGENTS, OR ITS SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS OF ANY TIER, AND INCLUDING ANY CLAIMS CAUSED OR ARISING FROM OR ALLEGED TO BE CAUSED OR ARISING IN PART FROM THE NEGLIGENCE OF ANY CUSTOMER PARTY. IT IS EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THE INDEMNIFICATION REQUIRED HEREIN SHALL NOT EXCEED THE DEGREE OR PERCENTAGE OF NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT ATTRIBUTABLE TO INDEMNITOR. 4.2 H&G’S INDEMNITY OBLIGATION INCLUDES ANY CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INJURY TO PROPERTY OR CONTAMINATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT, WHETHER FROM POLLUTION, OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT PROSECUTED BY A GOVERNMENTAL ENTITY. 4.3 H&G’S INDEMNITY OBLIGATION IS LIMITED BY THE AMOUNT OR TYPE OF DAMAGES, COMPENSATION, OR BENEFITS AVAILABLE UNDER ANY INS URANCE POLICY CARRIED BY H&G. 4.4 SURVIVAL. THIS INDEMNITY OBLIGATION SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS CONTRACT FOR ANY REASON AND THE COMPLETION OF ALL WORK WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THIS CONTRACT. 4.5 TO THE EXTENT ANY PORTION OF THE ABOVE INDEMNITY OBLIGATIONS MAY BE FOUND BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION TO BE UNEN FORCEABLE, OR VOID AS AGAINST PUBLIC POLICY, OR OTHERWISE PROHIBITED BY LAW, THEN THE REMAINDER OF THE ABOVE INDEMNITY OBLIGATIONS SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. Nothing here, this Article 4 should be construed as a requirement of H&G to indemnify any Indemnified Parties or to supply added insured coverage for any Indemnified Parties in a manner prohibited by Chapter 151 of the Texas Insurance Code. 5. Taxes and Permits H&G shall obtain all permits, licenses, fees, and certificates of inspection necessary for the prosecution and completion of the work associated with this project . H&G shall arrange for all necessary inspections and approvals by public officials. Unless noted in this proposal, H&G shall also not be responsible for any work associated with obtaining a certificate of occu pancy (CO) for the facility. 6. Laws, Regulations and Ordinances H&G shall be bound by, and shall follow, all federal, state, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations applicable to this contract. H&G and all lower-tier subcontractors shall be duly licensed to run under the law of the applicable jurisdictions. Specifically, and without limitation, H&G and all employees and agents hereof shall follow the applicable requirements issued by the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended, all other applicable health and safety laws and regulations, and al l laws and regulations applicable to the hiring of aliens. The terms and conditions of this Subcontract shall be interpreted by the laws of the State of Texas, and venue shall be maintainable in Dallas County. 7. Payment Payment will be due within thirty days of receipt of H&G’s invoice (NET 30). All lien and/or bond rights shall remain intact until H&G has been paid in full for every invoice. The proper lien and/or bond releases will be provided after each invoice has been paid. 8. Time of Performance Upon the execution of this Agreement, H&G will go ahead with the work in a prompt and diligent manner, by the mutually agreed upon schedule that is the basis for this contract. H&G shall be entitled to added compensation for compliance with schedule amendments or damages for delays that are caused by the Customer. 9. Changes to Scope The Customer may, at any time, by written agreement with H&G, amend the scope of work associated with this contract. In this event, the Customer and H&G must agree in writing to the changes to the scope of work, changes to the contract price and/or changes to the time associated with complying with the modifications to the contract, prior to the implementation of the changes. H&G shall not be required to perform any work, including work associated with changes to the original contract scope, if any invoices are still unpaid after forty-five calendar days past their date of submission. 10. Liens After final payment, H&G shall provide to Customer a release of its liens and claims and all liens and claims of all entities giving labor and/or materials for the performance of this contract, and satisfactory evidence that there are no other liens or claims whatsoever outstanding against the work relating to this contra ct. 11. Warranty For quoted service repairs, H&G calls for its labor for a period of ninety days after the work is completed. For quoted service repairs, H&G calls for the parts for a period of one year after the work is completed. For equipment replacement projects, H&G calls for the parts and labor for a period of one year after the work is completed. 12. Disputes Unresolved disputes involving $7,500 or less may be resolved by arbitration by the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association . The prevailing party shall recover its attorney’s fees and costs associated with the arbitration. For disputes involving more than $7,500, if either party initiates litigation for the purpose of enforcing its rights under this contract, the prevailing party shall recover its attorney’s fees and court costs. 13. Delays Should H&G’s performance of this contract be delayed by any acts of the Customer, by H&G’s subcontractors or by H&G’s supplie rs, H&G shall receive a fair extension of the time and/or an increase to the contract amount for the performance of this contract. Within five (5) business days after the commencement of any delay caused by the Customer, by H&G’s subcontractors or by H&G’s suppliers, H&G shall notify the Customer in writing giving the full details of the cause or alleged delay. 14. Safety H&G shall ensure that its employees, subcontractors, and suppliers, regardless of tier, understands and agrees to follow H&G’s safety policies and procedures, as well as with all federal, state, and local codes and regulations. 15. Termination of Contract With ten (10) business days’ written notice, Customer can end this Agreement with H&G. In this event, H&G shall be entitled to reimbursement for all design and pre -construction work to said date, as well as to reimbursement for all material not yet furnished but which has already been fabricated, or for which is in the pro cess of being fabricated, or for which H&G is contractually liable to a third party, including all cancellation fees associated with the termination of any orders for materials or products. BOTH PARTIES HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT. THIS DOCUMENT CONSTITUTES THE ENTIRE CONTRACTUAL AGREEMENT AND SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR PROPOSALS AND/OR AGREEMENTS. H&G ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY UNDERSTANDING OR REPRESENTATION MADE BY ANY OF ITS OFFICERS OR AGENTS OR ANY OTHER PERSON DURING OR PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THIS CONTRACTUAL AGREEMENT UNLESS SUCH UNDERSTANDING OR REPRESENTATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY STATED HEREIN. NO PROVISIONS OF THIS CONTRACTUAL AGREEMENT MAY BE WAIVED OR CHANGED EXCEPT IN WRITING BY AN EXECUTIVE OFFICER OF H&G. Page 342 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute an amendment to a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. for the purchase of water treatment chemicals for the Community Pool in the total amount of $25,496.86. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Town of Trophy Club operates a seasonal community pool that requires regular use of water treatment chemicals to ensure safe and compliant swimming conditions for residents and guests. PVS DX, Inc., a BuyBoard vendor, supplies the facility with sodium hypochlorite (liquid chlorine), hydrochloric acid, and other chemicals necessary for daily pool operations. The Town Manager previously approved a purchase order of $18,000 for water treatment chemicals during the FY 2025 season. Since opening, the community pool has experienced higher-than-anticipated chemical usage due to mechanical challenges, extreme temperatures, and heavier-than-expected bather loads. As a result, the approved amount is insufficient to cover the facility's remaining needs. To continue providing safe and compliant water quality at the community pool, staff requests an amendment to increase the existing purchase order with PVS DX, Inc. by $7,496.86. This additional funding will ensure uninterrupted access to required water treatment chemicals through the end of the fiscal year. PVS DX, Inc. is a contracted BuyBoard vendor, allowing the Town to procure chemicals through a cooperative purchasing agreement that ensures competitive pricing and compliance with state purchasing requirements. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The current purchase order with PVS DX, Inc. totals $18,000. Staff requests an increase of $7,496.86, bringing the total amount to $25,496.86. Sufficient funds are available in the General Fund Parks Department operating budget to accommodate this request. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Purchase Change Order Request Page 343 of 522 ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute an amendment to a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. for the purchase of water treatment chemicals for the Community Pool in the total amount of $25,496.86. Page 344 of 522 Page 345 of 522 Page 346 of 522 Page 347 of 522 Page 348 of 522 Page 349 of 522 Page 350 of 522 Page 351 of 522 Page 352 of 522 Page 353 of 522 Page 354 of 522 Page 355 of 522 Page 356 of 522 Page 357 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with SiteOne Landscape Supply Holding, LLC for the purchase of irrigation and landscaping supplies in the amount of $40,000. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Parks & Recreation Department regularly purchases essential irrigation and landscaping supplies from SiteOne Landscape Supply. SiteOne offers a comprehensive selection of products that support the department's ongoing maintenance and enhancement of parks and facilities. The vendor provides high-quality, durable products— including irrigation components, fertilizers, herbicides, and other landscape materials—that ensure efficient water management and maintain healthy, visually appealing green spaces for the community. By maintaining an active purchase order with SiteOne Landscape Supply, the Parks & Recreation Department secures reliable access to these materials, ensuring continuous park upkeep and enhancing quality of life in Trophy Club. Site One Landscape is a participant in the BuyBoard Purchasing Cooperative under contract number 705-23. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: Funding for the on-demand blanket purchase agreement up to $40,000 is provided for in the FY 2026 Budget in the General Fund Parks Department property maintenance account. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. BuyBoard Vendor Info Summary ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with SiteOne Landscape Supply Holding, LLC for the purchase of irrigation and landscaping supplies in the amount of $40,000. Page 358 of 522 Vendor Contract Information Summary SiteOne Landscape SupplyVendor Monique PottsContact 2164044749Phone bids@siteone.comEmail www.siteone.comVendor Website 36-4485550TIN 1385 East 36th StreetAddress Line 1 ClevelandVendor City 44114Vendor Zip OHVendor State USAVendor Country 10Delivery Days FOB DestinationFreight Terms Net 30 DaysPayment Terms Freight prepaid by vendor and added to invoiceShipping Terms Company TruckShip Via NoDesignated Dealer YesEDGAR Received NoService-disabled Veteran Owned NoMinority Owned NoWomen Owned NoNational YesNo Foreign Terrorist Orgs YesNo Israel Boycott NoMWBE All Texas RegionsESCs All StatesStates Field and Turf Irrigation Products, Landscaping Products, and Specialty Conditioners/Soils Contract Name 705-23Contract No. 06/01/2023Effective 05/31/2026Expiration YesAccepts RFQs 9/15/2025 10:43 AM Page 359 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. for water treatment chemicals in the not-to- exceed amount of $30,000. (Chase Ellis, Director of Parks & Recreation) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Parks & Recreation Department routinely purchases essential water treatment chemicals from PVS DX, Inc. to maintain the safety and operation of the Community Pool. PVS DX supplies high-quality products—including sodium hypochlorite (liquid chlorine), hydrochloric acid, and other chemicals—necessary to maintain clean, balanced, and compliant water conditions for public use. Reliable access to these treatment chemicals is critical to sustaining safe recreational swimming and protecting the long-term integrity of pool infrastructure. By maintaining an active purchase agreement with PVS DX, the Parks Department ensures consistent availability of these materials, supporting community health and enjoyment. PVS DX, Inc. participates in the BuyBoard Purchasing Cooperative under Contract #701-23. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: Funding for the on-demand blanket purchase agreement, up to $30,000, is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the General Fund Community Pool Department chemicals account. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. BuyBoard Vendor Info Summary ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to authorize the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a purchase agreement with PVS DX, Inc. in the not-to-exceed amount of $30,000. Page 360 of 522 Vendor Contract Information Summary Petra Chemical Company Inc (formerly DCC Inc)Vendor Samantha FlowersContact 972-224-1669Phone dccsales@dcc-pools.comEmail www.dcc-pools.comVendor Website 93-3292784TIN 2929 Storey Ln.Address Line 1 DallasVendor City 75220Vendor Zip TXVendor State USAVendor Country 10Delivery Days FOB DestinationFreight Terms Net 30Payment Terms Freight prepaid by vendor and added to invoiceShipping Terms Company TruckShip Via NoDesignated Dealer YesEDGAR Received NoService-disabled Veteran Owned NoMinority Owned NoWomen Owned NoNational YesNo Foreign Terrorist Orgs YesNo Israel Boycott NoMWBE 8, 9, 10, 11, 12ESCs All StatesStates Swimming Pool Chemicals, Supplies, and EquipmentContract Name 701-23Contract No. 06/01/2023Effective 05/31/2026Expiration YesAccepts RFQs Buyboard Contract 701-23Quote Reference Number 20% Restocking on Parts or Supplies after 30 Days / No Return on Chemicals once delivery of product has been accepted by the customer Return Policy 9/15/2025 1:39 PM Page 361 of 522 Vendor Contract Information Summary 9/15/2025 1:39 PM Page 362 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary AGENDA ITEM: Consider an ordinance of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas amending Ordinance 2013-23 relating to the composition of the Board of Directors for the Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: On June 23, 2025, the Town Council discussed restructuring the Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone (TIRZ) No. 1 Board of Directors. The discussion focused on aligning the TIRZ Board with either the Town Council or the Economic Development Corporation (EDC) membership to improve efficiency and coordination with economic development initiatives. Following deliberation, the Council directed staff to prepare an ordinance restructuring the TIRZ Board to mirror the membership of the EDC Board of Directors. The proposed ordinance amends Ordinance No. 2013-23 to revise the composition of the TIRZ Board as follows: • Seven (7) members of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors, and • One (1) member appointed by Tarrant County, should the County choose to exercise its appointment authority pursuant to the Participation Agreement. If adopted, the ordinance presented in the following agenda item will amend the Participation Agreement with Tarrant County to reflect the new TIRZ Board membership. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: There is no financial impact associated with this agenda item. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the ordinance as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Ordinance Page 363 of 522 ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to approve the ordinance of the Town of Trophy Club Texas amending Ordinance 2013-23 relating to the composition of the Board of Directors for the Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). Page 364 of 522 TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 2025-XX AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS; AMENDING ORDINANCE NO. 2013-23 RELATING TO THE COMPOSITION OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS FOR REINVESTMENT ZONE NUMBER ONE, TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS (TIRZ NO. 1); PROVIDING FOR THE APPOINTMENT OF BOARD MEMBERS TO INCLUDE THE MEMBERS OF THE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION AND ONE MEMBER TO BE APPOINTED BY TARRANT COUNTY, IF EXERCISED BY THE COUNTY; PROVIDING THIS ORDINANCE IS CUMULATIVE OF ALL ORDINANCES; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SAVINGS CLAUSE; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, the Town of Trophy Club, Texas (the “Town”) is a home rule municipality acting under its charter adopted by the electorate pursuant to Article XI, Section 5 of the Texas Constitution and Chapter 9 of the Local Government Code; and WHEREAS, on August 19, 2013, the Town Council of the Town adopted Ordinance No. 2013-23 creating “Reinvestment Zone Number One, Town of Trophy Club, Texas” (the “Zone”), and establishing a board of directors for the Zone (the “TIRZ Board”) pursuant to Texas Tax Code Ch. 311 (the “TIRZ Act”); and WHEREAS, Section 311.009(a) of the TIRZ Act provides that the board of directors of a reinvestment zone must consist of at least five (5) and not more than fifteen (15) members, and allows the governing body of the municipality to appoint not more than ten (10) directors to the TIRZ Board; and WHEREAS, the Town Council desires to streamline operations and promote consistency by aligning the membership of the TIRZ Board with that of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors, subject to the requirements of the TIRZ Act; and WHEREAS, on April 8th, 2014, the Town entered into an agreement with Tarrant County to participate in the Zone (the “Participation Agreement”), which authorizes Tarrant County to appoint one (1) member to the TIRZ Board; and WHEREAS, the Town Council is authorized by the TIRZ Act and this ordinance to increase membership on the TIRZ Board from five (5) members to eight (8) members; and WHEREAS, the Town Council further finds that Tarrant County, as a participating taxing unit, may continue to appoint one (1) member to the TIRZ Board pursuant to the Participation Agreement and the TIRZ Act. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, THAT: Page 365 of 522 ORDINANCE NO. 2025-XX PAGE 2 SECTION 1. INCORPORATION OF PREMISES All of the premises and recitals above are true and correct and are hereby incorporated in the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2. AMENDMENTS Section 3. “Zone Board of Directors” is hereby amended and replaced in its entirety to read as follows: “(a) Membership. A board of directors for the Zone (the “Board”) is hereby established and shall consist of up to eight (8) members. The members of the Board shall be: Seven (7) members of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors, as appointed and serving pursuant to Chapter 505 of the Texas Local Government Code, and the Town Council may also appoint other individuals eligible under Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code; and One (1) member appointed by Tarrant County, should the County choose to exercise its appointment authority in accordance with the Participation Agreement and Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code. (b) All members of the Board shall serve for staggered terms of two (2) years. The Town Council shall appoint a chairman from among the members in accordance with Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code. The Board may elect a vice- chairman to preside in the absence of the chairman or when there is a vacancy in the office of chairman. The board may elect other officers as it considers appropriate. (c) The Board shall make recommendations to the Town Council regarding the administration and operation of the Zone. The Board and shall perform all duties imposed upon it by Chapter 311 of the Texas Tax Code, including powers of a municipality under Chapter 380, Local Government Code. The Board shall not have authority to issue bonds, impose taxes or fees, exercise the power of eminent domain, or give final approval to the Zone’s final project and financing plan without approval by the Town Council.” SECTION 3. CUMULATIVE This Ordinance shall be cumulative of all other provisions of ordinances of the Town, except where the provisions of this Ordinance are in direct conflict with the Page 366 of 522 ORDINANCE NO. 2025-XX PAGE 3 provisions of such ordinances, in which event the conflicting provisions of such ordinances are hereby repealed. SECTION 4. SEVERABILITY It is hereby declared to be the intention of the Town Council that the sections, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, and phrases of this Ordinance are severable, and if any section, paragraph, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance shall be declared unconstitutional by the valid judgment or decree of any court of competent jurisdiction, such unconstitutionality shall not affect any of the remaining sections, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, or phrases of this Ordinance; since the same would have been enacted by the Town Council without the incorporation in this Ordinance of any such unconstitutional section, paragraph, sentence, clause, or phrase. SECTION 5. SAVINGS All rights and remedies of the Town are expressly saved as to any and all violations of the provisions of any other ordinances affecting the subject matter of this Ordinance within the Town which have accrued at the time of the effective date of this Ordinance; and, as to such accrued violations and all pending litigation, both civil and criminal, whether pending in court or not, under such ordinances, same shall not be affected by this Ordinance, but may be prosecuted until final disposition by the courts. SECTION 6. EFFECTIVE DATE This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after its date of passage and it is so ordained. PASSED AND APPROVED by the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas, this th day of , 2025. Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor ATTEST: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary Page 367 of 522 ORDINANCE NO. 2025-XX PAGE 4 APPROVED AS TO FORM: Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Page 368 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary AGENDA ITEM: Consider Amendment No. 2 to the participation agreement between the Town of Trophy Club and Tarrant County for Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). (Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: This item relates directly to the preceding agenda item amending the membership of the TIRZ Board. In 2014, the Town of Trophy Club and Tarrant County (County) entered into a Participation Agreement for Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). Under the agreement, the County committed to contribute 60% of its tax increment, up to a maximum of $1,571,011, to the TIRZ Fund. The County has paid $215,915.10 in contributions to date. The agreement was amended in 2016 to clarify the tax increment base. Amendment No. 2 updates Section 4.4 of the Participation Agreement with Tarrant County to reflect the following changes: • The TIRZ Board will consist of up to eight (8) members. • Seven (7) members will be appointed from the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors under Chapter 505 of the Texas Local Government Code. • One (1) member will be appointed by Tarrant County under the Participation Agreement and Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: There is no financial impact associated with this agenda item. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Amendment No. 2 ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to approve Amendment No. 2 to the Page 369 of 522 participation agreement between the Town of Trophy Club and Tarrant County for Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One (TIRZ No. 1). Page 370 of 522 Page 1 of 3 AMENDMENT NO. 2 TO TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB AND TARRANT COUNTY, TEXAS AGREEMENT TO PARTICIPATE IN TAX INCREMENT REINVESTMENT ZONE NUMBER ONE, TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS This Amendment No. 2 to Town of Trophy Club and Tarrant County, Texas, Agreement to Participate in Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One, Town of Trophy Club, Texas (“Amendment”) is entered into by and between the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home rule municipality organized under the laws of the State of Texas (the “Town” or “City”) and Tarrant County, Texas (the “County” or “Taxing Unit”). The Town and County are referred to collectively as the “Parties” or individually as a “Party.” The Town and County hereby agree that the following statements are true and correct and constitute the basis upon which the Town and the County have entered into this Amendment: A. On August 19, 2013, the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas (the “Council”) adopted Town Ordinance No. 2013-23 establishing a board of directors for the Zone (the “TIRZ Board”) and designating certain real property generally located at Trophy Wood Drive and Highway 114 as Tax Increment Reinvestment Zone Number One, Town of Trophy Club, Texas (the “Zone”). Town Ordinance No. 2013-23, as amended, is hereby incorporated into this Amendment by reference for all purposes; and B. On or about April 8, 2014, the Town and County entered into an Agreement (the “Participation Agreement”) under which County agreed to deposit sixty percent (60%) of the County’s Tax Increment, up to a maximum of $1,571,011, into the Tax Increment Fund for the Zone, as specifically provided in that Participation Agreement; and C. On or about June 14, 2016, the Parties approved Amendment No. 1 to the Participation Agreement (“Amendment No. 1”) to correctly define the Tax Increment Base for the Zone; and D. The Town desires to streamline operations and promote administrative consistency for the TIRZ Board by aligning the membership of the TIRZ Board with that of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors; and E. Section 311.009(a) of the Texas Tax Code provides that the board of directors of a reinvestment zone must consist of at least five (5) and not more than fifteen (15) members, and allows the governing body of the municipality to appoint not more than ten (10) directors to the TIRZ Board; and F. On September 22, 2025, the Town Council adopted Ordinance No. 2025-____, to increase the membership of the TIRZ Board to eight (8) members, which includes seven (7) members of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Page 371 of 522 Page 2 of 3 Directors, as appointed and serving pursuant to Chapter 505 of the Texas Local Government Code, or other individuals eligible under Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code, and one (1) member appointed by the County; and G. The Parties desire to amend the Agreement, as amended by Amendment No. 1, as herein set forth in this Amendment No. 2. NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the conditions set forth herein, the sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the Town and the County do hereby contract, covenant, and agree as follows: 1. Recitals. The Parties hereby agree that the recitals set forth above are true and correct and form the basis upon which they have entered into the Agreement, as amended by that Amendment No. 1, and this Amendment No. 2. The recitals in the Agreement are incorporated into this Amendment No. 2 as if fully set forth herein, except as amended by this Amendment No. 2, and the defined terms in the Agreement shall have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Agreement, unless otherwise defined herein. 2. Amendment. Section 4.4. TIRZ Board Membership, of the Agreement is hereby removed and replaced in its entirety to provide as follows: “Pursuant to Section 3 of Town Ordinance· No. 2013-23, creating the Zone, as amended by Town Ordinance· No. 2025- during the term of the Zone, the TIRZ Board shall consist of up to eight (8) members. The TIRZ Board members shall consist of seven (7) members of the Town’s Economic Development Corporation Board of Directors, as appointed and serving pursuant to Chapter 505 of the Texas Local Government Code, and the Town Council may also appoint other individuals eligible under Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code. One (1) member shall be appointed by Tarrant County, should the County choose to exercise its appointment authority in accordance with the Interlocal Participation Agreement and Section 311.009 of the Texas Tax Code. All members shall serve for staggered terms of two (2) years each. The Town Council shall appoint a chairman from among the members. The TIRZ Board may elect a vice- chairman, and other officers as needed. The TIRZ Board shall make recommendations to the Town Council regarding the administration and operation of the Zone and shall perform all duties imposed upon it by Chapter 311 of the Texas Tax Code, including powers of a municipality under Chapter 380, Local Government Code. The TIRZ Board shall not have authority to issue bonds, impose taxes or fees, exercise the power of eminent domain, or give final approval to the Zone’s final project and financing plan without approval by the Town Council.” 3. This Amendment No. 2 contains the final written expression of the Town and the County with respect to the subject matter hereof. Except as amended herein, all other terms and conditions of the Agreement, as amended by Amendment No. 1, shall remain in full force and effect. This Amendment No. 2 may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument. The execution of this Amendment No. 2 may be accomplished by facsimile or electronic signatures and shall be deemed fully executed upon the exchange among the parties of signed facsimile or electronic copies of this Amendment No. 2. Page 372 of 522 Page 3 of 3 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have caused this Amendment No. 2 to be executed by their duly authorized officers and to be effective as of the last date set forth below. AGREED AND EXECUTED as of the last date indicated below: TARRANT COUNTY TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, (County): TEXAS (Town): By: By: Tim O’Hare, County Judge Brandon Wright, Town Manager Date: Date: ATTEST: ATTEST: By: By: Deputy County Clerk Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: APPROVED AS TO FORM: By: By: Assistant Criminal District Attorney Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Page 373 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Brandon Wright, Town Manager AGENDA ITEM: Consider a resolution of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas finding that Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC’s application to change rates within the Town should be denied. (Brandon Wright, Town Manager.) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: On June 26, 2025, Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC (“Oncor” or “Company”) filed an application with cities retaining original jurisdiction seeking to increase system-wide transmission and distribution rates by about $834 million or approximately 13% over present revenues. The Company asked the Town to approve a 12.3% increase in residential rates and a 51.0% increase in street lighting rates. If approved, the impact of this requested increase on an average residential customer would be about $7.90 per month. In a prior Town action, Oncor’s rate request was suspended from taking effect for 90 days, the fullest extent permissible under the law. This time period has permitted the Town, through its participation with the Steering Committee of Cities Served by Oncor (“Steering Committee”), to determine that the proposed rate increase is unreasonable. Consistent with the recommendations of the experts engaged by the Steering Committee, Oncor’s request for a rate increase should be denied. Accordingly, the purpose of the resolution is to deny the rate change application proposed by Oncor. Once the resolution is adopted, Oncor will have 30 days to appeal the decision to the Public Utility Commission of Texas (“PUC”) where the appeal will be consolidated with Oncor’s filing (PUC Docket No. 58306) currently pending at the PUC. All cities with original jurisdiction are required to adopt the resolution by October 29, 2025. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: There is no financial impact associated with this agenda item. Approving the resolution prevents Oncor's rate increase from becoming effective and engages the Steering Committee of Cities Served by Oncor to review and negotiate more reasonable terms. LEGAL REVIEW: The Town is using documents created by the Steering Committee of Cities Served by Oncor, of which the Town of Trophy Club is a member, to suspend the Oncor rate filing request. The attached resolution as created and reviewed by Lloyd Gosselink Rochelle & Townsend, P.C. Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has also reviewed the resolution as to form and legality. Page 374 of 522 ATTACHMENTS: 1. Resolution ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to approve the resolution of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas finding that Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC’s application to change rates within the Town should be denied. Page 375 of 522 1669/70/9094087 1 RESOLUTION NO. 2025-XX A RESOLUTION OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS FINDING THAT ONCOR ELECTRIC DELIVERY COMPANY LLC’S APPLICATION TO CHANGE RATES WITHIN THE TOWN SHOULD BE DENIED; FINDING THAT THE TOWN’S REASONABLE RATE CASE EXPENSES SHALL BE REIMBURSED BY THE COMPANY; FINDING THAT THE MEETING AT WHICH THIS RESOLUTION IS PASSED IS OPEN TO THE PUBLIC AS REQUIRED BY LAW; REQUIRING NOTICE OF THIS RESOLUTION TO THE COMPANY AND LEGAL COUNSEL WHEREAS, the Town of Trophy Club, Texas (“Town”) is an electric utility customer of Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC (“Oncor” or “Company”), and a regulatory authority with an interest in the rates and charges of Oncor; and WHEREAS, the Town is a member of the Steering Committee of Cities Served by Oncor (“Steering Committee”), a coalition of similarly situated cities served by Oncor that have joined together to efficiently and cost effectively review and respond to electric issues affecting rates charged in Oncor’s service area; and WHEREAS, on or about June 26, 2025, Oncor filed with the Town an application to increase system-wide transmission and distribution rates by about $834 million or approximately 13% over present revenues, and the Company asks the Town to approve a 12.3% increase in residential rates and a 51.0% increase in street lighting rates; and WHEREAS, the Steering Committee is coordinating its review of Oncor’s application and working with the designated attorneys and consultants to resolve issues in the Company’s filing; and WHEREAS, through review of Oncor’s application, the Steering Committee’s consultants determined that Oncor’s proposed rates are excessive; and WHEREAS, the Steering Committee’s members and attorneys recommend that members deny Oncor’s application; and NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS: Section 1. That the rates proposed by Oncor to be recovered through its electric rates charged to customers located within the Town limits, are hereby found to be unreasonable and shall be denied. Page 376 of 522 1669/70/9094087 2 Section 2. That the Company shall continue to charge its existing rates to customers within the Town. Section 3. That the Town’s reasonable rate case expenses shall be reimbursed in full by Oncor. Section 4. That it is hereby officially found and determined that the meeting at which this Resolution is passed is open to the public as required by law and the public notice of the time, place, and purpose of said meeting was given as required. Section 5. That a copy of this Resolution shall be sent to Oncor Electric Delivery Company LLC, 1616 Woodall Rodgers Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75202 and to Thomas Brocato, Counsel to the Steering Committee, at Lloyd Gosselink Rochelle & Townsend, P.C., 816 Congress Ave., Suite 1900, Austin, Texas 78701. PASSED AND APPROVED this 22ND day of SEPTEMBER 2025. _________________________________ Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor ATTEST: __________________________________ Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: ___________________________________ Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Page 377 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: April Duvall, Director of Finance AGENDA ITEM: Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance accepting and approving an update of the Service and Assessment Plan and an updated Assessment Roll for the Town of Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (PID) in compliance with Chapter 372 Public Improvement District Assessment Act of the Texas Local Government Code. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: Each year, the Town Council is required to review and approve the updated Service and Assessment Plan (SAP) and the Assessment Roll for Public Improvement District No. 1 (PID No. 1), located within The Highlands at Trophy Club. Revenue bonds were originally issued in 2007 to fund the acquisition, construction, and maintenance of public infrastructure improvements within the PID. These bonds were refinanced in 2015 and again in 2025, resulting in reduced interest rates, cost savings for property owners, and an accelerated payoff schedule—shortening the final maturity from 2033 to 2032. All authorized public improvements outlined in the PID Infrastructure Plan have been completed, and the associated funds have been fully expended in accordance with the approved scope of work. This ordinance adopts the annual Service Plan Update and Assessment Roll, includes the required findings of fact, and establishes an effective date. This annual action is mandated by the PID Infrastructure Plan and reflects no material changes from the plan approved in the prior year. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The Service and Assessment Plan (SAP) outlines the authorized improvements to be provided by the PID and details the associated costs, indebtedness, and method for assessing properties within the district. The 2025 update includes an assessment roll that identifies each parcel based on the assessment method outlined in the amended SAP. No new parcel subdivisions have been added since the last update in 2024. Page 378 of 522 The original PID indebtedness from the 2015 Bonds, to be repaid from assessments, is $26,154,979. In May 2025, all outstanding bonds were refunded through the issuance of the Town of Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 Special Assessment Revenue Refunding Bonds, Series 2025, in the aggregate principal amount of $12,905,000. Assessments on any property may be paid in full at any time. If not paid in full, assessments are payable in annual installments of principal and interest, the last of which is scheduled for the 2032 tax year. The 2025 annual installments will be billed by the Town in 2025 and become delinquent on February 1, 2026. Below is a chart with the annual installment amount per lot type for the current year. LOT TYPE ANNUAL INSTALLMENT Type 1 $2,460.01 Type 2 $1,869.61 Type 3 $1,525.21 Type 4 $1,303.81 Type 5 $1,082.41 LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the ordinance as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Presentation 2. Ordinance 3. Exhibit A: Service and Assessment Plan Update and Updated Assessment Roll 4. Notice of Public Hearing ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council conduct the public hearing and move to approve the ordinance accepting and approving an update of the Service and Assessment Plan and an updated Assessment Roll for the Town of Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (PID) in compliance with Chapter 372 Public Improvement District Assessment Act of the Texas Local Government Code. Page 379 of 522 PARKS ROADS TRAILSLANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION WATER DISTRIBUTION LINESDRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS FIXED ASSESSMENT: FIRE SERVICES ASSESSMENT: Beginning in October 2025, PID residents will no longer receive a separate ESD assessment. Instead, Fire services are now assessed through your annual property taxes via the Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1, consistent with how other Trophy Club residents pay for this service. Property owners in the Public Improvement District (PID) pay assessments to fund public improvements within the District. In 2007, the Town issued $27.5 million in Series 2007 Bonds to finance projects such as thoroughfare improvements, water and wastewater systems, an elevated water tank, trails, open spaces, and public parks. In April 2025, the Town Council approved refinancing this debt, generating more than $4 million in total savings for PID residents over the life of the loan. This refinance provides an average reduction of about 5.2% in annual assessments per lot type and shortens the overall repayment term by one year, ending in 2032. Beginning October 1, 2025, the annual assessment will range from $1,301.80 to $2,456.22, depending on lot size, and is expected to remain relatively flat through 2032. For information about individual payoff amounts, please contact DTA at (949) 955-1500. In 2007 the Town of Trophy Club created the first municipally bonded Public Improvement District (PID) in the State of Texas. The District was created principally to finance certain public improvement projects for the remaining portions of the residential component of the master planned development known as “The Highlands”. A Service and Assessment Plan was then established setting forth a plan to cover the costs for improvement projects and services which would be assessed against the properties within the District for payment of the special assessments. www.TROPHYCLUB.ORG/PID PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT ASSESSMENTS: The PID District includes approximately 609 acres or 23% of the corporate limits located within the Town of Trophy Club. The District is generally located in the North and Northwest areas of Town. For a more precise location of the PID’s boundaries or to find out if your home is located in the PID, contact us at (682)237-2900. PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT BOUNDARIES: Page 380 of 522 TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB ORDINANCE NO. 2025-13 AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, ACCEPTING AND APPROVING AN UPDATE OF THE SERVICE AND ASSESSMENT PLAN AND AN UPDATED ASSESSMENT ROLL FOR THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT NO. 1 (“PID”) IN COMPLIANCE WITH CHAPTER 372 (AUTHORIZED IMPROVEMENT ASSESSMENT); MAKING AND ADOPTING FINDINGS; PROVIDING FOR THE INCORPORATION OF FINDINGS; ACCEPTING AND APPROVING THE ANNUAL SERVICE AND ASSESSMENT PLAN UPDATE AND UPDATED ASSESSMENT ROLL FOR THE PID ATTACHED AS EXHIBIT “A” HERETO; PROVIDING A CUMULATIVE REPEALER CLAUSE; PROVIDING SEVERABILITY; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, the Town of Trophy Club (the “Town”) is a home rule municipality acting under its charter adopted by the electorate pursuant to Article XI, Section 5 of the Texas Constitution and Chapter 9 of the Local Government Code; and WHEREAS, on May 7, 2007, after due notice, the Town Council held a public hearing in the manner required by law on the advisability of the public improvements and services described in the petition as required by Sec. 372.009 of the Public Improvement District Assessment Act, Chapter 372, Texas Local Government Code, as amended (the “PID Act”) and made the findings required by Sec. 372.009(b) of the PID Act and, by Resolution No. 2007-08 adopted by a majority of the members of the Town Council, authorized the PID in accordance with its finding as to the advisability of the public improvements and services; and WHEREAS, on November 5, 2007, after notice and a public hearing conducted in the manner required by law, the Town Council adopted Ordinance No. 2007-29, which was supplemented by Ordinance No. 2009-24 adopted by the Town Council on September 28, 2009 (as supplemented, the “Assessment Ordinance”); and WHEREAS, on December 13, 2007, the Town Council issued special assessment revenue bonds secured by the assessments levied pursuant to the Assessment Ordinance (the “2007 Bonds”); and WHEREAS, on December 22, 2015, the Town Council issued special assessment revenue refunding bonds (the “2015 Bonds”), to refund in full the 2007 Bonds, such 2015 Bonds being secured by the assessments levied pursuant to the Assessment Ordinance; and WHEREAS, on May 29, 2025, the Town Council issued special assessment revenue refunding bonds (the “2025 Bonds”), to refund in full the 2015 Bonds, such 2025 Bonds being secured by the assessments levied pursuant to the Assessment Ordinance; and WHEREAS, Section 372.013 of the PID Act and the Service and Assessment Plan require that the Service and Assessment Plan and Assessment Roll be annually reviewed and updated; and Page 381 of 522 ORD 2025-13 Page 2 of 4 WHEREAS, pursuant to the issuance of the 2025 Bonds, the Service and Assessment Plan should be updated to reflect the issuance of the 2025 Bonds; and WHEREAS, the Annual Service and Assessment Plan Update and updated Assessment Roll attached as Exhibit “A” hereto conform the original Assessment Roll to the principal and interest payment schedule required for the 2025 Bonds, thereby reducing the amounts listed on the original Assessment Roll, and update the Assessment Roll to reflect prepayments, property divisions and changes to the budget allocation for District public improvements that occur during the year, if any; and WHEREAS, the Town Council now desires to proceed with the adoption of this Ordinance which supplements the Assessment Ordinance and approves and adopts the Annual Service and Assessment Plan Update and the Updated Assessment Roll attached thereto, in conformity with the requirements of the PID Act, for the fiscal year beginning October 1, 2025, and ending September 30, 2026. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS: SECTION 1. INCORPORATION OF FINDINGS The findings and determinations set forth in the preambles above are incorporated herein for all purposes and are hereby adopted. SECTION 2. ANNUAL SERVICE AND ASSESSMENT PLAN UPDATE AND UPDATED ASSESSMENT ROLL The Annual Service and Assessment Plan Update and Updated Assessment Roll attached hereto as Exhibit “A” are hereby accepted and approved in compliance with the PID Act in all matters as required by law. SECTION 3. CUMULATIVE REPEALER That this Ordinance shall be cumulative of all other Ordinances and shall not repeal any of the provisions of such Ordinances except for those instances where there are direct conflicts with the provisions of this Ordinance. Ordinances or parts thereof in force at the time this Ordinance shall take effect and that are inconsistent with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent that they are inconsistent with this Ordinance. Provided however, that any complaint, action, claim, or lawsuit which has been initiated or has arisen under or pursuant to such Ordinance on the date of adoption of this Ordinance shall continue to be governed by the provisions of that Ordinance and for that purpose the Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. Page 382 of 522 ORD 2025-13 Page 3 of 4 SECTION 4. SEVERABILITY If any provision, section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance, or the application of same to any person or set of circumstances is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, void, or invalid, the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance or the application to other persons or sets of circumstances shall not be affected thereby, it being the intent of the Town Council that no portion hereof, or provision or regulation contained herein shall become inoperative or fail by reason of any unconstitutionality, voidness, or invalidity of any other portion hereof, and all provisions of this Ordinance are declared to be severable for that purpose. SECTION 5. EFFECTIVE DATE This Ordinance shall take effect, and the levy of the Assessments, and the provisions and terms of the Service and Assessment Plan and Assessment Role shall be and become effective upon passage and execution hereof in accordance with the law. ADOPTED, PASSED, and APPROVED by the Town Council, by a vote of _______ members voting “for”, _______ members voting “against”, and with _______ absentees on this 22nd day of September 2025. Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor Town of Trophy Club, Texas [SEAL] ATTEST: APPROVED AS TO FORM: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Town of Trophy Club, Texas Town of Trophy Club, Texas Page 383 of 522 Exhibit “A” Annual Service and Assessment Plan Update and Updated Assessment Roll Page 384 of 522 Page 385 of 522 Page 386 of 522 Page 387 of 522 Page 388 of 522 Page 389 of 522 Page 390 of 522 Page 391 of 522 Page 392 of 522 Page 393 of 522 Page 394 of 522 Page 395 of 522 Page 396 of 522 Page 397 of 522 Page 398 of 522 Page 399 of 522 2025 Lot Type: Principal Interest Net Debt Service 2025 $1,540.70 $860.82 $2,401.52 $54.70 $2,456.22 $13,712.24 2026 $1,790.40 $608.58 $2,398.98 $55.52 $2,454.50 $12,171.54 2027 $1,880.72 $519.06 $2,399.77 $56.35 $2,456.12 $10,381.14 2028 $1,973.16 $425.02 $2,398.18 $57.20 $2,455.38 $8,500.42 2029 $2,070.91 $326.36 $2,397.28 $58.06 $2,455.34 $6,527.26 2030 $2,173.98 $222.82 $2,396.80 $58.93 $2,455.73 $4,456.35 2031 $2,282.36 $114.12 $2,396.48 $59.81 $2,456.29 $2,282.36 Total $13,712.24 $3,076.78 $16,789.02 $400.57 $17,189.59 (a) Tax Year 2025 corresponds to Bond Year 2026. Tax Year 2025 Annual Installments will become due by January 31, 2026. (b) Reflects the issuance of the 2025 Bonds. (c) Subject to change. Assessment Balance Tax Year (a) Assessments (b) Collections Costs Annual Installment (c) Tax Year: Exhibit A Annual Installments By Lot Type 1 Page 400 of 522 Page 401 of 522 2025 Lot Type: Principal Interest Net Debt Service 2025 $1,170.93 $654.23 $1,825.16 $41.57 $1,866.73 $10,421.30 2026 $1,360.70 $462.52 $1,823.22 $42.20 $1,865.42 $9,250.37 2027 $1,429.35 $394.48 $1,823.83 $42.82 $1,866.65 $7,889.66 2028 $1,499.60 $323.02 $1,822.62 $43.47 $1,866.09 $6,460.32 2029 $1,573.90 $248.04 $1,821.93 $44.12 $1,866.06 $4,960.72 2030 $1,652.23 $169.34 $1,821.57 $44.79 $1,866.36 $3,386.82 2031 $1,734.60 $86.73 $1,821.33 $45.46 $1,866.78 $1,734.60 Total $10,421.30 $2,338.35 $12,759.65 $304.43 $13,064.09 (a) Tax Year 2025 corresponds to Bond Year 2026. Tax Year 2025 Annual Installments will become due by January 31, 2026. (b) Reflects the issuance of the 2025 Bonds. (c) Subject to change. Assessment Balance Tax Year (a) Assessments (b) Collections Costs Annual Installment (c) Tax Year: Exhibit A Annual Installments By Lot Type 2 Page 402 of 522 Page 403 of 522 2025 Lot Type: Principal Interest Net Debt Service 2025 $955.23 $533.71 $1,488.95 $33.91 $1,522.86 $8,501.59 2026 $1,110.05 $377.32 $1,487.37 $34.42 $1,521.79 $7,546.35 2027 $1,166.05 $321.82 $1,487.86 $34.94 $1,522.80 $6,436.31 2028 $1,223.36 $263.51 $1,486.87 $35.46 $1,522.34 $5,270.26 2029 $1,283.97 $202.35 $1,486.31 $36.00 $1,522.31 $4,046.90 2030 $1,347.87 $138.15 $1,486.02 $36.54 $1,522.55 $2,762.93 2031 $1,415.06 $70.75 $1,485.82 $37.08 $1,522.90 $1,415.06 Total $8,501.59 $1,907.60 $10,409.19 $248.35 $10,657.54 (a) Tax Year 2025 corresponds to Bond Year 2026. Tax Year 2025 Annual Installments will become due by January 31, 2026. (b) Reflects the issuance of the 2025 Bonds. (c) Subject to change. Assessment Balance Tax Year (a) Assessments (b) Collections Costs Annual Installment (c) Tax Year: Exhibit A Annual Installments By Lot Type 3 Page 404 of 522 Page 405 of 522 2025 Lot Type: Principal Interest Net Debt Service 2025 $816.57 $456.24 $1,272.81 $28.99 $1,301.80 $7,267.49 2026 $948.91 $322.55 $1,271.46 $29.43 $1,300.89 $6,450.92 2027 $996.78 $275.10 $1,271.88 $29.86 $1,301.74 $5,502.00 2028 $1,045.77 $225.26 $1,271.04 $30.32 $1,301.35 $4,505.22 2029 $1,097.58 $172.97 $1,270.56 $30.77 $1,301.33 $3,459.45 2030 $1,152.21 $118.09 $1,270.30 $31.23 $1,301.54 $2,361.86 2031 $1,209.65 $60.48 $1,270.13 $31.70 $1,301.84 $1,209.65 Total $7,267.49 $1,630.69 $8,898.18 $212.30 $9,110.48 (a) Tax Year 2025 corresponds to Bond Year 2026. Tax Year 2025 Annual Installments will become due by January 31, 2026. (b) Reflects the issuance of the 2025 Bonds. (c) Subject to change. Assessment Balance Tax Year (a) Assessments (b) Collections Costs Annual Installment (c) Tax Year: Exhibit A Annual Installments By Lot Type 4 Page 406 of 522 Page 407 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.014(A) Notice (Required Before Contract Execution) NOTICE OF OBLIGATIONS RELATED TO PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT A person who proposes to sell or otherwise convey real property that is located in a public improvement district established under Subchapter A, Chapter 372, Local Government Code (except for public improvement districts described under Section 372.005), or Chapter 382, Local Government Code, shall first give to the purchaser of the property this written notice, signed by the seller. For the purposes of this notice, a contract for the purchase and sale of real property having a performance period of less than six months is considered a sale requiring the notice set forth below. This Notice requirement does not apply to a transfer: 1) Under a court order or foreclosure; 2) By a trustee in bankruptcy; 3) To a mortgagee by a mortgagor or successor in interest or to a beneficiary of a deed of trust by a trustor or successor in interest; 4) By a mortgagee or a beneficiary under a deed of trust who has acquired the land at a sale conducted under a power of sale under a deed of trust or a sale under a court-ordered foreclosure or has acquired the land by a deed in lieu of foreclosure; 5) By a fiduciary in the course of the administration of a decedent’s estate, guardianship, conservatorship, or trust; 6) From one co-owner to another co-owner of an undivided interest in the real property; 7) To or from a government entity; or, 8) Of only a mineral interest, leasehold interest, or security interest. The following notice shall be given to the prospective purchaser before the execution of a binding contract of purchase and sale, either separately or as an addendum or paragraph of a purchase contract. In the event a contract of purchase and sale is entered into without the seller having provided the required notice, the purchases, subject to certain exception, is entitled to terminate the contract. A separate copy of this notice shall be executed by the seller and the purchase and must be filed in the real property records of the county in which the property is located at the closing of the purchase and sale of the property. Page 408 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.014(A) Notice (Required Before Contract Execution) NOTICE OF OBLIGATION TO PAY PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT ASSESSMENT TO TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT NO. 1 CONCERNING THE FOLLOWING PROPERTY ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ As the purchaser of the real property described above, you are obligated to pay assessments to Trophy Club, Texas, for the costs of a portion of a public improvement or services project (the "Authorized Improvements") undertaken for the benefit of the property within Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (the "District") created under Subchapter A, Chapter 372, Local Government Code. AN ASSESSMENT HAS BEEN LEVIED AGAINST YOUR PROPERTY FOR THE AUTHORIZED IMPROVEMENTS, WHICH MAY BE PAID IN FULL AT ANY TIME. IF THE ASSESSMENT IS NOT PAID IN FULL, IT WILL BE DUE AND PAYABLE IN ANNUAL INSTALLMENTS THAT WILL VARY FROM YEAR TO YEAR DEPENDING ON THE AMOUNT OF INTEREST PAID, COLLECTION COSTS, ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS, AND DELINQUENCY COSTS. The exact amount of the assessment may be obtained from Trophy Club. The exact amount of each annual installment will be approved each year by Trophy Club Town Council in the annual service plan update for the district. More information about the assessments, including the amounts and due dates, may be obtained from Trophy Club. Your failure to pay any assessment or any annual installment may result in penalties and interest being added to what you owe or in a lien on and the foreclosure of your property. Page 409 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.014(A) Notice (Required Before Contract Execution) The undersigned purchaser acknowledges receipt of this notice before the effective date of a binding contract for the purchase of the real property at the address described above. Buyer (Print Name) Signature Date Buyer (Print Name) Signature The undersigned seller acknowledges providing this notice to the potential purchaser before the effective date of a binding contract for the purchase of the real property at the address described above. Seller (Print Name) Signature Date Seller (Print Name) Signature Date Page 410 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.0143 Notice (Required At Closing And Must Be Recorded In Denton County Deed Of Records) AFTER RECORDING RETURN TO: ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ NOTICE OF OBLIGATION TO PAY PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT ASSESSMENT TO TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT NO. 1 CONCERNING THE FOLLOWING PROPERTY ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ As the purchaser of the real property described above, you are obligated to pay assessments to Trophy Club, Texas, for the costs of a portion of a public improvement or services project (the "Authorized Improvements") undertaken for the benefit of the property within Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (the "District") created under Subchapter A, Chapter 372, Local Government Code. AN ASSESSMENT HAS BEEN LEVIED AGAINST YOUR PROPERTY FOR THE AUTHORIZED IMPROVEMENTS, WHICH MAY BE PAID IN FULL AT ANY TIME. IF THE ASSESSMENT IS NOT PAID IN FULL, IT WILL BE DUE AND PAYABLE IN ANNUAL INSTALLMENTS THAT WILL VARY FROM YEAR TO YEAR DEPENDING ON THE AMOUNT OF INTEREST PAID, COLLECTION COSTS, ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS, AND DELINQUENCY COSTS. The exact amount of the assessment may be obtained from Trophy Club. The exact amount of each annual installment will be approved each year by Trophy Club Town Council in the annual service plan update for the district. More information about the assessments, including the amounts and due dates, may be obtained from Trophy Club. Your failure to pay any assessment or any annual installment may result in penalties and interest being added to what you owe or in a lien on and the foreclosure of your property. Page 411 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.0143 Notice (Required At Closing And Must Be Recorded In Denton County Deed Of Records) The undersigned purchaser acknowledges receipt of this notice before the effective date of a binding contract for the purchase of the real property at the address described above. The undersigned purchaser acknowledged the receipt of this notice including the current information required by Section 5.0143, Texas Property Code, as amended. Buyer (Print Name) Signature Date Buyer (Print Name) Signature STATE OF TEXAS § § COUNTY OF ______________ § The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me by ___________________ and __________________, known to me to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the foregoing instrument and acknowledged to me that he or she executed the same for the purposes therein expressed. Given under my hand and seal of office on this ______________, 20___ Notary Public, State of Texas Page 412 of 522 Texas Property Code Section 5.0143 Notice (Required At Closing And Must Be Recorded In Denton County Deed Of Records) The undersigned seller acknowledges providing a separate copy of the notice required by Section 5.014 of the Texas Property Code including the current information required by Section 5.0143, Texas Property Code, as amended, at the closing of the purchase of the real property at the address above. Seller (Print Name) Signature Date Seller (Print Name) Signature STATE OF TEXAS § § COUNTY OF ______________ § The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me by ___________________ and __________________, known to me to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the foregoing instrument and acknowledged to me that he or she executed the same for the purposes therein expressed. Given under my hand and seal of office on this ______________, 20___ Notary Public, State of Texas Page 413 of 522 Page 414 of 522 Principal Interest Net Debt Service 2025 $1,450,000.00 $810,147.22 $2,260,147.22 $51,477.00 $2,311,624.22 $12,905,000.00 2026 $1,685,000.00 $572,750.00 $2,257,750.00 $52,255.00 $2,310,005.00 $11,455,000.00 2027 $1,770,000.00 $488,500.00 $2,258,500.00 $53,030.00 $2,311,530.00 $9,770,000.00 2028 $1,857,000.00 $400,000.00 $2,257,000.00 $53,832.00 $2,310,832.00 $8,000,000.00 2029 $1,949,000.00 $307,150.00 $2,256,150.00 $54,640.00 $2,310,790.00 $6,143,000.00 2030 $2,046,000.00 $209,700.00 $2,255,700.00 $55,463.00 $2,311,163.00 $4,194,000.00 2031 $2,148,000.00 $107,400.00 $2,255,400.00 $56,291.00 $2,311,691.00 $2,148,000.00 Total $12,905,000.00 $2,895,647.22 $15,800,647.22 $376,988.00 $16,177,635.22 (a) Tax Year 2025 corresponds to Bond Year 2026. Tax Year 2025 Annual Installments will become due by January 31, 2026. (b) Reflects the issuance of the 2025 Bonds. (c) Subject to change. Aggregate Annual Installments for All Parcels Tax Year (a) Assessments (b) Collections Costs Annual Installment (c) Assessment Balance Page 415 of 522 Page 416 of 522 COMMERCIAL RECORDERPROOF EMAIL ADDRESS: recorder@flash.net Deadline for submitting legal notices is 11:00 (am) the business day before TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARINGSNOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT two public hearings will be conducted by the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas on the 22nd day of September, 2025 at 7:00 p.m. at the Municipal Building at 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Texas 76262. The public hearings will be as follows: Public Hearing for Annual Service & Assessment Plan and updated Assessment Roll for the District to con-sider proposed assessments to be levied against the as-sessable property within THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DIS-TRICT NO. 1 (the “District”) pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 372 of the Texas Local Government Code, as amended.The District was created in 2007 in order to finance certain public improvements, including thoroughfare im-provements, water distribu-tion system improvements, elevated water tank improve-ments, wastewater collection systems, trail systems, open spaces, landscaping, irriga-tion, screening walls, neigh-borhood entry features, public parks, and park drainage im-provements. The costs of the improvements were original-ly financed in 2007 through PID Bonds in the amount of $27,500,000. The PID Bonds have been refunded twice, most recently being refund-ed down to the amount of $12,905,000. Public Hearing to consider Elimination of the Autho- rized Services – Emergency Services District AssessmentBeginning in October 2025, PID residents will no longer receive a separate ESD assess-ment. Instead, Fire Services are now billed through the annual property taxes via the Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1. The boundaries of the Dis-trict are described as follows:The District includes ap-proximately 609.683 acres located within the corporate limits of the Town of Trophy Club, Denton County, Texas. The District is generally lo-cated to the north of Oakmont Drive, Oak Hill Drive and the Quorum Condominiums, east of the Lakes Subdivision and Parkview Drive, south of the Corp of Engineers Property and west of the Town’s east-ern town limits. The District is more particularly described by metes and bounds and such description is available for inspection at Town Hall, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Texas 76262.All written or oral objections will be considered at the pub-lic hearing.A copy of the Service and As-sessment Plan and proposed Assessment Roll, which in-cludes the assessments to be levied against each parcel in the District, is available for public inspection at the office of the Town Secretary, Town of Trophy Club, at 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Tex-as 76262.9-12 PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Page 417 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: April Duvall, Director of Finance AGENDA ITEM: Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance finding that annual special assessments for emergency services in Public Improvement District No. 1 (The Highlands at Trophy Club) no longer provide a special benefit to the property; providing that no further levy of assessments for emergency services will be made in accordance with Chapter 372 of the Texas Local Government Code; repealing the Service and Assessment Plan; and providing an effective date. (April Duvall, Director of Finance) i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: In 2007, the Town of Trophy Club created Public Improvement District No. 1 (PID No. 1), known as The Highlands at Trophy Club, to finance and provide certain public improvements and services, including emergency services, through annual special assessments. Each year since 2008, the Town Council has conducted the required annual review and adopted a Service and Assessment Plan for PID No. 1. For the FY 2026 Budget cycle, a significant change impacts this process. The Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1 (District) expanded its boundaries in FY 2025 to include the entire area previously served by the Emergency Services District (ESD) within PID No. 1. As a result, a separate ESD assessment is no longer necessary. Fire service funding is now fully consolidated under the District's property tax collections, creating a uniform and simplified funding structure for emergency services across the Town. Accordingly, the proposed ordinance repeals the Service and Assessment Plan as it relates to emergency services, discontinues future emergency service assessments in PID No. 1, and confirms that no further levy or collection will occur after the effective date. The ordinance also provides for continued collection of any delinquent assessments due prior to adoption, affirms the applicability of the Texas Tax Code and PID Act to those collections, and ensures severability and cumulative effect with prior ordinances. Adoption of this ordinance will terminate the emergency services assessment component of PID No. 1, aligning the Town’s practices with the expanded service provision of the District. Page 418 of 522 BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The repeal of the emergency services assessment in PID No. 1 has no negative fiscal impact to the Town’s General Fund. Historically, the costs of fire and emergency services within the PID were funded through the annual special assessment on property owners. Previously, the Emergency Services District (ESD) within PID No. 1 funded $572,690 in fire service expenditures, representing PID No. 1’s share of fire protection costs. With the FY 2026 Budget cycle, those costs are now fully consolidated under the District's property tax collections. This change eliminates the need for a separate Emergency Services District (ESD) assessment while ensuring continued funding for fire services through the District's tax rate. For property owners in PID No. 1, the fiscal impact is a shift from a special assessment to District property taxes, creating a more consistent and uniform funding structure across the Town. The Town will continue to collect any delinquent assessments due prior to the effective date of the ordinance, but no new emergency services assessments will be levied moving forward. While the emergency services assessment will be removed for tax year 2025 collections, beginning October 1, 2025, PID No. 1 residents will continue to see the Trophy Club PID 1 assessment on their property tax bills, which is unrelated to the provision of fire services. The assessment for Trophy Club PID 1 is to repay infrastructure costs for the development of homes within PID No. 1. LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the ordinance as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Presentation 2. Ordinance 3. Notice of Public Hearing ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council conduct the public hearing and move to approve the ordinance finding that annual special assessments for emergency services in Public Improvement District No. 1 (The Highlands at Trophy Club) no longer provide a special benefit to the property; providing that no further levy of assessments for emergency services will be made in accordance with Chapter 372 of the Texas Local Government Code; repealing the Service and Assessment Plan; and providing an effective date. Page 419 of 522 PARKS ROADS TRAILSLANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION WATER DISTRIBUTION LINESDRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS FIXED ASSESSMENT: FIRE SERVICES ASSESSMENT: Beginning in October 2025, PID residents will no longer receive a separate ESD assessment. Instead, Fire services are now assessed through your annual property taxes via the Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1, consistent with how other Trophy Club residents pay for this service. Property owners in the Public Improvement District (PID) pay assessments to fund public improvements within the District. In 2007, the Town issued $27.5 million in Series 2007 Bonds to finance projects such as thoroughfare improvements, water and wastewater systems, an elevated water tank, trails, open spaces, and public parks. In April 2025, the Town Council approved refinancing this debt, generating more than $4 million in total savings for PID residents over the life of the loan. This refinance provides an average reduction of about 5.2% in annual assessments per lot type and shortens the overall repayment term by one year, ending in 2032. Beginning October 1, 2025, the annual assessment will range from $1,301.80 to $2,456.22, depending on lot size, and is expected to remain relatively flat through 2032. For information about individual payoff amounts, please contact DTA at (949) 955-1500. In 2007 the Town of Trophy Club created the first municipally bonded Public Improvement District (PID) in the State of Texas. The District was created principally to finance certain public improvement projects for the remaining portions of the residential component of the master planned development known as “The Highlands”. A Service and Assessment Plan was then established setting forth a plan to cover the costs for improvement projects and services which would be assessed against the properties within the District for payment of the special assessments. www.TROPHYCLUB.ORG/PID PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT ASSESSMENTS: The PID District includes approximately 609 acres or 23% of the corporate limits located within the Town of Trophy Club. The District is generally located in the North and Northwest areas of Town. For a more precise location of the PID’s boundaries or to find out if your home is located in the PID, contact us at (682)237-2900. PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT BOUNDARIES: Page 420 of 522 TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 2025-xx AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, FINDING THAT ANNUAL SPECIAL ASSESSMENTS (THE “ASSESSMENTS”) FOR EMERGENCY SERVICES (“EMERGENCY SERVICES”) COMPRISING THE AUTHORIZED SERVICES NO LONGER PROVIDE A SPECIAL BENEFIT TO THE PROPERTY IN THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT NO. 1 (THE HIGHLANDS AT TROPHY CLUB) (THE “DISTRICT”); PROVIDING THAT THERE SHALL BE NO LEVY OF ASSESSMENTS AGAINST PROPERTY WITHIN THE DISTRICT FOR EMERGENCY SERVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 372, TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE, AS AMENDED; REPEALING THE SERVICE AND ASSESSMENT PLAN; PROVIDING A CUMULATIVE REPEALER CLAUSE; PROVIDING FOR SEVERABILITY; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, the Town of Trophy Club (the “Town”) is a home rule municipality acting under its charter adopted by the electorate pursuant to Article XI, Section 5 of the Texas Constitution and Chapter 9 of the Local Government Code; and WHEREAS, on March 16, 2007, a petition was submitted and filed with the Town Secretary of the Town (the “Town Secretary”) pursuant to the Public Improvement District Assessment Act, Chapter 372, Texas Local Government Code (the “PID Act”), requesting the creation of a public improvement district over a portion of the area of the Town to be known as The Town of Trophy Club Public Improvement District No. 1 (the “District”); and WHEREAS, the petition contained the signatures of the owners of taxable property representing more than fifty percent of the appraised value of taxable real property liable for assessment within the District, as determined by the then current ad valorem tax rolls of the Denton Central Appraisal District and the signatures of property owners who own taxable real property that constitutes more than fifty percent of the area of all taxable property that is liable for assessment by the District; and WHEREAS, on May 7, 2007, after due notice, the Town Council of the Town (the “Town Council”) held the public hearing in the manner required by law on the advisability of the public improvements and services described in the petition as required by Sec. 372.009 of the PID Act and made the findings required by Sec. 372.009(b) of the PID Act and, by Resolution No. 2007-08 adopted by a majority of the members of the Town Council, authorized the District in accordance with its finding as to the advisability of the public improvements and services; and WHEREAS, on May 18, 2007, the Town published notice of its authorization of the District in the Trophy Club Times, a newspaper of general circulation in the Town; and Page 421 of 522 WHEREAS, no written protests of the District from any owners of record of property within the District were filed with the Town Secretary within 20 days after May 18, 2007; and WHEREAS, on May 21, 2007, the Council adopted a resolution directing the filing of a proposed assessment roll, and directing related action; and WHEREAS, the Town has conducted annual reviews from 2008 through 2024 as provided in the PID Act and has annually adopted ordinances approving a Service and Assessment Plan for Authorized Services and an Assessment Roll for District (collectively referred to as the “Plan”); and WHEREAS, on October 14th, 2024, the Town approved Resolution No. 2024-21, which authorized expansion of the boundaries of Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1 (the “MUD”), to include the entire corporate limits of the Town; and WHEREAS, on October 16th, 2024, the MUD approved Resolution No. 2024-1016, accepting the Town’s consent to expand its boundaries to include the entire corporate limits of the Town; and WHEREAS, after the expansion of the MUD’s boundaries, the annual special assessments (the “Assessments”) for the emergency services (the “Emergency Services”) comprising the Authorized Services are no longer needed and do not provide a special benefit to the property in the District; and WHEREAS, the Town Council finds and determines that the Plan is no longer needed, and as of the effective date of this Ordinance no Assessments for Emergency Services shall be levied against property in the District; and WHEREAS, notice was published, and a public hearing was held on September 22, 2025, in accordance with the PID Act to discuss the advisability and necessity of the Assessment for Emergency Services; and WHEREAS, the Town Council closed the hearing, and after considering all written and documentary evidence presented at the hearing, including all written comments and statements filed with the Town, determined to proceed with the adoption of this Ordinance in conformity with the requirements of the PID Act. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1. The findings and determinations set forth in the preamble above are hereby fully incorporated into this Ordinance by reference for all purposes. Page 422 of 522 SECTION 2. FINDINGS The Town Council hereby finds, determines, and ordains, as follows: (a) The Assessments for Emergency Services and the apportionment of the costs of the same pursuant to the Plan are no longer advisable or necessary; and (b) The provisions of the Plan prior to the adoption of this Ordinance relating to the Assessments and the due and delinquency dates for the Assessments, interest, and penalties on delinquent Assessments, and procedures in connection with the imposition and collection of the Assessments, shall remain in full force and effect as it relates to the collection of Assessments for Emergency Services due and owing prior to the effective date of this Ordinance; and (c) Except as provided in (b) above and Sections 4 through 7 below, the Plan is hereby repealed and shall no longer serve as the Plan for the District as it relates to the Emergency Services; and (d) A written notice of the date, hour, place and subject to this meeting of the Town Council was posted at a place convenient to the public for the time required by law preceding this meeting, as required by the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, Texas Government Code, as amended, and that this meeting has been open to the public as required by law at all times during which this Ordinance and the subject matter hereof has been discussed, considered, and formally acted upon. SECTION 3. LEVY AND PAYMENT OF ASSESSMENTS FOR COSTS OF EMERGENCY SERVICES The Town Council hereby finds and determines that as of the effective date of this Ordinance, there shall be no levy or payment of an Assessment related to Emergency Services on any tract of property located within the District. SECTION 4. APPOINTMENT OF ADMINISTRATOR DTA Public Finance, Inc. (“DTA) (www.FinanceDTA.com) is hereby appointed and designated as the Administrator of the Plan for Emergency Services levied prior to the effective date of this Ordinance. The Administrator shall perform the duties of the Administrator described in the Plan and in this Ordinance, as applicable. In addition to other applicable costs of collection, whether legally authorized by contract or other District document, the Administrator’s fees, charges, and expenses for providing such service shall constitute Collection Costs. Page 423 of 522 SECTION 5. PENALTIES AND INTEREST ON DELINQUENT ASSESSMENTS Delinquent Assessments that are due and owing prior to the effective date of this Ordinance, shall continue to be subject to the penalties, interest, procedures, and foreclosure sales set forth in the Plan. The Assessments shall have lien priority as specified in the PID Act and the Plan. SECTION 6. APPLICABILITY OF TAX CODE To the extent not inconsistent with this Ordinance, and not inconsistent with the PID Act or the other laws governing public improvement districts, the provisions of the Texas Tax Code shall be applicable to the imposition and collection of Assessments by the Town. SECTION 7. CUMULATIVE REPEALER This Ordinance shall be cumulative of all other Ordinances and shall not repeal any of the provisions of such Ordinances except for those instances where there are direct conflicts with the provisions of this Ordinance. Ordinances or parts thereof in force at the time this Ordinance shall take effect and that are inconsistent with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent that they are inconsistent with this Ordinance. Provided however, that any complaint, action, claim, or lawsuit which has been initiated or has arisen under or pursuant to such Ordinance on the date of adoption of this Ordinance shall continue to be governed by the provisions of that Ordinance and for that purpose the Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 8. SEVERABILITY If any provision, section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance, or the application of same to any person or set of circumstances is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, void, or invalid, the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance or the application to other persons or sets of circumstances shall not be affected thereby, it being the intent of the Town Council that no portion hereof, or provision or regulation contained herein shall become inoperative or fail by reason of any unconstitutionality, voidness, or invalidity of any other portion hereof, and all provisions of this Ordinance are declared to be severable for that purpose. SECTION 9. EFFECTIVE DATE This Ordinance shall take effect upon passage and execution hereof. Page 424 of 522 ADOPTED, PASSED, and APPROVED by the Town Council, by a vote of _____ members voting “for” and members voting “against” and with absentee, on this 22nd day of September 2025. Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor ATTEST: [SEAL] Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary APPROVED TO AS FORM: Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Page 425 of 522 COMMERCIAL RECORDERPROOF EMAIL ADDRESS: recorder@flash.net Deadline for submitting legal notices is 11:00 (am) the business day before TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARINGSNOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT two public hearings will be conducted by the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas on the 22nd day of September, 2025 at 7:00 p.m. at the Municipal Building at 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Texas 76262. The public hearings will be as follows: Public Hearing for Annual Service & Assessment Plan and updated Assessment Roll for the District to con-sider proposed assessments to be levied against the as-sessable property within THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DIS-TRICT NO. 1 (the “District”) pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 372 of the Texas Local Government Code, as amended.The District was created in 2007 in order to finance certain public improvements, including thoroughfare im-provements, water distribu-tion system improvements, elevated water tank improve-ments, wastewater collection systems, trail systems, open spaces, landscaping, irriga-tion, screening walls, neigh-borhood entry features, public parks, and park drainage im-provements. The costs of the improvements were original-ly financed in 2007 through PID Bonds in the amount of $27,500,000. The PID Bonds have been refunded twice, most recently being refund-ed down to the amount of $12,905,000. Public Hearing to consider Elimination of the Autho- rized Services – Emergency Services District AssessmentBeginning in October 2025, PID residents will no longer receive a separate ESD assess-ment. Instead, Fire Services are now billed through the annual property taxes via the Trophy Club Municipal Utility District No. 1. The boundaries of the Dis-trict are described as follows:The District includes ap-proximately 609.683 acres located within the corporate limits of the Town of Trophy Club, Denton County, Texas. The District is generally lo-cated to the north of Oakmont Drive, Oak Hill Drive and the Quorum Condominiums, east of the Lakes Subdivision and Parkview Drive, south of the Corp of Engineers Property and west of the Town’s east-ern town limits. The District is more particularly described by metes and bounds and such description is available for inspection at Town Hall, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Texas 76262.All written or oral objections will be considered at the pub-lic hearing.A copy of the Service and As-sessment Plan and proposed Assessment Roll, which in-cludes the assessments to be levied against each parcel in the District, is available for public inspection at the office of the Town Secretary, Town of Trophy Club, at 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, Tex-as 76262.9-12 PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC NOTICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Page 426 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Tamara Smith, MSL, Assistant to the Town Manager AGENDA ITEM: Conduct a public hearing and consider an ordinance amending Sections 14.02.052, "Definitions," Section 14.02.103, "Use Table," and Division 5, "Supplementary District Regulations," of Article 2, "Zoning Ordinance," of Chapter 14, "Zoning," of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, by updating regulations pertaining to Nursing Facilities, Assisted Living Facilities, and Community Homes and establishing for the registration of such operations. (Tamara Smith, Assistant to the Town Manager) i. Conduct Public Hearing ii. Consider Ordinance BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: As part of the FY 2025 Business Plan, Goal #5 focuses on establishing best practices for permitting and regulating senior group homes and boarding homes. This effort includes developing recommendations for potential ordinance improvements to enhance Trophy Club's reputation as a premier neighborhood community. Under the Town's current ordinance, Convalescent and Group Homes are not state-regulated or licensed, posing legal risks to the Town. To mitigate this risk, proposed ordinance amendments would incorporate Assisted Living Facilities and Community Homes, both state- licensed and regulated, while establishing occupancy limits for group homes to enhance compliance. A reasonable accommodation request process will further protect the Town from ADA-related lawsuits. Assisted Living Facilities currently fall under the Convalescent Home category in the Town’s zoning ordinances, but updates are recommended to align with State regulations. While licensing is governed by state law, the Town can strengthen oversight by implementing registration and certificate of occupancy requirements. To ensure compliance, the Town may require annual inspections, report violations to the Texas Department of Aging and Disability Services (DADS), and revoke occupancy certificates for non- compliance. Additionally, a legal framework is being developed to incorporate reasonable accommodation procedures, ensure compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and mitigate potential discrimination claims related to group homes and addiction treatment Page 427 of 522 facilities. Considerations also include occupancy limits, community home requirements, and the renewal process for reasonable accommodations. Next steps include updating the Town’s zoning ordinance to align with state laws, implementing registration and inspection processes, and ensuring zoning regulations remain legally sound. A work session was conducted with the Town Council in April and with the Planning & Zoning Commission and Zoning Board of Adjustments in July. A resident input session was held in August. Recommendations from the two work sessions and the resident input session included: • Regulating on-site and off-site parking. • Establishing distance requirements between community homes. • Researching ownership requirements and whether an operator can lease the property. • Providing notice of reasonable accommodation request. • Restricting ALFs/Community homes from operating in hazardous areas. • Disposing of medical waste. The Planning & Zoning Commission recommended approval of the attached ordinance at its September 4, 2025 meeting. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: Notice of the public hearing was distributed as required by the Town of Trophy Club Zoning Ordinance and State Law. The Planning & Zoning Commission approved the ordinance changes (5-1) at its September 4, 2025 meeting. FISCAL IMPACT: Additional licensing and inspection requirements for assisted living facilities, community homes, and group homes will increase Town expenditures. The Town plans to outsource inspections to a third-party vendor, with license and inspection fees applied to applicants to offset those costs. An administrative fee will be added to cover the time required to prepare information and other necessary departmental resources. Below is a schedule of fees proposed with the attached ordinance. Permit Application Fee: $300 Legal Review: Actual Cost Inspection: $150 Reinspection: $150 for each additional reinspection Use of Outside Consultants for Inspections: Actual cost LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the ordinance as to form and legality. Page 428 of 522 ATTACHMENTS: 1. Presentation 2. Ordinance ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council conduct the public hearing and move to approve the ordinance amending Sections 14.02.052, "Definitions," Section 14.02.103, "Use Table," and Division 5, "Supplementary District Regulations," of Article 2, "Zoning Ordinance," of Chapter 14, "Zoning," of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, by updating regulations pertaining to Nursing Facilities, Assisted Living Facilities, and Community Homes and establishing for the registration of such operations. Page 429 of 522 Town Council Regular Meeting Monday, September 22, 2025 Page 430 of 522 Feedback Page 431 of 522 Feedback Town Council P&Z/ZBA Resident Input Parking X X X State Agency Reporting X X Property Improvements X X Resident Background Checks-*Town Attorney advised against X Inspection Protocols X Community Notifications X Property Restrictions/Legal Review X Public Education X Permitting X Requiring Annual Renewal X Trash & Medical Waste X Page 432 of 522 Ordinance Changes Page 433 of 522 Ordinance: •Assisted Living Facilities (ALFs) and Nursing Facilities must use off-street parking and may only use on-street parking directly adjacent to the property’s front lot line. •Community Homes cannot keep more vehicles than the number of bedrooms, either on-site or on adjacent right-of-way, per Texas Human Resources Code §123.009. Parking Page 434 of 522 Ordinance: •Town must report violations of state law to the Texas Department of Aging and Disability Services (DADS) or other licensing agency. State Agency Reporting Page 435 of 522 Ordinance: •ALFs/Community Homes must comply with subdivision and zoning regulations for residential areas. •Any non-residential improvements require a reasonable accommodation.   Property Improvements Page 436 of 522 Ordinance: •Annual registration required with the Community Development Department, with detailed information (owner/operator, licenses, emergency contacts, etc.). •Inspections may occur at registration, renewal, CO application, or upon complaints. •Violations classified as life safety (24 hrs), critical (72 hrs), or non- critical (30 days). •Failure to comply may result in CO revocation. Inspection Protocols Page 437 of 522 Ordinance: •Reasonable accommodation requests may be filed with the Community Development Department. •If granted, the Town may notify property owners within 200 feet of the community home and provide them a copy of the regulations. •Appeals go to the Zoning Board of Adjustment (ZBA). Community Notifications Page 438 of 522 Ordinance: •Community Homes may not be established within ½ mile of another Community Home, as required by Texas Human Resources Code §123.008. Property Restrictions/Legal Review Page 439 of 522 Public education will be provided after approval through a dedicated webpage on the Trophy Club website, which will include the reasonable accommodation document, registration materials, and additional resources. Public Education Page 440 of 522 Ordinance: •Facilities must comply with Town trash regulations. •Facilities generating medical waste must comply with state disposal regulations (26 TAC 553.104(k)), and failure is both a local ordinance violation and reportable to the state. Trash/Medical Waste Page 441 of 522 social media | email | website Page 442 of 522 TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 2024-XX AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, AMENDING SECTION 14.02.052, “DEFINITIONS,” SECTION 14.02.103, “USE TABLE,” AND DIVISION 5, “SUPPLEMENTARY DISTRICT REGULATIONS,” OF ARTICLE 2, “ZONING ORDINANCE,” OF CHAPTER 14, “ZONING,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES, TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, BY UPDATING REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO NURSING FACILITIES, ASSISTED LIVING FACILITIES, AND COMMUNITY HOMES AND ESTABLISHING FOR THE REGISTRATION OF SUCH OPERATIONS; PROVIDING THAT THIS ORDINANCE SHALL BE CUMULATIVE OF ALL ORDINANCES; PROVIDING A SAVINGS CLAUSE; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; PROVIDING A PENALTY; PROVIDING FOR PUBLICATION; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, the Town of Trophy Club, Texas (the “Town”) is a home rule municipality acting under its charter adopted by the electorate pursuant to Article XI, Section 5 of the Texas Constitution and Chapter 9 of the Local Government Code; and WHEREAS, the Town Council is authorized and empowered by law, in accordance with Chapter 211 of the Texas Local Government Code, to regulate land use, and property development within the Town for the public health, safety, and general welfare; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has previously adopted regulations governing the nursing, rest, and convalescent homes and homes for the developmentally disabled; and WHEREAS, the Town Council desires to update the Town’s regulations of such operations in order to align with current state law governing nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, and community homes, and to provide for the registration and inspection of such operations; and WHEREAS, after public notice was given in compliance with State law and a public hearing was conducted, and after considering the information submitted at the public hearing and all other relevant information and materials, the Planning and Zoning Commission of the Town has recommended to the Town Council the adoption of this Ordinance; and WHEREAS, after complying with all legal notices, requirements, and conditions, a public hearing was held before Town Council on _________________, at which the Town Council considered the information submitted at the public hearing and all other relevant information and materials. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS, THAT: Page 443 of 522 SECTION 1. The above and foregoing premises are true and correct and are incorporated herein and made a part hereof for all purposes. SECTION 2. Section 14.02.052, “General definitions,” of Division 2, “Definitions,” of Article 2, “Zoning Ordinance,” of Chapter 14, “Zoning,” of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, is hereby amended by deleting the definitions of “Convalescent home” and “Group home for the disabled” and by adding the following new definitions, inserted alphabetically to read as follows: “Assisted living facility. A facility that furnishes food and shelter and provides personal care and services pursuant to Chapter 247 of the Texas Health and Safety Code. Community home. A community-based residential home, as defined by Texas Human Resources Code Chapter 123, that is operated by: a) the Department of Aging and Disability Services; b) a community center organized under Subchapter A, Chapter 534, Texas Health and Safety Code, that provides services to persons with disabilities; c) an entity subject to the Texas Nonprofit Corporation Law as described by Section 1.008(d), Business Organizations Code; d) an entity certified by the Department of Aging and Disability Services as a provider under the ICF-IID medical assistance program; or e) an assisted living facility licensed under Chapter 247, Health and Safety Code, provided that the exterior structure retains compatibility with the surrounding residential dwellings. Nursing facility. Convalescent and nursing facilities that provide services pursuant to Chapter 242 of the Texas Health and Safety Code.” SECTION 3. Subsection (a), “Residential,” of Section 14.02.103, “Use table,” of Division 3, “Establishment of Districts,” of Article 2, “Zoning Ordinance,” of Chapter 14, “Zoning,” of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, is hereby amended by deleting the use classifications for “Home for developmentally disabled” and “Nursing, rest and convalescent home” and adding the following new use classifications, inserted alphabetically to read as follows: Page 444 of 522 “ Permitted Uses District Classifications R- 15 R- 12 R- 11 R- 10 R- 9 R- 8 R- FV R- TT R- OH R- OHP R- S MH * * * NS (a) Residential Assisted living facility P Community home P P P P P P P P P P P P Nursing facility P ” SECTION 4. Division 5, “Supplementary District Regulations,” of Article 2, “Zoning Ordinance,” of Chapter 14, “Zoning,” of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, is hereby amended by adding a new Section 14.02.263, “Nursing Facilities, Assisted Living Facilities, and Community Homes,” to read as follows: “14.02.263 Nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, and community homes. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to establish safeguards to protect the life, health, safety, and property of the occupants of nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, or community homes and the general welfare of the public by developing procedures to enforce minimum standards and to provide equitable and practical criminal, administrative, and civil remedies for violations of this section. (b) Definitions. Unless specified in this section, all terms used herein shall have the meaning assigned by section 14.02.052 of this code. (1) Certificate of occupancy. A certificate issued by the town in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, or codes authorizing occupancy of a building. (2) Operator. The owner, manager, or other responsible party tasked with managing a property as a nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home, whether an individual or an entity. Page 445 of 522 (3) Life safety violation. A violation of the most recently adopted editions of the Building Code or International Property Maintenance Code as adopted by the town, the town charter, the Code of Ordinances, or other applicable local, state, or federal law that represents an imminent threat of death or injury to persons on the premises of a nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home. (4) Critical violation. A violation of the most recently adopted editions of the Building Code or International Property Maintenance Code as adopted by the town, the town charter, the Code of Ordinances, or other applicable local, state, or federal law that is capable of causing or contributing to injury or illness of persons on the premises of a nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home. (5) Non-critical violation. A violation of the most recently adopted editions of the Building Code or International Property Maintenance Code as adopted by the town, the town charter, the Code of Ordinances, or other applicable local, state, or federal law that is not considered a life safety or critical violation. (c) Applicability and Administration. (1) This chapter shall apply to all nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, and community homes located in the town which are now in existence, or which may hereafter be constructed or converted from other uses. (2) The community development department is authorized to administer and enforce the provisions of this section and the town’s building standards regulations. (3) The community development department shall have the authority to render interpretations of this section and to adopt policies and procedures to clarify the application of its provisions. (d) Registration. (1) No nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home shall be used or occupied until the operator has obtained a certificate of occupancy in accordance with this code. (2) An operator that operates a nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home must register with the town’s community development department on an annual basis. Such registration is valid from the date that the application is approved for a period of one (1) year. (3) The operator of a nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home that is constructed after the effective date of this section shall register within 30 days after obtaining its certificate of occupancy, and annually thereafter. Page 446 of 522 (4) The registration shall be on a form prescribed by the town, shall be accompanied by the fee identified in the town’s fee schedule, and shall contain the following information: (A) The operating name, physical address, and business address for the nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home; (B) The owner name, phone number, email address, physical address, business address, and, if applicable, type of business entity that owns the nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home; (C) To the extent applicable, the names, addresses, email addresses, and telephone numbers of the property manager, resident manager, registered agent, and all federal, state, and local funding agencies; (D) To the extent applicable, all federal, state, and/or local licenses, applications for licenses, and/or inspection reports related to the operations of the nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home; (E) The names and physical addresses of designated employees or authorized representatives who shall be assigned to respond to emergency conditions, to include fires, natural disasters, floods, burst pipes, collapse hazard, violent crime, and other similar conditions, and a telephone number where said employees can be contacted during any 24-hour period. (F) The total number of rooms and/or sleeping spaces; (G) If the property is owned by a corporation, limited liability company, partnership, limited partnership, trust or real estate investment trust, the name and physical address of a duly authorized agent for the entity; and (H) If the property is not owned by the applicant or entity intending to own and/or operate the nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home, a notarized statement from the property owner consenting to the proposed operations to be conducted at the property. (e) Inspections and Violations. The town may conduct inspections to ensure compliance with minimum building standards and health and safety regulations in accordance with the following provisions. All inspections shall be subject to the fees identified in the town fee schedule. (1) Inspections may be conducted upon filing of a new or renewal registration, upon application for or to verify compliance with a certificate of occupancy, Page 447 of 522 and upon reports of code violations, including complaints filed with the town, which may result in further periodic or follow-up inspections; (2) Inspections may be conducted of the following areas: (A) All building exteriors, including landscaping and screening features; (B) All public areas; (C) Unoccupied dwelling units; and (D) Occupied dwelling units upon the consent of the occupant or the operator or, if necessary, when subject to a warrant issued by a court of competent jurisdiction. (3) In the event an inspection identifies violations of minimum building standards and health and safety regulations, the following provisions shall apply: (A) When an inspection is made at a community home or assisted living facility and a violation is found to exist, a notice of violation will be prepared by the town. The notice of violation shall be deemed delivered when a copy of the notice: (i) Is delivered in person to the operator; or (ii) Two days after the copy of the notice of violation is deposited with the U.S. Postal Service and addressed to the landlord, owner, or property manager, with proper postage affixed. (B) Upon receiving a notice of violation, the operator shall timely correct all violations identified in a notice of violation, mitigate safety threats arising from the violations immediately, and make repairs within a reasonable period of time, as identified herein. Conditions creating life safety threats must remain secured from occupants until all repairs are completed. (4) In addition to other authority granted by this section, the town has all rights and authority granted by Article 18.05 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure. Inspections shall comply with all federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and ordinances. (5) When considering a violation created by a tenant, the town may consider the timeliness of the operator’s response to the violation, actions taken by the operator to address a tenant’s activities that may have caused the violation, and actions taken by the operator to prevent or reduce similar violations in the future. Page 448 of 522 (6) Operators shall have an opportunity to correct violations subject to the following timelines. The time to correct a violation may be extended at the town’s discretion upon a showing of good cause and identification of a corrective action plan with targets for satisfactory progression toward compliance. (A) A life safety violation shall be corrected within 24 hours of the issuance of the notice of violation; (B) A critical violation shall be corrected within 72 hours of the issuance of the notice of violation; and (C) A non-critical violation shall be corrected within 30 days of the issuance of a notice of violation. (7) Failure to timely correct violations in accordance with this section may result in the revocation of a certificate of occupancy. (8) The town shall report all violations of applicable state law to the Department of Aging and Disability Services. (f) Parking Regulations. (1) An assisted living facility and/or nursing facility subject to this article, other than a community home, must provide adequate parking in accordance with the town’s subdivision ordinance and other applicable regulations. Additionally, parking is restricted to the number of off-street parking spaces associated with the facility structure and to on-street parking immediately adjacent to the property’s front lot line. All motor vehicles are further subject to the parking regulations contained in chapter 12 of the code. (2) A community home subject to this article may not keep, for the use of the residents of the home, motor vehicles in numbers that exceed the number of bedrooms in the home either on the premises of the home or on a public right-of-way adjacent to the home, in accordance with Section 123.009 of the Texas Human Resources Code. (g) Waste Disposal Regulations. (1) A nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home subject to this article shall comply with all applicable town requirements for solid waste disposal. (2) Additionally, any nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home producing medical waste must dispose of such waste in accordance with all applicable state regulations for such disposal. (h) Compatibility with Residential Areas; Location Requirements. Page 449 of 522 (1) A community home, including an assisted living facility that retains compatibility with surrounding residential dwellings, is subject to the subdivision and zoning regulations contained in chapters 10 and 14 of the code. In order to construct improvements or operate a use not consistent with said regulations, a community home may apply for a reasonable accommodation in accordance with this chapter, if applicable. (2) In accordance with Section 123.008 of the Texas Human Resources Code, a community home may not be established within one-half mile of an existing community home. (i) Reasonable Accommodations. The provisions in this chapter governing the operation of community homes shall not be construed to limit a person’s right to request a reasonable accommodation on the basis of a disability. A person requesting a reasonable accommodation from this ordinance on the basis of a disability may file a request for reasonable accommodation with the community development department. (1) A reasonable accommodation request may be made by any person with a disability; the person’s representative; a developer; or a provider of housing for individuals with disabilities. The request shall state the reason for the accommodation and the basis for the request and demonstrate that the reasonable accommodation is requested on the basis of disability and is both reasonable and necessary to ensure equal opportunity for individuals with disabilities to obtain housing in accordance with the Fair Housing Act. (2) If the reasonable accommodation request demonstrates the qualifications set forth in subsection (1) above and the requested accommodation would not fundamentally alter the town’s land use and zoning patterns or disproportionately impact the surrounding area, the town shall grant the reasonable accommodation request. If the town determines that a different reasonable accommodation would provide equal opportunity as described in subsection (1) above, the town may offer such alternative reasonable accommodation. (3) A decision of the town regarding a reasonable accommodation request may be appealed to the town’s zoning board of adjustment in accordance with the procedures outlined in Section 14.02.405 of this code. (4) Following the approval of a reasonable accommodation for a community home in a residential district, the town may notify the owners of property located within two hundred feet (200’) of the subject property that a community home is located at the subject property. Such notification shall include a copy of this section’s regulations. (j) Reporting Requirement. For any nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home subject to state licensure, the town shall report to the any applicable state licensing authority any nursing facility, assisted living facility, or community home Page 450 of 522 that the town finds: (1) Is established or operating in the town without a state license; (2) Poses an immediate threat to the health and safety of one or more resident(s) of the assisted living facility; or (3) Is otherwise violating a provision of Chapters 242 or 247 of the Texas Health and Safety Code, as amended; Chapter 123 of the Texas Human Resources Code, as amended; or any rule, regulation, or standard governing nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, or community homes promulgated in accordance with said statutes. (k) Enforcement. (1) Criminal enforcement. A violation of this chapter is a misdemeanor punishable by a fine not to exceed $2,000 in accordance with this code. Each occurrence of a violation or each day that a violation continues shall constitute a separate offense. The failure to perform an act required by this chapter is a violation of this chapter. (2) Civil enforcement. The town may enforce this chapter by pursuing all civil remedies to which it is entitled by law, to include filing suit and recovering civil penalties pursuant to Chapter 54 of the Texas Local Government Code. The town may also institute suit to recover the cost of any actual damages incurred by the town, and any costs of response, remediation, abatement, and restoration incurred by the town as allowed under state or federal laws or at common law.” SECTION 5. Section A-1.003, “Community development department,” of Article 1.000, “General Provisions,” of Appendix A, “Fee Schedule,” of the Code of Ordinances, Town of Trophy Club, Texas, is hereby amended by adding a new Subsection (hh), “Nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, and community homes,” to read as follows: “(hh) Nursing facilities, assisted living facilities, and community homes: (1) Permit application: $300. (2) Legal review: Actual cost. (3) Inspection: $150. (4) Reinspection: $150.00 per each additional reinspection. (5) For use of outside consultants for inspections: Actual cost.” Page 451 of 522 SECTION 6. This Ordinance shall be cumulative of all other provisions of ordinances of the Town, except where the provisions of this Ordinance are in direct conflict with the provisions of such ordinances, in which event the conflicting provisions of such ordinances are hereby repealed. SECTION 7. All rights and remedies of the Town are expressly saved as to any and all violations of the provisions of any other ordinance affecting the subject matter of this Ordinance within the Town which have accrued at the time of the effective date of this Ordinance; and, as to such accrued violations and all pending litigation, both civil and criminal, whether pending in court or not, under such ordinances same shall not be affected by this Ordinance, but may be prosecuted until final disposition by the courts. SECTION 8. The sections, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, clauses and words of this Ordinance are severable, and if any section, paragraph, sentence, phrase, clause or word in this Ordinance or application thereof to any person or circumstance is held invalid or unconstitutional by a court of competent jurisdiction, such holding shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance, and the Town Council hereby declares that it would have passed such remaining portions of this Ordinance despite such invalidity, which remaining portions shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 9. It shall be unlawful for any person to violate any provision of this Ordinance, and any person violating or failing to comply with any provision hereof shall be fined, upon conviction, in an amount not less than One Dollar ($1.00) nor more than Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and a separate offense shall be deemed committed each day during or on which a violation occurs or continues. SECTION 10. The Town Secretary of the Town of Trophy Club is hereby directed to publish the caption and penalty clause of this Ordinance as required by Section 3.16 of the Town’s Charter. SECTION 11. This Ordinance shall become effective from and after its date of adoption and publication as provided by law, and it is so ordained. Page 452 of 522 PASSED AND APPROVED by the Town Council of the Town of Trophy Club, Texas, this __ day of ____, 2025. Jeannette Tiffany, Mayor ATTEST: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: Dean Roggia, Town Attorney Page 453 of 522 TOWN COUNCIL COMMUNICATION MEETING DATE: September 22, 2025 FROM: Tamara Smith, MSL, Assistant to the Town Manager AGENDA ITEM: Consider authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a professional services agreement with Olsson, Inc. for gateway, water tower, and wayfinding signage design in a not-to-exceed amount of $111,300. (Tamara Smith, Assistant to the Town Manager) BACKGROUND/SUMMARY: The Town of Trophy Club issued a Request for Proposal (RFP) to select a qualified firm to design and implement a comprehensive gateway, water tower, and wayfinding signage program. The project will enhance navigation, reinforce community identity, support local businesses, and reflect the Town’s unique character. The scope includes assessing existing signage, creating cohesive designs, specifying durable materials, planning installation, ensuring long-term maintenance, and collaborating with stakeholders. Proposals were due on June 30, 2025, and were reviewed by several department heads whose areas would be impacted by the project. The review team selected Olsson Inc. as the firm that best aligns with project requirements and objectives. Olsson’s team combines creativity, technical expertise, and strong project management to deliver memorable, functional spaces. They specialize in intuitive wayfinding systems, environmental graphics, and digital tools such as GIS and 3D modeling to make complex designs clear and navigable. Known for proactive communication and attention to detail, they integrate community planning, landscape architecture, and engineering perspectives to create place-centered solutions that reflect each community’s unique character. This project will include two phases, with phase one covering the current scope of work. Phase two will focus on implementation and construction, with costs allocated annually through the Capital Improvement Plan. BOARD REVIEW/CITIZEN FEEDBACK: N/A FISCAL IMPACT: The professional services agreement with Olsson for wayfinding signage design is a not-to-exceed amount of $111,300. Funding for this amount is available in the FY 2026 Budget in the Hotel Occupancy Tax Fund. Page 454 of 522 LEGAL REVIEW: Town Attorney, Dean Roggia, has reviewed the contract as to form and legality. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Professional Service Agreement 2. Exhibit A: Olsson's Proposal ACTIONS/OPTIONS: Staff recommends that the Town Council move to approve authorizing the Town Manager to negotiate and execute a professional services agreement with Olsson, Inc. for gateway, water tower, and wayfinding signage design in a not-to-exceed amount of $111,300. Page 455 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT This Professional Consulting Services Agreement (the “Agreement”) is made and entered into this day of 2025, by and between the Town of Trophy Club, a Texas home-rule municipality (the “Town”), and Olsson, Inc., 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 Plano, Texas 75024 (the “Consultant”) (individually, a “Party” and collectively, “Parties”). RECITALS WHEREAS, the Town has requested proposals pursuant to RFP No. TMO2025-01, to seek qualified design and implementation services for the development of integrated gateway features, monument designs, water tower designs, and wayfinding signage throughout the Town of Trophy Club, Texas (the “Project”); and WHEREAS, the Town desires to obtain professional consulting services in connection with the Project as provided in this Agreement and the detailed RFP No. TMO2025-01; and WHEREAS, in accordance with Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2254, the Consultant responded to RFP No. TMO2025-01, and the Town has determined that the Consultant’s bid is acceptable to the Town and the Consultant is the most highly qualified provider of professional consulting services for the Project, and the Consultant is willing to enter into this Agreement with the Town to perform such professional consulting services as more fully described in this Agreement and RFP No. TMO2025-01 (collectively referred to as the “Services”); and NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises above and the mutual covenants contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the Town and the Consultant agree as follows: AGREEMENT 1. Services Consultant shall perform the Services as described in this Agreement and RFP No. TMO2025- 01 (“RFP”), incorporated by reference, and shall do so in accordance with the Consultant’s proposal dated June 30, 2025 (“Proposal”), which is attached to and made a part of this Agreement as Exhibit A. 2. Compensation and Reimbursement 2.1. The Town shall pay Consultant a fee in the amount of one hundred six thousand dollars ($106,000.00) for the Services plus reasonable expenses as provided in this Agreement. 2.2. Consultant shall submit invoices to the Town monthly, as the work progresses for work completed. The Town shall then pay Consultant the total amount of the statement which is validly due within thirty (30) days in accordance with the Texas Prompt Payment Act, Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2251, with the final monthly installment being paid upon satisfactory completion of the services. All payments made under this Agreement shall be made from currently available funds in accordance with Texas law. Page 456 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 2 2.3. In the event the Town should request additional services not set forth in the RFP, Consultant and the Town shall agree on the compensation for those services prior to performance by Consultant. Under no circumstances will Consultant perform additional services without prior written authorization from the Town. 3. Confidential Relationship and Media Coverage 3.1 The Town may from time to time communicate to Consultant certain information to enable Consultant to effectively perform the Services. Consultant shall treat all such information as confidential, whether or not so identified, and shall not disclose any part thereof without the prior written consent of the Town. The Consultant shall limit the use and circulation of such information, even within its own organization, to the extent necessary to perform the Services. The foregoing obligations of this Section 3, however, shall not apply to any part of the information that (i) has been disclosed in publicly available sources of information; (ii) is, through no fault of Consultant, hereafter disclosed in publicly available sources of information; (iii) is now in the possession of Consultant without any obligation of confidentiality; or (iv) has been or is hereafter rightfully disclosed to Consultant by a third-party, but only to the extent that the use or disclosure thereof has been or is rightfully authorized by that third-party. 3.2 Consultant shall not disclose any reports, recommendations, conclusions, or other results of the services or the subject matter of this Agreement without the prior written consent of Town. 3.3 Consultant shall comply with all legal obligations it may now or hereafter have respecting the information or other property of any other person, firm, or corporation. 3.4 Consultant will not provide any public statements, press releases, articles, writings or materials to the any media outlet, including but not limited to, newspapers, social media, websites, blogs, magazines, or TV stations, which refers to the Town, or any of the services provided by Consultant to Town, under this Agreement without the prior written authorization of the Town. Requests for prior written approval of such releases, public statements, articles, writings or materials shall be directed to the Town’s Director of Corporate Communications. 4. Proprietary Rights 4.1 The work product of the Services, and any writings, discoveries, inventions, and innovations or data resulting from the Services, shall be promptly communicated to, and be the property of the Town. 4.2 As instruments of service, all documents, including original drawings, estimates, and notes shall owned by and be available for use by the Town. Page 457 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 3 5. Term This Agreement shall be effective on the date first mentioned above (the “Effective Date”) and shall remain in effect until (1) the Services are completed, or (2) until the expiration of one (1) year from the Effective Date, whichever occurs first (the “Termination Date”). This Agreement shall also be subject to termination upon a ten (10) day written notice at any time by the Town. In the event of termination prior to the Termination Date for reasons other than for cause, payment shall be made for the Services performed through the effective termination date including reimbursable expenses then due. This payment shall be the Town’s sole obligation to Consultant. In addition, upon termination or expiration of this Agreement, Consultant shall return to the Town any and all equipment, documents, or materials, and all copies made thereof, which Consultant received from, or developed for the Town for the purposes of this Agreement. 6. Right to Audit The Town, at its own expense, shall have the right at all reasonable times during normal business hours and upon at least twenty-four (24) hours advance notice, to audit, to examine, and to make copies of or extracts from the books of account and records maintained by Consultant with respect to the Services. If such audit shall disclose overpayment by Town to Consultant, written notice of such overpayment shall be provided to Consultant and the amount of overpayment shall be promptly reimbursed by Consultant to the Town. In the event any such overpayment is not paid within ten (10) days after receipt of such notice, the unpaid amount of such overpayment shall bear interest at the rate of one percent (1%) per month from the date of such notice until paid. 7. INDEMNIFICATION CONSULTANT (THE “INDEMNIFYING PARTY”), SHALL AT ITS SOLE COST INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE TOWN, TOGETHER WITH THE TOWN’S OFFICERS, AGENTS, COUNCIL MEMBERS, EMPLOYEES, ATTORNEYS AND REPRESENTATIVES (COLLECTIVELY, THE “INDEMNIFIED PARTY”), FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, DEMANDS, CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS, JUDGMENTS, SUITS, COSTS AND EXPENSES (INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS’ FEES) MADE BY ANY THIRD-PARTY, TO THE EXTENT ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE SERVICES PROVIDED BY CONSULTANT PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT (COLLECTIVELY, “INDEMNIFIED CLAIMS”), REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED BY ANY THIRD-PARTIES AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE DAMAGES OR CLAIMS OF THIRD-PARTIES ARE KNOWN OR FULLY APPRECIATED AT THIS TIME BY CONSULTANT, OR THE TOWN. THE INDEMNITIES IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE APPLICABLE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVED THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY ACT, ERROR, OMISSION, NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE, INTENTIONAL CONDUCT, BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH Page 458 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 4 OF WARRANTY, VIOLATION OF STATUTE OR COMMON LAW, VIOLATIONS OF THE STATE OR FEDERAL CONSTITUTIONS, OR ANY OTHER CONDUCT WHATSOEVER OF THE TOWN INDEMNIFIED PARTY. CONSULTANT SHALL USE LEGAL COUNSEL REASONABLY ACCEPTABLE TO THE TOWN IN CARRYING OUT ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR EARLY TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS INDEMNIFICATION IS NOT INTENDED TO APPLY TO CLAIMS MADE AGAINST THE INDEMNIFIED PARTY RESULTING FROM NEGLIGENT ACTS OF TOWN EMPLOYEES COVERED UNDER SECTION 101.021 OF THE TEXAS CIVIL PRACTICE AND REMEDIES CODE. The Parties hereby acknowledge and agree that Town is entering this Agreement pursuant to its governmental functions and that nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as constituting a waiver of the Town’s governmental immunity from suit or liability, which is expressly reserved to the extent allowed by law. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the Parties hereby acknowledge and agree that to the extent this Agreement is subject to the provisions of Subchapter I of Chapter 271, Texas Local Gov’t Code, as amended, the Town’s immunity from suit is waived only as set forth in Subchapter I of Chapter 271, Texas Local Gov’t Code. Further, the Parties agree that this Agreement is made subject to all applicable provisions of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code (“CPRC”), including but not limited to all defenses, limitations, and exceptions to the limited waiver of immunity from liability provided in CPRC Chapter 101 and Chapter 75. 8. Insurance Prior to the commencement of Services under this Agreement, Consultant shall obtain standard comprehensive professional liability insurance coverage in an amount of at least $1,000,000.00 per occurrence with a $2,000,000.00 aggregate policy limit per year, covering the Services provided under this Agreement, including contractual liability under this Agreement. A “claims made” policy is acceptable subject to coverage being maintained during the course of the Project and up to two (2) years after completion and acceptance of the Project by the Town. Consultant shall maintain such professional liability insurance coverage during all phases of services and for two (2) years after final completion of the Project. The Town shall be supplied with a certificate of such coverage which shall provide for a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation, non-renewal, or change in limits by endorsement, to the Town by certified mail. Consultant will maintain general liability insurance coverage as follows: The Town, including its officers, officials, employees, Boards and Commissions, and volunteers shall be named as an additional insured by endorsement to the general insurance coverage listed in this Agreement, excluding Workers’ Compensation, Employers’ Liability, and Professional Liability (for which a waiver of subrogation is required to be issued in favor of the Town), with regard to the Consultant’s activities as required by this Agreement. The Consultant shall provide any defense provided by the policy to a named insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Town, and all premiums arising from the coverage herein shall be the responsibility of the Consultant. Consultant shall maintain such general liability coverage during all phases of services and for two (2) years after final completion of the Project. The Town shall be supplied with a Page 459 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 5 certificate of such coverage which shall provide for a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation, non-renewal, or change in limits by endorsement, to the Town by certified mail. 9. Notices Any notices, consents, or other communications required or permitted to be given pursuant to this Agreement must be in writing and shall be sent to the address set forth below (or such other address as the Party might hereafter designate for itself by notice to the other Party as required hereby). Any such notice or communication shall be sufficient if sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid; by hand delivery; by overnight courier service; or by facsimile, with an original by regular mail. Any such notice or communication shall be effective on (a) the date of receipt if delivered personally; (b) three (3) days after deposit in an official depository under the regular care and custody of the United States Postal Service, if transmitted by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested; (c) the first business day after the date of deposit, if transmitted by overnight courier service; or (d) the date of transmission with confirmed answer back, if transmitted by facsimile, whichever shall first occur: To Town: Town of Trophy Club Attn: Brandon Wright 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 TYPE OF INSURANCE AMOUNT OF INSURANCE PROVISIONS 1 Workers’ Compensation Employers’ Liability Statutory Limits Town to be provided a WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND PROVIDED 30 DAY NOTICE OF CANCELLATION or material change in coverage. Insurance Company must be A-rated or above. 2 Commercial General (Public) Liability to include coverage for: a. Premises/Operations b. Products/Completed Operations c. Independent Contractors d. Personal Injury e. Contractual Liability Bodily Injury - $1,000,000 per person, $1,000,000 per occurrence; Property Damage - $1,000,000 per occurrence, $2,000,000 in aggregate Town to be listed as ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDED 30 DAY NOTICE OF CANCELLATION or material change in coverage. Insurance Company must be A-rated or above. 3 Business Auto Liability to include coverage for: a. Owned/Leased vehicles b. Non-owned vehicles c. Hired vehicles Bodily Injury - $1,000,000 per person, $1,000,000 per occurrence; Property Damage - $1,000,000 per occurrence Town to be listed as ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDED 30 DAY NOTICE OF CANCELLATION or material change in coverage. Insurance Company must be A-rated or above. Page 460 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 6 To Consultant: Olsson, Inc. Attn: Brennan Kane 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75024 10. General 10.1 The terms and conditions of Sections 3, 4, 6, and 7 hereof shall survive the termination of this Agreement and completion of the Services. 10.2 Consultant shall perform the Services as an independent contractor and shall not be considered an employee of Town for any purpose whatsoever, including, but not limited to, entitlement to Town employee benefits. Consultant hereby expressly waives any claim or entitlement to such benefits. 10.3 The waiver or failure of any Party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. 10.5 If any provision of this Agreement is invalid, illegal, or unenforceable under any applicable statute, court decision, or rule of law, it is to that extent to be deemed omitted. The remainder of the Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. 10.6 This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas, without regard for conflict of laws principles. Venue of any action arising from this Agreement shall be in Denton County, Texas. 10.7 This Agreement may not be modified, altered or amended except by written instrument duly executed by both Parties, except that a Party may change its address for notices by providing written notice to the other Party. 10.8 This Agreement constitutes the entire understanding between Consultant and Town respecting the Services described herein. 10.9 Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in the Agreement, all information, documents, and communications relating to the Agreement shall be subject to the Texas Public Information Act (“Act”) and any opinion of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction relating to the Act. 10.10 Additional Verifications. To the extent required by Texas law, Consultant verifies that: (1) It does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association, as defined in Texas Government Code § 2274.001, and that it will not during the term of the contract discriminate against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; (2) It does not “boycott Israel” as that term is defined in Texas Government Code Ch. 2271 and § 808.001 and it will not boycott Page 461 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 7 Israel during the term of this Easement Agreement; and (3) It does not “boycott energy companies,” as those terms are defined in Texas Government Code §§ 809.001 and 2276.001, and it will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Easement Agreement; (4) It does not engage in scrutinized business operations with Sudan, Iran, or designated foreign terrorist organization as defined in Texas Government Code, Chapter 2270; and (5) It is not owned by or the majority of its stock or other ownership interest is held or controlled by i) individuals who are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country as defined by Texas Government Code § 2275.0101; or ii) a company or other entity, including a governmental entity, that is owned or controlled by citizens of or is directly controlled by the government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country; nor is it headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or a designated country. 10.11 Ethics Disclosure. The Consultant represents that it has completed a TEC form 1295 (“Form 1295”) generated by the Texas Ethics Commission’s electronic filing application in accordance with the provisions of Texas Government Code 2252.908 and the rules promulgated by the TEC. The Parties agree that, with the exception of the information identifying the Town and the contract identification number, the Town is not responsible for the information contained in the Form 1295. The information contained in the Form 1295 has been provided solely by Consultant and the Town has not verified such information. [SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW] [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT BLANK] Page 462 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 8 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have duly executed this Agreement as of the date first above written. TOWN: CONSULTANT: TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB, TEXAS OLSSON, INC. By: Brandon Wright, Town Manager By: Brennan Kane Date: ____________________________ Date: ____________________________ ATTEST: ATTEST: By: Tammy Dixon, Town Secretary By: Page 463 of 522 PROFESSIONAL CONSULTING SERVICES AGREEMENT – GATEWAY, WATER TOWERS, AND WAYFINDING PAGE 9 EXHIBIT A CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL Page 464 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation Town of Country Club, Texas June 30, 2025 Page 465 of 522 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 / Plano, TX 75024 / 214.473.2713 / olsson.com June 30, 2025 Town of Trophy Club April Duvall Director of Finance 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, Texas 76262 RE: RFQ Response – Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation Dear Ms. Duvall and Selection Committee Members, Trophy Club is a community with a strong sense of pride, place, and presence, where carefully designed streetscapes, pristine parks, and thoughtful planning reflect a deeper story about who it is and how it welcomes people in. From the moment someone arrives, whether via SH 114 or a quiet neighborhood street, the experience of navigation, orientation, and discovery plays a powerful role in shaping perception and connection. This project is about helping people find their way and feel like they belong. This project is about helping people find their way and feel like they belong. It should serve as an extension of Trophy Club’s identity—a network of visual cues that express refinement, hospitality, and place. We view this initiative as a project that aims to enhance how residents and visitors experience your town. Our approach centers on community-informed design, balancing beauty and durability, and anchoring every sign, from gateway monuments to park markers, in a cohesive visual language that mirrors the values Trophy Club embodies: elegance, order, and quality. Our team blends the disciplines of urban planning, landscape architecture, environmental design, branding, and implementation. We’ve worked with communities across the region to create systems that are both technically sound and emotionally resonant. We understand that this signage system must serve a diverse set of users—pedestrians, drivers, cyclists, visitors, longtime residents—and that it must be resilient enough to withstand Texas weather while remaining timeless in its aesthetic. But above all, we recognize the importance of getting the story right. What makes Trophy Club special? What does arrival feel like? What does pride look like in physical form? These are the questions that guide our process. From the initial walkthroughs and stakeholder conversations to multi-day design charrettes and detailed sign family development, our work is rooted in storytelling, technical excellence, and respect for context. The clarity of your intent shared during the pre-submittal meeting further reinforced our excitement about this opportunity and our belief that our team would be a natural fit for this project. We understand that Part 2: Design Development & Construction will be negotiated following the completion of Part 1: Master Plan. Still, in the interest of transparency and project continuity, we have included a cohesive roadmap from visioning through installation—to help you fully visualize the sequencing, timing, and impact of a complete signage transformation. Thank you for the opportunity to submit our qualifications. We would be honored to partner with the Town of Trophy Club on this meaningful effort to create a signage and wayfinding system that elevates the experience, amplifies the identity, and reflects the legacy of this truly exceptional place. With respect and enthusiasm, Brennan P. Kane, Associate AIA Project Manager / Lead Planner bkane@olsson.com / 414.550.8433 (cell) Page 466 of 522 CONTENTS Proposal Cover Sheet/ Acknowledgment of Addendum(s) .....................1 Declaration ...........................................................10 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire ...................11 Proposal Form/Experience of Personnel.......14 Project Approach & Cost ...................................35 Page 467 of 522 PROPOSAL COVER SHEET/ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDUM(S) Page 468 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 1 1 of 82 Contractor’s Initial PURCHASING AND CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) For GATEWAY, WATER TOWER, AND WAYFINDING SIGNAGE DESIGN & IMPLEMENTATION FOR THE TOWN OF TROPHY CLUB RFP No. TMO2025-01 Issue Date: June 2, 2025 BID SUBMISSION DEADLINE: JUNE 30, 2025, BY 3:00 PM (CST) CENTRAL STANDARD TIME NO LATE BIDS SHALL BE ACCEPTED BK Page 469 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 2 2 of 82 Contractor’s Initial RESPONSES SHALL BE DELIVERED TO: Town of Trophy Club 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 RESPONSES SHALL BE MAILED TO: Town of Trophy Club Finance Department 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 Pre-Submittal Conference will be held: June 11, 2025 Community Conference Room 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 *********************************************** NAME AND ADDRESS OF COMPANY SUBMITTING BID: FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THIS RFP PLEASE CONTACT: April Duvall Director of Finance aduvall@trophyclub.org *********************************************** BIDDERS MUST RETURN THIS COMPLETED COVER SHEET ALONG WITH THE BIDDER’S RESPONSE: April Duvall Director of Finance aduvall@trophyclub.org 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 Contact Person: Title: Phone: ( ) Fax: ( ) Email: Signature: Printed Name: Shall contract be available for Cooperative Contract use? (See Section 25, page 9) Yes No Acknowledgment of Addenda: #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 Olsson, Inc. 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75024 Brennan Kane Lead Planner NA414 550.8433 bkane@olsson.com Brennan Kane BK BK Page 470 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 3 3 of 82 Contractor’s Initial NOTICE TO PROPOSERS The Town of Trophy Club is soliciting proposals from qualified firms specializing in gateway, and wayfinding signage systems to enhance navigational experiences, reinforce community identity, support local businesses, as well as integrating a new water tower design into our design landscape. This project aims to design and implement a comprehensive wayfinding system that reflects our community’s unique character and modern needs. Respondents must offer a proposal that will meet the scope of services, requests and general description of work activities identified in the Request for Proposal (RFP), while adding what the Respondent would have to offer. Sealed proposals will be received by the Town of Trophy Club, Finance Department, at the Trophy Club Town Hall, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, TX 76262 until 3:00 PM on June 30, 2025, at which time proposals duly delivered and submitted will be considered for the following: RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Tower, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation Section 100. Delivery of Proposals Any proposal received and time stamped after stated closing time will be returned unopened. Reliance on the post office or delivery services will not be considered an adequate reason for granting an exception for failure to meet the required deadline for consideration of proposals. The outside of the box or package should be clearly marked “RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation” and include the proposer’s name, contact person, address, telephone number, e-mail address and attention Finance Director. Section 101. Pre-proposal Conference A pre-proposal conference will be conducted on June 11, 2025, at 3:00 PM in the Community Conference Room of the Trophy Club Town Hall, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, TX 76262. Any questions or concerns regarding the contents and requirements of this RFP will be discussed at the conference and appropriate addendums to the RFP will be considered. Written responses to any RFP related question received following the conference will be sent to all parties who attend the pre-proposal conference via e-mail. Section 102. Right to Reject Until the final award by the Town of Trophy Club, said Town reserves the right to reject any and/or all proposals, to waive technicalities and to proceed otherwise when the best interests of the Town are realized. Costs incurred in the preparation of a proposal are the sole responsibility of the proposer. Section 103. Proposer Contact with the Town To ensure an objective, orderly award process that provides all potential proposers with an equal opportunity to compete for and win Town business, the following requirements will be enforced during the proposal process: 1. All requests for information will be made either at the pre-proposal conference or directly to Finance Director at (aduvall@trophyclub.org). Answers to all information pertinent requests will be sent to all who attend the pre-proposal conference. BK Page 471 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 4 4 of 82 Contractor’s Initial 2. No direct contact with or lobbying of Town Management, members of the RFP evaluation committee or the Town Council will be permitted during the RFP process. 3. No gifts, lunches or other gratuities will be accepted by the Town. Section 200. Information Contained in the RFP The information set forth in this Request for Proposal (RFP) and in all appendices attached hereto has been presented solely to assist interested proposers in making their own evaluation of the Town’s proposed locations for gateway, water tower, and wayfinding signage design and is not intended to be all inclusive or to contain all of the information that a prospective proposer may desire. The Town has made no independent effort to determine the accuracy of completeness of such information. The proposer is solely responsible for making all necessary investigations and evaluations of information. TENTATIVE SCHEDULE Release RFP June 2, 2025 Pre-proposal Conference: June 11, 2025, at 3:00 PM Community Conference Room Trophy Club Town Hall 1 Trophy Wood Drive Trophy Club, TX 76262 This is a mandatory meeting for all vendors. Q&A Deadline June 13, 2025, at 5:00 PM Due Date: June 30, 2025, at 3:00 PM Bid Opening: June 30, 2025, at 3:10 PM BK Page 472 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 5 5 of 82 Contractor’s Initial IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PROPOSERS Section 300. Invitation for Proposals Background The Town of Trophy Club, as outlined in Exhibit D, located north of Fort Worth, boasts a unique history that has shaped it into the beautiful, safe, and well-maintained community it is today. What began as a small, golf-centric retreat for Dallas executives and retirees has transformed over the years into one of the premier residential communities in North Texas. As the first master-planned community in Texas, Trophy Club features more than 1,000 acres of parks, 36 holes of golf winding through neighborhoods and protected woodlands, and an efficient local government. Much of the Town’s charm lies in its diverse housing options and the active involvement of residents in local schools, churches, clubs, organizations, and Town advisory groups. Trophy Club is a thriving, close-knit community where neighbors connect through a wide array of activities and civic engagement. Strategically located along the SH 114 corridor, Trophy Club sits at the heart of a rapidly growing area in the Dallas-Fort Worth Metroplex. Its proximity to key areas such as Southlake, Westlake, and Roanoke, combined with easy access to both Dallas/Fort Worth International Airport and Alliance Airport, positions the town for continued opportunities. At its core, Trophy Club is defined by a high standard of living that appeals to residents at all stages of life. From its elegant entrances and manicured medians to its scenic roadways and safe, walkable neighborhoods, the Town maintains an inviting and environmentally sustainable atmosphere. The picturesque Trophy Club Country Club, with its two contiguous 18-hole golf courses, offers stunning views that complement the Town's reputation as a beautiful, serene oasis in the heart of North Texas. Scope of Project • ASSESSMENT o Evaluation of Existing Signage: Conducting a comprehensive review of the current signage to assess its effectiveness, visibility, and condition. This evaluation will identify any wear or damage and assess how well the existing wayfinding elements serve the community’s needs. • FABRICATION AND MATERIALS o Design Standards: Recommending design standards including specifications for all sign types. This will include elements along State Highway 114 to integrate landscaping, gateway signage, and monuments identifying Trophy Club to motorists. Monuments and landscaping in medians along residential and main thoroughfares in Town. o Material Selection: Recommending durable, weather-resistant materials suitable for local environmental conditions, ensuring long-lasting physical signage. These materials will also be selected to complement the aesthetic values of Trophy Club. BK Page 473 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 6 6 of 82 Contractor’s Initial • INSTALLATION o Implementation Planning: Developing a detailed plan for the installation of both physical wayfinding elements, including gateway features, monuments, and water tower designs. This phase will involve coordinating with local authorities and stakeholders to ensure minimal disruption and strategically placed signage for maximum visibility and effectiveness. • MAINTENANCE PLAN o Sustainability and Upkeep: Creating a comprehensive maintenance manual and a long-term schedule to ensure the continued functionality and durability of both physical and digital signage. The plan will focus on preserving the integrity and effectiveness of the wayfinding system over time. • COLLABORATION o Stakeholder Engagement: Working closely with key community stakeholders, including Town staff, Trophy Club Municipal Utility District, business owners, residents, Trophy Club Country Club, Boards and Commissions, and any other relevant groups. This collaboration will ensure the wayfinding system is aligned with broader community goals and meets the needs and expectations of local residents and organizations. o Needs Assessment: Conducting a thorough assessment to identify key destinations, decision points, and navigational challenges within the community. This process will gather input from stakeholders to ensure that the wayfinding system is comprehensive and reflects the needs of all involved. • DESIGN o Strategy Development: Creating a cohesive wayfinding and signage strategy that serves vehicle, pedestrian, tourist and cyclist navigation needs. The strategy will integrate physical navigation elements to improve accessibility and the overall user experience throughout Trophy Club. Proposal Information The Town reserves all rights in accordance with the requirement of the laws of the State of Texas and the Town Code, without qualification, including, but not limited to the following: • Select any Proposal. • Waive any formality, technicality, or irregularity in Proposals received. • Reject any Proposals, which are not legible, not complete or contain irregularities. • Reject any Proposals not received on or before the due date and time specified. • Obtain clarification from Proposers concerning Proposals. BK Page 474 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 7 7 of 82 Contractor’s Initial In order for your submission to be considered eligible, you must complete the following: 1. The Proposal must be properly completed (in ink or type); 2. The Proposal must be signed by an authorized contracting agent of your company; 3. The Proposal must be returned in its entirety with each page initialed by the contractor; and 4. The Proposal shall be filed with the Town of Trophy Club Finance Department, 1 Trophy Wood Drive, Trophy Club, TX 76262 no later than 3:00 PM on June 30, 2025. Section 310. Required Format of Proposal • The Proposal must contain ALL of the required paperwork. • ALL forms must be completed in their entirety and ALL questions must be answered directly on the form and/or expanded onto additional pages when necessary. References for company brochures and flyers will not be acceptable as an answer. • The Proposal must be organized into the required sections in the required order. • Proposals submissions shall be provided in searchable PDF format with all of the required sections included. • Refer to the checklist that follows to assist you in your submission. Required Format of Proposal: Proposals must be organized and submitted intact with all of the information in appropriately labeled sections in the following order: Sealed Box with the Proposer’s name and address in the upper left-hand corner and marked Sealed Proposal for “RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Tower, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation” in the lower left-hand corner containing a minimum of five (5) printed hardcopies and one (1) USB Drive containing an electronic copy in searchable pdf format. 1. Proposal Cover Sheet/ Acknowledgement of Addendum(s) signed/sealed by the authorized Contractor/Proposer 2. Declaration 3. Conflict of Interest Questionnaire 4. Proposal Form Experience of Personnel 5. Project Approach and Cost BK Page 475 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 8 8 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Proposal Cover Sheet and Acknowledgement of Addendum(s) Proposal for RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Tower, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation. Due: 3:00 PM June 30, 2025 Performance & Payment Bonds: REQUIRED UPON AWARD (Section 1260) The Proposer acknowledges receipt of the following Addendums to the solicitation: Addendum Number Date Please check the appropriate box: Corporation Partnership Sole Proprietor Unincorporated Include either: Social Security or Federal Tax Identification Number: No. 1 06.16.2025 X X 470781766 (Olsson, Inc.) BK Page 476 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 9 9 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Name of Firm Phone Address Fax Type or Print Name and Title of Qualified Proposer Attest: Signature of Qualified Proposer Date: Corporate Seal Olsson, Inc.214.473.2713 NA4700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100Plano, TX 75024 Sean BakerChief Financial Officer (CFO) 06.17.2025 BK Brennan Kane Project Manager/ Lead Planner 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75024 06.30.2025 Page 477 of 522 DECLARATION Page 478 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 10 10 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Declaration The undersigned, as Proposer, declares that the only persons/entities interested in this Proposal are those named herein, that no other person/entity has any interest in this Proposal or in the Contract for services to which this Proposal pertains, that this Proposal is made without connection or arrangement with any other person/entity and that this Proposal is in every aspect fair, in good faith, and without collusion or fraud. The Proposer further declares that they have complied in every respect with all requirements of this RFP, that they have read all appendices and has satisfied himself fully relative to all matters and conditions with respect to the services to which the Proposal pertains. The Proposer states that this Proposal is based upon the Request for Proposal documents and appendices. The Proposer agrees to the proposed Contract of the Town of Trophy Club RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Tower, Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation. Firm/Corporation Address Town, State, Zip Name Signature Title Submittal Date Olsson, Inc. 5700 Tennyson Parkway, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75024 Brennan Kane 06.30.2025 BK Project Manager/Lead Planner 06.30.2025 Page 479 of 522 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE Page 480 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 11 11 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Conflict of Interest Questionnaire Effective January 1, 2006, Chapter 176 of the Texas Local Government Code went into effect which requires that any vendor or person considering doing business with a local government entity disclose in the Questionnaire Form CIQ, the vendor or person’s affiliation or business relationship that might cause a conflict of interest with a local government entity. By law, this questionnaire must be filed with the Town Secretary of the Town of Trophy Club not less than the 7th business day after the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. A recent amendment to this state law that went into effect on September 1, 2007, now allows for two changes to the original statute: 1. The Conflict-of-Interest Questionnaire only needs to be filled out and returned with your proposal if you or your company are aware of a conflict, and, 2. If the amount of the conflict exceeds $2,500 It is the responsibility of every vendor filling out and returning this proposal to determine if there is a conflict meeting the parameters listed above. If so, the Town of Trophy Club requires that this Questionnaire be completed and turned in with your proposal. If there is no conflict, or if the amount of the conflict is less than $2,500, then you are not required to submit the Questionnaire with your proposal. See Section 176.006, Local Government Code which reads “A person commits an offense if the person violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor.” A sample is provided to assist with completing the Conflict-of-Interest Questionnaire. BK Page 481 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 12 12 of 82 Contractor’s Initial CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 1491, 80th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code by a person who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the person meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006, Local Government Code. A person commits an offense if the person knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. OFFICE USE ONLY Date Received 1 Name of person who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 3 Name of local government officer with whom filer has employment or business relationship. Name of Officer This section (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D) must be completed for each officer with whom the filer has an employment or other business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A.Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the filer of the questionnaire? Yes No B.Is the filer of the questionnaire receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at the direction of the local government officer named in this section AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No C.Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of 10 percent or more? Yes No D.Describe each employment or business relationship with the local government officer named in this section. 4 Signature of person doing business with the governmental entity Date Adopted 06/29/2007 BK NA 06.19.2025 Brennan signed 06.30.2025 Page 482 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 13 13 of 82 Contractor’s Initial SAMPLE - Conflict Of Interest Questionnaire FORM CIQ BK Page 483 of 522 PROPOSAL FORM EXPERIENCE OF PERSONNEL Page 484 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 14 14 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Proposal Form– Experience of Personnel (To adequately answer the questions, additional pages of narrative may be included within this section when necessary) Provide a list of personnel in key positions (including those of subcontractors) and attach one copy of the Summary of Qualifications form (see next page) for each person so identified; additional sheets may be attached to the form with a maximum of two extra pages per person. List Key Personnel Below: Name Position/Title Subcontractor(Y/N) PM/Lead Planner Ken Boone Principal-in-Charge N Brennan Kane N Chris Cahalan Cody Peratt Darren Varner Deputy PM/Sr. LA Sr. Master Planner/LA Sr. Master Planner/LA N N N Michelle Queen Public Engagement/Planner N Tyler Swehla 3D Visualization BK Taylor Plummer Community Planning/Branding N N Page 485 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 15 15 of 82 Contractor’s Initial Proposal Form – Experience of Personnel (continued) Summary of Qualifications Form (To adequately answer the questions, additional pages of narrative may be included within this section when necessary) Complete one separate form for each Manager and Supervisor, listing his or her experience during the past five years as follows: A Relevance of Previous Experience: Demonstrated track record of successfully completing wayfinding or similar design and implementation projects. B Project Team Qualifications: The individual and collective experience of team members in wayfinding design, digital technologies, project management, and other relevant skills. C Innovativeness: How has your team applied innovative approaches to gateway and wayfinding designs in other communities? Please see page X. Please see page X. Please see page X. BK Please see page 17. Please see page 28. Please see page 34. Page 486 of 522 DEMONSTRATED TRACK RECORD Page 487 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 17 DEMONSTRATED TRACK RECORD Olsson’s team brings a dynamic blend of creativity, technical savvy, and project leadership to every assignment. Their experience in wayfinding design, digital technologies, and project management makes them a go-to team for clients seeking memorable, functional spaces. When it comes to wayfinding, Olsson’s team designs intuitive systems and environmental graphics that help visitors navigate with ease and confidence. Their approach goes beyond basic signage, focusing on creating welcoming experiences that reflect the character of each site and community. Digital technologies are at the heart of our process. The team leverages GIS, 3D modeling, and visualization tools to map trails, signage, and landscape features, making complex ideas easy to understand for clients and stakeholders. Their expertise in digital asset management and field data collection streamlines project delivery and supports informed decision-making. Project management is another area where Olsson’s team shines. They’re skilled at developing comprehensive scopes, budgets, and schedules, using tools like Smartsheet and Deltek Vantagepoint to monitor progress and keep projects on track. Their communication style is proactive and transparent, with regular check-ins, status reports, and collaborative meetings that keep everyone in the loop. The team’s attention to detail and commitment to quality control means projects are thoughtfully designed and executed, meeting client needs and exceeding expectations. Beyond these core strengths, Olsson’s community planners and landscape architects are adept at collaborating across disciplines, integrating environmental, engineering, and community engagement perspectives into their work. Their portfolio includes everything from urban plazas and parks to complex infrastructure and digital inclusion projects, always with a focus on place-centered solutions and user experience. GATE WAY ENHANCEMENTS Warrensburg, Missouri The City of Warrensburg aimed to enhance community identity for visitors along transportation corridors by developing a gateway and bridge enhancement master plan. Our plan established and enhanced community identity using gateways and monumentation at key access points to the city. DRUMM FARM CENTER FOR CHILDREN Independence, Missouri Our work began with a visioning session and design charrette. The results of this four-day process led to a preliminary master plan that shed the stigma of an institutional environment and transformed the 45-acre site into two distinct zones. THE LEGENDS Kansas City, Kansas The Legends development includes a variety of landscaped areas with water features and fountains, fireplaces and fire pits, performance stages, heavily landscaped plazas, pedestrian walkways, and corridors. Olsson designed the artistic landscape features and detailed elements. Page 488 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 18 DATES 2024 to Ongoing SERVICES • Branding & Wayfinding • Master Planning • Landscape Architecture • Engineering & Design • Urban Design TEAM MEMBERS INVOLVED Michelle Queen, AICP Brennan Kane, Assoc. AIA Vivian Fung, AICP Cody Peratt, PLA, MLA PROJECT REFERENCE Robyn Battle Executive Director 972.569.1011 rbattle@prospertx.gov GATEWAYS & MONUMENTATION Prosper, Texas CRAFTING COMMUNITY CONNECTIONS THROUGH ICONIC ARCHWAYS. As the Town of Prosper continued its downtown revitalization efforts, it sought to establish a gateway and wayfinding system that would encapsulate the heart of its historic core while enhancing community identity. Rather than a single gateway structure, Olsson’s research and analysis identified the need for a comprehensive family of gateway, monumentation, and wayfinding elements that would serve both immediate and long-term needs. This approach fostered a cohesive visual language while strengthening connectivity within downtown and surrounding neighborhoods, reinforcing its unique sense of place. To expedite the process and maximize stakeholder input, Olsson facilitated a three-day design charrette. Each day, new ideas were generated and refined, with evening sessions dedicated to reviewing progress with the stakeholder committee. This highly collaborative approach allowed for real-time feedback and adjustments, aligning the final design with the community’s vision. The resulting solution included a series of gateway arches strategically positioned at key downtown entry points, complemented by wayfinding and monumentation structures to guide residents and visitors through the area. At the heart of downtown, the Olsson team introduced a signature artistic silo, paying homage to the town’s cotton industry heritage, along with vertical monumental elements inspired by the railroad that traverses downtown. These elements were carefully designed to frame the central intersection at Broadway and Main, reinforcing it as the community’s gathering place for events, celebrations, and daily interactions. Integrating historical references with contemporary design, the monumentation family not only enhances wayfinding but also deepens the town’s connection to its past while supporting its future growth. SCAN TO VIEW FINAL PLAN Page 489 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 19 DATES 2016 to Present SERVICES • Landscape Architecture • Master Planning • Site Design • Civil Engineering • Structural Engineering • Construction Management • Project Visualization • Surveying MARKETS • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Ron Lazenby Project Manager 972.668.2022 ron@grandscape.com GRANDSCAPE The Colony, Texas 35-FOOT PIECE OF ART ILLUMINATES MIXED-USE DEVELOPMENT. Grandscape is a mixed-use real estate development in The Colony, Texas. Sprawling over 400 acres, Grandscape is its own destination “city” with apartments, a resort hotel, unique restaurants, and an assortment of shops and communal areas. Located in the Dallas suburb The Colony, the project is poised for success with locals and visitors alike. Olsson helped generate success by providing landscape architecture, planning, design and construction services. Page 490 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 20 Interactive digital art is a key feature throughout the Grandscape development. Olsson worked extensively with the Barnycz Group on four unique works and their individual design criteria for interaction, ambiance, and spatial integration not only to serve as a focal point but to enliven, activate, and anchor their specific rooms. The Kaleidoscope was one of these signature works. Olsson partnered with the artists to understand their vision and develop the surrounding courtyard with elevated user terraces, dynamic lighting, and seasonal landscape interest to showcase this interactive feature throughout the day and evening. Our mission was to beautify the space with a modern style that makes Grandscape development aims to be an attractive destination. Our collective mission was to beautify and elevate the exterior environment with a variety of dynamic experiences, amenities, and attractions. PROJECT PROFILE Kaleidoscope panels 35-foot Kaleidescope Page 491 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 21 DATES Project dates SERVICES • Sub-bullets for services go here • Sub-bullets for services go here MARKETS • Sub-bullets for markets go here • Sub-bullets for markets go here DOWNTOWN GATEWAY STREETSCAPE Sedalia, Missouri A GLOWING GATE TO SEDALIA’S DOWNTOWN. The City of Sedalia expressed the need for a major gateway element to enhance the identity of Sedalia’s Central Business and Cultural District located in the heart of the city. The gateway, located at the intersection of Ohio Street and U.S. Highway 50, incorporates architectural elements that reflect the vibrant and unique historic nature of Sedalia’s downtown. Olsson provided initial conceptual design and presentation graphics for city approval. DATES 2014 to 2015 SERVICES • Landscape Architecture • Master Planning MARKETS • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Jim Simmons Community Development Director 660.827.3000 jsimmons@sedalia.com Page 492 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 22 AGGIEVILLE VISION TO REALITY MASTER PLAN Manhattan, Kansas The economic vitality of the Aggieville district is influenced by accommodating visitors and consumers. The City of Manhattan led an initiative to further develop Aggieville aims to become a mixed-use attraction offering various shopping, dining, entertainment, and residential opportunities. Some challenges include insufficient parking and access, aged utilities, and outdated visual appeal. To better understand the magnitude of Aggieville’s needs and improvement costs, the city hired Olsson to provide an infrastructure analysis.  Our team modeled traffic, studied land-use, and completed a parking study to determine connectivity, circulation, and access to the area. To address the utility concerns, we conducted a utility/stormwater infrastructure analysis, which was presented in a report to the City of Manhattan and will provide sensible recommendations for Aggieville going forward. Additionally, Olsson facilitated public involvement to build community consensus in improvement efforts. These efforts included holding charrettes and developing a steering committee composed of the Manhattan Chamber of Commerce, Aggieville Business Association, Kansas State University, and more.  DATES 2019 to Present SCOPE OF WORK • Landscape Architecture • Civil Engineering • Mechanical Engineering • Construction Management MARKETS • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Jason Hilgers Deputy City Manager 785.587.2404 hilgers@cityofmhk.com Page 493 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 23 THE LEGENDS AT SPARKS MARINA Sparks, Nevada ENTERTAINMENT ON A GRAND SCALE IN THE RENO METRO VALLEY The Legends at Sparks Marina is a prominent entertainment district in the Reno and Sparks, Nevada area. A 140-acre development, the Legends comprises a shopping center in addition to an entertainment district. The lifestyle center features an approximately 125-foot-tall tower, outdoor performance areas, living room spaces with fireplaces, special paving, accent lighting, multiple fountains, and sculptures of the Legends of Nevada. Olsson provided conceptual design, design development, construction documentation, and construction administration services. This includes the hardscape, landscape, and irrigation of the lifestyle center and surrounding development, including fountains and sculpture coordination. Phase II of the development included a boardwalk on an adjacent recreation lake, connecting to the city trail system. DATES 2008 SERVICES • Site Design • Landscape Architecture • Master Planning • Construction Management MARKETS • Commercial • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Barry Shannahan Executive Vice President 480.556.7723 bshannahan@reddevelopment.com Page 494 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 24 DOWNTOWN MARKET PLACE Lee’s Summit, Missouri DATES 2015 to Present SERVICES • Master Planning • Landscape Architecture • Public Engagement • Site Design • Civil Engineering • Survey MARKETS • Commercial • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Ryan Elam Assistant City Manager 816.969.1015 ryan.elam@cityofls.net TRANSFORMING DOWNTOWN WITH A FORWARD-THINKING MASTER PLAN. Since 2015, Olsson has partnered with the City of Lee’s Summit, Missouri, to elevate its status as an arts and cultural hub in its acclaimed downtown area. By engaging in and leading various teams, studies, and adapting to changing administrations, Olsson has crafted distinctive event and pedestrian space programming for a performing arts campus and farmers market. The final design represents a bold collaboration between the city, master developer, master contractor, and master architect, resulting in a vibrant public asset. Olsson spearheaded the design for all site elements, infrastructure, and the final adopted master plan. The new market and pedestrian- focused design is currently under construction and is scheduled to open in summer of 2025 Lee’s Summit community members look forward to using this space for events like Downtown Days, Oktoberfest, and a premier farmers market experience both indoors and outdoors. The integration of public art and premium materials will propel downtown into its next chapter. Page 495 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 25 DATES 2018 to 2020 SERVICES • Landscape Architecture • Site Design MARKETS • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Lyle Lutt Director of Administrative Services 402.844.2000 llutt@ci.norfolk.ne.us NORFOLK RIVERPOINT SQUARE Norfolk, Nebraska COMMUNITY SPACE SUPPORTING DOWNTOWN REVITALIZATION. Downtown Norfolk offers a variety of shopping, dining, and entertainment options. There are art galleries, dance studios, professional businesses, and residences. Thanks to the City of Norfolk’s partnership with Olsson, the eye-catching Johnny Carson mural at the intersection of Third Street and Norfolk Avenue is now home to a new public space to be known as Riverpoint Square. Olsson Studio’s concept for this area transformed a parking lot into an inviting gathering space. Riverpoint Square was possible because of a federal grant for downtown revitalization, which was overseen by the Northeast Nebraska Economic Development District. Page 496 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 26 DATES 2016 to 2018 SERVICES • Landscape Architecture MARKETS • Land & Facilities PROJECT REFERENCE Brandon Huffman 501.758.4982 emcinerney@reddevelopment.com THE PROMENADE AT CHENAL Little Rock, Arkansas PREMIER SHOPPING, DINING, ENTERTAINMENT, AND LIFESTYLE DESTINATION. The Promenade at Chenal is a 37-acre lifestyle retail development, which includes 340,000 square feet of upscale shopping, restaurants, and a theatre for the Chenal Valley residents of Little Rock, Arkansas. The focus of the development is a tree- lined Main Street that features an arbor structure, fireplace, garden gate, trellis and four water features. Specialty paving links it all together. Beautiful landscaping, extensive sidewalks and signage, and unique water features create an environment ideal for shopping, entertainment, and socializing. Olsson, provided conceptual design and design development services for hardscape, landscape, and irrigation. Olsson also produced construction documents for implementation of the retail center. Page 497 of 522 PROJECT TEAM QUALIFICATIONS Page 498 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 28 Olsson’s community planners and landscape architects bring a wealth of collective experience to gateway and monumentation projects in Texas, blending wayfinding design, digital technologies, and project management into a seamless process that delivers both function and community character. For the Downtown Prosper Gateways & Monumentation project, Olsson’s team took a holistic approach to wayfinding, and placemaking. Rather than focusing on a single gateway, they developed a comprehensive family of gateway arches, monumentation, and wayfinding elements. This strategy fostered a cohesive visual language and strengthened connectivity throughout downtown Prosper and its surrounding neighborhoods. The design features gateway arches at key entry points, a signature artistic silo honoring the town’s cotton industry heritage, and vertical monumentation inspired by the local railroad. These elements frame the central intersection at Broadway and Main, reinforcing it as a vibrant community gathering space. INDIVIDUAL & COLLECTIVE EXPERIENCE Project management is a cornerstone of Olsson’s delivery. The team leverages tools like Smartsheet and Deltek Vantagepoint to monitor budgets, schedules, and deliverables, keeping projects on track and stakeholders informed. Their process includes regular progress meetings, transparent communication, and a focus on quality control at every stage—from initial planning through construction documentation. Olsson’s landscape architects also bring deep skills in branding, master planning, and urban design, which are essential for gateway and monumentation projects that aim to celebrate local history and create a sense of arrival. Their Texas legacy is built on a century of landscape architecture, with a portfolio that includes iconic projects across the state and a reputation for innovative, community-centered solutions. In summary, Olsson’s collective experience in wayfinding design, digital technologies, and project management is on full display in gateway and monumentation projects. Our process is collaborative, tech-forward, and rooted in a deep understanding of place—delivering results that resonate with communities and stand the test of time. Page 499 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 29 BRENNAN KANE, ASSOC. AIA Project Manager/Lead Planner CHRIS CAHALAN, PLA, ASLA, LEED AP Deputy Project Manager / Senior Landscape Architect CODY PERATT, PLA Senior Master Planner / Landscape Architect DARREN VARNER, ASLA Senior Master Planner / Landscape Architect MICHELLE QUEEN, AICP Public Engagement / Graphics TYLER SWEHLA 3D Visualization KEN BOONE Principal-in-Charge Your Team TAYLOR PLUMMER Community Planning & Branding ORGANIZATIONAL CHART Olsson’s approach to assembling project teams is all about matching the right talent to the unique needs of each project. The team members identified in the organizational chart below are available to begin work upon notice to proceed, and each has been selected based on their relevant experience, skill set, and capacity to deliver results. Our reputation for professionalism and client service is reflected in the fact that 95.8 percent of its work in 2024 came from repeat clients. The structure of this project team designed to create efficiencies and provide flexibility, allowing the team to meet specific project requirements. Team members are chosen for their ability to work together cohesively, their technical expertise, and their proven track record on similar projects. This collaborative approach not only streamlines contract administration and project completion but also fosters strong client relationships built on trust and a history of quality work. Page 500 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 30 KEN BOONE Principal-in-Charge EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Ken is a technical expert with more than 30 years of experience in planning and design. He advises on design quality and technical excellence. His expertise includes community planning, public engagement, construction management, and site planning. Ken’s passion for creating better places energizes him during public meetings. He has led many long- range planning projects in roles like principal-in-charge and project manager. Ken has experience in community, urban, redevelopment, and park design. He effectively organizes workshops, gathers stakeholder ideas, and builds consensus. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Rowlett, Downtown Strategic Plan; Rowlett, TX • LMG Ventures, Grandscape; The Colony, TX • City of Buckeye, Downtown Specific Area Plan; Buckeye, AZ • City of Pearland, Old Town Revitalization Plan; Pearland, TX • City of Plano, Community Design Plan; Plano, TX • City of Plano, Downtown Silver Line Station Areas Plan; Plano, TX • City of Fort Worth, Neighborhood Parks Design – Marine Park Phase 1; Fort Worth, TX • City of Lee’s Summit, Downtown Market Place; Lee’s Summit, MO EDUCATION • Bachelor of Landscape Architecture, Kansas State University CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • Reality Based Leadership • Leadership In Action • International Council of Shopping Centers (ICSC) BRENNAN KANE, ASSOC. AIA Project Manager/Lead Planner EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Brennan is a dedicated and accomplished technical leader with nearly 20 years of professional public and private sector experience working in large, growing urban metropolises and rural urban communities. His diverse background reflects a genuine passion for fostering community development through innovative planning and engagement strategies that not only brings people together but also creates a tangible sense of place. His vision includes creating environments that inspire community engagement and investment. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Rowlett, Downtown Strategic Plan; Rowlett, TX • City of Plano, Community Design Plan; Plano, TX • City of Plano, Downtown Silver Line Station Areas Plan; Plano, TX • City of Pearland, Old Town Revitalization Plan; Pearland; TX • City of Princeton, Parks, Open Space, and Trails Master Plan; Princeton; TX EDUCATION • Masters of Architecture, University of Wisconsin- Milwaukee • Masters of Urban Planning, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • American Institute of Architects (Associate AIA) • American Planning Association (APA) Page 501 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 31 Deputy Project Manager/ Senior Landscape Architect EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Chris is an award-winning landscape architect and has a project portfolio that spans the Midwest. He has experience in site master planning, parks, retail, office, site design, hardscape design, landscape architectural design, and project management. Chris is involved in many project types including, urban design, parks, commercial developments, hospitality, residential, and institutional. Chris’s landscape architectural designs aim to create enriching experiences for users. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Grandview, Main Street Gateway; Grandview, MO • City of Sedalia, Downtown Gateway; Sedalia, MO • City of Warrensburg, Signage and Bridge Beautification; Warrensburg, MO • City of Olathe, Monument Kansas Highway 10 and Ridgeview Road; Olathe, KS • City of Lebanon, Gateway Monument; Lebanon, MO • City of Raymore, Roundabout Decorative Feature; Raymore, MO • City of Manhattan, Aggieville 12th Street; Manhattan, KS CHRIS CAHALAN, PLA, ASLA, LEED AP EDUCATION • Bachelor of Landscape Architecture, Iowa State University REGISTRATIONS • Professional Landscape Architect (PLA): KS, MO, IA, OK, and WI CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • LEED Accredited Professional Senior Landscape Architect & Master Planner EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Cody is a registered landscape architect and project manager with experience in site planning and design. His work has included international resort and hospitality projects, senior living, park planning and design, streetscape design, and private villas and residences. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Manhattan, Aggieville Vision to Reality Master Plan; Manhattan, KS • City of Sapulpa, Downtown Master Plan; Sapulpa, OK • City of Shawnee, Comprehensive Plan Revitalization; Shawnee, KS • City of Basehor, City Park Master Plan; Basehor; KS • City of Belton, Memorial Park Hardscape, Amenity, and Landscape Design; Belton, MO • City of Blue Springs; Gregory O. Grounds Park Signage and Wayfinding; Blue Springs, MO • City of Independence, Copaken Brooks Independence Square Redevelopment; Independence, MO • 3D Development, Pennway Point Entertainment; Kansas City, MO CODY PERATT, PLA EDUCATION • M.A., Higher Education Administration, University of Nebraska-Lincoln • Bachelor of Landscape Architecture, Kansas State University REGISTRATIONS • Professional Landscape Architect (PLA): NE CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • American Society of Landscape Architects (ASLA) Page 502 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 32 DARREN VARNER, ASLA Senior Landscape Architect & Master Planner EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Michelle Queen is a North Texas-based community planner with a passion for engaging communities and diverse stakeholders in identifying and attaining a unified vision for the spaces in which they live, work, and play. She has a wide-range of project experience from downtown plans, small area master planning, site design, and land use analysis, to strategic planning, corridor plans, and policy development. Her background includes public engagement, data collection and analysis, technical writing, architectural design, placemaking, graphic design, current planning support for city staff, and revitalization. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • City of Rowlett, Downtown Strategic Plan; Rowlett, TX • City of Pearland, Old Town Revitalization Plan; Pearland, TX • City of Plano, Silver Line Station Areas Plan; Plano, TX • City of Independence, Copaken Brooks Independence Square Redevelopment; Independence, MO • City of Bellevue, Comprehensive Plan Update and Long-range Transportation Plan; Bellevue, NE EDUCATION • Bachelor of Landscape Architecture, Kansas State University CERTIFICATIONS/ ASSOCIATIONS • American Society of Landscape Architects (ASLA) • ASLA Prairie Gateway Chapter MICHELLE QUEEN, AICP Public Engagement & Graphics EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Michelle is a North Texas-based community planner who has a passion for engaging communities and diverse stakeholders in identifying and attaining a unified vision for the spaces in which they live, work, and play. She has a wide-range of project experience from downtown plans, small area master planning, site design, and land use analysis, to strategic planning, corridor plans, and policy development. Her background includes public engagement, data collection and analysis, technical writing, architectural design, placemaking, graphic design, current planning support for city staff, and revitalization. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Rowlett, Downtown Strategic Plan; Rowlett, TX • City of Pearland, Old Town Revitalization Plan; Pearland, TX • City of Plano, Silver Line Station Areas Plan; Plano, TX • City of Princeton, Comprehensive Plan; Princeton, TX • City of Independence, Copaken Brooks Independence Square Redevelopment; Independence, MO • City of Bellevue, Comprehensive Plan Update and Long-range Transportation Plan; Bellevue, NE EDUCATION • Master of Urban and Regional Planning, Texas A&M University • B.S., Environmental Design/Architecture, Texas A&M University CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • American Institute of Certified Planners (AICP) Page 503 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 33 3D Visualization EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Tyler enjoys exploring different perspectives to find effective solutions for clients, assisting them in reaching their objectives. He is a resourceful and forward-thinking professional, known for his flexibility and efficiency in managing project timelines and collaborating with design teams. Tyler has experience in landscape architecture and parks and recreation planning and design. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • Town of Prosper, Downtown Gateways and Monumentation; Prosper, TX • City of Broken Arrow, Elam Park Phase 1; Broken Arrow, OK • City of Midwest City, W.P. Atkinson Park; Midwest City, OK • City of Joplin, Ewert Splash Park; Joplin MO • City of Republic, Regional Athletic Complex; Republic, MO • Homefield, Baseball Complex; Kansas City, KS • Jackson County, Frank White Jr. Sports Complex; Jackson County, MO • Jackson County Parks and Recreation, Frank White Jr. Sports Complex Championship Stadium and Master Plan; Lee’s Summit, MO TYLER SWEHLA, ASLA EDUCATION • Master of Landscape Architecture, Kansas State University CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • American Society of Landscape Architects (ASLA) • ASLA Prairie Gateway Chapter TAYLOR PLUMMER, AICP Community Planning & Branding EXPERIENCE SUMMARY Taylor is a community planning group leader for Olsson’s Planning & Engagement team, responsible for setting performance expectations. She crafts clear and concise plans that are consensus-built and balance community intuition with technical knowledge. Taylor’s team-based approach to plan development, including the involvement of key stakeholders, improves the chances for successful plan implementation. Her extensive experience with successfully engaging with community members creates “champions” of the plan along the way. PROJECT EXPERIENCE • City of Plano, Community Design Plan; Plano, TX • City of Plano, Silver Line Station Areas Plan; Plano, TX • City of Pearland, Old Town Revitalization Plan; Pearland TX • City of Buckeye, Downtown Specific Area Plan; Buckeye, AZ • City of Sapulpa, Downtown Master Plan; Sapulpa, OK • City of Bellevue, Comprehensive Plan Update and Long-range Transportation Plan (LRTP); Bellevue, NE • City of Manhattan, Aggieville Vision to Reality Master Plan; Manhattan, KS • City of Windsor, Eastman Park Drive Corridor Plan; Windsor, CO • City of Loveland, Highway 402 Corridor Plan; Loveland, CO EDUCATION • Master of Urban Planning, Sustainable Land Use Planning and Housing and Community Development, University of Kansas CERTIFICATIONS/ TRAINING • American Institute of Certified Planners (AICP) • International Association of Public Participation (IAP2) Page 504 of 522 INNOVATIVENESS Page 505 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 34 Olsson has brought innovative approaches to gateway and wayfinding design across a variety of communities throughout the U.S. The firm’s approach blends historical context, community identity, and modern placemaking to create solutions that are both visually compelling and highly functional. As an example, Olsson’s work in Beatrice, Nebraska, centers on the Court Street Corridor Master Plan, a project designed to transform downtown into a vibrant, pedestrian-friendly destination. The project’s vision includes transforming roundabouts into gateways with wayfinding features and sculptural elements, signaling to visitors that downtown Beatrice is a lively destination. The project aims to transform roundabouts into gateways with wayfinding features and sculptural elements, enhancing the appeal of downtown Beatrice. By weaving together local history, community engagement, and creative design, Olsson’s team delivers gateway and wayfinding solutions that do more than direct traffic—they create lasting impressions and strengthen community identity. INNOVATIVE APPROACHES TO GATEWAY & WAYFINDING DESIGNS Page 506 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 48 17 of 82 Contractor’s Initial OVERVIEW Section 400. Purpose and Intent The purpose of this proposal is to solicit qualified design and implementation services for the development of integrated gateway features, monument designs, water tower designs, and wayfinding signage throughout the Town of Trophy Club. These elements are intended to enhance the Town’s visual identity, improve navigation for residents and visitors, and celebrate the community’s unique character. The intent of this project is to create a cohesive and functional design that reflects the Town’s history, culture, and growth, while also meeting the practical needs of a rapidly expanding community. By strategically placing gateway signage, updating the water tower design, and implementing an intuitive wayfinding system for our Town and parks, and creating cohesive residential road signage. This project will improve both the aesthetic appeal and navigability of the Town, while including new modern and innovative sign components into the signage system that will provide a user-friendly tool for residents and visitors alike. Through this proposal, the Town of Trophy Club seeks to engage a design team that can deliver creative, practical, and sustainable solutions that reflect the Town’s high standards of living, support continued growth, and strengthen community pride. Information on potential locations can be found in Exhibit A, B & C. Section 401. Due Diligence Each proposer shall fully acquaint themselves with conditions relating to the scope and restrictions attending the execution of the work including all information provided in this RFP and appendices. Each Proposer shall conduct their own investigations concerning the conditions, locations, that may affect their work and by submitting a proposal, the proposer warrants that they have fully acquainted themselves with such conditions and are prepared to honor all statements and commitments made in their proposal to the Town. Proposers will not be reimbursed for any costs related to the preparation of their proposal whether successful or not. Section 500. Written Proposal Evaluation Criteria 1 Experience of key personnel, management staff and supervisors 15 2 Past performance and experience in providing similar services in metroplex area 25 3 Cost effectiveness of design and implementation 20 4 Quality and Innovation of Proposed Solutions 30 5 Clarity and organization of the proposal 5 6 Compliance with the RFP Format 5 Total Points 100 Section 501. Verbal Proposal Evaluation Criteria 1 Understanding of Project Requirements 20 2 Creativity and Innovation 20 3 Project Feasibility and Implementation Plan 20 4 Stakeholder Engagement and Collaboration 15 5 Sustainability and Maintenance Plan 10 6 Experience and Qualifications 10 7 Presentation and Communication Skills 5 Total Points 100 BK Page 507 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 49 18 of 32 Section 600. Tax Exempt Purchasing by Contractor Texas Tax Code 151.311, which is copied below, allows a vendor to purchase many items exempt from state and local sales taxes in the performance of their contract with the Town. Vendors who respond to this Request for Proposal will be expected to take advantage of this tax exemption as allowed by state law. Vendors should take the initiative to verify the tax-exempt details with the State of Texas Comptroller’s Office, but here are a few stipulations from them: • All products purchased to fulfill the contract must be used on the contract. For example, a vendor cannot purchase 100 pieces of lumber for our contract and use some of them for another taxable client. • The rental of items such as scaffolding, barricades, or rental equipment is not exempt from taxes. It is our understanding that vendors can provide their suppliers with a completed Texas Sales and Use Resale Certificate (http://www.window.state.tx.us/taxinfo/taxforms/01-3392.pdf) to receive this exemption. You may contact the State of Texas Comptroller’s Office for details, and their contact information can be found at http://www.window.state.tx.us/contact.html. Vendors who respond to this RFP are expected to pass this tax savings along to the Town. No exempt state and local sales taxes will be paid to the winning contractor. § 151.311. TAXABLE ITEMS INCORPORATED INTO OR USED FOR THE IMPROVEMENT OF REALTY OF AN EXEMPT ENTITY. The purchase of tangible personal property for use in the performance of a contract for an improvement to realty for an organization exempted under Section 151.309 or 151.310 of this code is exempt if the tangible personal property is incorporated into realty in the performance of the contract. The purchase of tangible personal property, other than machinery or equipment and its accessories and repair and replacement parts, for use in the performance of a contract for an improvement to realty for an organization exempted under Section 151.309 or 151.310 of this code is exempt if the tangible personal property is: (1) necessary and essential for the performance of the contract; and (2) completely consumed at the job site. The purchase of a taxable service for use in the performance of a contract for an improvement to realty that is performed for an organization exempted under Section 151.309 or 151.310 of this code is exempt if the service is performed at the job site and if: (1) the contract expressly requires the specific service to be provided or purchased by the person performing the contract; or (2) the service is integral to the performance of the contract. For purposes of this section, tangible personal property is completely consumed if after being used once for its intended purpose it is used up or destroyed. Tangible personal property that is rented or leased for use in the performance of the contract cannot be completely consumed for purposes of this section. Section 601. Conditions In its sole discretion the Town reserves the right to (1) withdraw the RFP from the market without notice before or after receiving submittals, (2) accept or reject any or all proposals, and (3) accept Type text here Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 508 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 50 19 of 32 proposals which deviate from the RFP as the Town deems appropriate and in its best interest. In its sole discretion, the Town may determine the qualifications and acceptability of a Party or parties submitting Proposals in response to this RFP. This RFP is made subject to correction, errors, and omissions. The attached Appendices are for guidance only. Town reserves the right to issue a subsequent RFP, cancel this entire RFP, and/or remedy technical errors in the RFP process. Town reserves the right to negotiate with any, all, or none of the proposers responding to the RFP. Following submission of a proposal, the proposer agrees to deliver such further details, information and assurances, including financial and disclosure data, relating to the proposer including information regarding affiliates, officers, directors, shareholders, partners, and employees as requested by the Town in its discretion. The proposer must furnish a “Certificate of Authority,” signed by the Chief Executive Officer or a managing partner of the entity with its response. The Certificate must list the specific officers who are authorized by board resolution to execute agreements on behalf of the entity. If selected, the proposer must furnish evidence that the entity is in good standing and authorized to transact business in the State of Texas prior to awarding of Contract. Agreements with the selected proposer will require that the selected proposer provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance, Commercial General Liability, Automobile Insurance, and any other insurance that the Town’s Risk Manager may require. The Town will be included as an additional name insured and the agreements with the selected proposer will require indemnification of the Town by the selected proposer in form and substance satisfactory to the Town’s Risk Manager and Town Attorney’s office. Agreements will require a Payment Bond and will only be required to obtain a Performance Bond if the bid price is over $100,000 as specified in this RFP. Such bonds will be in a form and with surety acceptable to the Town. In addition, the Town may require other forms of assurance from the selected proposer of successful completion of the development. Any and all costs and expenses associated with the preparation of any report or statement in this regard to the RFP shall be borne by the proposer. The prosper acknowledges that all information submitted in response to the RFP to the Town will be subject to the Texas Public Information Act. All responses relating to this request for qualifications and all information/charts/graphs, etc. produced as a result of this service, if selected, shall become the property of the Town of Trophy Club without any restrictions on usage, subject to exceptions under the Texas Public Information Act, and are non-returnable. Applicants may maintain a copy of such material for their records as necessary or required by industry standards. Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 509 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 51 20 of 32 The proposer shall comply with Federal law, Texas Law, and the Town Charter, and applicable Town Ordinances. The proposer shall not offer any gratuities, favors, or anything of monetary value to an official or employee of the Town or advisors for the purpose of influencing consideration of a response to this RFP. The proposer shall not collude in any manner or engage in any practices with any other applicant(s) which may restrict or eliminate competition or otherwise retrain trade. Violation of this instruction will cause the applicant’s submittal to be rejected by the Town. The prohibition is not intended to preclude joint ventures or subcontracts. All responses submitted must be the original work product of the proposer. Copying paraphrasing, otherwise using of substantial portions of the work product of another applicant is not permitted. Failure to adhere to this instruction will cause the response to be rejected. REQUIRED INSURANCE AND INDEMNITIES The Contractor shall secure and maintain throughout the duration of this Contract insurance of such types and in such amount as may be necessary to protect itself and the interest of the Town against all hazards or risks of loss as hereinafter specified. The form and limits of such insurance, together with the underwriter thereof in each case, shall be acceptable to the Town but regardless of such acceptance it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain adequate insurance coverage at all times. Failure of the Contractor to maintain adequate coverage shall not relieve him of any contractual responsibility or obligation. Section 700. General Requirements Satisfactory certificates of insurance shall be filed with the Town prior to starting any work under this Contract. The certificates shall state that 30 days advance written notice will be given to the Town before any policy covered thereby is changed or canceled. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and local laws and ordinances relating to Social Security, Unemployment Insurance, Pensions, etc. All insurance providers used to meet the requirements of this section must have an A.M. Best rating of “A” or better and be authorized to conduct business in the State of Texas. Section 701. Workers’ Compensation Insurance Coverage (A) Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the Contractor’s employees providing services under the Contract for the duration of the Contract. Duration of the Contract - includes the time from the commencement of services and continuing for five years. Persons providing services ("subcontractor" in Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 510 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 52 21 of 32 §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform under the Contract, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent Contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to the Contract. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Contract, such as parts suppliers, office supply deliveries, or other incidental vendors. (B) The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project (C) The Contractor must provide a Certificate of Coverage to the Town prior to commencement of service. (D) If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current Certificate of Coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new Certificate of Coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. (E) The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services under the Contract, and provide to the Town: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. (F) The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. (G) The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. (H) The Contractor shall post at the office where the trucks serving the Town are based, a notice in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. (I) The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services to: Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 511 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 53 22 of 32 (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, §401.011(44) for all of its employee’s providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (2) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing service, for the duration of the project or services; (3) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project or services; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project or services and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the Town in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. (J) By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the Town that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services under the Contract will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for duration of the Contract. Contractor also represents that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. (K) The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of Contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Section 702. Comprehensive Automobile Liability This insurance shall be written in comprehensive form and shall protect the Contractor against all Page 512 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 54 23 of 32 claims for injuries to members of the public and damage to property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles licensed for highway use, whether they are owned, non-owned, or hired. The liability limits shall not be less than: Bodily Injury $1,000,000/person $1,000,000/occurrence Property Damage $1,000,000/occurrence The insurance shall be of the occurrence type and name the Town as an additional insured. There shall be no deductible applied to the Town as additional insured. Section 703. Comprehensive General Liability This insurance shall be written in comprehensive form and shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising from injuries to members of the public or damage to property of others arising out of any act of omission of the Contractor or his agents, employees, or subcontractors. In addition, this policy shall specifically insure the contractual liability assumed by the Contractor under the article entitled DEFENSE OF SUITS. To the extent that the Contractor's work, or work under his direction, may require blasting, explosive conditions, or underground operations, the comprehensive general liability coverage shall contain no exclusion relative to blasting, explosion, collapse of buildings, or damage to underground property. The liability limits shall not be less than: Bodily Injury $1,000,000/person $1,000,000/occurrence Property Damage $1,000,000/occurrence $2,000,000/aggregate The insurance shall be of the occurrence type and name the Owner as an additional insured. There shall be no deductible applied to the Town as additional insured. Section 704. Defense of Suits If any action in court is brought against the Town, or any officer or agent of the Town, for the failure, omission, or neglect of the Contractor to perform any of the covenants, acts, matters, or things under this Contract; or for injury or damage caused by the alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents, or in connection with any claim based on lawful demands of subcontractors, workmen, material men, or suppliers the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Town and its officers and agents, from all losses, damages, costs, expenses, judgments, or decrees arising out of such action. Section 705. Indemnity and Release The Contractor is solely responsible for and shall defend, indemnify, and hold Town (or any of Town’s representatives or employees), free and harmless from and against any and all claims, liabilities, demands, losses, damages, costs or expense to all persons (including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees) arising out of resulting from or occurring in connection with the performance of the work that is (i) attributable to any bodily or personal injury, sickness, diseases or death of any person or any damage or injury to or destruction of real or personal property (other than Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 513 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 55 24 of 32 the work itself) including the loss of use thereof, and (ii) caused in whole or in part by any negligent, strict liability or other act or omission of Contractor, any subcontractor or supplier, their respective agents or employees or any other party for whom any of them may be liable regardless of whether such is caused in part by the negligent, strict liability or other act or omission of a party or parties indemnified hereunder. Said indemnity and hold harmless agreement shall also apply to claims arising from accidents to Contractor, its agents or employees, whether occasioned by Contractor or its employees, the owner or his employees, or by any other person or persons. The foregoing indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. Section 800. Performance Bond These bonds are solely for the protection of the Town in the event of a contractor/vendor default under Contract terms and conditions. Performance Bond’s will only be required if the bid is over $100,000. Bond must be written for (100%) of the total bid price. An example can be found in Appendix A. Section 801. Payment Bond The payment bond is for the protection of those performing work as subcontractors or suppliers for the prime vendor/contractor. Bond must be written for (100%) of the value of any subcontractor work to be performed as part of the project. An example can be found in Appendix B. Section 802. Power of Attorney Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 514 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 56 25 of 32 EXHIBIT A Town Parks/Facilities PARK/FACILITY NAME LOCATION Trophy Club Town Hall 1 Trophy Wood Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Trophy Club Park Maintenance Barn 1501 Junction Way, Trophy Club, TX 76262 Trophy Club Park 2885 Trophy Park Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Freedom Dog Park 2675 Trophy Park Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Independence Park East 500 Parkview Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Independence Park West 501 Parkview Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Trophy Club Community Pool and Splash Pad 500 Parkview Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Harmony Park 699 Indian Creek Dr., Trophy Club, TX 76262 Trophy Club Veteran’s Memorial 501 Parkview Dr., Trophy Club, TX76262 Water Tower 2901 Bobcat Blvd, Trophy Club, TX 76262 Water Tower T. W. King Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 515 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 57 26 of 32 EXHIBIT B Potential Points of Interest 1. Town Hall / Police Station 2. Harmony Park 3. Trophy Club Country Club 4. Schools 5. Military Veterans Memorial 6. Independence Park / Community Pool 7. Freedom Dog Park 8. Trophy Club Park 9. Water Towers Commercial Properties Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 516 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 58 27 of 32 EXHIBIT C Potential Major Intersection/Gateway Locations 1. Trophy Wood Dr. / Indian Creek Dr. intersection 2. Trophy Club Dr. / Indian Creek Dr. intersection 3. Trophy Lake Dr. / Trophy Club Dr. intersection 4. Trophy Club Dr. / Bobcat Blvd. 5. Bobcat Blvd. at Water Tower 6. Town Hall/ Water Tower 7. Trophy Wood Dr. Gateway 8. Trophy Club Dr. Gateway 9. Trophy Lake Dr. Gateway intersection Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 517 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 59 28 of 32 EXHIBIT D Town Limits Figure B. – Gateway, Water Tower, and Wayfinding Signage Area Map Olsson, Contractor’s Initial: BK Page 518 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 60 29 of 32 APPENDIX A. Performance Bond PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS COUNTY OF DENTON & § COUNTY OF TARRANT THAT herein after called the Principal, and hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Trophy Club as Owner, in the sum of___________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($________________________________ ) for the payment whereof the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has, by means of a written agreement, dated_________________ ____, entered into a Contract with the Owner for: GATEWAY, WATER TOWER, AND WAYFINDING SIGNAGE DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION August 1, 2025 – July 31, 2026 RFP 2025-01 GATEWAY, WATER TOWER, AND WAYFINDING SIGNAGE DEISGN AND IMPLEMETION as set out in said Contract, a copy of which is by reference made a part hereof; NOW THEREFORE the conditions of this obligation are such that, if the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract in accordance with the Plans, specifications and contract documents and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damage which Owner may suffer by reason of Principal's default or failure so to do, and shall fully reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any such default or failure; AND FURTHER, that if the Principal shall pay all persons, who have contracts directly with the Principal for labor and/or materials, failing which such persons shall have a direct right of action against the Principal and the Surety under this obligation, subject to Owner's priority, then the obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. AND PROVIDED, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract or in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner of any extension of time for the performance of the contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety, or either of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any alteration, extension or forbearance being hereby waived. AND PROVIDED, in the event Principal is in default under the Contract as defined herein, BK Contractor’s Initial: BK Performance Bond shall be provided during Phase 2 per Addendum No. 1. Page 519 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 61 30 of 32 Surety will within fifteen (15) days of determination by Owner of such default take over and assume completion of said Contract and become entitled to the payment of the balance of the Contract price, subject to Owner's priority. AND PROVIDED, that if any suit is brought under this Surety Bond, venue shall lie in Denton & Tarrant County, Texas. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounded parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this__________ day of_______________________, 2025, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative pursuant to authority of its governing body. WITNESSED: Principal: By: Surety: By: Attorney-in-fact (SEAL) WITNESSED: Principal: By: Surety: By: Contractor’s Initial: BK Performance Bond shall be provided during Phase 2 per Addendum No. 1. Page 520 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 62 31 of 32 APPENDIX B. Payment Bond STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS COUNTY OF DENTON & § COUNTY OF TARRANT THAT WE, _______________________________hereinafter called the Principal, ____ ____________________hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Trophy Club as Owner, in the sum of______________________________________ Dollars ($________________________________) for the payment whereof the Principal and the Surety binds themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The Conditions of this obligation are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain contract, hereto attached, and made a part hereof, with the Owner dated_______________________________ _______________________, for: GATEWAY, WATER TOWER, AND WAYFINDING SIGNAGE DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION August 1, 2025 – July 31, 2026 RFP 2025-01 GATEWAY, WATER TOWER, AND WAYFINDING SIGNAGE DEISGN AND IMPLEMETION NOW THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are such that, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as defined in Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2253, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. This bond is made and entered into solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, and all such claimants shall have a direct right of action under the bond as provided in Texas Gov’t Code Ch. 2253. AND PROVIDED, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract or in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner of any extension of time for the performance of the contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety, or either of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any alteration, extension or forbearance being hereby waived. AND PROVIDED, that if any suit is brought under this Payment Bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant & Denton County, Texas. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounded parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this _______________ day of __________________, 2025 the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned Contractor’s Initial: BK Payment Bond shall be provided during Phase 2 per Addendum No. 1. Page 521 of 522 RFP 2025-01 Gateway, Water Towers, and Wayfinding Signage Design & Implementation / 63 32 of 32 representative pursuant to authority of its governing body. WITNESSED: Principal: By: Surety: By: Attorney-in-fact (SEAL) Sean Baker Contractor’s Initial: BK Payment Bond shall be provided during Phase 2 per Addendum No. 1. Page 522 of 522 HANDOUTS DISTRIBUTED AT MEETING Caution: This email originated from outside of the organization. Do not click links or open attachments unless you recognize the sender and know the content is safe. When in doubt, contact netGenius. From:Patricia Jayne Keefer To:Mayor & Council Cc:Brandon Wright; Tamara Smith; Matt Cox; Tammy Dixon Subject:Sept 22 Item 19 Public Comment Date:Monday, September 22, 2025 8:30:59 AM Attachments:Feb 21 2024 8 parked at Asst Living Silver Leaf.MOV Draft ordinance Keefer Comments in red.pdf Dear Mayor and Town Council, Please consider this email and attachments as Public Comment for Item 19 Draft Ordinance discussion. 2025 Town Council Sept 22 Ordinance Public Comment on Agenda Item 19 My name is Pat Keefer. We’ve lived on Fresh Meadow for 41 years. Without notice to the over 1,700 impacted homeowners (shown in the black-shaded areas) it would be inappropriate to change our zoning with this ordinance. When Brandon asked me to join this discussion, I read the 1,042 emails on the Oak Hill facility and the foundational laws. The Oak Hill experience raised four high impact neighborhood problems: 1. Parking from medical service personnel’s vehicles as you saw in the video was horrible. Postal service, garage service, school bus services were impeded and traffic was reduced to one-way. Driveways were blocked and folks had to get people to move their cars so the homeowner could go to work. This type of business operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Nearby homeowners’ visitors had no place to park. 2. Regular business deliveries and pickups of laundry, medical supplies, medical waste, medications, food service and more exacerbated congestion to a formerly quiet neighborhood. 3. Five large trash containers of human waste soiled materials were always outside in view of the street and neighbors and added an unpleasant odor to the area. 4. There were 100 times more ambulance calls than a typical home. These are the items that need to be addressed in the ordinance. In June our State passed HB 2464 that gave the authority to municipalities to regulate home-based businesses. Thank you to Town Staff for mentioning this in the Council summer retreat package. In the P&Z meeting our attorney said we can use this to require off-street parking and we need to do so and have a fine schedule set for violations. The current R-zoning allows Town Council to require off-street deliveries and this needs to be done and have set fines for violations. These commercial businesses in residential neighborhoods do not generate sales tax revenue for the Town and need to comply with commercial style security and screening of trash from the street and from the neighbors. The only way to lower the ambulance calls is to limit the occupancy. Our attorney said there are already underlying laws that place limits of 6 clients and 2 staff so it is hard to understand how the Oak Hill facility was approved for 11 bedrooms. It would seem to make sense to state the occupancy limits in our ordinance. To assist Town Council, a red-lined version of the ordinance is attached. Please accept it in the spirit it is intended. Brandon asked me to participate and these are my thoughts. Thank you for your service to our Town. Wishing You Blue Skies and Tailwinds™, Pat Patricia Jayne (Pat) Keefer FAI Gold Medalist, Round the World Air Race Director, www.lonestarflight.org/board-members/keefer/ Recipient, Wright Master Pilot Award Donor, www.lonestarflight.org/fly/piper-pa-39-twin-comanche/ President, Patricia Jayne Keefer Foundation Retired President, U.S. Air Race, Inc.www.us-airrace.org ™ of Tailwinds.com